दिल्ली दिश्िदिद्यालय - Zakir Husain Delhi College

i

दिल्ली दिश् िदिद्यालय UNIVERSITY OF DELHI

Bachelor of Science in Physical Sciences

Discipline: Physics

(Effective from Academic Year 2019-20)

Revised Syllabus as approved by

Date: Academic Council No:

Date: Executive Council No:

Applicable for students enrolled with Regular Colleges.

ii

List of Contents Page

No.

Preamble 1

Learning Outcome-based Curriculum Framework for Undergraduate Education

in Physics

1. Introduction 3

2. Learning Outcome-based Curriculum Framework in B.Sc. Physical

Sciences Programme 4

2.1 Nature and Extent of the Programme in B.Sc. Physical

Sciences 4

2.2 Aims of bachelor’s degree Programme in B.Sc. Physical

Sciences 5

3. Graduate Attributes in B.Sc. Physical Sciences 5

4. Qualification Descriptors for Graduates in B.Sc. Physical Sciences 7

5. Programme Learning Outcomes in B.Sc. Physical Sciences with

combinations PCM, PEM or PMC 8

6. Teaching-Learning Processes 9

6.1 Teaching Learning Process for Core Courses 11

6.1.1 Teaching Learning Processes for Theory component of

Core Courses 11

6.1.2 Teaching Learning Processes for Physics Laboratory

component of Core Courses 11

6.2 Teaching Learning Processes For Discipline Specific Electives 12

6.3 Teaching Learning Processes For Skill Enhancement Courses 13

7. Assessment Methods 13

7.1 Assessment Methods For Core Courses 14

7.1.1 Assessment Methods for the Theory component of Core

courses 14

7.1.2 Assessment Methods for the Physics Laboratory

component of Core courses 14

7.2 Assessment Methods For Discipline Specific Electives 15

iii

7.3 Assessment Methods For Skill Enhancement Courses 15

8. Structure of Courses in B.Sc. Physical Sciences 16

8.1 Credit Distribution for B.Sc. Physical Sciences 16

8.2 Semester-wise Distribution of Courses 19

9. Detailed Courses for Programme in B.Sc. Physical Sciences, including

Course Objectives, Learning Outcomes, and Readings 26

9.1 Core Courses 26

9.2 Skill Enhancement Courses 39

9.3 Discipline Specific Elective Courses 71

Annexures

127

1

Preamble Higher Education in India is in need of reform. On the one hand, while there is a need for

increased access to higher education in the country, it is also necessary to improve the quality

of higher education. New initiatives and sustained efforts are needed to develop and enhance

the spirit of enquiry, analytical ability and comprehension skills of the young generation of

students. An emerging knowledge based society requires that they are able to acquire and

generate new knowledge and skills, and can creatively apply them to excel in their chosen

vocations. Our higher education system needs to inculcate exemplary citizenship qualities

and motivate students to contribute to the society at large. Such abilities and qualities of our

youth will be crucial for the country to face the challenges of the future.

One of the reforms in undergraduate (UG) education, initiated by the University Grants

Commission (UGC) at the national level in 2018, is to introduce the Learning Outcomes-

based Curriculum Framework (LOCF) which makes it student-centric, interactive and

outcome-oriented with well- defined aims and objectives.

The Department of Physics and Astrophysics, University of Delhi took up the task of

drafting the LOCF for UG Physics courses according to guidelines sent in March 2019 by

the Undergraduate Curriculum Review Committee (UGCRC)-2019 of the University of

Delhi. The Committee of Courses of the Department constituted a Steering Committee,

whose composition is given in Annexure 1A, to plan and formulate the LOCF for UG

Physics courses of the University. The Steering Committee formed Subject Working Groups

(Annexure 1B) to formulate the content of different sets of courses. The Subject Working

Groups included teachers from more than twenty colleges of the University, who have

experience of teaching the respective courses. About eighty faculty members from the

Department of Physics and Astrophysics and Physics Departments of colleges of the

University have contributed to this important task. The inputs of the Subject Working

Groups were compiled, and the present document prepared by a final drafting team

(Annexure 1C).

The University of Delhi offers the undergraduate B.Sc. (Honours) Physics programme, the

B.Sc. Physical Sciences programme with Physics and Electronics disciplines, as well as

general elective courses in Physics for students of Honours programme in disciplines other

than Physics. The LOCF has been prepared for all of the above.

An earlier draft of the LOCF of the University of Delhi was put in the public domain for

stakeholders’ comments in May 2019. This was a revised version of the existing Choice

Based Credit System (CBCS) undergraduate programme at the University of Delhi. We

thank the stakeholders who took time and made effort to give us feedback on the earlier

draft. Many of the comments received have helped us improve the LOCF draft.

We acknowledge the use of the document “Learning Outcomes based Curriculum

Framework (LOCF) for Undergraduate Programme B.Sc. (Physics) 2019” put up by the

UGC on its website in May 2019 (https://www.ugc.ac.in/pdfnews/1884134_LOCF-

Final_Physics-report.pdf) and prepared by its Subject Expert Committee for Physics. This

document has helped in clarifying the features of the LOCF and is the original source of a

significant part of the text of the present document.

2

Keywords

Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course (AECC);

Core Courses (CC);

Discipline Specific Electives (DSE);

Learning Outcome-based Curriculum Frame work (LOCF);

Course Learning Outcomes (CLO);

Program Learning Outcomes (PLO);

Skill Enhancement Courses (SEC);

Teaching Learning Processes (TLP).

3

Learning Outcomes-Based Curriculum Framework for

Undergraduate Education in Physics

1. INTRODUCTION

The learning outcomes-based curriculum framework for a B.Sc degree in Physical Sciences is

intended to provide a comprehensive foundation to the subject, and to help students develop

the ability to successfully continue with further studies and research in the subject. The

framework is designed to equip students with valuable cognitive abilities and skills so that

they are successful in meeting diverse needs of professional careers in a developing and

knowledge-based society. The curriculum framework takes into account the need to maintain

globally competitive standards of achievement in term of the knowledge and skills in

Physics, as well develop scientific orientation, enquiring spirit, problem solving skills and

values which foster rational and critical thinking.

Due to the extreme diversity of our country, a central university like the University of Delhi

gets students from very different academic backgrounds, regions and language zones. While

maintaining high standards, the learning outcome-based curriculum provides enough

flexibility to teachers and colleges to respond to diverse needs of students.

The learning outcome-based curriculum framework for undergraduate courses in Physics also

allows for flexibility and innovation in the programme design to adopt latest teaching and

assessment methods, and include introduction to news areas of knowledge in the fast-

evolving subject domains. The process of learning is defined by the following steps which

form the basis of final assessment of the achievement at the end of the program.

(i) Development of an understanding and knowledge of basic Physics. This involves

exposure to basics facts of nature discovered by Physics through observations and

experiments. The other core component of this development is introduction to

physics concepts and principles, their theoretical relationships in laws of physics,

and deepening of their understanding via appropriate problems.

(ii) The ability to use this knowledge to analyze new situations and learn skills and

tools like laboratory techniques, computational methods, and applied

mathematics to find solution, interpret results and make meaningful predictions.

(iii) The ability to synthesize the acquired knowledge and experience for an improved

comprehension of the physical problems and to create new skills and tools for

their possible solutions.

4

2.LEARNING OUTCOME-BASED CURRICULUM

FRAMEWORK IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL SCIENCES

PROGRAMME

Note: There are three physical science courses namely PCM (Physics, Chemistry, Maths),

PEM (Physics, Electronics, Maths), PMC (Physics, Maths, Computer) part where physics is

of it.

2.1 NATURE AND EXTENT OF THE PROGRAMME IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES

The UG programs in Physics builds on the basic Physics taught at the +2 level in all the

schools in the country. Ideally, the +2 senior secondary school education should aim and

achieve a sound grounding in understanding the basic Physics with sufficient content of

topics from modern Physics and contemporary areas of exciting developments in physical

sciences. The curricula and syllabi should be framed and implemented in such a way that the

basic connection between theory and experiment and its importance in understanding Physics

is made clear to students. This is very critical in developing a scientific temperament and the

urge to learn and innovate in Physics and other sciences. Unfortunately, the condition of our

school system in most parts of the country lacks the facilities to achieve the above goal, and it

is incumbent upon the college/university system to fill gaps in the scientific knowledge and

understanding of our country’s youth who complete school curricula and enter university

education.

Physics is an experimental and theoretical science that studies systematically the laws of

nature operating at length scales from the sub-atomic domains to the entire universe. The

scope of Physics as a subject is very broad. The core areas of study within the

disciplinary/subject area of an UG programme in Physics are: Classical and Quantum

Mechanics, Electricity and Magnetism, Thermal and Statistical Physics, Wave theory and

Optics, Physics of the Materials, Digital Electronics, and specialized methods of

Mathematical Physics and their applications in different branches of the subject. Along with

the theoretical course work students also learn physics laboratory methods for different

branches of physics, specialized measurement techniques, analysis of observational data,

including error estimation, and scientific report writing. The latest domain in Physics

pedagogy incorporated in the LOCF framework is computational physics, which involves

adaptation of Physics problems for algorithmic solutions, modelling and simulation of

physical phenomenon and mastery of computer programming. The elective modules of the

framework offer students choice to gain knowledge and expertise in more specialized

domains of Physics like Nuclear and Particle physics, Nanophysics, Astronomy and

Astrophysics, etc. and interdisciplinary subject areas like Biophysics, Geophysics,

Environmental Physics, Medical Physics, etc.

The physics-based knowledge and skills learnt by students also equip them to be successful

in careers other than research and teaching in Physics.

5

2.2 AIMS OF BACHELOR’S DEGREE PROGRAMME IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES

The LOCF based UG educational program in Physics aims to

create the facilities and learning environment in educational institutions to consolidate

the knowledge acquired at +2 level, motivate students to develop a deep interest in

Physics, and to gain a broad and balanced knowledge and understanding of physical

concepts, principles and theories of Physics.

provide opportunities to students to learn, design and perform experiments in lab, gain an

understanding of laboratory methods, analysis of observational data and report writing,

and acquire a deeper understanding of concepts, principles and theories learned in the

classroom through laboratory demonstration, and computational problems and

modelling.

develop the ability in students to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to

get to the solutions of specific theoretical and applied problems in Physics.

to prepare students for pursuing the interdisciplinary and multidisciplinary higher

education and/or research in interdisciplinary and multidisciplinary areas, as Physics is

among the most important branches of science necessary for interdisciplinary and

multidisciplinary research.

to prepare students for developing new industrial technologies and theoretical tools for

applications in diverse branches of the economic life of the country, as Physics is one of

the branches of science which contribute directly to technological development; and it

has the most advanced theoretical structure to make quantitative assessments and

predictions, and

in light of all of the above to provide students with the knowledge and skill base that

would enable them to undertake further studies in Physics and related areas, or in

interdisciplinary/multidisciplinary areas, or join and be successful in diverse professional

streams including entrepreneurship.

3. GRADUATE ATTRIBUTES IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL SCIENCES

Some of the characteristic attributes of a graduate in Physics are

Disciplinary knowledge

(i) comprehensive knowledge and understanding of major concepts, theoretical

principles and experimental findings in Physics and its different subfields like

Mathematical Physics, Classical and Quantum mechanics, Thermal and

Statistical mechanics, Electricity, Magnetism and Electromagnetic theory,

Atomic and Molecular Physics, Condensed matter Physics, Nuclear and Particle

Physics, Material Science, Analytical dynamics, Astrophysics and Cosmology,

Space science and other related fields of study, including broader

interdisciplinary subfields like Chemistry, Mathematics, Life sciences,

Environmental sciences, Earth Sciences, Medical Physics, Atmospheric Physics,

Computer science, Information Technology etc..

(ii) ability to use physics laboratory methods and modern instrumentation for

designing and implementing new experiments in physics,

interdisciplinary/multidisciplinary research areas and industrial research.

Skilled communicator: Ability to transmit abstract concepts and complex information

relating to all areas in Physics in a clear and concise manner through scientific report

writing. Ability to express complex relationships and information through graphical

6

methods and proper tabulation. Ability to explain complex processes through simulation

and modelling. Ability to express complex and technical concepts orally in a simple,

precise and straightforward language for better understanding.

Critical thinking: Ability to distinguish between relevant and irrelevant facts and

information, discriminate between objective and biased information, apply logic to arrive

at definitive conclusions, find out if conclusions are based upon sufficient evidence,

derive correct quantitative results, make rational evaluations, and arrive at qualitative

judgments according to established rules.

Sense of inquiry: Capability for asking relevant/appropriate questions relating to the

issues and problems in the field of Physics. Planning, executing and reporting the results

of theoretical or experimental investigation.

Team player/worker: Capable of working effectively in diverse teams in both

classroom, laboratory, Physics workshop and in field-based situation.

Skilled project manager: Capable of identifying/mobilizing appropriate resources

required for a project, and managing a project through to completion, while observing

responsible and ethical scientific conduct, safety and laboratory hygiene regulations and

practices.

Digitally Eff icient : Capable of using computers for computat ional and

simulation s tudies in Phys ics . Proficiency in appropriate software for numerical and

statistical analysis of data, accessing and using modern e-library search tools like - to

locate, retrieve, and evaluate Physics information from renowned physics archives,

accessing observational and experimental data made available by renowned research labs

for further analysis.

Ethical awareness/ana ly t i ca l reasoning: The graduate should be capable of

demonstrating t h e ability to think and analyze rationally with modern and scientific

outlook and adopt objectives, which are unbiased and truthful in all aspects of work.

She/he should be capable of identifying ethical issues related to one's work. She/he

should be ready to appropriately acknowledge, direct and indirect contributions received

from all sources, including from other personnel in the work field. Willing to contribute

to the free development of knowledge in all forms. Further, unethical behavior such as

fabrication, falsification or misrepresentation of data, or committing plagiarism, or not

adhering to intellectual property rights should be avoided.

Social, National and International perspective: The graduates should be able to

develop a social perspective about the significance of their knowled ge and

skills for social well -being and a sense of responsibility towards human

society and the planet . They should have a national as well as an international

perspective for their work and career in the chosen field of academic and research

activities.

Lifelong l ea rn e rs : Capable o f s e l f -paced a n d s e l f -directed l e a r n i n g a i m ed

a t p e r s o n a l development and for improving knowledge/skill development and

reskilling in all areas of Physics.

7

4. QUALIFICATION DESCRIPTORS FOR GRADUATES IN

B.Sc. PHYSICAL SCIENCES

The qualification descriptors for a B.Sc. Physical science program with combinations PCM,

PEM or PMC may include the following:

The graduates should be able to demonstrate:

(i) a systematic and coherent understanding of basic physics including the concepts,

theories and relevant experimental techniques in the domains of Mechanics,

Thermal Physics, Electricity and Magnetism, Modern Physics, Optics,

Mathematical Physics and of the specialized field like Nuclear and Particle

Physics, Quantum Physics, Embedded Systems, etc. in their choice of Discipline

Specific Elective course.

(ii) ability to relate their understanding of physics to other subjects like Mathematics,

Chemistry, Computer Science or Electronics, which are part of their curriculum,

and hence orient their knowledge and work towards multi-disciplinary/inter-

disciplinary contexts and problems.

(iii) procedural knowledge that creates different types of professionals related to

different areas of study in Physics and multi/interdisciplinary domains, including

research and development, teaching, technology professions, and government and

public service.

(iv) skills in areas related to specializations, relating the subfields and current

developments in the field of Physics.

Use knowledge, understanding and skills required for identifying problems and issues

relating to Physics, and its interface with other subjects studied in the course, collect relevant

quantitative and/or qualitative data from a wide range of sources from various research

laboratories of the world, their application, analysis and evaluation using appropriate

methodologies.

Communicate the results of studies undertaken accurately in a range of different contexts

using the main concepts, constructs and techniques of Physics and other subjects studied in

the course. Develop communication abilities to present these results in technical as well as

popular science meetings.

Ability to meet their own learning needs, drawing on a range of pedagogic material available

on the internet and books, current research and development work and professional materials,

and interaction with other science professionals.

Demonstrate Physics-related technological skills that are relevant to Physics-related trades

and employment opportunities. Apply their knowledge, understanding and skills to new/unfamiliar contexts beyond Physics

to identify and analyze problems and issues, and to solve complex problems.

8

5. PROGRAM LEARNING OUTCOMES IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES WITH COMBINATIONS PCM, PEM or PMC The student graduating with the Degree B.Sc. Physical sciences with PCM, PEM, or PMC

should have:

(i) a systematic and coherent understanding of basic physics including the concepts,

theories and relevant experimental techniques in the domains of Mechanics,

Thermal Physics, Electricity and Magnetism, Modern Physics, Optics,

Mathematical Physics and of the specialized field like Nuclear and Particle

Physics, Quantum Physics, Embedded Systems, etc. in their choice of Discipline


(ii) a wide ranging and comprehensive experience in physics laboratory methods in

experiments related to mechanics, optics, thermal physics, electricity, magnetism,

digital electronics, solid state physics and modern physics. Students acquire the

ability for systematic observations, use of scientific research instruments, analysis

of observational data, making suitable error estimates and scientific report

writing.

(iii) procedural knowledge that creates different types of professionals related to the

disciplinary/subject area of Physics and multi/interdisciplinary domains,

including professionals engaged in research and development, teaching,

technology professions and government/public service.

(iv) skills in areas related to one’s specialization area within the disciplinary/subject

area physics.

Demonstrate the ability to use skills in Physics and its related areas of technology for

formulating and solving problems and identifying and applying appropriate physical

principles and methodologies to solve a wide range of problems associated with Physics and

its interface with other subjects studied in the course.

Recognize the importance of mathematical modeling, simulation and computational methods,

and the role of approximation and mathematical approaches to describing the physical world

and beyond.

Plan and execute experiments or investigations related to Physics and its interface with other

subjects studied in the course analyze and interpret data/information collected using

appropriate methods, including the use of appropriate software such as programming

languages and purpose-written packages, and report accurately the findings of the

experiment/investigations while relating the conclusions/findings to relevant theories.

Demonstrate relevant generic skills and global competencies such as (i) problem-solving

skills that are required to solve different types of Physics related problems with well-defined

solutions, and tackle open-ended problems that belong to the disciplinary-area boundaries;

(ii) investigative skills, including skills of independent investigation of problems; (iii)

communication skills involving the ability to listen carefully, to read texts and research

papers analytically and to present complex information in a concise manner to

different groups/audiences of technical or popular nature; (iv) analytical skills involving

9

paying attention to detail and ability to construct logical arguments, using correct technical

language and ability to translate them with popular language when needed; (v) ICT skills;

(vi) personal skills such as the ability to work both independently and in a group.

Demonstrate professional behavior such as

(i) being objective, unbiased and truthful in all aspects of work and avoiding

unethical, irrational behavior such as fabricating, falsifying or misrepresenting

data or committing plagiarism;

(ii) the ability to identify the potential ethical issues in work-related situations;

(iii) be committed to the free development of scientific knowledge and appreciate its

universal appeal for the entire humanity;

(iv) appreciation of intellectual property, environmental and sustainability issues; and

promoting safe learning and working environment.

6. TEACHING LEARNING PROCESSES

The teaching learning processes play the most important role in achieving the desired aims

and objectives of the undergraduate programs in Physics. The LOCF framework emphasizes

learning outcomes for every physics course and its parts. This helps in identifying most

suitable teaching learning processes for every segment of the curricula. Physics is basically

an experimental science with a very elaborate and advanced theoretical structure. Systematic

observations of controlled experiments open up windows to hidden properties and laws of

nature. Physics concepts and theories are meant to create a systematic understanding of these

properties and laws. All principles and laws of physics are accepted only after their

verification and confirmation in laboratory, or observations in the real world, which require

scientists trained in appropriate experimental techniques, and engineers to design and make

advanced scientific instruments. At the same time physics graduates also need a deep

understanding of physics concepts, principles and theories, which require familiarity with

different branches of mathematical physics. To achieve these goals, the appropriate training

of young individuals to become competent scientists, researchers and engineers in future has

to be accomplished. For this purpose, a very good undergraduate program in Physics is

required as a first step. An appropriate teaching-learning procedure protocol for all the

colleges is therefore essential. To be specific, it is desirable to have:

Sufficient number of teachers in permanent position to do all the class room teaching and

supervise the laboratory experiments to be performed by the students.

All teachers should be qualified as per the UGC norms and should have good

communication skills.

Sufficient number of technical and other support staff to run laboratories, libraries, and

other equipment and to maintain the infrastructural facilities like buildings, ICT

infrastructure, electricity, sanitation, etc.

Necessary and sufficient infrastructural facilities for the class rooms, laboratories and

libraries.

Modern and updated laboratory equipment needed for the undergraduate laboratories and

reference and text books for the libraries.

Sufficient infrastructure for ICT and other facilities needed for technology enabled

learning like computer facilities, PCs, laptops, Wi-Fi and internet facilities with all the

necessary software.

10

Teachers should make use of these approaches for an efficient teaching-learning process:

(i) Class room teaching with lectures using traditional as well as electronic boards.

(ii) Demonstration of the required experiments in laboratory and sessions on

necessary apparatuses, data analysis, error estimation and scientific report writing

for effective and efficient learning of laboratory techniques.

(iii) Imparting the problem solving ability which enables a student to apply physical

and mathematical concepts to a new and concrete situation is essential to all

courses. This can be accomplished through examples discussed in the class or

laboratory, assignments and tutorials.

(iv) CBCS curriculum has introduced a significant content of computational courses.

Computational physics should be used as a new element in the physics pedagogy,

and efforts should be made to introduce computational problems, including

simulation and modelling, in all courses.

(v) Teaching should be complimented with students seminar to be organized very

frequently.

(vi) Guest lectures and seminars should be arranged by inviting eminent teachers and

scientists.

(vii) Open-ended project work should be given to all students individually, or in

groups of 2-3 students depending upon the nature of the course.

(viii) Since actual Undergraduate programme teaching is done in affiliated colleges

which have differing levels of infrastructure and student requirements, the

teachers should attend workshops organized by University Department for

college faculty on teaching methodology, reference materials, latest laboratory

equipment and experiments, and computational physics software for achieving

uniform standards. Common guidelines for individual courses needs to be

followed/evolved.

(ix) Internship of duration varying from one week anytime in the semester, and/or 2-6

weeks during semester break and summer breaks should be arranged by the

college for the students to visit other colleges/universities/HEI and industrial

organizations in the vicinity. If needed, financial assistance may also be provided

for such arrangements.

(x) Special attempts should be made by the institution to develop problem-solving

skills and design of laboratory experiments for demonstration at the UG level. For

this purpose a mentor system may be evolved where 3-4 students may be

assigned to each faculty member.

(xi) Teaching load should be managed such that the teachers have enough time to

interact with the students to encourage an interactive/participative learning.

In the first year students are fresh from school. Given the diversity of their backgrounds, and

the lack of adequate infrastructure and training in the school science learning, special care

11

and teacher attention is essential in the first year. Mentorship with senior students and

teachers can help them ease into rigorous of university level undergraduate learning.

A student completing the Physical Sciences with Physics discipline course under the CBCS

takes 4 core courses from each discipline, 2 discipline specific electives (DSE) courses in

each discipline, 4 skill enhancement (SEC) courses including at least one from each

discipline and two ability enhancement compulsory courses (AECC). Since different

categories of courses have different objectives and intended learning outcomes, the most

efficient and appropriate teaching learning processes would not be same for all categories of

courses.

6.1 TEACHING LEARNING PROCESSES FOR CORE COURSES

The objective of Core courses is to build a comprehensive foundation of physics concepts,

principles and laboratory skills so that a student is able to proceed to any specialized branch.

Rather than a quantitative amalgamation of disparate knowledge, it is much more preferable

that students gain the depth of understanding and ability to apply what they have learnt to

diverse problems.

All Core courses have a theory and an associated physics laboratory component. Even though

the learning in theory and lab components proceeds in step, the teaching learning processes

for the two components need specific and different emphases.

6.1.1 Teaching Learning Processes for Theory component of Core Courses

A significant part of the theoretical learning in core courses is done in the traditional lecture

cum black-board method. Demonstrations with models, power-point projection, student

project presentations, etc. are some other methods which should be judiciously used to

enhance the learning experience. Problem solving should be integrated into theoretical

learning of core courses and proportionally more time should be spent on it. It is advisable

that a list of problems is distributed to students before the discussion of every topic, and they

are encouraged to solve these in the self-learning mode, since teachers are unlikely to get

time to discuss all of them in the class room.

6.1.2 Teaching Learning Processes for Physics Laboratory component of Core Courses

Students learn essential physics laboratory skills mainly while preparing for experiments,

performing them in the laboratory, and writing appropriate laboratory reports. Most of this

learning takes place in the self-learning mode. However, teachers’ role is crucial at critical

key points. Physics laboratory learning suffers seriously if students do not get appropriate

guidance at these key points. Many students get their first proper exposure to physics

laboratory work in their first year of undergraduate studies. Hence, laboratory teaching to

first year students requires special care.

Demonstration on the working of required apparatuses should be given in few beginning

laboratory sessions of all courses. Sessions on the essentials of experimental data analysis,

error estimation, and scientific report writing are crucial in the first year physics laboratory

teaching. Once the essentials have been learnt, sessions may be taken on applications of these

for specific experiments in lab courses of later years. Students should be encouraged to

explore experimental physics projects outside the curricula.

12

Many college laboratories lack latest laboratory equipment due to resource crunch. For

example, very few laboratories have equipment for sensor and microprocessor based data

acquisition, whose output can be directly fed into a computer for further analysis. Colleges

need to make strategic planning, including student participation under teacher guided

projects, to gradually get their laboratories equipped with latest equipment. The Physics

department of the University can provide key guidance and help in this regard.

It is recommended that the maximum size of group for all Physics laboratory courses should

be 12-15 students per group.

6.2 TEACHING LEARNING PROCESSES FOR DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC

ELECTIVES

The objective of DSE papers is to expose students to domain specific branches of physics and

prepare them for further studies in the chosen field. While students must learn basic

theoretical concepts and principles of the chosen domain, a sufficient width of exposure to

diverse topics is essential in these papers. Student seminars and projects can be a very fruitful

way to introduce students to the latest research level developments.

Besides a theory component, every DSE paper has either an associated tutorial, or a physics

laboratory, or a computational physics component. Teaching learning processes for theory

and physics laboratory components described above in sub-sections 6.1.1and 6.1.2 for core

courses, should be applicable for DSE courses too.

Essential programming skills are the foremost requirement of computational physics

learning. The second requirement of computational physics learning is the ability to

transform a physics problem into a computable problem for which a suitable programme can

be written. Appropriate problems based assignments are crucial in developing these abilities.

Every computational physics lab course should involve sessions on essential computational

techniques, and the reduction of relevant physics problems to computational problems.

Advanced level student project can be easily integrated into the learning of computational

physics.

Colleges should ensure that students from weaker economic backgrounds have adequate

access to computers.

Tutorials provide an opportunity for attending closely to learning issues with individual

students, and hence an effective means to help create interest in the subject and assess their

understanding. Pre-assigned weekly problem sets and assignments help structure tutorial

sessions and should be used as often as possible. Students’ performance in tutorials should be

used for determining their internal assessment marks for the course.

It is recommended that the maximum size of group for all tutorials should be 8-10 students

per group.

13

6.3 TEACHING LEARNING PROCESSES FOR SKILL

ENHANCEMENT COURSES

Skill Enhancement papers are intended to help students develop skills which may or may not

be directly applicable to physics learning. These courses introduce an element of diversity of

learning environments and expectations. Efforts should be made that students gain adequate

‘hands-on’ experience in the desired skills. The theory parts of these courses are intended to

help students get prepared for such experiences. Since the assessment of these courses is

largely college based, teachers should make full use of it to design novel projects.

It is recommended that the maximum size of group in the laboratory for all SEC courses

should be 12-15 students per group.

At the end, the main purpose of Physics teaching should be to impart higher level objective

knowledge to students in concrete, comprehensive and effective ways. Here, effectiveness

implies gaining knowledge and skill which can be applied to solve practical problems as well

as attaining the capability of logical thinking and imagination which are necessary for the

creation of new knowledge and new discoveries. Once the students understand ‘why is it

worth learning?’ and ‘how does it connect to the real world?’, they will embrace the

curriculum in a way that would spark their imagination and instill a spirit of enquiry in them,

so that in future they can opt for further investigations or research. All in all, the teacher

should act as a facilitator and guide and not as a guardian of the curriculum.

7. ASSESSMENT METHODS

In the undergraduate education of Physics leading to the B.Sc. Physical Science degree, the

assessment and evaluation methods should focus on testing the conceptual understanding of

basic concepts and theories, experimental techniques, development of mathematical skills,

and the ability to apply the knowledge acquired to solve new problems and communicate the

results and findings effectively.

The two perennial shortfalls of the traditional science examination process in our country are

the reliance on rote learning for written exams, and a very perfunctory evaluation of

laboratory skills. Greater emphasis on problem solving and less importance to textbook

derivations discourages rote learning. Theory examinations should be based primarily on

unseen problems. Continuous evaluation of students’ work in the laboratory, and testing them

on extensions of experiments they have already performed can give a more faithful

evaluation of their laboratory skills.

Needless to say, there should be a continuous evaluation system for students. This will enable

teachers not only to ascertain the overall progress of learning by the students, but also to

identify students who are slow learners and for whom special care should be taken. An

appropriate grading system is the ‘relative grading system’. It introduces a competitive

element among students, but does not excessively penalizes weaker students.

Since the Learning Objectives are defined clearly for each course in the LOCF framework, it

is easier to design methods to monitor the progress in achieving the learning objectives

during the course and test the level of achievement at the end of the course.

14

The courses offered in the undergraduate Physics are the first courses at the

college/university level. Formative Assessment for monitoring the progress towards

achieving the learning objectives is an important assessment component, which provides both

teachers and students feedback on progress towards learning goals. University of Delhi

examination system has 20 percent internal assessment for theory component, and 50 percent

for physics laboratory and computational physics laboratory components. These marks

should be distributed in periodic assessments in different modes to serve the intended purpose

Since core courses, discipline specific courses, skill enhancement courses and general

elective courses have qualitatively different kinds of objectives and learning outcomes, one

model of assessment methods will not work for these different kinds of courses.

7.1 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR CORE COURSES

Core courses and associated physics laboratory and computational physics curricula lead to

the essential set of learning outcomes, which every physics graduate is expected to have.

Their assessment methods require rigor, comprehensiveness and uniformity about what is

minimally expected from students. Regular interactions mediated through university

department among teachers teaching these courses in different colleges may prove to be

helpful in this regard. Since depth of understanding of core topics is a highly desirable

outcome, assessment for these courses should put greater emphasis on unseen problems,

including extensions of textbook derivations done in class.

7.1.1 Assessment Methods for the Theory component of Core courses

The evaluation scheme of the University of Delhi allots 20 percent marks for internal

assessment of theory papers. Teachers should use a judicious combination of the following

methods to assess students for these marks: i) periodic class tests, ii) regular problem based

assignments, iii) unannounced short quizzes, iv) individual seminar presentations v) longer

assignments for covering theory and derivations not discussed in regular lectures, vi)

True/False Tests, and vii) Multiple Choice Tests for large classes.

To help students prepare themselves for formative assessment during the semester, and to

motivate them for self-learning, it is advisable that a Model Problem Set is made available to

them in the beginning of the course, or problem sets are given before discussion of specific

topics in class.

In preparing students for Substantive Summative Assessment at the end of the semester it is

helpful if a Model/mock question paper is made available to them in the beginning of the

course.

7.1.2 Assessment Methods for the Physics Laboratory component of Core courses

The 50 percent internal assessment for the evaluation scheme for laboratory courses is best

used in continuous evaluation of students’ performance in the lab. This evaluation should

include these components: i) Regular evaluation of experiments regarding a) written report of

each experiment and b) Viva-Voce on each experiment, ii) Test through setting experiments

by assembling components, iii) written test on experiments done in the lab and data analysis,

iv) Designing innovative kits to test the comprehension and analysis of the experiment done

15

by the students, and v) audio visual recording of the experiments being performed by

students and its self-appraisal.

The end semester laboratory examination should ideally involve extensions of experiments

done by students during the semester. Two or more experiments can be combined for this

purpose. Open ended problems for which students can get the answer by designing their own

experimental method should also be tried.

7.2 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC

ELECTIVES

Discipline specific courses build upon general principles learnt in core courses, and also

prepare students for further studies in specific domains of physics. Given the time constraint

of only one semester, specific domain exposure is mostly introductory in character.

Assessment for these courses should have significant component of open ended methods like

seminars and project work. Students have greater chance of proving their individual initiative

and ability for self-learning in these methods. These methods also have greater flexibility to

reward students for out of curriculum learning.

Besides a theory component, every DSE paper has either an associated tutorial, or a physics

laboratory, or a computational physics component. Assessment methods for theory and

physics laboratory components described above in sub-sections 7.1.1 and 7.1.2 for core


Computational Physics lab evaluation allots 50 percent marks to the internal evaluation of

students’ performance during the semester. Students should be assessed for every

computational assignment done during the semester. This should involve assessment of their

programme, report and a viva-voice. Periodic tests on unseen problems may form a part of

the internal assessment. It is essential that the end semester examination is based upon

unseen computational physics problems.

Students should be assessed for their performance in tutorials, and this assessment should

contribute to their internal assessment marks. Their work on pre-assigned problem

sets/assignments, and participation in tutorial discussions should be taken into account while

assessing their performance.

7.3 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR SKILL ENHANCEMENT

COURSES

Learning in skill enhancement courses is largely experience based. Student performance in

these courses is best assessed under continuous evaluation. Students could be assigned a

specific task for a class or group of classes, and they could be assessed for their success in

meeting the task.

16

8. STRUCTURE OF COURSES IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES

8.1 Credit Distribution for B.Sc. Physical Sciences (with PCM, PMC and

PEM).

The B.Sc. Physical science programme with Physics as one of the subjects consists of 132

credits based on the Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) approved by the UGC with 01

hour/week for each credit for theory/tutorials and 02 hours/week for each credit of laboratory

work/Hands-on exercises. Out of 132 credits, 108 credits are of Core and DSE courses

equally divided between Physics and two other subjects (36 credits each), 16 credits consist

of Skilled Enhancement courses (SEC) which are elective and 8 credits consists of Ability

Enhancement Compulsory Courses (AECC) equally divided (4 credits each) between

disciplines of the Environmental sciences and Languages/communications. A student can

take more than 132 credits in total (but not more than 148 credits) to qualify for the grant of

the B.Sc. Physical Sciences degree as per rules and regulations of the University.

17

Table 8.1 Table showing distribution of credits: Subject A: Physics

Discipline, Subject B and C (other two disciplines)

Semester Compulsory Core

Courses (CC) each with 06 credit (Total no. of Papers

12) 04 Core courses are compulsory

to be selected from

each subject A B and C

Discipline Specific

Elective

(DSE) each

with 06

credits,

Select any 02

courses from

each subject A

B and C

Ability Enhanceme

nt Compulsory Courses (AECC)

each with 04 credits,

Select any

02 from 03

courses

Skill Enhancement Course (SEC) each with 04

credits, Select any 04

courses

choosing at

least 1 from

each subject

A, B and C

Total Credi

ts

Sem I CC-1A CC-1B

CC-1C

-

AECC-1 -

22

Sem II CC-2A CC-2B

CC-2C

-

AECC-2 -

22

Sem III CC-3A CC-3B CC-3C

-

-

SEC-1(A/B/C) 22

Sem IV CC-4A CC-4B CC-4C

-

-

SEC-2(A/B/C) 22

Sem V -

DSE-1A DSE -1B

DSE -1C

-

SEC-3(A/B/C) 22

Sem VI -

DSE -2A DSE -2B

DSE -2C

-

SEC-4(A/B/C) 22

Total Credits

72 36 8 16 132

18

Table 8.2 DETAILS OF COURSES UNDER UNDERGRADUATE

PROGRAMME (B.Sc. Physical Science)

Course #Credits

Theory + Practical/Tutorials

=================================================================

I. Core Course 12 X (4+2)* = 72

(12 Papers)

04 Courses from each of the

03 disciplines of choice

II. DSE Courses 6 X (4+2)* or 6 X (5+1)** =36

(6 Papers)

Two papers from each discipline of choice including paper of interdisciplinary nature.

Optional Dissertation or project work in place of one Discipline elective paper (6 credits) in 6th

Semester

III. AECC Courses 2 X 4 = 8

(2 Papers of 2 credits each) Environmental Science English/MIL Communication

IV. SEC Courses 4 X (2+2)* =16

(4 Papers of 2 credits each)

____________________________________________________

Total credit = 132

College should evolve a system/policy about ECA/Interest/Hobby/ Sports/NCC/ NSS/related courses on its own. *Theory with practical/ Hands-on Exercise

**Theory with tutorials

#Wherever there is practical there will be no tutorials and vice -versa. The size of group

for practical papers is recommended to be a maximum of 12 to 15 students and for

tutorials 8-10 students per group.

19

8.2 SEMESTER-WISE DISTRIBUTION OF COURSES

CORE COURSES (CC)

Table 8.3 All CC courses of Physics Discipline (Subject-A) have 6 credits with

4 credits of theory and 2 credits of practicals:

Core

Course type

Unique

Paper

Code

Semester B.Sc.(PCM) B.Sc. (PEM) B.Sc. (PMC)

CC-1A 42221101 I Mechanics + Lab

Mechanics + Lab

Mechanics + Lab

CC-2A 42221201 II Electricity,

Magnetism and

EMT + Lab

Electricity,

Magnetism and

EMT + Lab

Electricity,

Magnetism and

EMT + Lab

CC-3A 42224303 III Thermal Physics

and Statistical

Mechanics +

Lab

Thermal Physics and

Statistical

Mechanics+

Lab

+ Lab

Thermal Physics and

Statistical

Mechanics

+ Lab

CC-4A 42224412 IV Waves and Optics

+ Lab

Waves and Optics +

Lab

Waves and Optics +

Lab

20

DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC ELECTIVES (DSE)

Table 8.4 All DSE courses of Physics Discipline (Subject-A) have 6 credits

with 4 credits of theory and 2 credits of practical or 5 credits of theory and

1 credit of Tutorials.

Discipline Specific (Subject-A: Physics) Elective papers (Credit: 06 each) (DSE 1A and DSE

2A): Select any 02 papers (one for each in semester V and semester IV) from the following

options. (Numbers in brackets indicate number of hours/ Week dedicated)

S. No. Unique

Paper

Code

B.Sc.(PCM) B.Sc. (PEM) B.Sc. (PMC)

Odd Semester – V Semester only (DSE-1A)

1 42227529

Elements of Modern Physics (4)

+ Lab (4)

Elements of Modern Physics

(4) + Lab (4)

Elements of Modern Physics

(4) + Lab (4)

2

42227530

Digital, Analog and

Instrumentation (4)

+ Lab (4)

Digital, Analog

and

Instrumentation

(4) + Lab (4)

Digital, Analog

and

Instrumentation

(4) + Lab (4)

3

42227531

Mathematical

Physics (4) + Lab

(4)

Mathematical

Physics (4) + Lab

(4)

Mathematical

Physics (4) +

Lab (4)

4

42227532

Nano Materials and

Applications (4) +

Lab (4)

Nano Materials

and Applications

(4) + Lab (4)

Nano Materials

and

Applications

(4) + Lab (4)

5

42227533

Communication

System (4) + Lab

(4)

Communication

System (4) + Lab

(4)

Communication

System (4) +

Lab (4)

6

42227534

Verilog and FPGA

based system design

(4) + Lab (4)

Verilog and FPGA

based system

design (4) + Lab

(4)

Verilog and

FPGA based

system design

(4) + Lab (4)

7

42227535 Medical Physics (4)

+ Lab (4)

Medical Physics

(4) + Lab (4)

Medical

Physics (4) +

Lab (4)

8

42227536 Applied Dynamics

(4) + Lab (4)

Applied Dynamics

(4) + Lab (4)

Applied

Dynamics (4) +

Lab (4)

21

Even Semester – VI semester only (DSE-2A)

9

42227637 Solid State Physics

(4) + Lab (4)

Solid State Physics

(4) + Lab (4)

Solid State

Physics (4) +

Lab (4)

10

42227638

Embedded System:

Introduction to

microcontroller (4)

+ Lab (4)

Embedded

System:

Introduction to

microcontroller (4)

+ Lab (4)

Embedded

System:

Introduction to

microcontroller

(4) + Lab (4)

11

42227639

Nuclear and Particle

Physics (5) +

Tutorials (1)

Nuclear and

Particle Physics

(5) + Tutorials (1)

Nuclear and

Particle Physics

(5) + Tutorial

(1)

12

42227640

Quantum

Mechanics (4) +

Lab (4)

Quantum

Mechanics (4) +

Lab (4)

Quantum

Mechanics (4)

+ Lab (4)

13

42227641

Digital Signal

processing (4) +

Lab (4)

Digital Signal

processing (4) +

Lab (4)

Digital Signal

processing (4) +

Lab (4)

14

42227642

Astronomy and

Astrophysics (5) +

Tutorials (1)

Astronomy and

Astrophysics (5) +

Tutorials (1)

Astronomy and

Astrophysics

(5) + Tutorials

(1)

15

42227643

Atmospheric

Physics (4) + Lab

(4)

Atmospheric

Physics (4) + Lab

(4)

Atmospheric

Physics (4) +

Lab (4)

16

42227644 Physics of the Earth

(5) + Tutorials (1)

Physics of the

Earth (5) +

Tutorials (1)

Physics of the

Earth (5) +

Tutorials (1)

17

42227645 Biological physics

(5) + Tutorials (1)

Biological physics

(5) + Tutorials (1)

Biological

physics (5) +

Tutorials (1)

18 ------ Dissertation (8) Dissertation (8) Dissertation (8)

22

SKILL ENHANCEMENT COURSES (SEC)

Table 8.5 All SEC courses of Physics Discipline (Subject-A) have 4 credits

with 2 credits of theory and 2 credits of Practical / Hands on/ Projects and

Field Work to be decided by the College. Teachers may give a long duration

project based on a SEC paper in the practical Lab.

No. Unique

Paper

Code

Semester B.Sc. (PCM) B.Sc. (PEM) B.Sc.

(PMC)

1 32223901 III/IV/V/VI Physics Workshop

Skills

Physics Workshop

Skills

Physics Workshop

Skills

2 32223902 III/IV/V/VI Computational Physics

Skills

Computational

Physics Skills

Computational

Physics

Skills

3 32223903 III/IV/V/VI Electrical Circuit and

Network Skills

Electrical Circuit and Network skills

Electrical Circuit

and Network

Skills 4 32223904 III/IV/V/VI Basic

Instrumentation

Skills

Basic Instrumentation

Skills

Basic

Instrumentati

on

Skills

5 32223905 III/IV/V/VI Renewable Energy and

Energy Harvesting

Renewable Energy

and Energy

Harvesting

Renewable Energy

and Energy

Harvesting

6 32223906 III/IV/V/VI Engineering design and prototyping/Technical Drawing

Engineering design and prototyping/Technical Drawing

Engineering design and prototyping/Technical Drawing

7 32223907 III/IV/V/VI Radiation Safety Radiation Safety Radiation Safety

23

8 32223908 III/IV/V/VI Applied Optics Applied Optics Applied Optics

9 32223909 III/IV/V/VI Weather Forecasting

Weather Forecasting

Weather Forecasting

10 XXX1 III/IV/V/VI Introduction to Physical Computing

Introduction to Physical Computing

Introduction to Physical Computing

11 XXX2 III/IV/V/VI Numerical Analysis

Numerical Analysis

Numerical Analysis

ABILITY ENHANCEMENT COMPULSORY COURSES (AECC)

Table 8.6 All the courses have 4 credits. The detailed content of these

courses is NOT mentioned in this document.

S.No. AECC Course Name

1 English

2 MIL Communication

3 Environmental Science

24

TABLE 8.7 SEMESTER-WISE BREAKUP OF TYPES OF COURSES

WITH THEIR CREDITS. Subject A-Physics; Subject B and C (other two

disciplines)

No.* Course opted Course name Credits

I Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course-I

English communications/

Environmental Science

4

Core Course-1A Mechanics (Theory + Lab) 4 + 2

Core Course-1B CC-1B 6

Core Course-1C CC-1C 6

II Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course-II

English communications/ Environmental Science

4

Core Course-2A Electricity, Magnetism & EMT (Theory + Lab)

4 + 2



III Core Course-3A Thermal Physics & Statistical Mechanics (Theory + Lab)

4 + 2



Skill Enhancement Course -1 SEC-1 (A/B/C) 4

IV

Core Course-4A Waves and Optics (Theory + Lab) 4 + 2




V

Discipline Specific Elective -1 A DSE-1A (Subject A: Physics) See Table 8.4

6

Discipline Specific Elective -1 B DSE-1B (Subject B) 6

Discipline Specific Elective -1 C DSE-1C (Subject C) 6

25


VI

Discipline Specific Elective - 2 A DSE-2A (Subject A: Physics) See Table 8.4

6

Discipline Specific Elective - 2 B DSE-2B (Subject B) 6

Discipline Specific Elective - 2 C DSE-2C (Subject C) 6

Skill Enhancement Course - 4 SEC-4 (A/B/C) 4

TOTAL 132

26

9. Detailed Courses for Programme in B.Sc. Physical Sciences,

including Course Objectives, Learning Outcomes, and Readings

9.1. Core Courses

CC-1A: Mechanics (42221101)

Credit: 06 (Theory-04, Practical-02)

Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course reviews the concepts of mechanics learnt at school from a more advanced

perspective and goes on to build new concepts. It begins with Newton’s Laws of Motion and

ends with the Fictitious Forces and Special Theory of Relativity. Students will also

appreciate the Rotational Motion, Gravitation and Oscillations.

The students will be able to apply the concepts learnt to several real world problems.

Course Learning Outcomes

Upon completion of this course, students are expected to understand the following concepts:

Understand the role of vectors and coordinate systems in Physics, solve Ordinary

Differential Equations, laws of motion and their application to various dynamical

situations.

Learn the concept of Inertial reference frames their transformations. Also, the concept of

conservation of energy, momentum, angular momentum and apply them to basic

problems.

Understand the phenomena of elastic and in-elastic collisions, phenomenon of simple

harmonic motion, understand angular momentum of a system of particle, understand

concept of Geosynchronous orbits

Understand special theory of relativity - special relativistic effects and their effects on the

mass and energy of a moving object.

In the laboratory course, after acquiring knowledge of how to handle measuring

instruments (like screw gauge, Vernier calipers, travelling microscope) student shall

embark on verifying various principles and associated measurable parameters.

Unit 1

Vectors: Vector algebra. Derivatives of a vector with respect to a parameter. Scalar and

vector products of two, three and four vectors. Gradient, divergence and curl of vectors

fields. Polar and Axial vectors.

(5 Lectures)

27

Ordinary Differential Equations: 1st order homogeneous differential equations, exact and

non-exact differential equations, 2nd order homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential

equations with constant coefficients (Operator Method Only).

(9 Lectures)

Unit 2

Laws of Motion: Review of Newton’s Laws of motion. Dynamics of a system of particles.

Concept of Centre of Mass, determination of center of mass for discrete and continuous

systems having cylindrical and spherical symmetry (1-D, 2-D, 3-D objects).

(6 Lectures)

Work and Energy: Motion of rocket. Work-Energy theorem for conservative forces. Force

as a gradient of Potential Energy. Conservation of momentum and energy. Elastic and in-

elastic Collisions.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 3

Rotational Dynamics: Angular velocity, Angular momentum, Torque, Conservation of

angular momentum, Moment of Inertia. Theorem of parallel and perpendicular axes

(statements only). Calculation of Moment of Inertia of discrete and continuous objects (1-D,

2-D and 3-D). Kinetic energy of rotation. Motion involving both translation and rotation.

(8 Lectures)

Unit 4

Gravitation: Newton’s Law of Gravitation. Motion of a particle in a central force field

(motion is in a plane, angular momentum is conserved, areal velocity is constant). Kepler’s

Laws (statements only). Satellite in circular orbit and applications. Geosynchronous orbits.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 5

Oscillations: Simple harmonic motion. Differential equation of SHM and its solutions.

Kinetic and Potential Energy, Total Energy and their time averages. Compound pendulum.

Differential equations of damped oscillations and forced oscillations and their solution.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 6

Special Theory of Relativity: Frames of reference. Gallilean Transformations. Inertial and

Non-inertial frames. Outcomes of Michelson Morley’s Experiment. Postulates of Special

Theory of Relativity. Length contraction. Time dilation. Relativistic transformation of

velocity. Relativistic variation of mass. Mass-energy equivalence. Transformation of Energy

and Momentum.

(14 Lectures)

Note: Students are not familiar with vector calculus. Hence all examples involve

differentiation either in one dimension or with respect to the radial coordinate.

28

PRACTICAL (60 Hours)

PHYSICS LAB: CC -1A LAB: Mechanics

Demonstration cum laboratory sessions on the construction and use of Vernier callipers,

screw gauge and travelling microscope, and necessary precautions during their use.

Sessions and exercises on the least count errors, their propagation and recording in final

result up to correct significant digits, linearization of data and the use of slope and intercept

to determine unknown quantities.

Session on the writing of scientific laboratory reports, which may include theoretical and

practical significance of the experiment performed, apparatus description, relevant theory,

necessary precautions to be taken during the experiment, proper recording of observations,

data analysis, estimation of the error and explanation of its sources, correct recording of the

result of the experiment, and proper referencing of the material taken from other sources

(books, websites, research papers, etc.)

At least 06 experiments from the following:

1. Measurements of length (or diameter) using Vernier calliper, screw gauge and travelling

microscope.

2. To study the random error in observations.

3. To determine the height of a building using a Sextant.

4. To study the motion of the spring and calculate (a) Spring constant and, (b) g.

5. To determine the Moment of Inertia of a Flywheel.

6. To determine g and velocity for a freely falling body using Digital Timing Technique.

7. To determine Coefficient of Viscosity of water by Capillary Flow Method (Poiseuille’s

method).

8. To determine the Young's Modulus of a Wire by Optical Lever Method.

9. To determine the Modulus of Rigidity of a Wire by Maxwell’s needle.

10. To determine the elastic constants of a wire by Searle’s method.

11. To determine the value of g using Bar Pendulum.

12. To determine the value of g using Kater’s Pendulum.

References for Theory

Essential Readings

1. Vector Analysis, Murray R. Spiegel et. al., 2/e, 2017, McGraw Hill Education.

2. Differential Equations, R. Bronson, G. B. Costa, 4/e, 2014, McGraw Hill Education.

3. Mechanics, D. S. Mathur, P. S. Hemne, 2012, S. Chand.

4. Intermediate Dynamics, Patrick Hamill, 2010, Jones and Bartlett Publishers.

5. Physics for Scientists and Engineers, R. A. Serway, J. W. Jewett, Jr, 9/e, 2014, Cengage

Learning.

29

Additional Readings

1. Feynman Lectures, Vol. 1, R. P. Feynman, R. B. Leighton, M. Sands, 2008, Pearson

Education.

2. University Physics, Ronald Lane Reese, 2003, Thomson Brooks/Cole.

3. University Physics, H. D. Young, R. A. Freedman, 14/e, 2015, Pearson Education.

4. Fundamentals of Physics, Resnick, Halliday & Walker 10/e, 2013, Wiley.

5. Engineering Mechanics, Basudeb Bhattacharya, 2/e, 2015, Oxford University Press.

6. Physics for Scientists and Engineers, Randall D Knight, 3/e, 2016, Pearson Education.

7. Physics: Principles with Applications, D. C. Giancoli, 6/e, 2005, Pearson Education.

Reference for Laboratory work

1. Advanced Practical Physics for students, B. L. Flint and H. T. Worsnop, 1971, Asia

Publishing House.

2. Engineering Practical Physics, S. Panigrahi & B. Mallick, 2015, Cengage Learning India

Pvt. Ltd.

3. Practical Physics, G. L. Squires, 2015, 4/e, Cambridge University Press.

4. A Text Book of Practical Physics, I. Prakash & Ramakrishna, 11/e, 2011, Kitab Mahal.

5. B. Sc. Practical Physics, Geeta Sanon, R. Chand, 2016.

CC-2A: Electricity, Magnetism & EMT (42221201)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course reviews the concepts of electromagnetism learnt at school from a more advanced

perspective and goes on to build new concepts. The course covers static and dynamic electric

and magnetic fields, and the principles of electromagnetic induction. It also includes analysis

of electrical circuits and introduction of network theorems. The students will be able to apply

the concepts learnt to several real world problems.


At the end of this course, students will be able to

Have basic knowledge of Vector Calculus

30

Demonstrate Gauss law, Coulomb’s law for the electric field, and apply it to systems of

point charges as well as line, surface, and volume distributions of charges.

Apply Gauss’s law of electrostatics to solve a variety of problems. Articulate knowledge

of electric current, resistance and capacitance in terms of electric field and electric

potential.

Calculate the magnetic forces that act on moving charges and the magnetic fields due to

currents (Biot- Savart and Ampere laws)

Have brief idea of magnetic materials, understand the concepts of induction, solve

problems using Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws

In the Lab course, students will be able to measure resistance (high and low), Voltage,

Current, self and mutual inductance, capacitor, strength of magnetic field and its

variation, study different circuits RC, LCR etc.

Unit 1

Vector Analysis: Review of vector algebra (Scalar and Vector product), Vector Integration,

Line, surface and volume integrals of Vector fields, Gauss-divergence theorem and Stoke's

theorem of vectors (statement only).

(10 Lectures)

Unit 2

Electrostatics: Electrostatic Field, electric flux, Gauss's theorem of electrostatics.

Applications of Gauss theorem- Electric field due to point charge, infinite line of charge,

uniformly charged spherical shell and solid sphere, plane charged sheet, charged conductor.

Electric potential as line integral of electric field, potential due to a point charge, electric

dipole, uniformly charged spherical shell and solid sphere. Calculation of electric field from

potential. Capacitance of an isolated spherical conductor. Parallel plate, spherical and

cylindrical condenser. Energy per unit volume in electrostatic field. Dielectric medium,

Polarization, Displacement vector. Gauss's theorem in dielectrics. Parallel plate capacitor

completely filled with dielectric.

(24 Lectures)

Unit 3

Magnetism:

Magnetostatics: Biot-Savart's law and its applications- straight conductor, circular coil,

solenoid carrying current. Divergence and curl of magnetic field. Magnetic vector potential.

Ampere's circuital law. Magnetic properties of materials: Magnetic intensity, magnetic

induction, permeability, magnetic susceptibility. Brief introduction of dia-, para- and ferro-

magnetic materials.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Electromagnetic Induction: Faraday's laws of electromagnetic induction, Lenz's law, self

and mutual inductance, L of single coil, M of two coils. Energy stored in magnetic field.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 5

31

Maxwell`s equations and Electromagnetic wave propagation: Equation of continuity of

current, Displacement current, Maxwell's equations, Wave equation in free space.

(10 Lectures)


PHYSICS LAB: CC-2A LAB: Electricity and Magnetism

Dedicated demonstration cum laboratory sessions on the construction, functioning and uses

of different electrical bridge circuits, and electrical devices like the ballistic galvanometer.

Sessions on the review of scientific laboratory report writing, and on experimental data

analysis, least square fitting, and computer programme to find slope and intercept of straight-

line graphs of experimental data.


1. To use a Multimeter for measuring (a) Resistances, (b) AC and DC Voltages, (c) DC

Current, and (d) checking electrical fuses.

2. Ballistic Galvanometer:

(i) Measurement of charge and current sensitivity

(ii) Measurement of CDR

(iii) Determine a high resistance by Leakage Method

iv) To determine Self Inductance of a Coil by Rayleigh’s Method.

3. To compare capacitances using De’Sauty’s bridge.

4. Measurement of field strength B & its variation in a Solenoid (Determine dB/dx).

5. To study the Characteristics of a Series RC Circuit.

6. To study a series LCR circuit and determine its (a) Resonant Frequency, (b) Quality

Factor.

7. To study a parallel LCR circuit and determine its (a) Anti-resonant frequency and (b)

Quality factor Q.

8. To determine a Low Resistance by Carey Foster’s Bridge.

9. To verify the Thevenin and Norton theorem

10. To verify the Superposition, and Maximum Power Transfer Theorem


Essential Readings

1. Vector analysis – Schaum’s Outline, M.R. Spiegel, S. Lipschutz, D. Spellman, 2ndEdn.,

2009, McGraw- Hill Education.

2. Electricity & Magnetism, J.H. Fewkes & J. Yarwood. Vol. I, 1991, Oxford Univ. Press

3. Electricity and Magnetism, D C Tayal, 1988, Himalaya Publishing House.

4. Fundamentals of Electromagnetics, M.A.W. Miah, 1982, Tata McGraw Hill

5. D.J. Griffiths, Introduction to Electrodynamics, 3rd Edn, 1998, Benjamin Cummings.

32

Additional Readings

1. Electricity and Magnetism, Edward M. Purcell, 1986, McGraw-Hill Education.


References for Laboratory

1. Advanced Practical Physics for students, B.L.Flint & H.T.Worsnop, 1971, Asia

Publishing House.

2. Engineering Practical Physics, S.Panigrahi & B.Mallick,2015, Cengage Learning India

Pvt. Ltd.

3. A Text Book of Practical Physics, Indu Prakash and Ramakrishna, 11th Edition, 2011,

Kitab Mahal, New Delhi.

4. Practical Physics, G.L. Squires, 2015, 4th Edition, Cambridge University Press

CC-3A: Thermal Physics and Statistical Mechanics (42224303)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course will introduce Thermodynamics, Kinetic theory of gases and Statistical

Mechanics to the students. The primary goal is to understand the fundamental laws of

thermodynamics and its applications to various thermodynamical systems and processes.

This coursework will also enable the students to understand the connection between the

macroscopic observations of physical systems and microscopic behavior of atoms and

molecules through Statistical mechanics.


At the end of this course, students will

Learn the basic concepts of thermodynamics, the first and the second law of

thermodynamics, the concept of entropy and the associated theorems, the

thermodynamic potentials and their physical interpretations. They are also expected to

learn Maxwell’s thermodynamic relations.

Know the fundamentals of the kinetic theory of gases, Maxwell-Boltzman distribution

law, equipartition of energies, mean free path of molecular collisions, viscosity, thermal

conductivity, diffusion and Brownian motion.

Learn about the black body radiations, Stefan- Boltzmann’s law, Rayleigh-Jean’s law

and Planck’s law and their significances.

33

Learn the quantum statistical distributions, viz., the Bose-Einstein statistics and the

Fermi-Dirac statistics.

In the laboratory course, the students are expected to: Measure of Planck’s constant

using black body radiation, determine Stefan’s Constant, coefficient of thermal

conductivity of a bad conductor and a good conductor, determine the temperature co-

efficient of resistance, study variation of thermo emf across two junctions of a

thermocouple with temperature etc.

Unit 1

Thermodynamic Description of system: Zeroth Law of thermodynamics and temperature.

First law and internal energy, conversion of heat into work, Various Thermodynamical

Processes, Applications of First Law: General Relation between Cp and Cv, Work Done

during Isothermal and Adiabatic Processes, Compressibility and Expansion Coefficient,

Reversible and irreversible processes, Second law, Entropy, Carnot’s cycle & theorem,

Entropy changes in reversible and irreversible processes, Entropy-temperature diagrams,

Third law of thermodynamics, Unattainability of absolute zero.

(22 lectures)

Unit 2

Thermodynamic Potentials: Enthalpy, Gibbs, Helmholtz and Internal Energy functions,

Maxwell’s relations and applications - Joule-Thomson Effect, Clausius Clapeyron Equation,

Expression for (Cp – Cv), Cp/Cv, TdS equations.

(10 lectures)

Unit 3

Kinetic Theory of Gases: Derivation of Maxwell’s law of distribution of velocities and its

experimental verification, Mean free path (Zeroth Order), Transport Phenomena: Viscosity,

Conduction and Diffusion (for vertical case), Law of equipartition of energy (no derivation)

and its applications to specific heat of gases; mono-atomic and diatomic gases.

(10 lectures)

Unit 4

Theory of Radiation: Blackbody radiation, Spectral distribution, Derivation of Planck's law,

Deduction of Wien’s distribution law, Rayleigh Jeans Law, Stefan Boltzmann Law and

Wien’s displacement law from Planck’s law.

(6 lectures)

Unit 5

Statistical Mechanics: Microstate and Microstate, Phase space, Entropy and

Thermodynamic probability, Maxwell- Boltzmann law, Quantum statistics, Fermi-Dirac

distribution law, Bose-Einstein distribution law, comparison of three statistics.

(12 lectures)

34


PHYSICS LAB: CC-3A LAB: Thermal Physics and Statistical Mechanics

Sessions on the construction and use of specific measurement instruments and experimental

apparatuses used in the thermal physics lab, including necessary precautions.

Sessions on the review of experimental data analysis, sources of error and their estimation in

detail, writing of scientific laboratory reports including proper reporting of errors.

Application to the specific experiments done in the lab.


1. To determine Mechanical Equivalent of Heat, J, by Callender and Barne’s constant flow

method.

2. Measurement of Planck’s constant using black body radiation.

3. To determine Stefan’s Constant.

4. To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of Cu by Searle’s Apparatus.

5. To determine the coefficient of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor by Lee and

Charlton’s disc method.

6. To determine the temperature co-efficient of resistance by Platinum resistance

thermometer.

7. To study the variation of thermo emf across two junctions of a thermocouple with

temperature.


Essential Readings

1. Thermal Physics, S. Garg, R. Bansal and C. Ghosh, 1993, Tata McGraw-Hill.

2. A Treatise on Heat, Meghnad Saha, and B.N. Srivastava, 1969, Indian Press.

3. Heat and Thermodynamics, M.W. Zemasky and R. Dittman, 1981, McGraw Hill

4. Thermodynamics, Kinetic theory & Statistical thermodynamics, F.W.Sears and

G.L.Salinger. 1988, Narosa Publications

5. Statistical Physics, Franz Mandl, 1988, 2nd Edition. Wiley.

Additional Readings


2. Thermal Physics and Statistical Mechanics, A. Kumar and S.P. Taneja, 2015, R. Chand

& Co. Publications.


4. B.Sc. Practical Physics, H. Singh & P. S. Hemne, 2011, S Chand and Company Ltd

5. B.Sc. Practical Physics, C. L. Arora, 2011, S Chand and Company Ltd.

35


1. Advanced Practical Physics for students, B.L. Flint & H.T. Worsnop, 1971, Asia

Publishing House.

2. Advanced level Physics Practicals, Michael Nelson and Jon M. Ogborn, 4th Edition,

reprinted 1985, Heinemann Educational Publishers



4. A Laboratory Manual of Physics for Undergraduate Classes, D. P. Khandelwal,1985,

Vani Publication.

5. An Advanced Course in Practical Physics, D. Chattopadhyay & P. C. Rakshit, 2013,

New Book Agency (P) Ltd.

CC-4A: Waves and Optics (42224412)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course reviews the concepts of waves and optics learnt at school from a more advanced

perspective and goes on to build new concepts. It begins with explaining ideas of

superposition of harmonic oscillations leading to physics of travelling and standing waves.

The course also provides an in depth understanding of wave phenomena of light, namely,

interference and diffraction with emphasis on practical applications of the same.


On successfully completing the requirements of this course, the students will have the skill

and knowledge to:

Understand Simple harmonic oscillation and superposition principle.

Understand the importance of classical wave equation in transverse and longitudinal

waves and solving a range of physical systems on its basis.

Understand Concept of normal modes in transverse and longitudinal waves: their

frequencies and configurations.

Understand Interference as superposition of waves from coherent sources derived from

same parent source. Demonstrate understanding of Interference experiments: Young’s

Double Slit, Fresnel’s biprism, Llyod’s Mirror, Newton’s Rings.

Demonstrate basic concepts of Diffraction: Superposition of wavelets diffracted from

apertures. Understand Fraunhoffer Diffraction from a slit.

36

Concept of Polarization

In the laboratory course, student will gain hands-on experience of using various optical

instruments and making finer measurements of wavelength of light using Newton Rings

experiment, Fresnel Biprism etc. Resolving power of optical equipment can be learnt

first hand.

The motion of coupled oscillators, study of Lissajous figures and behaviour of

transverse, longitudinal waves can be learnt in this laboratory course.

Unit 1

Superposition of Two Collinear Harmonic oscillations: Simple harmonic motion (SHM).

Linearity and Superposition Principle. (1) Oscillations having equal frequencies and (2)

Oscillations having different frequencies (Beats).

(6 Lectures)

Superposition of Two Perpendicular Harmonic Oscillations: Graphical and Analytical

Methods. Lissajous Figures (1:1 and 1:2) and their uses.

(2 Lectures)

Waves Motion- General: Transverse waves on a string. Travelling and standing waves on a

string. Normal Modes of a string. Group velocity, Phase velocity. Plane waves. Spherical

waves, Wave intensity.

(8 Lectures)

Unit 2

Sound: Sound waves, production and properties. Intensity and loudness of sound. Decibels.

Intensity levels. musical notes. musical scale. Acoustics of buildings (General idea).

(6 Lectures)

Wave Optics: Electromagnetic nature of light. Definition and Properties of wave front.

Huygens Principle.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 3

Interference: Division of amplitude and division of wave front. Young’s Double Slit

experiment. Lloyd’s Mirror & Fresnel’s Biprism. Phase change on reflection: Stokes’

treatment. Interference in Thin Films: parallel and wedge-shaped films. Fringes of equal

inclination (Haidinger Fringes); Fringes of equal thickness (Fizeau Fringes). Newton’s

Rings: measurement of wavelength and refractive index.

(12 Lectures)

Michelson’s Interferometer: Construction and working. Idea of form of fringes (no theory

needed), Determination of wavelength, Wavelength difference, Refractive index, and

Visibility of fringes.

(4 Lectures)

37

Unit 4

Diffraction: Fraunhofer diffraction: Single slit; Double Slit. Multiple slits & Diffraction

grating. Fresnel Diffraction: Half-period zones. Zone plate. Fresnel Diffraction pattern of a

straight edge, a slit and a wire using half-period zone analysis.

(14 Lectures)

Polarization: Transverse nature of light waves. Plane polarized light – production and

analysis. Circular and elliptical polarization (General Idea).

(5 Lectures)


PHYSICS LAB: CC- 4A LAB: Waves and Optics

Dedicated demonstration cum laboratory session on the construction, and use of spectrometer

and lasers, and necessary precautions during their use.





1. To investigate the motion of coupled oscillators.

2. To determine the Frequency of an Electrically Maintained Tuning Fork by Melde’s

Experiment and to verify λ2 – T Law.

3. To study Lissajous Figures.

4. Familiarization with Schuster`s focusing; determination of angle of prism.

5. To determine the Refractive Index of the Material of given Prism using Na Light.

6. To determine Dispersive Power of the Material of a given Prism using Hg Light.

7. To determine the value of Cauchy Constants of a material of a prism.

8. To determine the Resolving Power of a Prism.

9. To determine wavelength of sodium light using Fresnel Biprism.

10. To determine wavelength of sodium light using Newton’s Rings.

11. To determine the wavelength of Laser light using diffraction of single slit.

12. To determine wavelength of (1) Sodium and (2) Mercury light using plane diffraction

Grating.

13. To determine the Resolving Power of a Plane Diffraction Grating.

14. To determine the wavelength of Laser light using Diffraction grating.

References for Theory:

Essential Reading

1. Waves and Optics, S.P.Taneja, R.Chand and Pub., New Delhi, 2017.

2. The Physics of Waves and Oscillations, N.K. Bajaj, 1998, Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Optics, (2017), 6th Edition, Ajoy Ghatak, McGraw-Hill Education, New Delhi

4. Fundamentals of Optics, A. Kumar, H.R. Gulati and D.R. Khanna, 2011, R. Chand

Publications.

38

5. University Physics. F.W. Sears, M.W. Zemansky and H.D. Young. 13/e, 1986. Addison-

Wesley.

Additional Readings

1. Vibrations and Waves, A.P. French, 1st Edn., 2003, CRC press.

2. Principles of Optics, B.K. Mathur, 1995, Gopal Printing

3. Fundamentals of Optics, F.A Jenkins and H.E White, 1976, McGraw-Hill

4. B.Sc. Practical Physics, H. Singh & P. S. Hemne, 2011, S Chand and Company Ltd

5. B.Sc. Practical Physics, C. L. Arora, 2011, S Chand and Company Ltd.

6. Engineering Practical Physics, S.Panigrahi & B.Mallick,2015, Cengage Learning India

Pvt. Ltd.


1. Advanced Practical Physics for students, B.L. Flint and H.T. Worsnop, 1971, Asia

Publishing House.


reprinted 1985, Heinemann Educational Publishers






39

9.2. Skill-Enhancement Elective Course - (SEC)

# Students should not take the same SEC paper in different

Semesters

SEC: Physics Workshop Skills (32223901)

Credit:04 (Theory-02, Practical-02)

Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

The aim of this course is to enable the students to be familiar and have experience of various

mechanical and electrical tools through hands-on mode. This course enables students to

understand working of various measuring devices and different type of errors encountered in

the measurement process. This course also develops the mechanical skills of the students by

direct exposure to different machines and tools by demonstration and experimental

technique.


After completing this course, student will be able to:

Use measuring devices like Vernier calipers, Screw gauge, travelling microscope and

Sextant for measuring various length scales.

Acquire skills in the usage of multimeter, soldering iron, oscilloscopes, power supplies

and relays.

Develop mechanical skills such as casting, foundry, machining, forming and welding and

will become familiar with common machine tools like lathe, shaper, drill, milling

machine, surface machines and cutting tools.

Get acquainted with prime movers: mechanism, gear system, wheel, fixing of gears with

motor axle, lever mechanism, lifting of heavy weight using lever, braking systems,

pulleys.

Unit 1

Introduction: Measuring devices: Vernier calliper, Screw gauge and travelling

microscope. Measure the dimension of a solid block, volume of cylindrical

beaker/glass, diameter of a thin wire, thickness of metal sheet, etc. Use of Sextant to

measure height of buildings, mountains, etc.

(6 lectures)

Unit 2

Mechanical Skill: Overview of manufacturing methods: casting, foundry, machining,

forming and welding. Types of welding joints and welding defects. Concept of machine

40

processing, introduction to common machine tools like lathe, shaper, drilling, milling

and surface machines. Cutting tools, lubricating oils. Cutting of a metal sheet using

blade. Smoothening of cutting edge of sheet using file. Drilling of holes of different

diameter in metal sheet and wooden block. Use of bench vice and tools for fitting.

Make funnel using metal sheet.

(14 Lectures)

Unit 3

Introduction to prime movers: Mechanism, gear system, wheel, Fixing of gears with

motor axel. Lever mechanism, Lifting of heavy weight using lever. braking systems,

pulleys, working principle of power generation systems. Demonstration of pulley

experiment.

(10 Lectures)

Practical: (60 Hours)

PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Physics Workshop Skills

Sessions on the use of equipment used in the workshop, including necessary precautions.

Sessions on the review of experimental data analysis, error analysis and reporting and their

application to the specific experiments done in the lab.

Main emphasis is on taking observations, calculations, graph and result. Perform at

least three practicals from the following.

Teacher may give long duration project based on this paper.

All experiments are compulsory.

1. Comparison of diameter of a thin wire using screw gauge and travelling microscope.

2. Drilling of Hole in metal, wood and plastic.

3. Cutting of metal sheet.

4. Cutting of glass sheet

5. Lifting of heavy weights using simple pulley/lever arrangement.

References

1. A text book in Electrical Technology, B. L. Theraja, S. Chand and Company..

2. Performance and design of AC machines – M.G. Say, ELBS Edn.

3. Performance and design of AC machines, M. G. Say, ELBS Edn.

4. Mechanical workshop practice, K.C. John, 2010, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

5. Workshop Processes, Practices and Materials, Bruce J Black 2005, 3rd Edn., Editor

Newnes [ISBN: 0750660732] New Engineering Technology, Lawrence

Smyth/Liam Hennessy, The Educational Company of Ireland [ISBN0861674480].

41

SEC: Computational Physics Skills (32223902)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objectives

This course is intended to give an insight into computers and their scientific applications. To

familiarize students with the use of computer to solve physics problems. To teach

a programming language namely FORTRAN and data visualization using Gnuplot. To teach

them to prepare long formatted document using latex.


Students will be able to

Use computers for solving problems in Physics.

Prepare algorithms and flowcharts for solving a problem.

Use Linux commands on terminal

Use an unformatted editor to write sources codes. Learn “Scientific Word Processing”, in particular, using LaTeX for preparing articles,

papers etc. which include mathematical equations, picture and tables.

Learn the basic commands of Gnuplot.

Unit 1

Introduction : Importance of computers in Physics, paradigm for solving physics

problems. Usage of editor in Linux.

Algorithms and Flowcharts: Algorithm: Definition, properties and development.

Flowchart: Concept of flowchart, symbols, guidelines, types. Examples: Cartesian to

Spherical Polar Coordinates, Roots of Quadratic Equation, Sum of two matrices, Sum

and Product of a finite series, calculation of sin(x) as a series, algorithm for plotting (1)

Lissajous figures and (2) trajectory of a projectile thrown at an angle with the

horizontal.

(4 Lectures)

Scientific Programming: Some fundamental Linux Commands (Internal and External

commands). Development of FORTRAN, Basic elements of FORTRAN: Character

Set, Constants and their types, Variables and their types, Keywords, Variable

Declaration and concept of instruction and program. Operators: Arithmetic, Relational,

Logical and Assignment Operators. Expressions: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical,

Character and Assignment Expressions. Fortran Statements: I/O Statements

(unformatted/formatted), Executable and Non-Executable Statements, Layout of

Fortran Program, Format of writing Program and concept of coding, Initialization and

Replacement Logic. Examples from physics problems.

(5 Lectures)

42

Unit 2

Control Statements: Types of Logic(Sequential, Selection, Repetition), Branching

Statements (Logical IF, Arithmetic IF, Block IF, Nested Block IF, SELECT CASE and

ELSE IF Ladder statements), Looping Statements (DO- CONTINUE, DO-ENDDO,

DO-WHILE, Implied and Nested DO Loops), Jumping Statements (Unconditional

GOTO, Computed GOTO, Assigned GOTO) Subscripted Variables (Arrays: Types of

Arrays, DIMENSION Statement, Reading and Writing Arrays), Functions and

Subroutines (Arithmetic Statement Function, Function Subprogram and Subroutine),

RETURN, CALL, COMMON and EQUIVALENCE Statements), Structure, Disk I/O

Statements, open a file, writing in a file, reading from a file. Examples from physics

problems.

Programming:

1. Exercises on syntax on usage of FORTRAN

2. Usage of GUI Windows, Linux Commands, familiarity with DOS commands

and working in an editor to write sources codes in FORTRAN.

3. To print out all natural even/ odd numbers between given limits.

4. To find maximum, minimum and range of a given set of numbers.

5. Calculating Euler number using exp(x) series evaluated at x=1

(6 Lectures)

Unit 3

Scientific word processing: Introduction to LaTeX: TeX/LaTeX word processor,

preparing a basic LaTeX file, Document classes, Preparing an input file for LaTeX,

Compiling LaTeX File, LaTeX tags for creating different environments, Defining

LaTeX commands and environments, Changing the type style, Symbols from other

languages. Equation representation: Formulae and equations, Figures and other floating

bodies, Lining in columns- Tabbing and tabular environment, Generating table of

contents, bibliography and citation, Making an index and glossary, List making

environments, Fonts, Picture environment and colors, errors.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 4

Visualization: Introduction to graphical analysis and its limitations. Introduction to

Gnuplot. importance of visualization of computational and computational data, basic

Gnuplot commands: simple plots, plotting data from a file, saving and exporting,

multiple data sets per file, physics with Gnuplot (equations, building functions, user

defined variables and functions), Understanding data with Gnuplot

(9 Lectures)

Practicals/Hands on exercises: (60 Hours)

PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Computational Physics Skills

"Sessions on the review of experimental data analysis, sources of error and their estimation in


Application to the specific experiments done in the lab.”

43


Hands on exercises: (Use of latest Fortran compiler is advisable.)

Students are advised to finish all exercises.

1. To compile a frequency distribution and evaluate mean, standard deviation etc.

2. To evaluate sum of finite series and the area under a curve.

3. To find the product of two matrices

4. To find a set of prime numbers and Fibonacci series.

5. To write program to open a file and generate data for plotting using Gnuplot.

6. Plotting trajectory of a projectile projected horizontally.

7. Plotting trajectory of a projectile projected making an angle with the horizontally.

8. Creating an input Gnuplot file for plotting a data and saving the output for seeing on the

screen. Saving it as an eps file and as a pdf file.

9. To find the roots of a quadratic equation.

10. Motion of a projectile using simulation and plot the output for visualization.

11. Numerical solution of equation of motion of simple harmonic oscillator and plot the

outputs for visualization.

12. Motion of particle in a central force field and plot the output for visualization.

References

Essential Readings

Introduction to Numerical Analysis, S.S. Sastry, 5th Edn., 2012, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

LaTeX–A Document Preparation System, Leslie Lamport (Second Edition, Addison-

Wesley, 1994).

Gnuplot in action: understanding data with graphs, Philip K Janert, (Manning 2010)

Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Programming with Fortran, S Lipsdutz

and A Poe, 1986 Mc-Graw Hill Book Co.

Computational Physics: An Introduction, R. C. Verma, et al. New Age International

Publishers, New Delhi (1999)

Elementary Numerical Analysis, K. E. Atkinson, 3rd Edn., 2007, Wiley India Edition.

Additional Readings

Computer Programming in Fortran 77. V. Rajaraman (Publisher:PHI).

Computational Physics - A practical Introduction to computational Physics and

Scientific Computing; by Konstantinos N. Anagnostopoulos

44

SEC: Electrical circuits and Network Skills (32223903)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

To develop an understanding of basic principles of electricity and its household applications.

To impart basic knowledge of solid state devices and their applications, understanding of

electrical wiring and installation.



Demonstrate good comprehension of basic principles of electricity including ideas about

voltage, current and resistance.

• Develop the capacity to analyze and evaluate schematics of power efficient electrical

circuits while demonstrating insight into tracking of interconnections within elements

while identifying current flow and voltage drop.

• Gain knowledge about generators, transformers and electric motors. The knowledge

would include interfacing aspects and consumer defined control of speed and power.

• Acquire capacity to work theoretically and practically with solid-state devices.

• Delve into practical aspects related to electrical wiring like various types of conductors

and cables, wiring-Star and delta connections, voltage drop and losses.

• Measure current, voltage, power in DC and AC circuits, acquire proficiency in

fabrication of regulated power supply.

• Develop capacity to identify and suggest types and sizes of solid and stranded cables,

conduit lengths, cable trays, splices, crimps, terminal blocks and solder.

Unit 1

Basic Electricity Principles: Voltage, Current, Resistance, and Power. Ohm's law.

Series, parallel, and series-parallel combinations. AC and DC Electricity.

Familiarization with multimeter, voltmeter and ammeter.

(3 Lectures)

Electrical Circuits: Basic electric circuit elements and their combination. Rules to

analyze DC sourced electrical circuits. Current and voltage drop across the DC circuit

elements. Single-phase and three-phase alternating current sources. Rules to analyze

AC sourced electrical circuits. Real, imaginary and complex power components of AC

source. Power factor. Saving energy and money.

(4 Lectures)

45

Electrical Drawing and Symbols: Drawing symbols. Blueprints. Reading Schematics.

Ladder diagrams. Electrical Schematics. Power circuits. Control circuits. Reading of

circuit schematics. Tracking the connections of elements and identify current flow and

voltage drop.

(4 Lectures)

Generators and Transformers: DC Power sources. AC/DC generators. Inductance,

capacitance, and impedance. Operation of transformers.

(2 Lectures)

Electric Motors: Single-phase, three-phase & DC motors. Basic design. Interfacing

DC or AC sources to control heaters and motors. Speed & power of ac motor.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 2

Solid-State Devices: Resistors, inductors and capacitors. Diode and rectifiers.

Components in Series or in shunt. Response of inductors and capacitors with DC or AC

sources.

(3 Lectures)

Electrical Protection: Relays. Fuses and disconnect switches. Circuit breakers.

Overload devices. Ground-fault protection. Grounding and isolating. Phase reversal.

Surge protection. Relay protection device.

(3 Lectures)

Electrical Wiring: Different types of conductors and cables. Basics of wiring-Star and

delta connection. Voltage drop and losses across cables and conductors. Instruments to

measure current, voltage, power in DC and AC circuits. Insulation. Solid and stranded

cable. Conduit. Cable trays. Splices: wirenuts, crimps, terminal blocks, and solder.

Preparation of extension board.

(5 Lectures)

Network Theorems: (1) Thevenin theorem (2) Norton theorem (3) Superposition

theorem (4) Maximum Power Transfer theorem.

(3 Lectures)

Practical: (60 Hours)

PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Electric Circuit and Network Skills


apparatuses used in the physics lab, including necessary precautions.





46

At least 08 Experiments from the following

1. Series and Parallel combinations: Verification of Kirchoff’s law.

2. To verify network theorems: (I) Thevenin (II) Norton (III) Superposition theorem

(IV) Maximum power transfer theorem

3. To study frequency response curve of a Series LCR circuit.

4. To verify (1) Faraday’s law and (2) Lenz’s law.

5. Programming with Pspice/NG spice.

6. Demonstration of AC and DC generator.

7. Speed of motor

8. To study the characteristics of a diode.

9. To study rectifiers (I) Half wave (II) Full wave rectifier (III) Bridge rectifier

10. Power supply (I) C-filter, (II) π- filter

11. Transformer – Step up and Step down

12. Preparation of extension board with MCB/fuse, switch, socket-plug, Indicator.

13. Fabrication of Regulated power supply.

It is further suggested that students may be motivated to pursue semester long dissertation

wherein he/she may do a hands-on extensive project based on the extension of the practicals

enumerated above.


Essential Readings

Electrical Circuits, K.A. Smith and R.E. Alley, 2014, Cambridge University Press

Performance and design of AC machines - M G Say ELBS Edn.

Electronic Devices and Circuits, A Mothershead, 1998, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

Network, Lines and Files, John D. Ryder, V Perarson 2nd Edn.,2015.


A text book in Electrical Technology - B L Theraja - S Chand & Co.

Electrical Circuit Analysis, K. Mahadevan and C. Chitran, 2nd Edition, 2018, PHI

learning Pvt. Ltd.

47

SEC: Basic Instrumentation Skills (32223904)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

To expose the students to various aspects of instruments and their usage through hands-on

mode. To provide them a thorough understanding of basics of measurement, measurement

devices such as electronic voltmeter, Oscilloscope, signal and pulse generators, Impedance

bridges, digital instruments etc.


At the end of this course the students will learn the following:

The student is expected to have the necessary working knowledge on accuracy,

precision, resolution, range and errors/uncertainty in measurements.

Course learning begins with the basic understanding of the measurement and errors in

measurement. It then familiarizes about each and every specification of a multimeter,

multimeters, multivibrators, rectifiers, amplifiers, oscillators and high voltage probes

and their significance with hands on mode.

Explanation of the specifications of CRO and their significance. Complete explanation of

CRT.

Students learn the use of CRO for the measurement of voltage (DC and AC), frequency

and time period. Covers the Digital Storage Oscilloscope and its principle of working.

Students learn principles of voltage measurement. Students should be able to understand

the advantages of electronic voltmeter over conventional multimeter in terms of

sensitivity etc. Types of AC millivoltmeter should be covered.

Covers the explanation and specifications of Signal and pulse Generators: low frequency

signal generator and pulse generator. Students should be familiarized with testing and

specifications.

Students learn about the working principles and specifications of basic LCR bridge.

Hands on ability to use analog and digital instruments like digital multimeter and

frequency counter.

Unit 1

Basic of Measurement: Instruments accuracy, precision, sensitivity, resolution range

etc. Errors in measurements and loading effects. Multimeter: Principles of measurement

of dc voltage and dc current, ac voltage, ac current and resistance. Specifications of a

multimeter and their significance.

48

(4 Lectures)

Electronic Voltmeter: Advantage over conventional multimeter for voltage

measurement with respect to input impedance and sensitivity. Principles of voltage,

measurement (block diagram only). Specifications of an electronic Voltmeter/

Multimeter and their significance.AC millivoltmeter: Type of AC millivoltmeters.

Block diagram ac millivoltmeter, specifications and their significance.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 2

Oscilloscope: Block diagram of basic CRO. CRT, electrostatic focusing and

acceleration (Explanation only– no mathematical treatment), brief discussion on screen

phosphor, visual persistence. Time base operation, synchronization. Front panel

controls. Specifications of CRO and their significance.

(6 Lectures)

Use of CRO: for the measurement of voltage (dc and ac), frequency and time period.

Special features of dual trace, introduction to digital oscilloscope, probes. Digital

storage Oscilloscope: principle of working.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 3

Signal and pulse Generators: Block diagram, explanation and specifications of low

frequency signal generator and pulse generator. Brief idea for testing,

specifications.Distortion factor meter, wave analysis.

(4 Lectures)

Impedance Bridges: Block diagram of bridge. Working principles of basic (balancing

type) RLC bridge. Specifications of RLC bridge. Block diagram and working principles

of a Q- Meter. Digital LCR bridges.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 4

Digital Instruments: Comparison of analog & digital instruments. Characteristics of a

digital meter. Working principles of digital voltmeter.

(3 Lectures)

Digital Multimeter: Block diagram and working of a digital multimeter. Working

principle of time interval, frequency and period measurement using universal counter/

frequency counter, time- base stability, accuracy and resolution.

(3 Lectures)

Practical : (60 Hours)

PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Basic Instrumentation Skills

Session on the construction and use of CRO, and other experimental apparatuses used in the

lab, including necessary precautions.

49



The test of lab skills will be of the following test items:

1. Use of an oscilloscope.

2. Oscilloscope as a versatile measuring device.

3. Circuit tracing of Laboratory electronic equipment,

4. Use of Digital multimeter /VTVM for measuring voltages

5. Circuit tracing of Laboratory electronic equipment,

6. Winding a coil / transformer.

7. Study the layout of receiver circuit.

8. Trouble shooting a circuit

9. Balancing of bridges


Practicals:

1. To observe the loading effect of a multimeter while measuring voltage across a low

resistance and high resistance.

2. To observe the limitations of a multimeter for measuring high frequency voltage

and currents.

3. To measure Q of a coil and its dependence on frequency, using a Q- meter.

4. Measurement of voltage, frequency, time period and phase using Oscilloscope.

5. Measurement of time period, frequency, average period using universal counter/

frequency counter.

6. Measurement of rise, fall and delay times using a Oscilloscope.

7. Measurement of distortion of a RF signal generator using distortion factor meter.

8. Measurement of R,L and C using a LCR bridge/ universal bridge.

Open Ended Experiments:

1. Using a Dual Trace Oscilloscope

2. Converting the range of a given measuring instrument (voltmeter, ammeter).

It is further suggested that students may be motivated to pursue semester long

dissertation wherein he/she may do a hands-on extensive project based on the extension

of the practicals enumerated above.


Essential Readings

1. Digital Circuits and systems, Venugopal, 2011, Tata McGraw Hill.

2. Logic circuit design, Shimon P. Vingron, 2012, Springer.

3. Digital Electronics, Subrata Ghoshal, 2012, Cengage Learning.

4. Electronic Instrumentation, H.S. Kalsi, 3rd Ed., McGraw Hill Education.

50

Additional Readings

1. Performance and design of AC machines - M G Say ELBS Edn.


1. A text book in Electrical Technology - B L Theraja - S Chand and Co.

2. Electronic Devices and circuits, S. Salivahanan & N. S.Kumar, 3rd Ed., 2012, Tata

Mc-Graw Hill.

SEC: Renewable Energy and Energy harvesting (32223905)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

To impart knowledge and hands on learning about various alternate energy sources to teach

the ways of harvesting energy using wind, solar, mechanical, ocean, geothermal energy etc.

To review the working of various energy harvesting systems which are installed worldwide.


At the end of this course, students will be able to achieve the following learning outcomes:

• Knowledge of various sources of energy for harvesting

• Understand the need of energy conversion and the various methods of energy storage

• A good understanding of various renewable energy systems, and its components.

• Knowledge about renewable energy technologies, different storage technologies,

distribution grid, smart grid including sensors, regulation and their control.

• Design the model for sending the wind energy or solar energy plant.

• The students will gain hand on experience of:

(i) different kinds of alternative energy sources,

(ii) conversion of vibration into voltage using piezoelectric materials,

(iii) conversion of thermal energy into voltage using thermoelectric modules.

51

Unit 1

Fossil fuels and Alternate Sources of energy: Fossil fuels and nuclear energy, their

limitation, need of renewable energy, non-conventional energy sources. An overview of

developments in Offshore Wind Energy, Tidal Energy, Wave energy systems, Ocean

Thermal Energy Conversion, solar energy, biomass, biochemical conversion, bio-gas

generation, geothermal energy tidal energy, Hydroelectricity.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 2

Solar energy: Solar energy, its importance, storage of solar energy, solar pond, non-

-convective solar pond, applications of solar pond and solar energy, solar water heater,

flat plate collector, solar distillation, solar cooker, solar green houses, solar cell,

absorption air conditioning. Need and characteristics of photo-voltaic (PV) systems, PV

models and equivalent circuits, and sun tracking systems.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 3

Wind Energy harvesting: Fundamentals of Wind energy, Wind Turbines and different

electrical machines in wind turbines, Power electronic interfaces, and grid

interconnection topologies.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 4

Ocean Energy: Ocean Energy Potential against Wind and Solar, Wave Characteristics

and Statistics, Wave Energy Devices.

Tide characteristics and Statistics, Tide Energy Technologies, Ocean Thermal Energy,

Osmotic Power, Ocean Bio-mass.

Geothermal Energy: Geothermal Resources, Geothermal Technologies.

Hydro Energy: Hydropower resources, hydropower technologies, environmental

impact of hydro power sources. Rain water harvesting.

(9 Lectures)

Unit 5

Piezoelectric Energy harvesting: Introduction, Physics and characteristics of

piezoelectric effect, materials and mathematical description of piezo-electricity,

Piezoelectric parameters and modeling piezoelectric generators, Piezoelectric energy

harvesting applications, Human power

Electromagnetic Energy Harvesting: Linear generators, physical/mathematical

models, recent applications Carbon captured technologies, cell, batteries, power

consumption Environmental issues and Renewable sources of energy, sustainability.

Merits of Rain Water harvesting

(9 Lectures)

52


PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Renewable Energy and Energy Harvesting

Sessions on the use of equipment used in the workshop, including necessary precautions.




Demonstrations and Experiments:

1. Demonstration of Training modules on Solar energy, wind energy, etc.

2. Conversion of vibration to voltage using piezoelectric materials

3. Conversion of thermal energy into voltage-driven thermo-electric modules.


Essential Readings

1. Solar energy, Suhas P Sukhative, Tata McGraw - Hill Publishing Company Ltd.

2. Renewable Energy, Power for a sustainable future, Godfrey Boyle, 3rd Edn., 2012,

Oxford University Press.

Additional Readings

1. Solar Energy: Resource Assessment Handbook, P Jayakumar, 2009

2. J. Balfour, M. Shaw and S. Jarosek, Photo-voltaics, Lawrence J Goodrich (USA).

3. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Renewable_energy


1. Non-conventional energy sources, B.H. Khan, McGraw Hill 60

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Renewable_energy

53

SEC: Engineering Design and Prototyping/Technical Drawing

(32223906)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

To introduce the students to modern visualization techniques and their applications in diverse

areas including computer aided design. To offer hands-on experience of engineering drawing

based on knowledge gained using computer aided designing software.


This course will enable the student to be proficient in:

• Understanding the concept of a sectional view – visualizing a space after being cut by a

plane. How The student will be able to draw and learn proper techniques for drawing an

aligned section.

• Understanding the use of spatial visualization by constructing an orthographic multi view

drawing.

• Drawing simple curves like ellipse, cycloid and spiral, Orthographic projections of

points, lines and of solids like cylinders, cones, prisms and pyramids etc.

• Using Computer Aided Design (CAD) software and AutoCAD techniques.

Unit 1

Introduction: Fundamentals of Engineering design, design process and sketching: Scales

and dimensioning, Designing to Standards (ISO Norm Elements/ISI), Engineering Curves:

Parabola, hyperbola, ellipse and spiral.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 2

Projections: Principles of projections, Orthographic projections: straight lines, planes and

solids. Development of surfaces of right and oblique solids. Section of solids. Intersection

and Interpenetration of solids. Isometric and Oblique parallel projections of solids.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 3

CAD Drawing: Introduction to CAD and Auto CAD, precision drawing and drawing aids,

Geometric shapes, Demonstrating CAD specific skills (graphical user interface, create,

retrieve, edit, and use symbol libraries). Use of Inquiry commands to extract drawing data.

Control entity properties. Demonstrating basic skills to produce 2-D drawings. Annotating in

Auto CAD with text and hatching, layers, templates and design centre, advanced plotting

(layouts, viewports), office standards, dimensioning, internet and collaboration, Blocks,

Drafting symbols, attributes, extracting data. Basic printing and editing tools, plot/print

drawing to appropriate scale.

54

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Computer Aided Design and Prototyping: 3D modeling with AutoCAD (surfaces and

solids), 3D modeling with Sketchup, 3D designs, Assembly: Model Editing; Lattice and

surface optimization; 2D and 3D packing algorithms, Additive Manufacturing Ready Model

Creation (3D printing), Technical drafting and Documentation.

(6 Lectures)

Practicals : (60 Hours)

PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Engineering Design and Prototyping/Technical

Drawing


Five experiments based on the above theory.

Teacher may design at least five experiments based on the above syllabus.


Essential Readings

Engineering Graphic, K. Venugopal and V. Raja Prabhu, New Age International

Engineering Drawing, N.S. Parthasarathy and Vele Murali, Ist Edition, 2015, Oxford

University Press

Don S. Lemons, Drawing Physics, MIT Press, M A Boston, 2018,

ISBN:9780262535199

AutoCAD 2014 and AutoCAD 2014/Donnie Gladfelter/Sybex/ISBN:978-1-118-57510-9

Architectural Design with Sketchup/Alexander Schreyer/John Wiley & Sons/ISBN:978-

1-118-12309-6.

Additional Readings Engineering Drawing, Dhananjay A Jolhe, McGraw-Hill

James A. Leach, AutoCAD 2017 Instructor, SDC publication, Mission, KS 2016. ISBN:

978163057029.

Analysis of Mechanisms and Machines, M A Boston, McGraw-Hill, 2007.

55

SEC : Radiation Safety (32223907)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course focusses on the applications of nuclear techniques and radiation protection.

It will not only enhance the skills towards the basic understanding of the radiation but will

also provide the knowledge about the protective measures against the radiation exposure.

It imparts all the skills required by a radiation safety officer or any job dealing with radiation

such as X-ray operators, nuclear medicine dealing jobs: chemotherapists, PET MRI CT scan,

gamma camera etc. operators etc.


This course will help students in the following ways:

Awareness and understanding the hazards of radiation and the safety measures to guard

against these hazards.

Learning the basic aspects of the atomic and nuclear Physics, specially the radiations that

originate from the atom and the nucleus.

Having a comprehensive knowledge about the nature of interaction of matter with

radiations like gamma, beta, alpha rays, neutrons etc. and radiation shielding by

appropriate materials.

Knowing about the units of radiations and their safety limits, the devises to detect and

measure radiation.

Learning radiation safety management, biological effects of ionizing radiation,

operational limits and basics of radiation hazards evaluation and control, radiation

protection standards, ‘International Commission on Radiological Protection’ (ICRP) its

principles, justification, optimization, limitation, introduction of safety and risk

management of radiation. nuclear waste and disposal management, brief idea about

‘Accelerator driven Sub-Critical System’ (ADS) for waste management.

Learning about the devices which apply radiations in medical sciences, such as MRI,

PET.

Understanding and performing experiments like Study the background radiation

levels using Radiation detectors, Determination of gamma ray linear and mass

absorption coefficient of a given material for radiation shielding application.

Unit 1

Basics of Atomic and Nuclear Physics: Basic concept of atomic structure; X rays

characteristic and production; concept of bremsstrahlung and auger electron, The

composition of nucleus and its properties, mass number, isotopes of element, spin,

binding energy, stable and unstable isotopes, law of radioactive decay, Mean life and

half-life, basic concept of alpha, beta and gamma decay, concept of cross section and

kinematics of nuclear reactions, types of nuclear reaction, Fusion, fission.

(6 Lectures)

56

Unit 2

Interaction of Radiation with matter: Types of Radiation: Alpha, Beta, Gamma and

Neutron and their sources, sealed and unsealed sources, Interaction of Photons - Photo-

electric effect, Compton Scattering, Pair Production, Linear and Mass Attenuation

Coefficients, Interaction of Charged Particles: Heavy charged particles - Beth-Bloch

Formula, Scaling laws, Mass Stopping Power, Range, Straggling, Channelling and

Cherenkov radiation. Beta Particles- Collision and Radiation loss (Bremsstrahlung),

Interaction of Neutrons- Collision, slowing down and Moderation.

(7 Lectures)

Unit 3

Radiation detection and monitoring devices: Radiation Quantities and Units: Basic

idea of different units of activity, KERMA, exposure, absorbed dose equivalent dose,

effective dose, collective equivalent dose, Annual Limit of Intake (ALI) and derived

Air Concentration (DAC). Radiation detection: Basic concept and working principle of

gas detectors (Ionization Chambers, Proportional Counter, Multi-Wire Proportional

Counters (MWPC) and Geiger Muller Counter), Scintillation Detectors (Inorganic and

Organic Scintillators), Solid States Detectors and Neutron Detectors, Thermo

luminescent Dosimetry.

Radiation detection: Basic concept and working principle of gas detectors (Ionization

Chambers, Proportional Counter and Geiger Muller Counter), Scintillation Detectors

(Inorganic and Organic Scintillators), Solid States Detectors and Neutron Detectors,

Thermoluminescent Dosimetry.

(7 Lectures)

Unit 4

Radiation safety management: Biological effects of ionizing radiation, Operational

limits and basics of radiation hazards evaluation and control: radiation protection

standards, International Commission on Radiological Protection (ICRP) principles,

justification, optimization, limitations, introduction of safety and risk management of

radiation. Nuclear waste and disposal management. Brief idea about Accelerator driven

Sub-critical system (ADS) for waste management.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 5

Application of nuclear techniques: Application in medical science (e.g., MRI, PET,

Projection Imaging Gamma Camera, radiation therapy), Archaeology, Art, Crime

detection, Mining and oil. Industrial Uses: Tracing, Gauging, Material Modification,

Sterilization, Food preservation.

(5 Lectures)

57


PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Radiation Safety







Experiments:

At least 05 Experiments from the following

1. Estimate the energy loss of different projectiles/ions in Water and carbon, using

SRIM/TRIM etc. simulation software.

2. Simulation study (using SRIM/TRIM or any other software) of radiation depth in

materials (Carbon, Silver, Gold, Lead) using H as projectile/ion.

3. Comparison of interaction of projectiles with ZP = 1 to 92 (where ZP is atomic number of

projectile/ion) in a given medium (Mylar, Carbon, Water) using simulation software

(SRIM etc).

4. SRIM/TRIM based experiments to study ion-matter interaction of heavy projectiles on

heavy atoms. The range of investigations will be ZP = 6 to 92 on ZA = 16 to 92 (where ZP

and ZA are atomic numbers of projectile and atoms respectively). Draw and infer

appropriate Bragg Curves.

5. Calculation of absorption/transmission of X-rays, γ-rays through Mylar, Be, C, Al, Fe

and ZA = 47 to 92 (where ZA is atomic number of atoms to be investigated as targets)

using XCOM, NIST (https://physics.nist.gov/PhysRefData/Xcom/html/xcom1.html).

6. Study the background radiation in different places and identify the source material from

gamma ray energy spectrum. (Data may be taken from the Department of Physics &

Astrophysics, University of Delhi and gamma ray energies are available in the website

http://www.nndc.bnl.gov/nudat2/).

7. Study the background radiation levels using Radiation meter .

8. Study of characteristics of GM tube and determination of operating voltage and plateau

length using background radiation as source (without commercial source).

9. Study of counting statistics using background radiation using GM counter.

10. Study of radiation in various materials (e.g. KSO4etc.). Investigation of possible radiation

in different routine materials by operating GM counter at operating voltage.

11. Study of absorption of beta particles in Aluminum using GM counter.

12. Detection of α particles using reference source & determining its half life using spark

counter.

13. Gamma spectrum of Gas Light mantle (Source of Thorium).

https://physics.nist.gov/PhysRefData/Xcom/html/xcom1.html

http://www.nndc.bnl.gov/nudat2/

58


Essential Readings

1. Nuclear Physics by S N Ghoshal, First edition, S. Chand Publication, 2010.

2. Nuclear Physics: Principles and Applications by J Lilley, Wiley Publication, 2006.

3. Fundamental Physics of Radiology by W J Meredith and J B Massey, John Wright and

Sons, UK, 1989.

4. An Introduction to Radiation Protection by A Martin and S A Harbisor, John Willey &

Sons, Inc. New York, 1981.

5. IAEA Publications: (a) General safety requirements Part 1, No. GSR Part 1 (2010), Part

3 No. GSR Part 3 (Interium) (2010); (b) Safety Standards Series No. RS-G-1.5 (2002),

Rs-G-1.9 (2005), Safety Series No. 120 (1996); (c) Safety Guide GS-G-2.1 (2007).

Additional readings

1. Basic ideas and concepts in Nuclear Physics: An introductory approach by K Heyde,

third edition, IOP Publication, 1999.

2. Radiation detection and measurement by G F Knoll, 4th Edition, Wiley Publications,

2010.

3. Techniques for Nuclear and Particle Physics experiments by W R Leo, Springer, 1994.

4. Thermoluminescence dosimetry by A F Mcknlay, Bristol, Adam Hilger (Medical

Physics Hand book 5.

5. Medical Radiation Physics by W R Hendee, Year book Medical Publishers, Inc.,

London, 1981.

6. Physics and Engineering of Radiation Detection by S N Ahmed, Academic Press

Elsevier, 2007.

7. Nuclear and Particle Physics by W E Burcham and M Jobes, Harlow Longman Group,

1995.

Reference for laboratory work

1. Schaum's Outline of Modern Physics, McGraw-Hill, 1999.

2. Schaum's Outline of College Physics, by E. Hecht, 11th edition, McGraw Hill, 2009.

3. Modern Physics by K Sivaprasath and R Murugeshan, S Chand Publication, 2010.

4. AERB Safety Guide (Guide No. AERB/RF-RS/SG-1), Security of radioactive sources in

radiation facilities, 2011.

5. AERB Safety Standard No. AERB/SS/3 (Rev. 1), Testing and Classification of sealed

Radioactivity Sources., 2007.

https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%252522Kiruthiga+Sivaprasath%252522&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwiJpvfvlpPjAhXUdn0KHd59BJMQ9AgILzAA

59

SEC: Applied Optics (32223908)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This paper provides the conceptual understanding of various branches of modern optics to the

students. This course introduces basic principles of LASER, Holography and signal

transmission via optical fiber.


Students will be able to :

• Understand basic lasing mechanism qualitatively, types of lasers, characteristics of laser

light and its application in developing LED, Holography.

• Gain concepts of Fourier optics and Fourier transform spectroscopy.

• Understand basic principle and theory of Holography.

• Grasp the idea of total internal reflection and learn the characteristics of optical fibers.

Unit 1

Photo-sources and Detectors

Lasers: an introduction, Planck’s radiation law (qualitative idea), Energy levels,

Absorption process, Spontaneous and stimulated emission processes, Theory of laser

action, Population of energy levels, Einstein’s coefficients and optical amplification,

properties of laser beam, Ruby laser, He-Ne laser, and semiconductor lasers; Light

Emitting Diode (LED) and photo-detectors.

(9 lectures)

Unit 2

Fourier Optics and Fourier Transform Spectroscopy (Qualitative explanation) Concept

of Spatial frequency filtering, Fourier transforming property of a thin lens, Fourier

Transform Spectroscopy (FTS): measuring emission and absorption spectra, with wide

application in atmospheric remote sensing, NMR spectrometry, and forensic science.

(6 lectures)

Unit 3

Holography

Introduction: Basic principle and theory: recording and reconstruction processes,

Requirements of holography- coherence, etc. Types of holograms: The thick or volume

hologram, Multiplex hologram, white light reflection hologram; application of

holography in microscopy, interferometry, and character recognition.

(6 lectures)

60

Unit 4

Photonics: Fibre Optics

Optical fibres: Introduction and historical remarks, Total Internal Reflection, Basic

characteristics of the optical fibre: Principle of light propagation through a fibre, the

coherent bundle, The numerical aperture, Attenuation in optical fibre and attenuation

limit; Single mode and multimode fibres, Fibre optic sensors: Fibre Bragg Grating.

(9 lectures)


PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Applied Optics







Experiments on Lasers:

1. To determine the grating radial spacing of the Compact Disc (CD) by reflection using

He-Ne or solid state laser.

2. To find the width of the wire or width of the slit using diffraction pattern obtained by a

He-Ne or solid state laser.

3. To find the polarization angle of laser light using polarizer and analyzer d. Thermal

expansion of quartz using laser.

4. To determine the wavelength and angular spread of laser light by using plane diffraction

grating.

Experiments on Semiconductor Sources and Detectors: 5. V-I characteristics of LED.

6. Study the characteristics of solid state laser.

7. Study the characteristics of LDR.

8. Characteristics of Photovoltaic Cell/ Photodiode. e. Characteristics of IR sensor.

Experiments on Fourier Optics: 9. Optical image addition/subtraction.

10. Optical image differentiation.

11. Fourier optical filtering.

12. Construction of an optical 4f system

Experiments on Fourier Transform Spectroscopy:

To study the interference pattern from a Michelson interferometer as a function of mirror

separation in the interferometer. The resulting interferogram is the Fourier transform of the

power spectrum of the source. Analysis of experimental interferograms allows one to

determine the transmission characteristics of several interference filters. Computer simulation

can also be done.

61

Experiments on Holography and interferometry:

13. Recording and reconstruction of holograms (Computer simulation can also be done).

14. To construct a Michelson interferometer or a Fabry Perot interferometer.

15. To determine the wavelength of sodium light by using Michelson’s interferometer.

16. To measure the refractive index of air.

Experiments on Fibre Optics: 17. To measure the numerical aperture of an optical fibre.

18. To measure the near field intensity profile of a fibre and study its refractive index profile.

19. To study the variation of the bending loss in a multimode fibre.

20. To determine the power loss at a splice between two multimode fibre.

21. To determine the mode field diameter (MFD) of fundamental mode in a single-mode

fibre by measurements of its far field Gaussian pattern.

References

Essential Readings

LASERS: Fundamentals & applications, K. Thyagrajan & A. K. Ghatak, 2010, Tata

McGraw Hill

Introduction to Fourier Optics, Joseph W. Goodman, The McGraw- Hill, 1996.

Introduction to Fiber Optics, A. Ghatak & K. Thyagarajan, Cambridge University Press.

Fibre optics through experiments, M.R.Shenoy, S.K.Khijwania, et. al. 2009, Viva Books

Optics, Karl Dieter Moller, Learning by computing with model examples, 2007, Springer.

Additional Readings

Optical Electronics, Ajoy Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, 2011, Cambridge University Press

Optoelectronic Devices and Systems, S.C. Gupta, 2005, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

62

SEC: Weather Forecasting (32223909)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• The aim of this course is to impart theoretical knowledge to the students and also to

enable them to develop an awareness and understanding of the causes and effects of

different weather phenomena and basic forecasting techniques.


The student will gain the following:

• Acquire basic knowledge of the elements of the atmosphere, its composition at various

heights, variation of pressure and temperature with height.

• Learn basic techniques to measure temperature and its relation with cyclones and anti-

cyclones.

• Knowledge of simple techniques to measure wind speed and its directions, humidity and

rainfall.

• Understanding of absorption, emission and scattering of radiations in atmosphere;

Radiation laws.

• Knowledge of global wind systems, jet streams, local thunderstorms, tropical cyclones,

tornadoes and hurricanes.

• Knowledge of climate and its classification. Understanding various causes of climate

change like global warming, air pollution, aerosols, ozone depletion, acid rain.

• Develop skills needed for weather forecasting, mathematical simulations, weather

forecasting methods, types of weather forecasting, role of satellite observations in

weather forecasting, weather maps etc. Uncertainties in predicting weather based on

statistical analysis.

• Develop ability to do weather forecasts using input data.

• In the laboratory course, students should be able to learn: Principle of the working of a

weather Station, Study of Synoptic charts and weather reports, Processing and analysis

of weather data, Reading of Pressure charts, Surface charts, Wind charts and their

analysis.

Unit 1

Introduction to atmosphere: Elementary idea of atmosphere: physical structure and

composition; compositional layering of the atmosphere; variation of pressure and

temperature with height; air temperature; requirements to measure air temperature;

temperature sensors: types; atmospheric pressure: its measurement

(9 Periods)

63

Unit 2

Measuring the weather: Wind; forces acting to produce wind; wind speed direction:

units, its direction; measuring wind speed and direction; humidity, clouds and rainfall,

radiation: absorption, emission and scattering in atmosphere; radiation laws.

(4 Periods)

Unit 3

Weather systems: Global wind systems; air masses and fronts: classifications; jet

streams; local thunderstorms; tropical cyclones: classification; tornadoes; hurricanes.

(3 Periods)

Unit 4

Climate and Climate Change: Climate: its classification; causes of climate change;

global warming and its outcomes; air pollution and its measurement, particulate matters

PM 2.5, PM 10. Health hazards due to high concentration of PM2.5; aerosols, ozone

depletion

(6 Periods)

Unit 5

Basics of weather forecasting: Weather forecasting: analysis and its historical

background; need of measuring weather; types of weather forecasting; weather

forecasting methods; criteria of choosing weather station; basics of choosing site and

exposure; satellites observations in weather forecasting; weather maps; uncertainty and

predictability; probability forecasts.

(8 Periods)


PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Weather Forecasting

Real time demonstration of clouds location and their movements based on short-time

animation. Satellite, for instance INSAT-3D products can be displayed. Water vapours, cloud

imagery & 3D overview of wind pattern can be demonstrated. Different wavelengths

channels (Infra-red and Visible) operations can be shown to distinguish the features.

Profiles of different atmospheric parameters (temperature, humidity, wind component, etc.)

can be demonstrated based on radiosonde daily launch.



1. Study of synoptic charts & weather reports, working principle of weather station.

2. Processing and analysis of weather data:

(a) To calculate the sunniest time of the year.

(b) To study the variation of rainfall amount and intensity.

(c) To observe the sunniest/driest day of the week.

(d) To examine the maximum and minimum temperature throughout the year.

(e) To evaluate the relative humidity of the day.

(f) To examine the rainfall amount month wise.

64

3. Exercises in chart reading: Plotting of constant pressure charts, surfaces charts,

upper wind charts and its analysis.

4. Formats and elements in different types of weather forecasts/ warning (both aviation

and non-aviation).

5. Simulation of weather system

6. Field visits to India Meteorological department and National center for medium

range weather forecasting

References

Essential Readings

1. Aviation Meteorology, I.C. Joshi, 3rd edition 2014, Himalayan Books

2. The weather Observers Hand book, Stephen Burt, 2012, Cambridge University

Press.

3. Meteorology, S.R. Ghadekar, 2001, Agromet Publishers, Nagpur.

4. Text Book of Agrometeorology, S.R. Ghadekar, 2005, Agromet Publishers, Nagpur.

5. Atmosphere and Ocean, John G. Harvey, 1995, The Artemis Press.

SEC : Introduction to Physical Computing (XXX1)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

Exposure to the elements of physical computing using embedded computers to enable the

student to implement experimental setups in physics. To offer an opportunity to learn

automation and to design an appropriate system for laboratory experiments using computer

software in a project based learning environment.


The student will be able to

Understand the evolution of the CPU from microprocessor to microcontroller and

embedded computers from a historical perspective.

65

Operate basic electronic components and analog and digital electronics building blocks

including power supply and batteries.

Use basic laboratory equipment for measurement and instrumentation.

Understand the Arduino ecosystem and write simple Arduino programs (sketches)

Understand sensor characteristics and select a suitable sensor for various applications.

Read digital and analog data and produce digital and analog outputs from an embedded

computer.

Understand how to interface an embedded computer to the physical environment.

Visualize the needs of a standalone embedded computer and implement a simple system

using Arduino.

Unit 1

Brief overview of a computer. Evolution from CPU to Microprocessor to

microcontroller. Introduction to Arduino. Overview of basic electronic components (R,

L, C, diode, BJT, MOSFET etc.) and circuits, 555 timer, logic gates, logic function ICs,

power supply and batteries.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 2

Capturing schematic diagrams.

(i) Using free software such as Eagle CAD.

(ii) Using basic lab instruments – DMM, oscilloscope, signal generator etc.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 3

Understanding Arduino programming. Downloading and installing Arduino IDE.

Writing an Arduino sketch.

Programming fundamentals: program initialization, conditional statements, loops,

functions, global variables.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 4

1. Digital Input and Output

2. Measuring time and events. Pulse Width Modulation.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 5

1. Analog Input and Output.

2. Physical Interface: sensors and actuators.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 6

1. Communication with the outside world.

2. System Integration and debugging.

66

( 3 Lectures)


PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Introduction to Physical Computing

Sessions on the construction and use of specific equipment and experimental apparatuses

used in the physics lab, including necessary precautions.




Hello LED: Connect a LED to a digital output pin and turn it on and off.

Hello Switch: Read a switch a toggle an LED when the switch is pressed and released.

Hello ADC: Connect a potentiometer to an ADC input and print the analog voltage on

the serial monitor.

Hello Blink: Read a switch and changing the LED blink rate every time the switch is

pressed and released.

Hello PWM: Write a Pulse Width Modulation code in software and vary the LED

intensity.

Hello Random: Read a switch and every time the switch is pressed and released, generate

and print a random number on the serial monitor.

Hello Random2: Connect a Seven Segment Display (SSD) and print the random number

on this display each time a switch is pressed and released. Collect large data sample and

plot relative frequency of occurrence of each ‘random’ number

Hello LCD: Connect a (16X2) LCD to an Arduino and print ‘Hello World’.

Hello LCD2: Connect a temperature sensor to an ADC input and print the temperature

on the LCD

Hello PWM2: Connect a RGB LED and 3 switches. Use hardware PWM feature of the

Arduino and change the relative intensity of each of the LEDs of the RGB LED and

generate large number of colors.

Mini Projects:

1. Connect 2 SSDs and every time a switch is pressed and released, print 2 random

numbers on the two SSDs

2. Connect a switch and 4 RGB LEDs in a ‘Y’ configuration. Change the LED lighting

patterns each time a switch is pressed and released (total 4095 patterns possible).

3. Arrange acrylic mirrors in a triangle and make a LED kaleidoscope using the RGB LEDs

as the light source.

4. Connect a photo-gate mechanism to a bar pendulum. Verify that the period of oscillation

is independent of the amplitude for small amplitudes. What happens when the amplitude

is large?

5. Connect 8 switches and a small speaker and an audio amplifier and make a piano.

6. Connect 2 sets of 3 switches for two players. Connect LCD and implement a ‘rock-

paper-scissors’ game.

67

References

Essential Readings

1. Learn Electronics with Arduino: An Illustrated Beginner's Guide to Physical Computing.

Jody Culkin and Eric Hagan. Shroff Publishers. ISBN: 9789352136704.

2. Programming Arduino: Getting Started with Sketches, Second Edition. Simon Monk.

McGraw-Hill Education. ISBN-10: 1259641635.

3. Physical Computing: Sensing and Controlling the Physical World with Computers, 1st

Edition. Thomson. ISBN-10: 159200346X.

4. The Art of Electronics. Paul Horowitz and Winfield Hill. Cambridge University Press.

2nd Edition. ISBN-13: 978-0521689175

5. Designing Embedded Hardware. John Catsoulis. Shroff Publishers. 2nd Edition.

ISBN: 9788184042597

SEC: Numerical Analysis (XXX2)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

The emphasis of course is to equip students with the mathematical tools required in solving

problem of interest to physicists. To expose students to fundamental computational physics

skills and hence enable them to solve a wide range of physics problems. To help students

develop critical skills and knowledge that will prepare them not only for doing fundamental

and applied research but also prepare them for a wide variety of careers.


Theory:

After completing this course, student will be able to:

approximate single and multi-variable function by Taylor's Theorem.

Solve first order differential equations and apply it to physics problems.

68

solve linear second order homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equations

with constant coefficients.

Calculate partial derivatives of function of several variables

Understand the concept of gradient of scalar field and divergence and curl of vector

fields. perform line, surface and volume integration

Use Green's, Stokes' and Gauss's Theorems to compute integrals

Practical:

After completing this course, student will be able to :

design, code and test simple programs in C++ learn Monte Carlo techniques,

fit a given data to linear function using method of least squares find roots of a given non-

linear function

Use above computational techniques to solve physics problems

Unit 1

Errors and iterative Methods: Truncation and Round-off Errors. Floating Point

Computation, Overflow and underflow. Single and Double Precision Arithmetic,

Iterative Methods.

(2 Lectures)

Solutions of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations: (1) Fixed point iteration

method, (2) Bisection method, (3) Secant Method, (4) Newton Raphson method, (5)

Generalized Newton’s method. Comparison and error estimation

(6 Lectures)

Unit 2

Interpolation: Forward and Backward Differences. Symbolic Relation, Differences of a

polynomial. Newton’s Forward and Backward Interpolation Formulas

(5 Lectures)

Unit 3

Least Square fitting: (1) Fitting a straight line. (2) Non-linear curve fitting: (a) Power

function, (b) Polynomial of nth degree, and (c) Exponential Function. (3) Linear

Weighed Least square Approximation (5 Lectures)

Unit 4

Numerical Differentiation: (1) Newton’s interpolation Formulas & (2) Cubic Spline

Method, Errors in Numeric Differentiation. Maximum and Minimum values of a

Tabulated Function

(4 Lectures)

Numerical Integration: Generalized Quadrature Formula. Trapezoidal Rule.

Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 Rules. Weddle’s Rule, Gauss-Legendre Formula.

(4 Lectures)

69

Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations: First Order ODE’s: solution of Initial

Value problems: (1) Euler’s Method, (2) Modified Euler’s method (4 Lectures)


PRACTICALS SEC LAB: Numerical Analysis




Algebraic and transcendental equation:

1. To find the roots of an algebraic equation by Bisection method.

2. To find the roots of an algebraic equation by Secant method.

3. To find the roots of an algebraic equation by Newton-Raphson method.

4. To find the roots of a transcendental equation by Bisection method. Interpolation

5. To find the forward difference table from a given set of data values.

6. To find a backward difference table from a given set of data values. Curve fitting

7. To fit a straight line to a given set of data values.

8. To fit a polynomial to a given set of data values.

9. To fit an exponential function to a given set of data values.

Differentiation:

10. To find the first and second derivatives near the beginning of the table of values of (x,y).

11. To find the first and second derivatives near the end of the table of values of (x,y).

Integration

12. To evaluate a definite integral by trapezoidal rule.

13. To evaluate a definite integral by Simpson 1/3 rule.


15. To evaluate a definite integral by Gauss Quadrature rule.

Differential Equations:

16. To solve differential equations by Euler’s method.

17. To solve differential equations by modified Euler’s method.

References

Essential Readings

Elementary Numerical Analysis, K.E.Atkinson, 3rd Edn., 2007 , Wiley India Edition.

Introduction to Numerical Analysis, S.S. Sastry, 5th Edn., 2012, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

A first course in Numerical Methods, U.M. Ascher & C. Greif, 2012, PHI Learning.

70


Schaum's Outline of Programming with C++. J. Hubbard, 2000, McGraw Hill Pub.

Numerical Recipes in C++: The Art of Scientific Computing, W.H. Press et.al., 2nd

Edn., 2013, Cambridge University Press.

An introduction to Numerical methods in C++, Brian H. Flowers, 2009, Oxford

University Press.

71

9.3. DSE Courses Discipline Specific (Physics Elective)

DSE-1A: Elements of Modern Physics (42227529)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

The objective of this course is to teach the physical and mathematical foundations necessary

for learning various topics in modern physics which are crucial for understanding atoms,

molecules, photons, nuclei and elementary particles. These concepts are also important to

understand phenomena in laser physics, condensed matter physics and astrophysics.


This course will prepare the students to appreciate and comprehend the following aspects:

Understand historical basis of quantum mechanics.

Explain how quantum mechanical concepts answer some of unanswered questions of

Classical mechanics such as photoelectric effect, Compton scattering etc.

Explain inadequacy of Rutherford model, discrete atomic spectra from hydrogen like

atoms and its explanation on quantum mechanical basis.

Demonstrate ability to apply wave-particle duality and uncertainty principle to solve

physics problems.

Explain two slit interference experiment with photons, atoms and particles establishing

non-deterministic nature of QM.

Set up Schrodinger equation for behavior of a particle in a field of force for simple

potential and find wave solutions establishing wave-like nature of particles.

Demonstrate ability to solve 1-D quantum problems including the quantum particle in a

box, a well and the transmission and reflection of waves.

Explain nuclear structure, binding energy, nuclear models and impossibility of an

electron being in the nucleus as a consequence of the uncertainty principle.

Understand radioactivity, radioactive decays, apply radioactive laws to solve related

physics problems and Pauli’s prediction of neutrino, and the subsequent discovery.

Unit 1

Introduction : Planck’s quantum, Planck’s constant and light as a collection of photons ;

Photo- electric effect and Compton scattering. De Broglie wavelength and matter waves;

Davisson-Germer experiment.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 2

Problems with Rutherford model: Instability of atoms and observation of discrete atomic

spectra; Bohr's quantization rule and atomic stability; calculation of energy levels for

hydrogen-like atoms and their spectra.

72

(14 Lectures)

Unit 3

Position measurement: Gamma ray microscope thought experiment; Wave-particle duality,

Heisenberg uncertainty principle - impossibility of a particle following a trajectory;

Estimating minimum energy of a confined particle using uncertainty principle; Energy-time

uncertainty principle.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 4

Double-slit interference experiment with photons, atoms and particles; linear superposition

principle as a consequence; Schrodinger’s equation for non-relativistic particles; Momentum

and Energy operators; stationary states; physical interpretation of wavefunction, probabilities

and normalization; Probability and probability current densities in one dimension.

(11 Lectures)

Unit 5

One dimensional infinitely rigid box: energy eigenvalues, eigenfunctions and their

normalization; Quantum dot as an example; Quantum mechanical scattering and tunneling in

one dimension - across a step potential and across a rectangular potential barrier. (12

Lectures) Size and structure of atomic nucleus and its relations with atomic weight;

Impossibility of an electron being in the nucleus as a consequence of the uncertainty

principle. Nature of nuclear force, NZ graph, semi-empirical mass formula & binding energy.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 6

Radioactivity: stability of the nucleus; Law of radioactive decay; Mean life and half-life;

Alpha decay; Beta decay: energy released, spectrum and Pauli's prediction of neutrino;

Gamma ray emission, energy-momentum conservation: electron-positron pair creation by

gamma photons in the vicinity of a nucleus.

Fission and fusion: mass deficit, relativity and generation of energy; Fission: nature of

fragments and emission of neutrons.

(11 Lectures)


PHYSICS LAB: DSE-1A LAB: Sessions on the construction and use of specific measurement instruments and experimental

apparatuses used in the modern physics lab, including necessary precautions.




73


1. To determine value of Boltzmann constant using V-I characteristic of PN diode.

2. To determine work function of material of filament of directly heated vacuum diode.

3. To determine value of Planck’s constant using LEDs of at least 4 different colours.

4. To determine the ionization potential of mercury.

5. To determine the wavelength of H-alpha emission line of Hydrogen atom.

6. To determine the absorption lines in the rotational spectrum of Iodine vapour.

7. To study the diffraction patterns of single and double slits using laser source and

measure its intensity variation using Photosensor and compare with incoherent source –

Na light. 19

8. Photo-electric effect: photo current versus intensity and wavelength of light; maximum

energy of photoelectrons versus frequency of light.

9. To determine the value of e/m by magnetic focusing.

Reference for Theory:

Essential Readings

1. Concepts of Modern Physics, Arthur Beiser, 2002, McGraw-Hill.

2. Modern Physics by R A Serway, C J Moses and C A Moyer, 3rd edition, Thomson

Brooks Cole, 2012.

3. Modern Physics for Scientists and Engineers by S T Thornton and A Rex, 4th edition,

Cengage Learning, 2013.

4. Basic ideas and concepts in Nuclear Physics: An introductory approach by K Heyde,


5. Quantum Mechanics, Robert Eisberg and Robert Resnick, 2ndEdn., 2002, Wiley.

Additional Readings:

1. Six Ideas that Shaped Physics: Particle Behave like Waves, T.A. Moore,2003, McGraw

Hill.

2. Thirty years that shook physics: the story of quantum theory, George Gamow, Garden

City, NY: Doubleday, 1966.

3. New Physics, ed. Paul Davies, Cambridge University Press (1989).

4. Quantum Theory, David Bohm, Dover Publications, 1979.

5. Lectures on Quantum Mechanics: Fundamentals and Applications, eds. A. Pathak and

Ajoy Ghatak, Viva Books Pvt. Ltd., 2019

6. QUANTUM MECHANICS: Theory and Applications, (2019), (Extensively revised 6th

Edition), Ajoy Ghatak and S. Lokanathan, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi

7. Concepts of Nuclear Physics by B L Cohen, Tata McGraw Hill Publication, 1974.



Publishing House.

74


reprinted 1985, Heinemann Educational Publishers.

3. A Text Book of Practical Physics, Indu Prakash and Ramakrishna, 11th Edition,2011,




5. Practical Physics, G.L. Squires, 2015, 4th Edition, Cambridge University Press.

DSE-1A: Digital, Analog and Instrumentation (42227530)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This paper aims to cover the basic digital and analog electronic systems. The concept of

Boolean algebra is discussed in detail and arithmetic circuits are described. Students will

learn the physics of semiconductor devices such as p-n junction, rectifier diodes and bipolar

junction transistors.


Differentiating the Analog and Digital circuits, the concepts of number systems like

Binary, BCD, Octal and hexadecimal are developed to elaborate and focus on the digital

systems.

Characteristics and working of pn junction.

Two terminal devices: Rectifier diodes, Zener diode, photodiode etc.

NPN and PNP transistors: Characteristics of different configurations, biasing,

stabilization and their applications.

CE and two stage RC coupled transistor amplifier using h-parameter model of the

transistor.

Designing of different types of oscillators and their stabilities.

Ideal and practical op-amps: Characteristics and applications.

Timer circuits using IC 555 providing clock pulses to sequential circuits and develop

multivibrators.

75

Also impart understanding of working of CRO and its usage in measurements of voltage,

current, frequency and phase measurement.

In the laboratory students will learn to construct both combinational and sequential

circuits by employing NAND as building blocks. They will be able to study

characteristics of various diodes and BJT. They will also be able to design amplifiers

(using BJT and Op-Amp), oscillators and multivibrators. They will also learn working of

CRO.

Unit 1

Digital Circuits Difference between Analog and Digital Circuits. Binary Numbers. Decimal to Binary and

Binary to Decimal Conversion, AND, OR and NOT Gates. NAND and NOR. Gates as

Universal Gates. XOR and XNOR Gates.

(5 Lectures) De Morgan's Theorems. Boolean Laws. Simplification of Logic Circuit using Boolean

Algebra. Fundamental Products. Minterms and Maxterms. Conversion of a Truth Table into

an Equivalent Logic Circuit by (1) Sum of Products Method and (2) Karnaugh Map.

(6 Lectures) Binary Addition. Binary Subtraction using 2's Complement Method). Half Adders and Full

Adders and Subtractors, 4-bit binary Adder-Subtractor.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 2

Semiconductor Devices and Amplifiers: Semiconductor Diodes: P and N type

semiconductors. PN junction and its characteristics. Static and dynamic Resistance.

(2 Lectures)

Bipolar Junction transistors: n-p-n and p-n-p Transistors. Characteristics of CB, CE and

CC Configurations. Active, Cutoff & Saturation regions. Current gains α and β. Relations

between α and β. Load Line analysis of Transistors. DC Load line & Q-point. Voltage

Divider Bias Circuit for CE Amplifier. h-parameter Equivalent Circuit of transistor. Analysis

of single-stage CE amplifier using hybrid Model. Input and output Impedance. Current and

Voltage gains.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 3

Operational Amplifiers (Black Box approach): Characteristics of an Ideal and Practical

Op-Amp (IC 741), Open-loop and closed-loop Gain. CMRR, concept of Virtual ground.

Applications of Op-Amps: (1) Inverting and non-inverting Amplifiers, (2) Adder, (3)

Subtractor, (4) Differentiator, (5) Integrator, (6) Zero crossing detector.

(14 Lectures)

Sinusoidal Oscillators: Barkhausen's Criterion for Self-Sustained Oscillations.

Determination of Frequency of RC Phase-shift Oscillator.

(5 Lectures)

76

Unit 4

Instrumentations :

Introduction to CRO: Block diagram of CRO. Applications of CRO: (1) Study of

waveform, (2) Measurement of voltage, current, frequency, and phase difference.

(3 Lectures)

Power Supply: Half-wave Rectifiers. Centre-tapped and Bridge Full-wave Rectifiers,

Calculation of Ripple Factor and Rectification Efficiency, Basic idea about capacitor filter,

Zener Diode and Voltage Regulation.

(6 Lectures)

Timer IC: IC 555 Pin diagram and its application as Astable and Monostable Multivibrator.

(3 Lectures)


PHYSICS LAB: DSE-1A LAB: Digital, Analog and Instrumentation







1. To measure (a) Voltage, and (b) Frequency of a periodic waveform using a CRO

2. To minimize a given (a) logic circuit and (b) Boolean equation.

3. Half adder, Full adder and 4-bit Binary Adder.

4. To design an astable multivibrator of given specifications using 555 Timer.

5. To design a monostable multivibrator of given specifications using 555 Timer.

6. To study IV characteristics of (a) PN diode, (b) Zener diode and (c) LED

7. To study the characteristics of a Transistor in CE configuration.

8. To design a CE amplifier of a given gain (mid-gain) using voltage divider bias.

9. To design an inverting amplifier of given gain using Op-amp 741 and study its frequency

response. (b) To design a non-inverting amplifier of given gain using Op-amp 741 and

study its Frequency Response.

10. To study a precision Differential Amplifier of given I/O specification using Op-amp.

11. To investigate the use of an op-amp as a Differentiator.

12. To design a Wien Bridge Oscillator using an op-amp.


Essential Readings

1. Integrated Electronics, J. Millman and C.C. Halkias, 1991, Tata Mc-Graw Hill.

2. Fundamentals of Digital Circuits, Anand Kumar, 4th Edn, 2018, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

3. Digital Principles and Applications, A.P.Malvino, D.P.Leach and Saha, 8th Ed., 2018,

Tata McGraw Hill Education.

77

4. OP-AMP & Linear Digital Circuits, R.A. Gayakwad, 2000, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

5. Electronics: Fundamentals and Applications, J.D. Ryder, 2004, Prentice Hall.

Additional Readings

1. Electronic devices & circuits, S. Salivahanan & N.S. Kumar, 2012, Tata Mc-Graw Hill

2. Microelectronic Circuits, M.H. Rashid, 2nd Edn., 2011, Cengage Learning.

3. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Tech., Helfrick and Cooper,1990,

PHI Learning.

4. Microelectronic circuits, A.S. Sedra, K.C. Smith, A.N. Chandorkar, 2014, 6th Edn.,



1. Electronic Devices and circuits, B. Kumar, S.B. Jain, 2nd Edition, 2015, PHI Learning

Pvt. Ltd.

2. Basic Electronics: A text lab manual, P.B.Zbar, A.P.Malvino, M.A.Miller, 1994, Mc-

Graw Hill.

DSE-1A: Mathematical Physics (42227531)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

The emphasis of course is to equip students with the mathematical tools required in solving

problem of interest to physicists. The course will expose students to fundamental

computational physics skills and hence enable them to solve a wide range of physics

problems.


At the end of this course, the students will be able to

Find extrema of functions of several variables.

78

Represent a periodic function by a sum of harmonics using Fourier series and their

applications in physical problems such as vibrating strings etc.

Obtain power series solution of differential equation of second order with variable

coefficient using Frobenius method.

Understand properties and applications of special functions like Legendre polynomials,

Bessel functions and their differential equations and apply these to various physical

problems such as in quantum mechanics.

Learn about gamma and beta functions and their applications.

Solve linear partial differential equations of second order with separation of variable

method.

Understand the basic concepts of complex analysis and integration.

In the laboratory course, the students will be able to design, code and test simple

programs in C++ in the process of solving various problems.

Unit 1

Calculus of functions of more than one variable: Partial derivatives, exact and inexact

differentials. Integrating factor, with simple illustration. Constrained Maximization using

Lagrange Multipliers.

(6 Lectures)

Fourier Series: Periodic functions. Orthogonality of sine and cosine functions, Dirichlet

Conditions (Statement only). Expansion of periodic functions in a series of sine and cosine

functions and determination of Fourier coefficients. Even and odd functions and their Fourier

expansions. Application. Summing of Infinite Series.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 2

Frobenius Method and Special Functions: Singular Points of Second Order Linear

Differential Equations and their importance. Frobenius method and its applications to

differential equations. Legendre, Bessel Differential Equations. Properties of Legendre

Polynomials: Rodrigues Formula, Orthogonality. Simple recurrence relations.

(16 Lectures)

Unit 3

Some Special Integrals: Beta and Gamma Functions and Relation between them. Expression

of Integrals in terms of Gamma Functions.

(4 Lectures)

Partial Differential Equations: Solutions to partial differential equations, using separation

of variables: Laplace's Equation in problems of rectangular geometry. Solution of 1D wave

equation.

(10 Lectures)

79

Unit 4

Complex Analysis: Brief revision of Complex numbers & their graphical representation.

Euler's formula, D-Moivre’s theorem, Roots of Complex Numbers. Functions of Complex

Variables. Analyticity and Cauchy-Riemann Conditions. Examples of analytic functions.

Singular functions: poles and branch points, order of singularity. Integration of a function of

a complex variable. Cauchy’s Integral.

(14 Lectures)


PHYSICS LAB: DSE-1A LAB: Mathematical Physics

The aim of this Lab is not just to teach computer programming and numerical analysis but to

eemphasize its role in solving problems in Physics.

• Highlights the use of computational methods to solve physics problems.

• The course will consist of lectures (both theory and practical) in the Lab. The

recommended group size is not more than 15 students.

• Evaluation to be done not on the programming but on the basis of formulating the

problem.

• Aim at teaching students to construct the computational problem to be solved.

• Students can use any one operating system: Linux or Microsoft Windows.

• At least 12 programs must be attempted from the following covering the entire syllabus.

• The list of programs here is only suggestive. Students should be encouraged to do.

Topics

Descriptions with Applications

Introduction and Overview Computer architecture and organization, memory and

Input/output devices,

Basics of scientific computing Binary and decimal arithmetic, Floating point numbers,

single and double precision arithmetic, underflow and

overflow - emphasize the importance of making equations

in terms of dimensionless variables, Iterative methods

Algorithms and Flow charts Purpose, symbols and description,

80

Introduction to C++ Introduction to Programming: Algorithms: Sequence,

Selection and Repetition, Structured programming, basic

idea of Compilers. Data Types, Enumerated Data,

Conversion & casting, constants and variables,

Mathematical, Relational, Logical and Bit wise Operators.

Precedence of Operators, Expressions and Statements,

Scope and Visibility of Data, block, Local and Global

variables, Auto, static and External variables.

Programs:

To calculate area of a rectangle

To check size of variables in bytes (Use of size of ()

Operator)

converting plane polar to Cartesian coordinates and

vice versa

C++ Control Statements if-statement, if-else statement, Nested if Structure, Else-if

statement, Ternary operator, Goto statement, switch

statement, Unconditional and Conditional looping, while

loop, Do-while loop, for loop, nested loops, break and

continue statements

Programs:

To find roots of a quadratic equation if…else and

if…else if. Else

To find largest of three numbers

To check whether a number is prime or not

To list Prime numbers up to 1000

Random Number generator Generating pseudo random numbers to find value of pi

using Monte Carlo simulations. To integrate using Monte

Carlo Method

Arrays and Functions

Sum and average of a list of numbers, largest of a given list

of numbers and its location in the list, sorting of numbers in

ascending descending order using Bubble sort and

Sequential sort, Binary search, 2-dimensional arrays,

matrix operations (sum, product, transpose etc.)

81

Solution of Algebraic and

Transcendental equations by

Bisection, Newton Raphson and

Secant methods

Solution of linear and quadratic equation, solving

in optics, square root of a

number.

Data Analysis and Least Square

Fitting (Linear case)

Uncertainty, error and precision, mean, standard deviation

and error in the mean. Combining uncertainties (law of

propagation of error), Least squares method for fitting data:

linear (y=ax+b), power law(y=axb) and exponential

(y=aebx). To find parameters a, b and errors in them using

method of least squares. Ohms law- calculate R, Hooke’s

law - Calculate spring constant.

Taylor’s and Maclaurin Series Finding approximate value of sin(x) or cos(x) using first

‘n’ terms in the series expansion. Finding value of sin(x)

accurate to a given number of significant digits.

Numerical differentiation

(Forward and Backward and

central difference formulae –

Using basic definition)

Given Position with equidistant time data calculate velocity

and acceleration


Essential Readings

1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Erwin Kreyszig, 2008, Wiley India.

2. Complex Variables and Applications, J.W.Brown& R.V.Churchill, 7th Ed. 2003, Tata

McGraw-Hill.

3. Advanced Mathematics for Engineers and Scientists: Schaum Outline Series, M. R

Spiegel, McGraw Hill Education (2009).

82

4. Applied Mathematics for Engineers and Physicists, L.A. Pipes and L.R. Harvill, Dover

Publications (2014).

5. Mathematical Methods for Physics and Engineers, K.F Riley, M.P. Hobson and S. J.

Bence, 3rd ed., 2006, Cambridge University Press

Additional Readings:

1. Mathematical Physics, A.K. Ghatak, I.C. Goyal and S.J. Chua, Laxmi Publications

Private Limited (2017)

2. Advanced Engineering Mathematics ,D.G.Zill and W.S.Wright, 5 Ed.,2012,Jones and

Bartlett Learning.

3. An introduction to ordinary differential equations, E.A.Coddington, 2009, PHI learning.

Differential Equations, George F. Simmons, 2007, McGraw Hill.

4. Mathematical methods for Scientists & Engineers, D.A.Mc Quarrie, 2003, Viva Books

Reference for Laboratory work:

1. C++ How to Program’, Paul J. Deitel and Harvey Deitel, Pearson (2016)

2. ‘Schaum's Outline of Programming with C++’, J.Hubbard, 2000, McGraw-Hill

Education

3. Introduction to Numerical Analysis, S.S. Sastry, 5th Edn., 2012, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

4. An introduction to Numerical methods in C++, Brian H. Flowers, 2009, Oxford

University Press.

5. Computational Physics, Darren Walker, 1st Edn., Scientific International Pvt. Ltd

(2015).

6. Elementary Numerical Analysis, K.E. Atkinson, 3rd Edn., 2007, Wiley India Edition.

83

DSE-1A: Nano Materials and Applications (42227532)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course introduces briefly the basic concepts of Quantum Mechanics and principles

required to understand nanomaterials. Various nanomaterial synthesis/growth methods and

characterizations techniques are discussed to explore the field in detail. The effect of

dimensional confinement of charge carries on the electrical, optical and structural properties

are discussed.


On successful completion of the module students should be able to

Understand the basic concepts of Quantum Mechanics and solve Schrodinger wave

equation for simple problems.

Explain the difference between nanomaterials and bulk materials and their properties.

Explain the role of confinement on the density of state function and so on the various

properties exhibited by nanomaterials compared to bulk materials.

Explain various methods for the synthesis/growth of nanomaterials including top down

and bottom up approaches.

Analyze the data obtained from the various characterization techniques.

Explain various applications of nano particles, quantum dots, nano wires etc.

Explain why nanomaterials exhibit properties which are sometimes very opposite, like

magnetic, to their bulk counterparts.

In the Lab course students will synthesize nanoparticles by different chemical routes and

characterize them in the laboratory using the different techniques, learnt in the theory.

They will also carry out thin film preparation and prepare capacitors and evaluate its

performance. They will fabricate a PN diode and study its I-V characteristics.

Unit 1

Basic Introduction to solids: Classification of solids into crystalline and amorphous

materials, classification based on conductivity (range of values) as metals, semiconductors

and insulators, idea of bandgap and its consequence on optical and electrical proper es,

electrons as free particles for current conduction (I = nevA), introduce bulk (3D) and

nanomaterials {thin films (2D), nanowires (1D) nanodots or quantum dots (0D)} with an

example of the colour of say Gold metals and its nanoparticles.

(6 Lectures)

84

Unit 2

Basic Quantum Mechanics: Idea about particles as wave, electron interference experiment,

superposition principle, position (or amplitude), and momentum. Wave-particle duality,

uncertainty principle, energy quantisation, Schrodinger’s equation, Applications of

Schrodinger’s equation (quantitative): The free particle, potential step, rectangular potential

barrier and the tunnel effect free and bound states of a particle in square well potential,

particle in a box (3D) problem.

(14 Lectures)

Unit 3

Nanoscale Systems: Bulk materials Density of States function and its implication on

electrical properties, Band structure and density of states function for nanoscale materials

(Quantitative for 2D, 1D, 0D), Applications of quantum confinement of carriers in 3D, 2D,

1D nanostructures and its consequences on electronic and optical properties.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Synthesis and Characterization (Qualitative): Top down and Bottom up approach,

Photolithography. Ball milling. Spin coating, Vacuum deposition: Physical vapor deposition

(PVD): Thermal evaporation, Sputtering, Pulsed Laser Deposition (PLD), electric arc

deposition for CNT, C60, grapheme, Chemical vapor deposition (CVD). Preparation through

colloidal methods (Metals, Metal Oxide nanoparticles), MBE growth of quantum dots.

(5 Lectures)

Structure and Surface morphology: X-Ray Diffraction (XRD). Scanning Electron

Microscopy (SEM). Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM).

Spectroscopy: UV-Vis spectroscopy. (Emphasis should be on to discuss data and plots

gathered from these techniques).

(11 Lectures)

Unit 5

Optical and Electron Transport Properties: Bandgap tuning as a function of particle size

(discuss results of oxide and metal nanoparticles) Radiative processes: General formalization

absorption, emission and luminescence. Defects and impurities. Time and length scales of

electrons in solids, Carrier transport, diffusive and ballistic transport in nanostrucutures,

Charging effect, Coulomb blockade effect.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 6

Applications (Qualitative): based on optical, electrical and magnetic properties of

nanoparticles, nanowires and thin films in electronic industry, medical industry, beauty

products, Micro Electromechanical Systems (MEMS).

(7 Lectures)

85


PHYSICS LAB: DSE-1A LAB: Nano Materials and Applications


apparatuses used in the nano physics lab, including necessary precautions.





1. Synthesis of metal (Au/Ag) nanoparticles by chemical route and study its optical

absorption properties.

2. Synthesis of semiconductor (CdS/ZnO/TiO2/Fe2O3etc) nanoparticles and study its XRD

and optical absorption properties as a function of time.

3. Surface Plasmon study of metal nanoparticles by UV-Visible spectrophotometer.

4. Analysis of XRD pattern of nanomaterials and estimation of particle size.

5. To study the effect of size on color of nanomaterials.

6. To prepare composite of CNTs with other materials.

7. Growth of quantum dots by thermal evaporation.

8. Prepare a disc of ceramic of a compound and study its XRD.

9. Fabricate a thin film of nanoparticles by spin coating (or chemical route) and study its

XRD and UV-Visible spectra.

10. Prepare a thin film capacitor and measure capacitance as a function of temperature or

frequency.

11. F abricate a PN junction diode by diffusing Al over the surface of N-type Si/Ge and study

its V-I characteristic.


Essential Readings

1. Introduction to Nanoelectronics, V.V. Mitin, V.A. Kochelap and M.A. Stroscio, 2011,

Cambridge University Press.

2. C.P. Poole, Jr. Frank J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology 1st edition (2003) Wiley

India Pvt. Ltd.

3. S.K. Kulkarni, Nanotechnology: Principles & Practices 2nd edition (2011) (Capital

Publishing Company)

4. K.K. Chattopadhyay and A. N. Banerjee, Introduction to Nanoscience and Technology

(2009) (PHI Learning Private Limited).

5. Electronic transport in mesoscopic systems by Supriyo Datta (1997) Cambridge

University Press.

Additional Readings

1. Solid State Physics, M. A. Wahab, 2011, Narosa Publications.

2. Solid State Physics by J. R. Hall and H. E. Hall, 2nd edition (2014) Wiley.

86

3. Quantum Mechanics by S. P. Singh, M. K. Badge and K. Singh, S. Chand and Company

Ltd.

4. Fundamentals of molecular spectroscopy by C. N. Banwell and E. M. McCASH, 4th

edition, McGraw-Hill.

5. Quantum Transport in semiconductor nanostructures by Carla Beenakker and HenK Van

Houten (1991) (available at arXiv: cond-mat/0412664) open source Sara cronewett Ph.D.

thesis (2001).


1. C.P. Poole, Jr. Frank J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology 1st edition (2003) Wiley

India Pvt.Ltd..

2. S.K. Kulkarni, Nanotechnology: Principles & Practices 2nd edition (2011) (Capital

Publishing Company).

3. K.K. Chattopadhyay and A. N. Banerjee, Introduction to Nanoscience and Technology

(2009) (PHI Learning Private Limited).

4. Richard Booker, Earl Boysen, Nanotechnology for Dummies (2005) (Wiley Publishing

Inc.).

DSE-1A: Communication System (42227533)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This paper aims to describe the concepts of electronics in communication and

communication techniques based on Analog Modulation, Analog and digital Pulse

Modulation. Communication and Navigation systems such as GPS and mobile telephony

system are also introduced. This paper will essentially connect the text book knowledge with

the most popular communication technology in real world.

87



Understand of fundamentals of electronic communication system and electromagnetic

communication spectrum with an idea of frequency allocation for radio communication

system in India.

Gain an insight on the use of different modulation and demodulation techniques used in

analog communication

Learn the generation and detection of a signal through pulse and digital modulation

techniques and multiplexing.

Gain an in-depth understanding of different concepts used in a satellite communication

system.

Study the concept of Mobile radio propagation, cellular system design and understand

mobile technologies like GSM and CDMA.

Understand evolution of mobile communication generations 2G, 3G, and 4G with their

characteristics and limitations.

In the laboratory course, students will apply the theoretical concepts to gain hands on

experience in building modulation and demodulation circuits; Transmitters and Receivers

for AM and FM. Also to construct TDM, PAM, PWM, PPM and ASK, PSK and FSK

modulator and verify their results.

Unit 1

Electronic communication: Introduction to communication – means and modes. Power

measurements (units of power). Need for modulation. Block diagram of an electronic

communication system. Brief idea of frequency allocation for radio communication system in

India (TRAI). Electromagnetic communication spectrum, band designations and usage.

Channels and base-band signals.

(4 Lectures)

Analog Modulation: Amplitude Modulation, modulation index and frequency spectrum.

Generation of AM (Emitter Modulation), Amplitude Demodulation (diode detector), Single

Sideband (SSB) systems, advantages of SSB transmission, Concept of Single side band

generation and detection. Frequency Modulation (FM) and Phase Modulation (PM),

modulation index and frequency spectrum, equivalence between FM and PM, Generation of

FM using VCO, FM detector (slope detector), Qualitative idea of Super heterodyne receiver.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 2

Analog Pulse Modulation: Channel capacity, Sampling theorem, Basic Principles-PAM,

PWM, PPM, modulation and detection technique for PAM only, Multiplexing (time division

multiplexing and frequency division multiplexing).

(9 Lectures)

Unit 3

Digital Pulse Modulation: Need for digital transmission, Pulse Code Modulation, Digital

Carrier Modulation Techniques, Sampling, Quantization and Encoding. Concept of

88

Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK), Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), Phase Shift Keying (PSK),

and Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK).

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Satellite Communication : Introduction, need, Geosynchronous satellite orbits,

geostationary satellite advantages of geostationary satellites. Transponders (C - Band),

Uplink and downlink, path loss, Satellite visibility, Ground and earth stations. Simplified

block diagram of earth station.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 5

Mobile Telephony System: Basic concept of mobile communication, frequency bands used

in mobile communication, concept of cell sectoring and cell splitting, SIM number, IMEI

number, need for data encryption, architecture (block diagram) of mobile communication

network, idea of GSM, CDMA, TDMA and FDMA technologies, simplified block diagram

of mobile phone handset, 2G, 3G and 4G concepts (qualitative only), GPS navigation system

(qualitative idea only.

(15 Lectures)


PHYSICS LAB: DSE-1A LAB: Communication System






1. To design an Amplitude Modulator using Transistor

2. To study envelope detector for demodulation of AM signal

3. To study FM - Generator and Detector circuit

4. To study AM Transmitter and Receiver

5. To study FM Transmitter and Receiver

6. To study Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)

7. To study Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)

8. To study Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)

9. To study Pulse Position Modulation (PPM)

10. To study ASK, PSK and FSK modulators

89


Essential Readings

1. Electronic Communications, D. Roddy and J. Coolen, Pearson Education India.

2. Advanced Electronics Communication Systems- Tomasi, 6thEdn. Prentice Hall.

3. Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, B.P. Lathi, 4th Edition, 2011,


4. Electronic Communication systems, G. Kennedy, 3rd Edn., 1999, Tata McGraw Hill.

5. Principles of Electronic communication systems – Frenzel, 3rd edition, McGraw Hill

Additional Readings

1. Communication Systems, S. Haykin, 2006, Wiley India

2. Wireless communications, Andrea Goldsmith, 2015, Cambridge University Press


1. Electronic Communication system, Blake, Cengage, 5th edition. Wireless

communications, Andrea Goldsmith, 2015, Cambridge University Press.

2. Introduction to Communication systems, U. Madhow, 1st Edition, 2018, Cambridge

University Press.

DSE-1A: Verilog and FPGA Based System Design (42227534)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This paper provides a review of combinational and sequential circuits such as multiplexers,

demultiplexers, decoders, encoders and adder circuits. It discusses the fundamental Verilog

concepts in-lieu of today's most advanced digital design techniques.



• Understand the steps and processes for design of logic circuits and systems.

90

• Differentiate between combinational and sequential circuits.

• Design various types of state machines..

• Understand various types of programmable logic building blocks such as CPLDs and

FPGAs and their tradeoffs.

• Write synthesizable Verilog code.

• Write a Verilog test bench to test various Verilog code modules.

• Design, program and test logic systems on a programmable logic device (CPLD or

FPGA) using Verilog.

Unit 1

Digital logic design flow. Review of combinational circuits. Combinational building blocks:

multiplexors, demultiplexers, decoders, encoders and adder circuits. Review of sequential

circuit elements: flip-flop, latch and register. Finite state machines: Mealy and Moore. Other

sequential circuits: shift registers and counters. FSMD (Finite State Machine with Datapath):

design and analysis. Microprogrammed control. Memory basics and timing. Programmable

Logic devices.

(20 lectures)

Unit 2

Evolution of Programmable logic devices. PAL, PLA and GAL. CPLD and FPGA

architectures. Placement and routing. Logic cell structure, Programmable interconnects,

Logic blocks and I/O Ports. Clock distribution in FPGA. Timing issues in FPGA design.

Boundary scan.

(20 lectures)

Unit 3

Verilog HDL: Introduction to HDL. Verilog primitive operators and structural Verilog

Behavioral Verilog. Design verification. Modeling of combinational and sequential circuits

(including FSM and FSMD) with Verilog Design examples in Verilog.

(20 lectures)


PHYSICS LAB: DSE-1A LAB: Verilog and FPGA Based System Design







1. Write code to realize basic and derived logic gates.

2. Half adder, Full Adder using basic and derived gates.

3. Half subtractor and Full Subtractor using basic and derived gates.

4. Design and simulation of a 4-bit Adder.

91

5. Multiplexer (4x1) and Demultiplexer using logic gates.

6. Decoder and Encoder using logic gates.

7. Clocked D, JK and T Flip flops (with Reset inputs).

8. 3-bit Ripple counter.

9. To design and study switching circuits (LED blink shift).

10. To design traffic light controller.

11. To interface a keyboard.

16. To interface a LCD using FPGA.

17. To interface multiplexed seven segment display.

18. To interface a stepper motor and DC motor.

19. To interface ADC 0804.


Essential Readings

1. Principles of Digital Systems Design and VHDL, Lizy Kurien and Charles Roth; Cengage

Publishing. ISBN-13:978-8131505748.

2. Verilog HDL, Samir Palnitkar, Pearson Education; Second edition (2003).

3. FPGA Based System Design, Wayne Wolf; Pearson Education,

4. Digital Signal processing, S. K. Mitra; McGraw Hill, 1998

5. VLSI design, Debaprasad Das; Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition, 2015.

Additional Readings 1. Digital Signal Processing with FPGAs, U. Meyer Baese; Springer, 2004

2. Verilog HDL primer- J. Bhasker. BSP, 2003


1. Digital System Designs and Practices: Using Verilog HDL and FPGAs, Ming-Bo Lin;

Wiley India Pvt Ltd. ISBN-13: 978-8126536948.

2. Verilog Digital System Design, Zainalabedin Navabi; TMH; 2nd edition. ISBN-13: 978-

0070252219.

3. Designing Digital Computer Systems with Verilog, D.J. Laja and S. Sapatnekar;

Cambridge University Press, 2015.

92

DSE-1A: Medical Physics (42227535)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course introduces a student to the basics of Medical Physics.


This course will enable the student to

Focus on the application of Physics to clinical medicine.

Gain a broad and fundamental understanding of Physics while developing particular

expertise in medical applications.

Learn about the human body, its anatomy, physiology and BioPhysics, exploring its

performance as a physical machine.

Learn diagnostic and therapeutic applications like the ECG, Radiation Physics, X-ray

technology, ultrasound and magnetic resonance imaging.

Gain knowledge with reference to working of various diagnostic tools, medical

imaging techniques

Understand interaction of ionizing radiation with matter - its effects on living organisms

and its uses as a therapeutic technique and also radiation safety practices.

Gain functional knowledge regarding need for radiological protection and the sources of

an approximate level of radiation exposure for treatment purposes.

In the laboratory course, the student will be exposed to the workings of various medical

devices and getting familiarized with various detectors used in medical imaging,

medical diagnostics. The hands-on experience will be very useful for the students from

job perspective.

Unit 1

PHYSICS OF THE BODY-I

Basic Anatomical Terminology: Standard Anatomical Position, Planes. Familiarity with

terms like- Superior, Inferior, Anterior, Posterior, Medial, Lateral, Proximal and Distal.

Mechanics of the body: Skeleton, forces, and body stability. Muscles and dynamics of body

movement.

Physics of Locomotors Systems: joints and movements, Stability and Equilibrium. Energy

household of the body: Energy balance in the body, Energy consumption of the body, Heat

losses of the body, Thermal Regulation.

Other Systems in the body: Pressure system of body. Physics of breathing, Physics of

cardiovascular system.

(8 Lectures)

93

Unit 2

PHYSICS OF THE BODY-II

Acoustics of the body: Nature and characteristics of sound, Production of speech, Physics of

the ear, Diagnostics with sound and ultrasound. Optical system of the body: Physics of the

eye. Electrical system of the body: Physics of the nervous system, Electrical signals and

information transfer.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 3

PHYSICS OF DIAGNOSTIC AND THERAPEUTIC SYSTEMS-I

X-Rays: Electromagnetic spectrum, production of x-rays, x-ray spectra, Brehmsstrahlung,

Characteristic x-ray. X-ray tubes & types: Coolidge tube, x-ray tube design, tube cooling

stationary mode, Rotating anode x-ray tube, Tube rating, quality and intensity of x-ray. X-ray

generator circuits, half wave and full wave rectification, filament circuit, kilo voltage circuit.

Single and three phase electric supply. Power ratings. Types of X-Ray Generator, high

frequency generator, exposure timers and switches, HT cables.

(7 Lectures)

Radiation Physics: Radiation units’ exposure, absorbed dose, units: rad, gray, relative

biological effectiveness, effective dose- Rem & Sievert, inverse square law. Interaction of

radiation with matter Compton & photoelectric effect, linear attenuation coefficient.

Radiation Detectors: ionization (Thimble chamber, condenser chamber), chamber. Geiger

Muller counter, Scintillation counters and Solid-State detectors, TFT.

(7 Lectures)

Unit 4

MEDICAL IMAGING PHYSICS: Evolution of Medical Imaging-ray diagnostics and

imaging, Physics of nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR), NMR imaging, MRI Radiological

imaging, Ultrasound imaging, Physics of Doppler with applications and modes, Vascular

Doppler. Radiography: Filters, grids, cassette, X-ray film, film processing, fluoroscopy.

Computed tomography scanner- principle and function, display, generations, mammography.

Thyroid uptake system and Gamma camera (Only Principle, function and display).

(9 Lectures)

RADIATION ONCOLOGY PHYSICS: External Beam Therapy (Basic Idea):

Telecobalt, Conformal Radiation Therapy (CRT), 3DCRT, IMRT, Image Guided

Radiotherapy, EPID, Rapid Arc, Proton Therapy, Gamma Knife, Cyber Knife. Contact Beam

Therapy (Basic Idea): Brachytherapy- LDR and HDR, Intra Operative Brachytherapy.

Radiotherapy, kilo voltage machines, deep therapy machines, Telecobalt machines, Medical

linear accelerator. Basics of Teletherapy units, deep X-ray, Telecobalt units, Radiation

protection, external beam characteristics, dose maximum and build up – bolus, percentage

depth dose, tissue maximum ratio and tissue phantom ratio, Planned target Volume and Gross

Tumour Volume.

(9 Lectures)

94

Unit 5

RADIATION AND RADIATION PROTECTION: Principles of radiation protection,

protective materials-radiation effects, somatic, genetic stochastic and deterministic effect.

Personal monitoring devices: TLD film badge, pocket dosimeter, OSL dosimeter. Radiation

dosimeter. Natural radioactivity, Biological effects of radiation, Radiation monitors. Steps to

reduce radiation to Patient, Staff and Public. Dose Limits for Occupational workers and

Public. AERB: Existence and Purpose.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 6

PHYSICS OF DIAGNOSTIC AND THERAPEUTIC SYSTEMS-II

Diagnostic nuclear medicine: Radio pharmaceuticals for radioisotope imaging,

Radioisotope imaging equipment, Single photon and positron emission tomography.

Therapeutic nuclear medicine: Interaction between radiation and matter Dose and isodose in

radiation treatment. Medical Instrumentation: Basic Ideas of Endoscope and Cautery, Sleep

Apnea and Cpap Machines, Ventilator and its modes.

(5 Lectures)

Practical (60 Hours)

PHYSICS LAB: DSE-1A LAB: Medical Physics







1. Understanding the working of a manual Hg Blood Pressure monitor, Stethoscope and to

measure the Blood Pressure.

2. Understanding the working of a manual optical eye-testing machine and to learn eye-

testing procedure.

3. Correction of Myopia (short sightedness) using a combination of lenses on an optical

bench/breadboard.

4. Correction of Hypermetropia/Hyperopia (long sightedness) using a combination of

lenses on an optical bench/breadboard.

5. To learn working of Thermo luminescent dosimeter (TLD) badges and measure the

background radiation.

6. Familiarization with Geiger-Muller (GM) Counter & to measure background radiation

7. Familiarization with Radiation meter and to measure background radiation.

8. Familiarization with the Use of a Vascular Doppler.

95


1. Medical Physics, J.R. Cameron and J.G.Skofronick, Wiley (1978)

2. Basic Radiological Physics Dr. K.Thayalan- Jayapee Brothers Medical Publishing Pvt.

Ltd. New Delhi (2003)

3. Christensen’s Physics of Diagnostic Radiology: Curry, Dowdey and Murry - Lippincot

Williams and Wilkins (1990).

4. Physics of the human body, Irving P. Herman, Springer (2007).

5. Physics of Radiation Therapy: F M Khan - Williams and Wilkins, 3rd edition (2003).

6. The essential physics of Medical Imaging: Bushberg, Seibert, Leidholdt and Boone.

Lippincot Williams and Wilkins, Second Edition (2002)

Additional Reading

1. The Physics of Radiology-H E Johns and Cunningham.

2. Physics of Radiation Therapy : F M Khan - Williams and Wilkins, 3rd edition (2003)

3. Handbook of Physics in Diagnostic Imaging: R.S. Livingstone: B.I. Publications Pvt Ltd.

DSE-1A: Applied Dynamics (42227536)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course introduces the main topics of low-dimensional nonlinear systems, with

applications to a wide variety of disciplines, including physics, engineering, mathematics,

chemistry, and biology. This course begins with the first order dynamical system and the idea

of phase space, flows and trajectories and ends with the elementary fluid dynamics. Students

will also appreciate the introduction to chaos and fractals.


Upon successful course completion, a student will be able to:

Demonstrate understanding of the concepts that underlay the study of dynamical systems.

Understand fractals as self-similar structures.

Learn various forms of dynamics and different routes to chaos.

96

Understand basic Physics of fluids and its dynamics theoretically and experimentally

and by computational simulations

In the Lab course, students will be able to perform Simulations/Lab experiments on:

coupled Oscillators, Simulation of Simple Population , Predator-Prey Dynamics,

Simple genetic circuits, rate equations for some simple chemical reactions, Fractal

Formation in Deterministic Fractals, Fluid Flow Models.

Unit 1

Introduction to Dynamical systems: Definition of a continuous first order dynamical

system. The idea of phase space flows and trajectories. Simple mechanical systems as first

order dynamical systems: simple and damped harmonic oscillator. Sketching flows and

trajectories in phase space. Fixed points, attractors, stability of fixed points, basin of

attraction, notion of qualitative analysis of dynamical systems.

Examples of dynamical systems –

Population models e.g. exponential growth and decay, logistic growth, predator-prey

dynamics. Rate equations for chemical reactions e.g. auto catalysis, bio stability.

(22 Lectures)

Unit 2

Introduction to Chaos and Fractals: Chaos in nonlinear equations - Logistic map and

Lorenz equations: Dynamics from time series. Parameter dependence- steady, periodic and

chaotic states. Cobweb iteration. Fixed points. Defining chaos- aperiodic, bounded,

deterministic and sensitive dependence on initial conditions. Period- Doubling route to chaos.

Self-similarity and fractal geometry: Fractals in nature – trees, coastlines, earthquakes, etc.

Need for fractal dimension to describe self-similar structure. Deterministic fractal vs. self-

similar fractal structure.

(18 Lectures)

Unit 3

Elementary Fluid Dynamics: Importance of fluids: Fluids in the pure sciences, fluids in

technology. Study of fluids: Theoretical approach, experimental fluid dynamics,

computational fluid dynamics. Basic physics of fluids: The continuum hypothesis-concept of

fluid element or fluid parcel; Definition of a fluid- shear stress; Fluid properties- viscosity,

thermal conductivity, mass diffusivity, other fluid properties and equation of state; Flow

phenomena- flow dimensionality, steady and unsteady flows, uniform and non-uniform

flows, viscous and inviscid flows, incompressible and compressible flows, laminar and

turbulent flows, rotational and irrotational flows, separated and unseparated flows. Flow

visualization - streamlines, path lines, Streaklines.

(20 Lectures)

97


PHYSICS LAB: DSE-1A LAB: Applied Dynamics

Computing and visualizing trajectories using software such as Scilab, Maple, Octave,

XPPAUT based on Applied Dynamics problems like:


1. To determine the coupling coefficient of coupled pendulums.

2. To determine the coupling coefficient of coupled oscillators.

3. To determine the coupling and damping coefficient of damped coupled oscillator.

4. To study population models e.g. exponential growth and decay, logistic growth, species

competition, predator- prey dynamics, simple genetic circuits.

5. To study rate equations for chemical reactions e.g. auto catalysis, biostability.

6. To study examples from game theory.

7. Computational visualization of trajectories in the Sinai Billiard.

8. Computational visualization of trajectories Electron motion in mesoscopic conductors as

a chaotic billiard problem.

9. Computational visualization of fractal formations of Deterministic fractal.

10. Computational visualization of fractal formations of self-similar fractal.

11. Computational visualization of fractal formations of Fractals in nature – trees, coastlines,

earthquakes.

12. Computational Flow visualization - streamlines, pathlines, Streaklines.


Essential Readings

1. Nonlinear Dynamics and Chaos, S. H. Strogatz, Levant Books, Kolkata, 2007.

2. Understanding Nonlinear Dynamics, Daniel Kaplan and Leon Glass, Springer.

3. Nonlinear Dynamics: Integrability, Chaos and Patterns, M. Lakshmanan and S. Rajasekar,

Springer, 2003.

4. An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, G. K. Batchelor, Cambridge University Press, 2002.

5. Fluid Mechanics, 2/e, L. D. Landau and E. M. Lifshitz, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1987.


1. Nonlinear Dynamics and Chaos, S. H. Strogatz, Levant Books, Kolkata, 2007.

2. Understanding Nonlinear Dynamics, Daniel Kaplan and Leon Glass, Springer.

3. An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, G. K. Batchelor, Cambridge University Press, 2002.

4. Simulation of ODE/PDE Models with MATLAB®, OCTAVE and SCILAB: Scientific

and Engineering Applications: A. Vande Wouwer, P. Saucez, C. V. Fernández, 2014,

Springer.

98

DSE: 2A: Solid State Physics (42227637)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course introduces the basic concepts and principles required to understand the various

properties exhibited by condensed matter, especially solids. It enables the students to

appreciate how the interesting and wonderful properties exhibited by matter depend upon its

atomic and molecular constituents. The gained knowledge helps to solve problems in solid

state physics using relevant mathematical tools. It also communicates the importance of solid

state physics in modern society.


On successful completion of the module students should be able to

Elucidate the concept of lattice, crystals and symmetry operations.

Understand the elementary lattice dynamics and its influence on the properties of

materials.

Describe the main features of the physics of electrons in solids: origin of energy bands,

and their influence electronic behavior.

Explain the origin of dia-, para-, and ferro-magnetic properties of solids.

Explain the origin of the dielectric properties exhibited by solids and the concept of

polarizability.

Learn the properties of superconductivity in solid.

In the laboratory students will carry out experiments based on the theory that they have

learned to measure the magnetic susceptibility, dielectric constant, trace hysteresis loop.

They will also employ to four probe methods to measure electrical conductivity and the

hall set up to determine the hall coefficient of a semiconductor.

Unit 1

Crystal Structure: Solids: Amorphous and Crystalline Materials. Lattice Translation

Vectors. Lattice with a Basis. Unit Cell. Types of lattices. Miller Indices. Reciprocal Lattice.

Brillouin Zones. Diffraction of X-rays by Crystals. Bragg’s Law.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 2

Elementary Lattice Dynamics : Lattice Vibrations and Phonons : Linear Monoatomic and

Diatomic Chains. Acoustical and Optical Phonons. Qualitative Description of the Phonon

Spectrum in Solids. Dulong and Petit’s Law, Einstein and Debye theories of specific heat of

solids (qualitative only). T3 law.

(10 Lectures)

99

Unit 3

Free electron theory: Electrons in metals- Drude Model (Basic concept), Elementary band

theory: Kronig Penney model. Band Gap. Classification of solids based on band gap into

conductors, semiconductors and insulators. P-and N- type Semiconductors. Conductivity of

Semiconductors, mobility, Hall effect in metal and Semiconductor. Hall coefficient.

Application of Hall effect.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Magnetic Properties of Matter : Dia-, Para-, Ferri- and Ferro- magnetic Materials.

Classical Langevin Theory of dia– and Para- magnetism.Weiss’s Theory of Ferromagnetism

and Ferromagnetic Domains.Curie’s law, B-H Curve.Hysteresis and Energy Loss.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 5

Dielectric Properties of Materials: Polarization. Local Electric Field in solids.

Depolarization Field. Electric Susceptibility. Polarizability. Clausius Mossoti Equation.

Classical Theory of Electric Polarizability. Normal and Anomalous Dispersion.

(11 Lectures)

Unit 6

Superconductivity: Experimental Results. Critical Temperature. Critical magnetic field.

Meissner effect. Type I and II Superconductors.

(5 Lectures)


PHYSICS LAB: DSE-2A LAB: Solid State Physics


apparatuses used in the solid state physics lab, including necessary precautions.




At least 06 experiments from the following

1. Measurement of susceptibility of paramagnetic solution (Quinck’s Tube Method)

2. To measure the Magnetic susceptibility of Solids.

3. To determine the Coupling Coefficient of a piezoelectric crystal.

4. To study the dielectric response of materials with frequency

5. To determine the complex dielectric constant and plasma frequency of a metal using

Surface Plasmon Resonance (SPR) technique.

6. To determine the refractive index of a dielectric layer using SPR technique.

7. To study the PE Hysteresis loop of a Ferroelectric Crystal.

100

8. To draw the BH curve of iron (Fe) using a Solenoid and determine the energy loss from

Hysteresis loop.

9. To measure the resistivity of a semiconductor (Ge) crystal with temperature (up to 150o

C) by four-probe method and determine its band gap.

10. To determine the Hall coefficient of a semiconductor sample.

11. Analysis of X-Ray diffraction data in terms of unit cell parameters and estimation of

particle size.

12. Measurement of change in resistance of a semiconductor with magnetic field.


Essential Readings

1. Introduction to Solid State Physics, Charles Kittel, 8th Ed., 2004, Wiley India Pvt.Ltd.

2. Elements of Solid-State Physics, J.P. Srivastava, 2nd Ed., 2006, Prentice-Hall of India

3. Introduction to Solids, Leonid V. Azaroff, 2004, Tata Mc-Graw Hill.

4. Solid State Physics, Neil W. Ashcroft and N. David Mermin, 1976, Cengage Learning.

5. Elementary Solid State Physics, M.Ali Omar, 2006, Pearson.

Additional Readings

1. Solid State Physics, Rita John, 2014, McGraw Hill.

2. Solid State Physics, M.A. Wahab, 2011, Narosa Publications



Publishing House.


reprinted 1985, Heinemann Educational Publishers.

3. Elements of Solid-State Physics, J.P. Srivastava, 2nd Ed., 2006, Prentice-Hall of India.




101

DSE-2A: Embedded System: Introduction to microcontroller

(42227638)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This course familiarizes students to the designing and development of embedded systems.

This course gives a review of microprocessor and introduces microcontroller 8051.


At the end of this course, students will be able to:

Know the major components that constitute an embedded system.

Understand what is a microcontroller, microcomputer embedded system.

Describe the architecture of 8051 microcontroller.

Write simple programs for 8051 microcontrollers in C language.

Understand key concepts of 8051 microcontroller systems like I/O operations,

interrupts, programming of timers and counters.

Interface 8051 microcontroller with peripherals

Understand and explain concepts and architecture of embedded systems

Implement small programs to solve well-defined problems on an embedded platform.

Develop familiarity with tools used to develop an embedded environment

Learn to use the Arduino Uno (an open source microcontroller board) in simple

applications.

In the laboratory, students will program 8051 microcontroller and Arduino to perform

various experiments.

Unit 1

Embedded system introduction: Introduction to embedded systems and general-purpose

computer systems, architecture of embedded system, classifications, applications and purpose

of embedded systems, challenges and design issues in embedded system, operational & non-

operational quality attributes of embedded system, elemental description of embedded

processors and microcontrollers.

(6 Lectures)

Review of microprocessors: Organization of Microprocessor based system, 8085μp pin

diagram and architecture, Data bus and address bus, 8085 programming model, instruction

classification, subroutines, stacks and its implementation, delay subroutines, hardware and

software interrupts.

(4 Lectures)

102

Unit 2

8051 microcontroller: Introduction and block diagram of 8051 microcontroller, architecture

of 8051, overview of 8051 family, 8051 assembly language programming, Program Counter

and ROM memory map, Data types and directives, Flag bits and Program Status Word

(PSW) register, Jump, loop and call instructions.

(12 Lectures)

8051 I/O port programming: Introduction of I/O port programming, pin out diagram of

8051 microcontroller, I/O port pins description & their functions, I/O port programming in

8051 (using Assembly Language), I/O programming: Bit manipulation.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 3

Programming of 8051: 8051 addressing modes and accessing memory using various

addressing modes, assembly language instructions using each addressing mode, arithmetic

and logic instructions, 8051 programming: for time delay and I/O operations and

manipulation, for arithmetic and logic operations, for ASCII and BCD conversions.

(12 Lectures)

Timer and counter programming: Programming 8051 timers, counter programming.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 4

Serial port programming with and without interrupt: Introduction to 8051 interrupts,

programming timer interrupts, programming external hardware interrupts and serial

communication interrupt, interrupt priority in the 8051.

(6 Lectures)

Interfacing 8051 microcontroller to peripherals: Parallel and serial ADC, DAC

interfacing, LCD interfacing.

(2 Lectures)

Unit 5

Programming Embedded Systems: Structure of embedded program, infinite loop,

compiling, linking and locating, downloading and debugging.

(3 Lectures)

Embedded system design and development: Embedded system development environment,

file types generated after cross compilation, disassembler/decompiler, simulator, emulator

and debugging, embedded product development lifecycle, trends in embedded industry.

(8 Lectures)

103


PRACTICALS- DSE-2A LAB: Embedded System: Introduction to

Microcontroller

Sessions on the use of specific equipment and experimental apparatuses used in the physics




Following experiments (At least 06 using 8051):

1. To find that the given numbers is prime or not.

2. To find the factorial of a number.

3. Write a program to make the two numbers equal by increasing the smallest number and

decreasing the largest number.

4. Use one of the four ports of 8051 for O/P interfaced to eight LED’s. Simulate binary

counter (8 bit) on LED’s.

5. Program to glow first four LED then next four using TIMER application.

6. Program to rotate the contents of the accumulator first right and then left.

7. Program to run a countdown from 9-0 in the seven segment LED display.

8. To interface seven segment LED display with 8051 microcontrollers and display ‘HELP’

in the seven segment LED display.

9. To toggle ‘1234’ as ‘1324’ in the seven segment LED.

10. Interface stepper motor with 8051 and write a program to move the motor through a

given angle in clock wise or counter clockwise direction.

11. Application of embedded systems: Temperature measurement, some information on

LCD display, interfacing a keyboard.


Essential Readings

Embedded Systems: Architecture, Programming & Design, Raj Kamal, 2008, Tata

McGraw Hill.

The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems Using Assembly and C, M.A.Mazidi,

J.G. Mazidi and R.D. McKinlay, 2nd Edition, 2007, Pearson Education.

Embedded Systems and Robots, Subrata Ghoshal, 2009, Cengage Learning.

Introduction to embedded system, K.V. Shibu, 1st Edition, 2009, McGraw Hill.

Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, Krishna Kant, 2nd Edition, 2016. PHI learning

Pvt. Ltd.

104


Embedded System, B.K. Rao, 2011, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

Embedded Microcomputer systems: Real time interfacing, J. W. Valvano 2011, Cengage

Learning.

DSE-2A: Nuclear and Particle Physics (42227639)

Credit: 06 (Theory-05, Tutorial-01)

Theory: 75 Hours

Tutorial: 15 Hours

Course Objective

The objective of the course is to impart the understanding of the sub atomic particles and

their properties. It will emphasize to gain knowledge about the different nuclear techniques

and their applications in different branches Physics and societal application. The course will

focus on the developments of problem based skills.


To be able to understand the basic properties of nuclei as well as knowledge of

experimental determination of the same, the concept of binding energy, its various

dependent parameters, N-Z curves and their significance

To appreciate the formulations and contrasts between different nuclear models such as

Liquid drop model, Fermi gas model and Shell Model and evidences in support.

Knowledge of radioactivity and decay laws. A detailed analysis, comparison and energy

kinematics of alpha, beta and gamma decays.

Familiarization with different types of nuclear reactions, Q- values, compound and direct

reactions.

To know about energy losses due to ionizing radiations, energy losses of electrons,

gamma ray interactions through matter and neutron interaction with matter. Through the

section on accelerators students will acquire knowledge about Accelerator facilities in

105

India along with a comparative study of a range of detectors and accelerators which are

building blocks of modern day science.

It will acquaint students with the nature and magnitude of different forces, particle

interactions, families of sub- atomic particles with the different conservation laws,

concept of quark model.

The acquired knowledge can be applied in the areas of nuclear medicine, medical

physics, archaeology, geology and other interdisciplinary fields of Physics and

Chemistry. It will enhance the special skills required for these fields.

Unit 1

General Properties of Nuclei: Constituents of nucleus and their Intrinsic properties,

quantitative facts about mass, radii, charge density, matter density (experimental

determination of each), binding energy, average binding energy and its variation with mass

number, main features of binding energy versus mass number curve, N/Z plot, angular

momentum, parity, magnetic moment, electric moments.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 2

Nuclear Models: Liquid drop model approach, semi empirical mass formula and

significance of its various terms, condition of nuclear stability, nucleon separation energies

(up to two nucleons), Fermi gas model (degenerate fermion gas, nuclear symmetry potential

in Fermi gas), evidence for nuclear shell structure and the basic assumptions of shell model.

(11 Lectures)

Unit 3

Radioactivity decay: Decay rate and equilibrium (Secular and Transient) (a) Alpha decay:

basics of α-decay processes, theory of α-emission, Gamow factor, Geiger Nuttall law, α-

decay spectroscopy, decay Chains. (b) β- decay: energy kinematics for β-decay, β-spectrum,

positron emission, electron capture, neutrino hypothesis. (c) Gamma decay: Gamma rays

emission from the excited state of the nucleus & kinematics, internal conversion.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Nuclear Reactions: Types of Reactions, units of related physical quantities, Conservation

Laws, kinematics of reactions, Q-value, reaction rate, reaction cross section, Concept of

compound and direct reaction, resonance reaction, Coulomb scattering (Rutherford

scattering).

(8 Lectures)

Unit 5

Interaction of Nuclear Radiation with matter: Energy loss due to ionization (Bethe-Block

formula), energy loss of electrons, Cerenkov radiation. Gamma ray interaction through

matter (photoelectric effect, Compton scattering, pair production), neutron interaction with

matter.

(9 Lectures)

106

Detector for Nuclear Radiations: Gas detectors: estimation of electric field, mobility of

particle for ionization chamber and GM Counter. Basic principle of Scintillation Detectors

and construction of photo-multiplier tube (PMT). Semiconductor Detectors (Si and Ge) for

charge particle and photon detection (concept of charge carrier and mobility), neutron

detector.

(9 Lectures)

Particle Accelerators: Accelerator facility available in India: Van-de Graaff generator

(Tandem accelerator), Linear accelerator, Cyclotron, Synchrotrons (Principal, construction,

working, advantages and disadvantages).

(7 Lectures)

Unit 6

Particle physics: Particle interactions (concept of different types of forces), basic features,

Cosmic Rays, types of particles and its families, Conservation Laws (energy and momentum,

angular momentum, parity, baryon number, Lepton number, Isospin, Strangeness) concept of

quark model, color quantum number and gluons.

(11 Lectures)


Essential Readings

Basic ideas and concepts in Nuclear Physics: An introductory approach by K Heyde,


Nuclear Physics by S N Ghoshal, First edition, S. Chand Publication, 2010.

Introductory Nuclear Physics by K S Krane, Wiley-India Publication, 2008.

Radiation detection and measurement, G F Knoll, John Wiley & Sons, 2010.

Introduction to elementary particles by D J Griffiths, Wiley, 2008.

Additional Readings

Concepts of Nuclear Physics by B L Cohen, Tata McGraw Hill Publication, 1974.

Physics and Engineering of Radiation Detection by S N Ahmed, Academic Press

Elsevier, 2007.

Techniques for Nuclear and Particle Physics experiments by WR Leo, Springer, 1994.

Modern Physics by R A Serway, C J Moses and C A Moyer, 3rd edition, Thomson

Brooks Cole, 2012.

Modern Physics for Scientists and Engineers by S T Thornton and A Rex, 4th edition,

Cengage Learning, 2013

Concepts of Modern Physics by Arthur Beiser, McGraw Hill Education, 2009.

Nuclear Physics: principles and applications by J Lilley, Wiley Publication, 2006.

References for Tutorial

1. Schaum's Outline of Modern Physics, McGraw-Hill, 1999.

107

2. Schaum's Outline of College Physics, by E. Hecht, 11th edition, McGraw Hill, 2009.

3. Modern Physics by K Sivaprasath and R Murugeshan, S Chand Publication, 2010.

4. Nuclear Physics "Problem-based Approach" Including MATLAB by Hari M. Aggarwal,

PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. (2016).

DSE-2A: Quantum Mechanics (42227640)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

After learning the elements of modern physics, in this course students would be exposed to

more advanced concepts in quantum physics and their applications to problems of the sub

atomic world.


The Students will be able to learn the following from this course:

Methods to solve time-dependent and time-independent Schrodinger equation.

Quantum mechanics of simple harmonic oscillator.

Non-relativistic hydrogen atom: spectrum and Eigen functions.

Angular momentum: Orbital angular momentum and spin angular momentum.

Bosons and fermions - symmetric and anti-symmetric wave functions.

Application to atomic systems

In the laboratory course, with the exposure in computational programming in the

computer lab, the student will be in a position to solve Schrodinger equation for ground

state energy and wave functions of various simple quantum mechanical one-

dimensional and three dimensional potentials.

Unit 1

Time dependent Schrodinger equation: Time dependent Schrodinger equation and

dynamical evolution of a quantum state; Properties of Wave Function. Interpretation of Wave

https://www.google.co.in/search?hl=en&tbm=bks&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%252522Kiruthiga+Sivaprasath%252522&sa=X&ved=0ahUKEwiJpvfvlpPjAhXUdn0KHd59BJMQ9AgILzAA

108

Function Probability and probability current densities in three dimensions; Conditions for

Physical Acceptability of Wave Functions. Normalization. Linearity and Superposition

Principles. Eigenvalues and eigen functions. Position, momentum & Energy operators;

commutator of position and momentum operators; Expectation values of position &

momentum. Wave Function of a Free Particle.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 2

Time independent Schrodinger equation: Hamiltonian, stationary states and energy

eigenvalues; expansion of an arbitrary wave function as a linear combination of energy eigen

functions; General solution of the time dependent Schrodinger equation in terms of linear

combinations of stationary states; Application to the spread of Gaussian wave packet for a

free particle in one dimension; wave packets, Fourier transforms and momentum space wave

function; Position-momentum uncertainty principle.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 3

General discussion of bound states in an arbitrary potential: Continuity of a wave

function, boundary condition and emergence of discrete energy levels; application to one-

dimensional problem- square well potential; Quantum mechanics of simple harmonic

oscillator-energy levels and energy eigen functions using Frobenius method.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Quantum theory of hydrogen-like atoms: time independent Schrodinger equation in

spherical polar coordinates; separation of variables for the second order partial differential

equation; angular momentum operator and quantum numbers; Radial wave functions from

Frobenius method; Orbital angular momentum quantum numbers l and m; s, p, d, shells

(basic ideas only).

(10 Lectures)

Unit 5

Atoms in Electric and Magnetic Fields: Electron Angular Momentum. Angular momentum

Quantization. Electron Spin and Spin Angular Momentum. Larmor’s Theorem. Spin

Magnetic Moment. Stern-Gerlach Experiment. Normal Zeeman Effect: Electron Magnetic

Moment and Magnetic Energy.

(8 Lectures)

Unit 6

Many-electron atoms: Pauli’s Exclusion Principle. Symmetric and Anti-symmetric Wave

Functions. Spin orbit coupling. Spectral Notations for Atomic States. Total Angular

Momentum. Spin-orbit coupling in atoms: L-S and J-J couplings.

(10 Lectures)

109


PRACTICALS- DSE-2A LAB: Quantum Mechanics

Use C/C ++ /Scilab for solving the following problems based on Quantum Mechanics like:

1. Solve the s-wave Schrodinger equation for the ground state and the first excited state of the

hydrogen atom:

where m is the reduced mass of the electron. Obtain the energy eigenvalues and plot the

corresponding wavefunctions. Remember that the ground state energy of the hydrogen

atom is ≈ -13.6 eV. Take e = 3.795 (eVÅ)1/2, ħc = 1973 (eVÅ) and m = 0.511x106 eV/c2.

2. Solve the s-wave radial Schrodinger equation for an atom:

where m is the reduced mass of the system (which can be chosen to be the mass of an

electron), for the screened coulomb potential

Find the energy (in eV) of the ground state of the atom to an accuracy of three significant

digits. Also, plot the corresponding wave function. Take e = 3.795 (eVÅ)1/2, m =

0.511x106 eV/c2, and a = 3 Å, 5 Å, 7 Å. In these units ħc = 1973 (eVÅ). The ground state

energy is expected to be above -12 eV in all three cases.

3. Solve the s-wave radial Schrodinger equation for a particle of mass m:

For the an harmonic oscillator potential

for the ground state energy (in MeV) of particle to an accuracy of three significant digits.

Also, plot the corresponding wave function. Choose m = 940 MeV/c2, k = 100 MeV fm-2,

b = 0, 10, 30 MeV fm-3. In these units, cħ = 197.3 MeV fm. The ground state energy is

expected to lie between 90 and 110 MeV for all three cases.

4. Solve the s-wave radial Schrodinger equation for the vibrations of hydrogen molecule:

Where µ is the reduced mass of the two-atom system for the Morse potential

Find the lowest vibrational energy (in MeV) of the molecule to an accuracy of three

significant digits. Also plot the corresponding wave function.

Take: m = 940x106 eV/c2, D = 0.755501 eV, α = 1.44, r0 = 0.131349 Å

110

Laboratory based experiments (Optional):

5. Study of Electron spin resonance- determine magnetic field as a function of the resonance

frequency.

6. Study of Zeeman effect: with external magnetic field; Hyperfine splitting.

7. Quantum efficiency of CCDs.


Essential Readings

1. Quantum Mechanics, B. H. Bransden and C. J. Joachain; 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2000.

2. A Text book of Quantum Mechanics, P.M. Mathews and K. Venkatesan, 2nd Ed.,2010,

McGraw Hill.

3. Quantum Mechanics for Scientists & Engineers, D.A.B. Miller, 2008, Cambridge

University Press.

4. Quantum Mechanics: Theory and Applications, (2019), (Extensively revised 6th Edition),

Ajoy Ghatak and S. Lokanathan, Laxmi Publications, New Delhi.

5. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, D.J. Griffith, 2nd Ed. 2005, Pearson Education.

Additional Readings

1. Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, R. H. Dicke and J. P. Wittke, Addison-Wesley

Publications, 1966.

2. Quantum Mechanics, Leonard I. Schiff, 3rd Edn. 2010, Tata McGraw Hill.

3. Quantum Mechanics, Robert Eisberg and Robert Resnick, 2ndEdn., 2002, Wiley.

4. Quantum Mechanics, Bruce Cameron Reed, 2008, Jones and Bartlett Learning.

5. Quantum Mechanics, Walter Greiner, 4th Edn., 2001, Springer.

6. Introductory Quantum Mechanics, R. L. Liboff; 4th Ed., Addison Wesley, 2003.

7. Quantum Mechanics: Concepts and Applications, 2nd Edition,Nouredine Zettili, A John

Wiley and Sons, Ltd., Publication


1. Schaum's Outline of Programming with C++. J.Hubbard, 2000, McGraw‐ Hill Pub.

2. Numerical Recipes in C: The Art of Scientific Computing, W.H. Press et.al., 3rd Edn.,

2007, Cambridge University Press.

3. A Guide to MATLAB, B.R. Hunt, R.L. Lipsman, J.M. Rosenberg, 2014, 3rd Edn.,

Cambridge University Press

4. Elementary Numerical Analysis, K.E. Atkinson, 3rd E d . 2 0 0 7 ,Wiley India Edition.

5. Simulation of ODE/PDE Models with MATLAB®, OCTAVE and SCILAB: Scientific

& Engineering Applications: A.V. Wouwer, P. Saucez, C.V. Fernández.2014 Springer.

111

DSE-2A: Digital Signal processing (42227641)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

The prime goal of this paper is to develop a thorough understanding of the central elements

of discrete time signal processing theory and correlate this theory with the real-world signal

processing applications.



Learn basic discrete-time signal and system types, convolution sum, impulse and

frequency response concepts for linear time-invariant (LTI) systems.

Understand use of different transforms and analyze the discrete time signals and

systems.

Realize the use of LTI filters for filtering different real world signals. The concept of

transfer

Learn to solve Difference Equations.

Develop an ability to analyze DSP systems like linear-phase, FIR, IIR, All-pass,

averaging and notch Filter etc.

Understand the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) and realize its implementation using

FFT techniques.

Design and understand different types of digital filters such as finite & infinite impulse

response filters for various applications.

In the Lab course, the students will realize various concepts using Scilab simulations like

Digital Filters and their classifications based on the response, design and algorithm,

Fluency in using Fast Fourier Transform, Signal generation, realization of systems and

finding their transfer function, characterization using pole-zero plots and designing

digital filters.

Unit 1

Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: Classification of Signals, Transformations of the

Independent Variable, Periodic and Aperiodic Signals, Energy and Power Signals, Even and

Odd Signals, Discrete-Time Systems, System Properties. Impulse Response, Convolution

Sum; Graphical Method; Analytical Method, Properties of Convolution; Commutative;

Associative; Distributive; Shift; Sum Property System Response to Periodic Inputs,

Relationship Between LTI System Properties and the Impulse Response; Causality; Stability;

Invertibility, Unit Step Response.

(10 Lectures)

112

Unit 2

Discrete-Time Fourier Transform: Fourier Transform Representation of Aperiodic

Discrete-Time Signals, Periodicity of DTFT, Properties; Linearity; Time Shifting; Frequency

Shifting; Differencing in Time Domain; Differentiation in Frequency Domain; Convolution

Property. The z-Transform: Bilateral (Two-Sided) z-Transform, Inverse z- Transform,

Relationship Between z-Transform and Discrete-Time Fourier Transform, z-plane, Region-

of- Convergence; Properties of ROC, Properties; Time Reversal; Differentiation in the z-

Domain; Power Series Expansion Method (or Long Division Method); Analysis and

Characterization of LTI Systems; Transfer Function and Difference-Equation System.

Solving Difference Equations.

(15 Lectures)

Unit 3

Filter Concepts: Phase Delay and Group delay, Zero-Phase Filter, Linear-Phase Filter,

Simple FIR Digital Filters, Simple IIR Digital Filters, All pass Filters, Averaging Filters,

Notch Filters.

(5 Lectures)

Discrete Fourier Transform: Frequency Domain Sampling (Sampling of DTFT), The

Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and its Inverse, DFT as a Linear transformation,

Properties; Periodicity; Linearity; Circular Time Shifting; Circular Frequency Shifting;

Circular Time Reversal; Multiplication Property; Parseval’s Relation, Linear Convolution

Using the DFT (Linear Convolution Using Circular Convolution), Circular Convolution as

Linear Convolution with aliasing.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Fast Fourier Transform: Direct Computation of the DFT, Symmetry and Periodicity

Properties of the Twiddle factor (WN), Radix-2 FFT Algorithms; Decimation-In-Time (DIT)

FFT Algorithm; Decimation-In-Frequency (DIF) FFT Algorithm, Inverse DFT Using FFT

Algorithms.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 5

Realization of Digital Filters: Non-Recursive and Recursive Structures, Canonic and Non

Canonic Structures, Equivalent Structures (Transposed Structure), FIR Filter structures;

Direct-Form; Cascade-Form; Basic structures for IIR systems; Direct-Form I.

Finite Impulse Response Digital Filter: Advantages and Disadvantages of Digital Filters,

Types of Digital Filters: FIR and IIR Filters; Difference Between FIR and IIR Filters,

Desirability of Linear-Phase Filters, Frequency Response of Linear-Phase FIR Filters,

Impulse Responses of Ideal Filters, Windowing Method; Rectangular; Triangular; Kaiser

Window, FIR Digital Differentiators.

Infinite Impulse Response Digital Filter: Design of IIR Filters from Analog Filters, IIR

Filter Design by Approximation of Derivatives, Backward Difference Algorithm, Impulse

Invariance Method.

(15 Lectures)

113


PRACTICAL-DSE-2A LAB: Digital Signal Processing

At least 06 experiments from the following using Scilab/Matlab.

Introduction to Numerical computation software Scilab/Matlab be introduced in the lab.

1. Write a program to generate and plot the following sequences: (a) Unit sample sequence

, (b) unit step sequence , (c) ramp sequence , (d) real valued exponential

sequence for

2. Write a program to compute the convolution sum of a rectangle signal (or gate function)

with itself for N = 5

3. An LTI system is specified by the difference equation

(a) Determine

(b) Calculate and plot the steady state response to

4. Given a casual system

(a) Find and sketch its pole-zero plot

(b) Plot the frequency response and

5. Design a digital filter to eliminate the lower frequency sinusoid of

The sampling frequency is Plot its pole zero diagram,

magnitude response, input and output of the filter.

6. Let be a 4-point sequence:

Compute the DTFT and plot its magnitude

(a) Compute and plot the 4 point DFT of

(b) Compute and plot the 8 point DFT of (by appending 4 zeros)

(c) Compute and plot the 16 point DFT of (by appending 12 zeros

7. Let and be the two 4-point sequences,

Write a program to compute their linear convolution using circular

convolution.

8. Using a rectangular window, design a FIR low-pass filter with a pass-band gain of unity,

cut off frequency of 1000 Hz and working at a sampling frequency of 5 KHz. Take the

length of the impulse response as 17.

114

9. Design an FIR filter to meet the following specifications:

Passband edge

Stopband edge

Passband attenuation

Stopband attenuation

Sampling frequency

10. The frequency response of a linear phase digital differentiator is given by

Using a Hamming window of length M = 21, design a digital FIR differentiator. Plot

the amplitude response.


Essential Readings

1. Digital Signal Processing, Tarun Kumar Rawat, 2015, Oxford University Press, India

2. Digital Signal Processing, S. K. Mitra, McGraw Hill, India.

3. Principles of Signal Processing and Linear Systems, B.P. Lathi, 2009, 1st Edn. Oxford

University Press.

4. Fundamentals of signals and systems, P.D. Cha and J.I. Molinder, 2007, Cambridge

University Press.

5. Digital Signal Processing Principles Algorithm & Applications, J.G. Proakis and D.G.

Manolakis, 2007, 4th Edn., Prentice Hall.

Additional Readings

1. Digital Signal Processing, A. Anand Kumar, 2nd Edition, 2016, PHI learning Private

Limited.

2. Digital Signal Processing, Paulo S.R. Diniz, Eduardo A.B. da Silva, Sergio L .Netto, 2nd

Edition, 2017, Cambridge University Press.


1. A Guide to MATLAB, B.R. Hunt, R.L. Lipsman, J.M. Rosenberg, 2014, 3rd Edn.,


2. Fundamentals of Digital Signal processing using MATLAB, R.J. Schilling and S.L.

Harris, 2005, Cengage Learning.

3. Getting started with MATLAB, Rudra Pratap, 2010, Oxford University Press.

115

DSE-2A: Astronomy and Astrophysics (42227642)


Theory: 75 Hours

Tutorial: 15 Hours

Course Objective

This course is meant to introduce undergraduate students to the wonders of the Universe.

Students will understand how astronomers over millennia have come to understand mysteries

of the universe using laws of geometry and physics, and more recently chemistry and

biology. They will learn about diverse set of astronomical and astrophysical phenomenon,

from the daily and yearly motion of stars and planets in the night sky which they can observe

themselves, to the expansion of the universe deduced from the latest observations and

cosmological models. The course presupposes school level understanding of mathematics

and physics.


Students completing this course will gain an understanding of

Different types of telescopes, diurnal and yearly motion of astronomical objects, and

astronomical coordinate systems and their transformations.

Brightness scale for stars, types of stars, their structure and evolution on HR diagram.

Components of Solar System and its evolution

The large scale structure of the Universe and its history

Distribution of chemical compounds in the interstellar medium and astrophysical

conditions necessary for the emergence and existence of life.

Unit 1

Introduction to Astronomy and Astronomical Scales: Overview of the Night Sky, Diurnal

and Yearly motions of the Sun, Stars and Constellations. Size, Mass, Density and

Temperature of Astronomical objects, Basic concepts of Positional Astronomy: Celestial

Sphere, Geometry of a Sphere, Spherical Triangle, Astronomical Coordinate Systems,

Horizon System, Equatorial System, Conversion of Coordinates. Rising and Setting Times,

Measurement of Time, Sidereal Time, Apparent Solar Time, Mean Solar Time, Equation of

Time, Astronomical Time Systems (LMT, UT, UTC).

(16 Lectures)

Unit 2

Basic Parameters of Stars: Determination of Distance by Parallax Method, Proper Motion,

Brightness, Radiant Flux and Luminosity, Apparent and Absolute magnitude scale, Distance

Modulus; Extinction, Determination of Temperature and Radius of a star; Stellar Spectra,

Atomic Spectra Revisited, Spectral Types and their Temperature Dependence, Black Body

116

Approximation, Luminosity Classification, H R Diagram, and Relations between Stellar

Parameters.

(15 Lectures)

Unit 3

Observational Tools and Physical Principles : Observing through the Atmosphere

(Scintillation, Seeing, Atmospheric Windows and Extinction) Basic Optical Definitions for

Telescopes : Magnification, Light Gathering Power, Limiting magnitude, Resolving Power,

Diffraction Limit, Optical and Radio telescopes, Current Indian Observatories. Virial theorem

for N particle systems, applications in Astrophysics. Equations for Hydrostatic and Thermal

Equilibria, Mean Molecular Weight of Stellar Gas, Stellar Energy Sources.

(15 Lectures)

Unit 4

Sun, the Milky Way and Astrochemistry: Solar Parameters, Sun’s Internal Structure, Solar

Photosphere, Solar Atmosphere, Chromosphere. Corona, Solar Activity. Basic Structure and

Properties of the Milky Way, Nature of rotation of the Milky Way (Differential rotation of the

Galaxy and Oort Constants, Rotation Curve of the Galaxy and the Dark Matter, Nature of the

Spiral Arms), Properties of and around the Galactic Nucleus. Molecular Spectroscopy,

Interstellar molecules, Organic compounds in Interstellar Medium and Solar system.

(15 Lectures)

Unit 5

Cosmology and Astrobiology: Cosmology: Standard Candles (Cepheids and SNe Type1a),

Cosmic Distance Ladder. Olbers Paradox, Hubble Expansion, Cosmological Principle,

Newtonian Cosmology and Friedmann Models. Chemistry of Life, Origin of Life, Chances of

Life in the Solar System, Exoplanets.

(14 Lectures)


Essential Readings

1. Fundamental of Astronomy (Fourth Edition), H. Karttunen et al. Springer

2. Astrophysics Stars and Galaxies K D Abhyankar, Universities Press

3. ModernAstrophysics, B.W. Carroll & D.A. Ostlie, Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.

4. Introductory Astronomy and Astrophysics, M. Zeilik and S.A. Gregory, 4th

Edition, Saunders College Publishing.

5. The Molecular Universe, A.G.G.M. Tielens (Sections I, II and III), Reviews of Modern

Physics, Vol 85, July September, 2013

117

Additional Readings

1. Explorations: Introduction to Astronomy, Thomos Arny and Stephen Schneider, 2014,

7th edition, McGraw Hill

2.. Textbook of Astronomy and Astrophysics with elements of cosmology, V.B. Bhatia,

Narosa Publication.

3. Baidyanath Basu, An introduction to Astrophysics, Second printing, Prentice -

Hall of India Private limited, New Delhi,2001.

4. The Physical Universe: An Introduction to Astronomy, F H Shu, University Science

Books

DSE-2A: Atmospheric Physics (42227643)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

This paper aims to describe the characteristics of the Earth’s atmospheric thermal structure

and chemical composition. It enables to learn remote sensing techniques to explore

atmospheric processes and helps to understand long term oscillations and fluid system

dynamics which control climate change. Also, it delineates characteristics of pollutants and

aerosols variability in the lower and middle atmosphere.



Learn and understand structure of temperature profiles and fine scale features in the

troposphere using observations.

Understand Atmospheric waves: surface water waves, atmospheric gravity waves,

acoustic waves etc.

Learn remote sensing techniques such as radar, LIDAR, and satellite to explore

atmospheric processes.

Understand properties of aerosols, their radiative and health effects.

118

Unit 1

General features of Earth’s atmosphere: Thermal structure of the Earth’s Atmosphere,

Composition of atmosphere, Hydrostatic equation, Potential temperature, Atmospheric

Thermodynamics, Greenhouse effect, Local winds, monsoons, fogs, clouds, precipitation,

Atmospheric boundary layer, Sea breeze and land breeze. Instruments for meteorological

observations including RS/RW, meteorological processes and convective systems, fronts,

Cyclones and anticyclones, thunderstorms.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 2

Atmospheric Dynamics: Scale analysis, Fundamental forces, Basic conservation laws, The

Vectorial form of the momentum equation in rotating coordinate system, scale analysis of

equation of motion, Applications of the basic equations, Circulations and vorticity,

Atmospheric oscillations, Quasi biennial oscillation, annual and semi-annual oscillations,

Mesoscale circulations, The general circulations, Tropical dynamics.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 3

Atmospheric Waves: Surface water waves, wave dispersion, acoustic waves, buoyancy

waves, propagation of atmospheric gravity waves (AGWs) in a nonhomogeneous medium,

Lamb wave, Rossby waves and its propagation in three dimensions and in sheared flow,

wave absorption, non-linear consideration.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 4

Atmospheric Radar and Lidar: Radar equation and return signal, Signal processing and

detection, Various type of atmospheric radars, Applications of radars to study atmospheric

phenomena, Lidar and its applications, Application of Lidar to study atmospheric

phenomenon. Data analysis tools and techniques.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 5

Atmospheric Aerosols: Spectral distribution of the solar radiation, Classification and

properties of aerosols, Production and removal mechanisms, Concentrations and size

distribution, Radiative and health effects, Observational techniques for aerosol Absorption

and scattering of solar radiation, Rayleigh scattering and Mie scattering, Bouguert-Lambert

law, Principles of radiometry, Optical phenomena in atmosphere, Aerosol studies using

Lidars.

(12 Lectures)

119


PRACTICALS- DSE-2A LAB: Atmospheric Physics

Scilab/C++ / Fortran/ Matlab based simulations experiments based on Atmospheric Physics

problems like (at least 05 experiments)

1. Numerical Simulation for atmospheric waves using dispersion relations

(a) Atmospheric gravity waves (AGW)

(b) Kelvin waves

(c) Rossby waves and mountain waves

2. Offline and online processing of radar data

(a) VHF radar,

(b) X-band radar, and

(c) UHF radar

3. Offline and online processing of LIDAR data

4. Radiosonde data and its interpretation in terms of atmospheric parameters using vertical

profiles in different regions of the globe.

5. Handling of satellite data and plotting of atmospheric parameters using different

techniques such as radio occultation technique

6. Time series analysis of temperature using long term data over metropolitan cities in India

-an approach to understand the climate change

7. PM 2.5 measurement using compact instruments

8. Field visits to National center for medium range weather forecasting, India meteorological

departments, and ARIES Nainital to see onsite radiosonde balloon launch, simulation on

computers and radar operations on real time basis.


Essential Readings

1. Fundamental of Atmospheric Physics, M.L Salby; Academic Press, Vol 61, 1996.

2. The Physics of Atmosphere – John T. Houghton; Cambridge University press; 3rd Edn.

2002.

3. An Introduction to dynamic meteorology – James R Holton; Academic Press, 2004.

4. Radar for meteorological and atmospheric observations – S Fukao and K Hamazu,

Springer Japan, 2014

120

DSE-2A: Physics of the Earth (42227644)


Theory: 75 Hours

Tutorial: 15 Hours

Course Objective

This course familiarizes the students with the origin of universe and role of earth in the solar

system.


At the end of this course student will be able to

• Have an overview of structure of the earth as well as various dynamical processes

occurring on it.

• Develop an understanding of evolution of the earth.

• Apply physical principles of elasticity and elastic wave propagation to understand

modern global seismology as a probe of the Earth's internal structure.

• Understand the origin of magnetic field, Geodynamics of earthquakes and the

description of seismic sources; a simple but fundamental theory of thermal convection;

the distinctive rheological behavior of the upper mantle and its top.

• Explore various roles played by water cycle, carbon cycle, nitrogen cycles in

maintaining steady state of earth leading to better understanding of the contemporary

dilemmas (climate change, bio diversity loss, population growth, etc.) disturbing the

Earth

• In the tutorial section, through literature survey on the various aspects of health of Earth,

project work / seminar presentation, the students will be able to appreciate need to ‘save’

Earth.

Unit 1

The Earth and the Universe: (a) Origin of universe, creation of elements and earth. A Holistic understanding of our

dynamic planet through Astronomy, Geology, Meteorology and Oceanography. Introduction

to various branches of Earth Sciences.

(b) General characteristics and origin of the Universe. The Big Bang Theory. Age of the

universe and Hubble constant. Formation of Galaxies. The Milky Way galaxy, Nebular

Theory, solar system, Earth’s orbit and spin, the Moon’s orbit and spin. The terrestrial and

Jovian planets. Titius-Bode law. Asteroid belt. Asteroids: origin types and examples.

Meteoroids, Meteors and Meteorites. Earth in the Solar system, origin, size, shape, mass,

density, rotational and revolution parameters and its age.

(c) Energy and particle fluxes incident on the Earth. (d) The Cosmic Microwave Background.

(17 Lectures)

121

Unit 2

Structure: (a) The Solid Earth: Mass, dimensions, shape and topography, internal structure, magnetic

field, geothermal energy. How do we learn about Earth’s interior?

(b) The Hydrosphere: The oceans, their extent, depth, volume, chemical composition. River

systems.

(c) The Atmosphere: layers, variation of temperature with altitude, adiabatic lapse rate,

variation of density and pressure with altitude, cloud formation.

(d) The Cryosphere: Polar caps and ice sheets. Mountain glaciers, permafrost.

(18 Lectures)

Unit 3

Dynamical Processes: (a) The Solid Earth: Origin of the magnetic field. Source of geothermal energy. Convection

in Earth’s core and production of its magnetic field. Mechanical layering of the Earth.

Introduction to geophysical methods of earth investigations. Concept of plate tectonics, types

of plate movements, hotspots, seafloor spreading and continental drift. Geodynamic elements

of Earth: Mid Oceanic Ridges, trenches, transform faults and island arcs. Origin of oceans,

continents, mountains and rift valleys. Earthquake and earthquake belt, Seismic waves,

Richter scale, geophones. Volcanoes: types products and distribution.

(b) The Hydrosphere: Ocean circulations. Oceanic current system and effect of Coriolis

forces. Concepts of eustasy, tend – air-sea interaction. Tides. Tsunamis.

(c) The Atmosphere: Atmospheric circulation. Weather and climatic changes. Earth’s heat

budget. Cyclones and anti-cyclones.

Climate: i. ii. iii. Earth’s temperature and greenhouse effect. Paleoclimate and recent climate

changes. The Indian monsoon system.

(d) Biosphere: Water cycle, Carbon cycle. The role of cycles in maintaining a steady state.

(18 Lectures)

Unit 4

Evolution:

Stratigraphy: Introduction and types, Standard stratigraphic time scale and introduction to

the concept of time in geological studies. Timeline of major geological and biological events.

Introduction to geochronological methods and their application in geological studies.

Radiometric dating: Advantages & disadvantages of various isotopes. History of

development of concepts of Uniformitarianism, Catastrophism and Neptunism. Various laws

of stratigraphy. Introduction to the geology and geomorphology of Indian subcontinent.

Origin of life on Earth Role of the biosphere in shaping the environment. Future of evolution

of the Earth and solar system: Death of the Earth (Probable causes).

(18 Lectures)

Unit 5

Disturbing the Earth -Contemporary dilemmas

(a) Human population growth.

(b) Atmosphere: Greenhouse gas emissions, climate change, air pollution. (c) Hydrosphere:

Fresh water depletion.

122

(d) Geosphere: Chemical effluents, nuclear waste.

(e) Biosphere: Biodiversity loss. Deforestation. Robustness and fragility of ecosystems.

(4 Lectures)


Essential Reading

1. Planetary Surface Processes, H. Jay Melosh, 2011, Cambridge University Press.

2. Consider a Spherical Cow: A course in environmental problem solving, John Harte,

University Science Books.

3. Holme’s Principles of Physical Geology, 1992, Chapman & Hall.

4. Planet Earth, Cosmology, Geology and the Evolution of Lifeand Environment, C.

Emiliani, 1992, Cambridge University Press.

5. The Blue Planet:An Introduction to Earth System Science, Brian J. Skinner, Stephen C.

Portere, 1994, John Wiley & Sons.

Additional Readings

1. Physics of the Earth, Frank D. Stacey, Paul M. Davis, 2008, Cambridge University Press.

2. Fundamentals of Geophysics, William Lowrie, 1997, Cambridge University Press.

3. The Solid Earth: An Introduction to Global Geophysics, C. M. R. Fowler, 1990,


4. The Earth: A Very Short Introduction, Martin Redfern, 2003, Oxford University Press.

5. Galaxies: A Very Short Introduction, John Gribbin, 2008, Oxford University Press.

6. Climate Change: A Very Short Introduction, Mark Maslin, 3rd Edition, 2014, Oxford

University Press.

7. The Atmosphere: A Very Short Introduction, Paul I. Palmer, 2017, Oxford University

Press.

123

DSE-2A: Biological Physics (42227645)

Credit : 06 (Theory-05, Tutorial-01)

Theory : 75 Hours

Tutorial : 15 Hours

Course Objective

This course familiarizes the students with the basic facts and ideas of biology from a

quantitative perspective. It shows them how ideas and methods of physics enrich our

understanding of biological systems at diverse length and time scales. The course also

gives them a flavour of the interface between biology, chemistry, physics and

mathematics.


After completing this course, students will

Know basic facts about biological systems, including single cells, multicellular

organisms and ecosystems from a quantitative perspective.

Gain familiarity with various biological processes at different length and time scales,

including molecular processes, organism level processes and evolution.

Be able to apply the principles of physics from areas such as mechanics, electricity and

magnetism, thermodynamics, statistical mechanics, and dynamical systems to

understand certain living processes.

Gain a systems level perspective on organisms and appreciate how networks of

interactions of many components give rise to complex behavior.

Perform mathematical and computational modelling of certain aspects of living systems.

Unit 1

Overview: The boundary, interior and exterior environment of living cells. Processes:

exchange of matter and energy with environment, metabolism, maintenance, reproduction,

evolution. Self-replication as a distinct property of biological systems. Time scales and

spatial scales. Allometric scaling laws.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 2

Molecules of life: Metabolites, proteins and nucleic acids. Their sizes, types and roles in

structures and processes. Transport, energy storage, membrane formation, catalysis,

replication, transcription, translation, signaling. Typical populations of molecules of various

types present in cells, their rates of production and turnover. Energy required to make a

bacterial cell. Simplified mathematical models of transcription and translation, small genetic

circuits and signaling pathways to be studied analytically and computationally.

(18 Lectures)

124

Unit 3

Molecular motion in cells:

Random walks and applications to biology: Diffusion; models of macromolecules.

Entropic forces: Osmotic pressure; polymer elasticity.

Chemical forces: Self-assembly of amphiphiles. Molecular motors: Transport along

microtubules. Flagellar motion: bacterial chemotaxis.

(22 Lectures)

Unit 4

The complexity of life:

At the level of a cell: The numbers of distinct metabolites, genes and proteins in a cell.

Metabolic, regulatory and signaling networks in cells. Dynamics of metabolic networks; the

stoichiometric matrix. The implausibility of life based on a simplified probability estimate,

and the origin of life problem.

At the level of a multicellular organism: Numbers and types of cells in multicellular

organisms. Cellular differentiation and development.

Brain structure : Neurons and neural networks. Brain as an information processing system.

At the level of an ecosystem and the biosphere: Food webs. Feedback cycles and self-

sustaining ecosystems.

(20 Lectures)

References

Essential Readings

1. Biological Physics: Energy, Information, Life; Philip Nelson (W H Freeman &Co, NY,

2004).

2. Physical Biology of the Cell (2nd Edition); Rob Phillips et al (Garland Science, Taylor &

Francis Group, London & NY, 2013).

3. An Introduction to Systems Biology; Uri Alon (Chapman and Hall/CRC, Special Indian

Edition, 2013).

4. Evolution; M. Ridley (Blackwell Publishers, 2009), 3rd edition.

125

DSE-2A: Dissertation

Credit: 08

Course Objective

Dissertation involves project work with the intention of exposing the student to research

/development. It involves open ended learning based on student ability and initiative,

exposure to scientific writing and inculcation of ethical practices in research and

communication.

Course Learning Outcomes Exposure to research methodology

Picking up skills relevant to dissertation project, such as experimental skills in the

subject, computational skills, etc.

Development of creative ability and intellectual initiative

Developing the ability for scientific writing

Becoming conversant with ethical practices in acknowledging other sources, avoiding

plagiarism, etc.

Guidelines for dissertation:

1. The dissertation work should not be a routine experiment or project at the under graduate

level. It should involve more than text book knowledge. Referring text books for

preparation and understanding concepts is allowed; however, one component of the

dissertation must include study of research papers or equivalent research material and/or

open ended project.

2. The total number of dissertations allowed should be limited to 5% of the total strength of

the students in the programme. However, students having national scholarships like

NTSE, KVPY, INSPIRE, etc. can be considered above this quota. The selection criterion

is at the discretion of the college. The student should not have any academic backlog

(Essential Repeat). The sole/single supervisor must have a Ph.D. degree. Not more than

two candidates would be enrolled under same supervisor.

3. At the time of submission of teaching work-load of the teachers by the college to the

Department (Department of Physics and Astrophysics, Delhi University), the supervisor

shall submit the proposal (200-300 words; not more than one full A4 page) of the

proposed dissertation. Along with that four names of the external examiners from any

college of Delhi University (other than the own college of the supervisor) or any

department of Delhi University can be suggested. The committee of courses of the

department may appoint any one teacher as an external examiner from the proposed list

of external examiners.

4. No topic would be repeated from the topics allotted by the supervisor in the previous

years, so that the work or dissertation could be distinct every time. The ‘proposal’ should

include the topic, plan of work, and clearly state the expected deliverables. The topic

must be well defined. The abstract should clearly explain the significance of the

suggested problem. It must emphasize the specific skills which the student shall be

learning during the course of dissertation, for example, some computational skill or

literature survey, etc. Both internal (supervisor) and external examiners will assess the

126

student at the end of the semester and award marks jointly, according to the attached

scheme.

5. Other than the time for pursuing dissertation work, there must be at least 2 hours of

interaction per week, of the student with the supervisor. The student has to maintain a

“Log Book” to summarize his/ her weekly progress which shall be duly signed by the

supervisor. Experimental work should be carried out in the parent college or any other

college or the Department in Delhi University with the consent of a faculty member

there. Unsupervised work carried out at research institutions / laboratories is to be

discouraged.

6. The dissertation report should be of around 30 pages. It must have minimum three

chapters namely (1) Introduction, (2) the main work including derivations /

experimentation and Results, and (3) Discussion and Conclusion. At the end, adequate

references must be included. Plagiarism should be avoided by the student and this should

be checked by the supervisor.

7. It is left to the discretion of the college if it can allow relaxation of two teaching periods

(at the most two periods per week to the supervisor, irrespective of the number of

students enrolled under him / her for dissertation). The evaluation/presentation of the

dissertation must be done within two weeks after the exams are over. For the interest of

the students it is advised that college may organize a workshop for creating awareness

amongst students. Any teacher who is not Ph.D. holder can be Co-supervisor with the

main supervisor.

Assessment of dissertation

MARKING SCHEME for Dissertation:

30 marks: Internal assessment based on performance like sincerity, regularity, etc.

Awarded by: Supervisor

40 marks: Written Report (including content and quality of work done). Awarded by:

Supervisor and External Examiner.

30 marks: Presentation*. Awarded by: Supervisor and External Examiner.

*All Dissertation presentations should be open. Other students / faculty should be

encouraged to attend.

127

ANNEXURE-1A

Steering Committee

LOCF (CBCS) Undergraduate Physics courses revision 2019

Department of Physics & Astrophysics, University of Delhi

1. Prof. Sanjay Jain – HoD (Chairman)

2. Prof. A. G. Vedeshwar – (Coordinator)

3. Prof. Vinay Gupta – (Convener)

4. Prof. Debajyoti Choudhury

5. Prof. P. Das Gupta

6. Prof. S. Annapoorni

7. Prof. H.P. Singh

8. Prof. T.R. Seshadri

9. Prof. Anjan Dutta

10. Prof. S.K. Mandal

11. Prof. Kirti Ranjan

12. Dr. G.S. Chilana (Department of Physics, Ramjas College)

13. Dr. Mallika Verma (Department of Physics, Miranda House)

14. Dr. Anuradha Gupta (Department of Physics, SGTB Khalsha College)

15. Dr. Sangeeta D. Gadre (Department of Physics, Kirori Mal College)

16. Dr. Jacob Cherian (Department of Physics, St. Stephens’ College)

17. Dr. Vandana Luthra (Department of Physics, Gargi College)

18. Dr. Mamta (Department of Physics, SGTB Khalsa College)

19. Dr. P.K. Jha (Department of Physics, Deen Dyal Upadhyaya College)

20. Dr. Sanjay Kumar (Department of Physics, St. Stephens’ College)

21. Dr. Abhinav Gupta (Department of Physics, St. Stephen's College)

22. Dr. Monika Tomar (Department of Physics, Miranda House)

23. Dr. Roshan Kshetrimayum (Department of Physics, Kirori Mal College)

24. Mr. Ashish Tyagi (Department of Physics, Swami Shraddhanand College)

25. Dr. Shalini Lumb Talwar (Department of Physics, Maitreyi College)

26. Dr. Shiva Upadhyay (Department of Physics, Swami Shraddhanand College)

27. Dr. Divya Haridas (Department of Physics, Keshav Mahavidyalaya)

28. Dr. Chetana Jain (Department of Physics, Hansraj College)

128

ANNEXURE 1B

Subject working groups



Group Papers

Name of faculty Role College

I

Waves and Optics (Hons.

core /GE)

Electricity and magnetism

(Hons. core/GE)

Electromagnetic theory

(Hons. core)

Electricity and magnetism

(Prog. core)

Waves and Optics (Prog.

core)

Electrical circuits and

Networks (SEC)

Applied Optics (SEC)

Introduction to Physical

Computing (SEC)

Prof. Kirti Ranjan Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Sangeeta D.

Gadre Convenor

Kirori Mal

College

Dr. Pragati Ishdhir

Member

Hindu College

Dr. K.C. Singh

Sri

Venkateswara

College

Dr. Pushpa Bindal Kalindi College

Dr. Geetanjali Sethi St. Stephen's

College

Dr. Pradeep Kumar Hansraj College

Dr. N. Chandrlika Gargi College

II

Elements of Modern

Physics (Hons. core/GE)

Quantum Mechanics and

applications (Hons. Core)

Elements of Modern

Physics (Prog. DSE)

Quantum Mechanics (Prog.

DSE/GE)

Advanced Quantum

Mechanics (Hons. DSE)

Prof. P. Das Gupta Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. P.K. Jha Convenor

Deen Dyal

Upadhyaya

college

Dr. N. Santakrus

Singh Hindu College

Dr. Punita Verma Kalindi College

129

Renewable energy and

Energy harvesting (SEC) Dr. Siddharth Lahon

Kirorimal

College

Dr. Onkar Mangla Daulat Ram

College

Dr. Sandhya Miranda House

Dr. Ajay Kumar Sri Aurobindo

College

III

Thermal Physics (Hons.

Core)

Statistical Mechanics

(Hons. Core)

Thermal Physics and


(Program core/GE)

Prof. S. Annapoorni Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Anuradha Gupta Convenor SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Deepak Jain

Member

Deen Dyal

Upadhyaya

college

Dr. Nimmi Singh SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Ashok Kumar Ramjas College

Dr. Aditya Saxena Deshbandhu

College

Dr. Maya Verma Hansraj College

IV

Solid State Physics (Hons.

Core)

Solid State Physics (Prog.

DSE/GE)

Nanomaterials and

Applications (DSE-Hons.+

Prog.)/GE

Prof. S. Annapoorni Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Divya Haridas Convenor Keshav

Mahavidyalaya

Dr. Mamta Bhatia

Member

AND College

Dr. Rajveer Singh ARSD College

Dr. Shiva Upadhyaya S.S.N. College

Dr. Harish K. Yadav St. Stephen's

College

Dr. Rashmi Menon Kalindi College

130

Dr. Yogesh Kumar Deshbandhu

College

V

Mathematical Physics-I

(Hons. Core)

Mathematical Physics-II

(Hons. Core)

Mathematical Physics -III

(Hons. Core)

Advanced Mathematical

Physics (Hons. DSE)

Mathematical Physics

(Program DSE/ Hons. GE)

Advanced Mathematical

Physics -II (Hons. DSE)

Computational Physics

Skills (SEC)

Numerical Analysis (SEC)

Linear Algebra & Tensor

Analysis (DSE)

Prof. T.R. Seshadri Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. G.S. Chilana Convenor Ramjas College

Dr. Abha Dev Habib

Member

Miranda House

Dr. Agam Kumar

Jha

Kirori Mal

College

Dr. Subhash Kumar AND College

Dr. Mamta SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Neetu Aggarwal Daulat Ram

College

Dr. Bhavna Vidhani Hansraj College

Dr. Ajay Mishra Dyal Singh

College

VI

Mechanics (Hons. Core/GE)

Mechanics (Prog. Core)

Applied Dynamics

(DSE/GE)

Classical Dynamics (DSE)

Physics Workshop Skills

(SEC)

Prof. A. G.

Vedeshwar

Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Ashish Tyagi Convenor SSN College

Dr. Shalini Lumb

Talwar

Member

Maitreyi College

Dr. Vandana Arora Keshav

Mahavidyalaya

Dr. Arvind Kumar Ramjas College

Dr. Chitra Vaid Bhagini Nivedita

College

Dr. Omwati Rana Daulat Ram

College

Dr. Sunita Singh Miranda House

131

Dr. Pranav Kumar Kirori Mal

College

Dr. Pooja Devi Shyam lal

College

VII

Nuclear and particle Physics

(Hons. DSE/GE)

Nuclear and particle physics

(Prog. DSE)

Radiation Safety (SEC)

Prof. Samit Mandal Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Vandana Luthra Convenor Gargi College

Dr. Namrata

Member

S.S.N. College

Dr. Supriti Das Gargi College

Dr. Punit Tyagi Ramjas College

VIII

Astronomy and

Astrophysics (DSE/GE)

Weather Forecasting (SEC)

Medical Physics (DSE/GE)

Atmospheric Physics

(DSE/GE)

Biological Physics

(DSE/GE)

Physics of Earth (DSE/GE)

Technical Drawing (SEC)

Dissertation

Prof. Anjan Datta Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Jacob Cherian Convenor St. Stephen's

College

Dr. S.K. Dhaka

Member

Rajdhani College

Dr. Sanjay Kumar St. Stephen's

College

Dr. Sushil Singh SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Chetna Jain Hansraj College

Dr. Ayushi Paliwal Deshbandhu

College

Dr. Rekha Gupta St. Stephen's

College

IX

Digital Systems and

Applications (Hons. Core)

Embedded Systems -

Introduction to

Microcontroller (DSE/GE)

Digital, Analog and

Instrumentation (Prog.

DSE/Hons. GE)

Verilog and FPA based

System design (DSE/GE)

Prof. Vinay Gupta Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Mallika Verma Convenor Miranda House

Dr. Shashi Bala

Member

Ramjas College

Dr. Arijit Chowdhuri AND College

132

Digital Signal Processing

(DSE/GE)

Linear and Digital

Integrated Circuits –E

Microprocessors and

Microcontrollers –E

Electronic Instrumentation -

E(DSE)

Basic Instrumentation Skills

(SEC)

Dissertation-E

Dr. Anjali Sharma ARSD College

Dr. Kajal Jindal Kirori Mal

College

Dr. Poonam Jain Sri Aurobindo

College

Dr. Savita Sharma Kalindi College

Dr. Alka Garg Gargi College

X

Analog systems and


Experimental techniques

(DSE)

Physics of Device and

Communication (DSE)

Communication System

(DSE/GE)

Network Analysis and

Analog Electronics-E

Communication Electronics

–E

Semiconductor Devices

Fabrication - E(DSE)

Photonic Devices and

Power Electronics -E (DSE)

Antenna theory and wireless

network -E (DSE)

Electrical circuit network

skills-Prog. SEC


Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Monika Tomar Convenor Miranda House

Dr. Sanjay Tandon

Member

Deen Dyal

Upadhyaya

college

Dr. Sangeeta

Sachdeva

St. Stephen's

College

Dr. Roshan Kirorimal

College

Dr. Kuldeep Kumar SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Reema Gupta Hindu College

133

XI

Practicals of all Courses


Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Sanjay Kumar Convenor St. Stephen's

College

Prof. P. D. Gupta

Member

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Prof. A.G.

Vedeshwar

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Prof. Samit Mandal

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. G.S. Chilana Ramjas College

Dr. Mallika Verma Miranda House

Dr. Anuradha Gupta SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Monika Tomar Miranda House

Dr. Sangeeta D.

Gadre

Kirori Mal

College


College

Dr. Vandana Luthra Gargi College

Dr. Roshan Kirori Mal

College

134

ANNEXURE 1C

Final drafting team



1. Prof. Sanjay Jain

2. Prof. A. G. Vedeshwar

3. Prof. Vinay Gupta

4. Dr. Sanjay Kumar – St. Stephens’ College

5. Dr. Sangeeta Gadre – Kirori Mal College

6. Dr. Punita Verma – Kalindi College

7. Dr. Rajveer Singh – ARSD College

8. Dr. Yogesh Kumar – Deshbandhu College

9. Mrs. Poonam Jain – Sri Aurobindo College

10. Dr. Ajay Kumar – Sri Aurobindo College

i

दिल्ली दिश् िदिद्यालय

UNIVERSITY OF DELHI

Bachelor of Science in Physical Sciences

Discipline: Electronics

(Effective from Academic Year 2019-20)

Revised Syllabus as approved by

Date: Academic Council No:

Date: Executive Council No:

Applicable for students enrolled in Regular Colleges.

ii

List of Contents Page

No.

Preamble 1

Learning Outcome-based Curriculum Framework for Undergraduate

Education in Physics

1. INTRODUCTION 3

2. LEARNING OUTCOME-BASED CURRICULUM FRAMEWORK

IN B.SC. PHYSICAL SCIENCES PROGRAMME HAVING

ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE

4

2.1 NATURE AND EXTENT OF THE PROGRAMME IN B.SC.

PHYSICAL SCIENCES WITH ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE

4

2.2 AIMS OF BACHELOR’S DEGREE PROGRAMME IN B.SC.


5

3. GRADUATE ATTRIBUTES IN B.SC. PHYSICAL SCIENCE WITH

ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE

5

4. QUALIFICATION DESCRIPTORS FOR GRADUATES IN B.SC.


7

5. PROGRAMME LEARNING OUTCOMES IN B.SC. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES WITH ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE (B.SC. (PEM))

8

6. TEACHING-LEARNING PROCESSES 9

6.1 TEACHING-LEARNING PROCESSES FOR CORE COURSES 11

6.1.1 Teaching-Learning Processes for Theory Component of

Core Courses

11

6.1.2 Teaching-Learning Processes for Electronics Laboratory

Component of Core Courses

11

6.2 TEACHING-LEARNING PROCESSES FOR DISCIPLINE

SPECIFIC ELECTIVES

12

6.3 TEACHING-LEARNING PROCESSES FOR SKILL

ENHANCEMENT COURSES

12

7. ASSESSMENT METHODS 13

7.1 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR CORE COURSES 13

7.1.1 Assessment Methods for Theory Component of Core

Courses

14

7.1.2 Assessment Methods for Electronics Laboratory

Component of Core Courses

14

7.2 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC

ELECTIVES

14

7.3 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR SKILL ENHANCEMENT

COURSES

15

8. STRUCTURE OF COURSES IN B.SC. PHYSICAL SCIENCES

(PEM) WITH ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE

15

iii

8.1 CREDIT DISTRIBUTION FOR B.SC. PHYSICAL SCIENCES

(WITH PEM)

15

8.2 SEMESTER-WISE DISTRIBUTION OF COURSES 18

9. DETAILED COURSES FOR PROGRAMME IN B.SC. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES, INCLUDING COURSE OBJECTIVES, LEARNING

OUTCOMES, AND READINGS

23

9.1 CORE COURSES 23

9.2 DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC ELECTIVE COURSES 35

9.3 SKILL ENHANCEMENT COURSES 54

ANNEXURES 75

1

Preamble Higher Education in India is in need of reform. On the one hand, while there is a need for

increased access to higher education in the country, it is also necessary to improve the quality

of higher education. New initiatives and sustained efforts are needed to develop and enhance

the spirit of enquiry, analytical ability and comprehension skills of the young generation of

students. An emerging knowledge based society requires that they are able to acquire and

generate new knowledge and skills, and can creatively apply them to excel in their chosen

vocations. Our higher education system needs to inculcate exemplary citizenship qualities and

motivate students to contribute to the society at large. Such abilities and qualities of our youth

will be crucial for the country to face the challenges of the future.

One of the reforms in undergraduate (UG) education, initiated by the University Grants

Commission (UGC) at the national level in 2018, is to introduce the Learning Outcomes-based

Curriculum Framework (LOCF) which makes it student-centric, interactive and outcome-

oriented with well-defined aims and objectives.

The Department of Physics and Astrophysics, University of Delhi took up the task of drafting

the LOCF for UG Physics courses according to guidelines sent in March 2019 by the

Undergraduate Curriculum Review Committee (UGCRC)-2019 of the University of Delhi. The

Committee of Courses of the Department constituted a Steering Committee, whose composition

is given in Annexure 1A, to plan and formulate the LOCF for UG Physics courses of the

University. The Steering Committee formed Subject Working Groups (Annexure 1B) to

formulate the content of different sets of courses. The Subject Working Groups included

teachers from more than twenty colleges of the University, who have experience of teaching

the respective courses. About eighty faculty members from the Department of Physics and

Astrophysics and Physics Departments of colleges of the University have contributed to this

important task. The inputs of the Subject Working Groups were compiled, and the present

document prepared by a final drafting team (Annexure 1C).

The University of Delhi offers the undergraduate B.Sc. (Honours) Physics programme, the

B.Sc. Physical Sciences programme with Physics and Electronics disciplines, as well as general

elective courses in Physics for students of Honours programmes in disciplines other than

Physics. The LOCF has been prepared for all of the above.

An earlier draft of the LOCF of the University of Delhi was put in the public domain for

stakeholders’ comments in May 2019. This was a revised version of the existing Choice Based

Credit System (CBCS) undergraduate programme at the University of Delhi. We thank the

stakeholders who took time and made effort to give us feedback on the earlier draft. Many of

the comments received have helped us improve the LOCF draft.

We acknowledge the use of the document “Learning Outcomes based Curriculum Framework

(LOCF) for Undergraduate Programme B.Sc. (Physics) 2019” put up by the UGC on its

website in May 2019 (https://www.ugc.ac.in/pdfnews/1884134_LOCF-Final_Physics-

report.pdf) and prepared by its Subject Expert Committee for Physics. This document has

helped in clarifying the features of the LOCF and is the original source of a significant part of

the text of the present document.

2

Keywords

Ability Enhancement Compulsory Course (AECC);

Core Courses (CC);

Discipline Specific Electives (DSE);

Learning Outcome-based Curriculum Frame work (LOCF);

Course Learning Outcomes (CLO);

Program Learning Outcomes (PLO);

Skill Enhancement Courses (SEC);

Teaching Learning Processes (TLP).

3

Learning Outcomes-Based Curriculum Framework for

Undergraduate Education in Physics

1. INTRODUCTION

The learning outcomes-based curriculum framework for a B.Sc degree in Physical Sciences

with Electronics discipline is intended to provide a comprehensive foundation to the subject,

and to help students develop the ability to successfully continue with further studies and

research in the subject. The framework is designed to equip students with valuable cognitive

abilities and skills so that they are successful in meeting diverse needs of professional careers

in a developing and knowledge-based society. The curriculum framework takes into account

the need to maintain globally competitive standards of achievement in term of the knowledge

and skills in Electronics, as well develop scientific orientation, enquiring spirit, problem

solving skills and values which foster rational and critical thinking.

Due to the extreme diversity of our country, a central university like the University of Delhi

gets students from very different academic backgrounds, regions and language zones. While

maintaining high standards, the learning outcome-based curriculum provides enough flexibility

to teachers and colleges to respond to diverse needs of students.

The learning outcome-based curriculum framework for undergraduate courses in Physical

Sciences with Electronics discipline also allows for flexibility and innovation in the programme

design to adopt latest teaching and assessment methods, and include introduction to news areas

of knowledge in the fast-evolving subject domains. The process of learning is defined by the

following steps which form the basis of final assessment of the achievement at the end of the

program.

(i) Development of an understanding and knowledge of basic Electronics. This

involves exposure to basics facts of nature discovered by Physics and Electronics

through observations and experiments. The other core component of this

development is introduction to Electronics concepts and principles, their theoretical

relationships in laws of Electronics, and deepening of their understanding via

appropriate problems.

(ii) The ability to use this knowledge to analyze new situations and learn skills and

tools like laboratory techniques, computational methods, applied mathematics,

embedded systems and smart modules to find solution, interpret results and make

meaningful predictions.

(iii) The ability to synthesize the acquired knowledge and experience for an improved

comprehension of the physical problems and to create new skills and tools for their

possible solutions.

4

2.LEARNING OUTCOME-BASED CURRICULUM

FRAMEWORK IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL SCIENCES PROGRAMME

having Electronics discipline

Note: There is one B.Sc. Physical Sciences Programme, namely B.Sc. Physical Sciences

with Physics, Electronics, and Mathematics (PEM) where Electronics is one of the

disciplines.

2.1 NATURE AND EXTENT OF THE PROGRAMME IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES WITH ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE

The UG programs, B.Sc. Physical Science with Electronics discipline is builds on the basic

Physics taught at the +2 level in all the schools in the country. Ideally, the +2 senior secondary

school education should aim and achieve a sound grounding in understanding the basic and

applied Physics with sufficient content of topics from modern Physics and contemporary areas

of exciting developments in physical sciences. The curricula and syllabi should be framed and

implemented in such a way that the basic connection between theory and experiment and its

importance in understanding electronics is made clear to students. This is very critical in

developing a scientific temperament and the urge to learn and innovate in electronics and other

allied disciplines. Unfortunately the condition of our school system in most parts of the country

lacks the facilities to achieve the above goal, and it is incumbent upon the college/university

system to fill gaps in the scientific knowledge and understanding of our country’s youth who

complete school curricula and enter university education.

Electronics, a subdivision of Physics, is an experimental science that studies systematically the

applied aspects of the laws of nature operating at length scales from the sub-atomic domains to

the entire universe. The scope of electronics as a subject is very broad. The core areas of study

within the disciplinary/subject area of an UG programme in Electronics are: Network Analysis

and Analog Electronics, Linear and Digital Integrated Circuits, Communication Electronics,

and Microprocessor and Microcontroller, and specialized tools of electronics and their

applications in different branches of the subject. Along with the theoretical course work

students also learn laboratory methods for different branches of Electronics, specialized

electronics tools and software, and scientific report writing. The latest addition to Electronics

pedagogy incorporated in the LOCF framework is computational and Laboratory work, which

involves adaptation of problems for algorithmic solutions, as well as modelling and simulation

of Electronics circuits and embedded system. The elective modules of the framework offer

students choice to gain knowledge and expertise in more specialized domains of Electronics

like Semiconductor Devices, Instrumentation, Digital Signal Processing, Verilog and FPGA

based system Design, Photonic Devices, Power Electronics, Antenna Theory, wireless Network

The Electronics-based knowledge and skills learnt by students also equip them to be successful

in careers other than research and teaching in Electronics.

5

2.2 AIMS OF BACHELORS DEGREE PROGRAMME IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES WITH ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE

The LOCF based UG educational program in B.Sc. Physical Science with Electronics aims to

● create the facilities and learning environment in educational institutions to consolidate

the knowledge acquired at +2 level, motivate students to develop a deep interest in

applied Physics and Electronics, and to gain a broad and balanced knowledge and

understanding of physical concepts, principles and theories of Electronics.

● provide opportunities to students to learn, design and perform experiments in lab, gain

an understanding of laboratory methods, design and analysis of electronic circuits and

report writing, and acquire a deeper understanding of concepts, principles and theories

learned in the classroom through laboratory demonstration, and computational problems

and modelling.

● develop the ability in students to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to

get to the solutions of specific theoretical and applied problems in Electronics.

● to prepare students for pursuing the interdisciplinary and multidisciplinary higher

education and/or research in interdisciplinary and multidisciplinary areas, as Electronics

is among the most important branches of applied science necessary for interdisciplinary

and multidisciplinary research.

● to prepare students for developing new industrial technologies and theoretical tools for

applications in diverse branches of the corporate and economic life of the country, as

Electronics is one of the branches of applied science which contribute directly to

technological development, and

● in light of all of the above to provide students with the knowledge and skill base that

would enable them to undertake further studies in Electronics and related areas, or in

interdisciplinary/multidisciplinary areas, or join and be successful in diverse

professional streams including entrepreneurship and startups.

3. GRADUATE ATTRIBUTES IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL SCIENCES

WITH ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE

Some of the characteristic attributes of a graduate in Electronics are

● Disciplinary knowledge

(i) comprehensive knowledge and understanding of major concepts, theoretical

principles and experimental developments in Electronics and its different subfields

like Analog Electronics, Digital Electronics, Network Analysis, VLSI technology,

Communication Electronics, Microprocessor and Microcontrollers, Semiconductor

Devices, Instrumentation, Digital Signal Processing, Verilog and FPGA Design,

Photonic Devices, Power Electronics, Antenna Theory, wireless Network and other

related fields of study, including broader interdisciplinary subfields like Physics,

Chemistry, Mathematics, Life sciences, Environmental sciences, Computer science,

Information Technology etc..

(ii) ability to use Electronics laboratory skills and modern instrumentation for

designing and implementing new circuits and smart systems in Electronics,

interdisciplinary/multidisciplinary research areas and industrial research.

● Skilled communicator: Ability to transmit abstract concepts and complex information

relating to all areas in Electronics in a clear and concise manner through scientific report

writing. Ability to express complex relationships and information through graphical

methods, circuit diagrams and proper tabulation. Ability to explain complex processes

6

through simulation and modelling. Ability to express complex and technical concepts

orally in a simple, precise and straightforward language for better understanding.

● Critical thinking: Ability to distinguish between relevant and irrelevant facts and

information, discriminate between objective and biased information, apply logic to

arrive at definitive conclusions, find out if conclusions are based upon sufficient

evidence, derive correct quantitative results, make rational evaluations, and arrive at

qualitative judgments according to established rules.

● Sense of inquiry: Capability for asking relevant/appropriate questions relating to the

issues and problems in the field of Electronics. Planning, executing and reporting the

results of a theoretical or experimental investigation.

● Team player/worker: Capable of working effectively in diverse teams in both

classroom, laboratory, Electronics workshop and in field-based situation.

● Skilled project manager: Capable of identifying/mobilizing appropriate resources

required for a project, and managing a project through to completion, while observing

responsible and ethical scientific conduct, safety and laboratory hygiene regulations and

practices.

● Digitally Efficient: Capable of using computers for computational and simulation

studies in Electronics. Proficiency in appropriate software for numerical and statistical

analysis of data, accessing and using modern e-library search tools, ability to locate,

retrieve, and evaluate Electronics information from renowned archives, proficiency in

accessing observational and experimental data made available by renowned research

labs for further analysis. Excellence in development of smart system and efficient

control circuits using suitable electronic components and microcontrollers.

● Ethical awareness/analytical reasoning: The graduates should be capable of

demonstrating the ability to think and analyze rationally with modern and scientific

outlook and adopt objectives, which are unbiased and truthful in all aspects of their

work. They should be capable of identifying ethical issues related to their work. They

should be ready to appropriately acknowledge direct and indirect contributions received

from all sources, including from other personnels in their field. They should be willing

to contribute to the free development of knowledge in all forms. Further, unethical

behavior such as fabrication, falsification or misrepresentation of data, or committing

plagiarism, or not adhering to intellectual property rights should be avoided.

● Social, National and International perspective: The graduates should be able to

develop a perspective about the significance of their knowledge and skills for social

well-being and a sense of responsibility towards human society and the planet. They

should have a national as well as an international perspective for their work and career

in the chosen field of academic and research activities.

● Lifelong learners: Capable of self-paced and self-directed learning aimed at personal

development and for improving knowledge/skill development and re-skilling in all areas

of Electronics.

7

4. QUALIFICATION DESCRIPTORS FOR GRADUATES IN

B.Sc. PHYSICAL SCIENCES WITH ELECTRONICS

DISCIPLINE

The qualification descriptors for a B.Sc. Physical science program with Electronics discipline

(with combinations of Physics, Electronics and Mathematics (PEM)) should include the

following:

The graduates should be able to

● Demonstrate:

(i) a systematic and coherent understanding of basic Electronics including the

concepts, theories and relevant experimental techniques in the domains of Network

Analysis, Analog Electronics, Digital Electronics, Integrated Circuits,

Communication Electronics, Microprocessor, Microcontroller and of the

specialized field like Semiconductor Devices, Electronic Instrumentation, Digital

Signal Processing, Verilog and FPGA Design, Photonic Devices, Power

Electronics, Antenna Theory, wireless Network, etc. in their choice of Discipline


(ii) ability to relate their understanding of Electronics to other subjects like Physics, or

Mathematics, which are part of their curriculum, and hence orient their knowledge

and work towards multi-disciplinary/inter-disciplinary contexts and problems.

(iii) procedural knowledge that creates different types of professionals related to

different areas of study in Electronics and multi/interdisciplinary domains,

including research and development, teaching, technology professions, and

government and public service.

(iv) skills in areas of specializations of their elected subfields, so that they can continue

with higher studies and can relate their knowledge to current developments in those

subfields.

● Use knowledge, understanding and skills required for identifying problems and issues

relating to Electronics, and its interface with other subjects studied in the course, collect

relevant quantitative and/or qualitative data/circuits from a wide range of sources

including various research laboratories of the world, their application, and do analysis

and evaluation using appropriate methodologies.

● Communicate the results of studies undertaken accurately in a range of different

contexts using the main concepts, constructs and techniques of Electronics and other

subjects studied in the course. Develop communication abilities to present these results

in technical as well as popular science meetings.

● Ability to meet their own learning needs, drawing on a range of pedagogic material

available on the internet and books, current research and development work and

professional materials, and in interaction with other science professionals.

● Apply their knowledge of Electronics (theoretical and laboratory skills) to new/

unfamiliar contexts. To identify and analyze problems and issues, solve complex

problems in Electronics and its interface with other subjects.

● Demonstrate Electronics-related technological skills that are relevant to employment in

industry and elsewhere.

8

5. PROGRAM LEARNING OUTCOMES IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL

SCIENCES WITH ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE (B.SC. (PEM))

The student graduating with the Degree B.Sc. Physical sciences with Electronics discipline,

B.Sc. (PEM) should be able to

● Acquire

(i) a systematic and coherent understanding of basic Electronics including the

concepts, theories and relevant experimental techniques in the domains of Network

Analysis, Analog Electronics, Digital Electronics, Integrated Circuits,

Communication Electronics, Microprocessor, Microcontroller and of the

specialized field like Semiconductor Devices, Electronic Instrumentation, Digital

Signal Processing, Verilog and FPGA Design, Photonic Devices, Power

Electronics, Antenna Theory, wireless Network, etc. in their choice of Discipline


(ii) a wide ranging and comprehensive experience in Electronics laboratory methods in

experiments related to Network Analysis, Analog Electronics, Digital Electronics,

Communication, Microcontroller, Semiconductor Devices, Instrumentation, Digital

Signal Processing, Verilog and FPGA, Antenna’s, etc. Students acquire the ability

for systematic designing and analysis of circuits, recording of proper observations,

use of scientific research instruments, analysis of observational data, making

suitable error estimates and scientific report writing.

(iii) procedural knowledge that creates different types of professionals related to the

disciplinary/subject area of Electronics and multi/interdisciplinary domains,

including professionals engaged in research and development, teaching, technology

professions and government/public service;

(iv) skills in areas related to their specialization area within the disciplinary/subject area

of Electronics.

● Demonstrate the ability to use skills in Electronics and its related areas of technology

for formulating and solving problems and identifying and applying appropriate physical

principles and methodologies to solve a wide range of problems associated with

Electronics and its interface with other subjects studied in the course.

● Recognize the importance of modeling simulation and computing, and the role of

approximation and mathematical approaches to describing the Electronic world.

● Plan and execute experiments or investigations related to Electronics and its interface

with other subjects studied in the course analyze and interpret data/information

collected using appropriate methods, including the use of appropriate software such as

programming languages and purpose-written packages, and report accurately the

findings of the experiment/investigations while relating the conclusions/findings to

relevant theories.

● Demonstrate relevant generic skills and global competencies such as

(i) problem-solving skills that are required to solve different types of Electronics-

related problems with well-defined solutions, and tackle open-ended problems that

belong to the disciplinary area boundaries;

(ii) investigative skills, including skills of independent investigation of problems;

(iii) communication skills involving the ability to listen carefully, to read texts and

research papers analytically and to present complex information in a concise

manner to different groups/audiences of technical or popular nature;

9

(iv) analytical skills involving paying attention to detail and ability to construct logical

arguments, using correct technical language and ability to translate them with

popular language when needed;

(v) ICT skills;

(vi) personal skills such as the ability to work both independently and in a group.

● Demonstrate professional behavior such as

(i) being objective, unbiased and truthful in all aspects of work and avoiding unethical,

irrational behavior such as fabricating, falsifying or misrepresenting data or

committing plagiarism;

(ii) the ability to identify the potential ethical issues in work-related situations;

(iii) be committed to the free development of scientific knowledge and appreciate its

universal appeal for the entire humanity;

(iv) appreciation of intellectual property, environmental and sustainability issues; and

(v) promoting safe learning and working environment.

6. TEACHING LEARNING PROCESSES

The teaching learning processes play the most important role in achieving the desired aims and

objectives of the undergraduate B.Sc. Physical Science program in Electronics (PEM). The

LOCF framework emphasizes learning outcomes for every Electronics course and its parts.

This helps in identifying most suitable teaching learning processes for every segment of the

curricula. Electronics is basically an experimental science with a very elaborate and advanced

applied structure. Systematic observations of controlled experiments open up windows to

hidden properties and unexplored circuits and devices. Physics concepts and theories are meant

to create a systematic understanding of the properties and laws used in Electronics. All

principles and laws of Physics are accepted only after their verifications and confirmations in

laboratory, or observations in the real world, which require scientists trained in appropriate

experimental techniques, and engineers to design and make advanced scientific instruments and

smart systems. Electronics graduates need a deep understanding of applied concepts, principles

and theories of Physics, which help in gaining familiarity with different branches of

Electronics. To achieve these goals, the appropriate training of young individuals to become

competent scientists, researchers and engineers in future have to be accomplished. For this

purpose, a very good undergraduate program, B.Sc. Physical Science in Electronics is required

as a first step. An appropriate teaching-learning procedural protocol for all the colleges is

therefore essential. To be specific, it is desirable to have:

• Sufficient number of teachers in permanent position to do all the class room teaching

and supervise the laboratory experiments to be performed by the students.

• All teachers should be qualified as per the UGC norms and should have good

communication skills.

• Sufficient number of technical and other support staff to run the laboratories, libraries,

equipment and maintain the infrastructural facilities like buildings, ICT infrastructure,

electricity, sanitation, etc.

• Necessary and sufficient infrastructural facilities for the class rooms, laboratories and

libraries.

• Modern and updated laboratory equipment needed for the undergraduate laboratories

and reference and text books for the libraries.

10

• Sufficient infrastructure for ICT and other facilities needed for technology-enabled

learning like computer facilities, PCs, laptops, Wi-Fi and internet facilities with all the

necessary software.

Teachers should make use of all the approaches for an efficient teaching-learning process i.e.:

(i) Class room teachings with lectures using traditional as well as electronic boards.

(ii) Use of Smart class rooms for simulation and demonstration for conveying the

difficult concepts of Physics in class room teaching and laboratories.

(iii) Demonstration of the required experiments in laboratory and workshops on

necessary apparatuses, data analysis, error estimation and scientific report writing

for effective and efficient learning of laboratory techniques.

(iv) Imparting the problem solving ability which enables a student to apply physical and

mathematical concepts to a new and concrete situation is essential to all courses.

This can be accomplished through examples discussed in the class or laboratory,

assignments and tutorials.

(v) CBCS curriculum has introduced a significant content of computational courses.

Computational physics should be used as a new element in the electronics

pedagogy, and efforts should be made to introduce computational problems,

including simulation and modelling, in all courses.

(vi) Teaching should be complimented with students seminar to be organized very

frequently.

(vii) Guest lectures and seminars should be arranged by inviting eminent teachers, and

scientists.

(viii) Open-ended project work should be given to all students individually, or in group to

2-3 students depending upon the nature of the course.

(ix) Since actual undergraduate teaching is done in affiliated colleges which have

differing levels of infrastructure and student requirements, the teachers should

attend workshops organized by the University Department for college faculty on

teaching methodology, reference materials, latest laboratory equipment and

experiments, and computational physics software for achieving uniform standards.

Common guidelines for individual courses need to be followed/evolved.

(x) Internship of duration varying from one week anytime in the semester, and/or 2-6

weeks during semester break and summer breaks should be arranged by the college

for the students to visit other colleges/universities/HEI and industrial organizations

in the vicinity. If needed, financial assistance may also be provided for such

arrangements

(xi) Special attempts should be made to develop problem-solving skills and design of

laboratory experiments for demonstration. For this purpose, a mentor system may

be evolved where 3-4 students may be assigned to each faculty member.

(xii) Teaching load should be managed such that the teachers have enough time to

interact with the students to encourage an interactive/participative learning.

In the first year students are fresh from school. Given the diversity of their backgrounds, and

the lack of adequate infrastructure and training in science learning in many schools, special

care and teacher attention is essential in the first year. Mentorship with senior students and

teachers can help them ease into rigors of university level undergraduate learning.

A student completing the Physical Sciences with Electronics discipline course under the CBCS

takes 4 core courses in each discipline, 2 discipline specific electives (DSE) courses in each

discipline, 4 skill enhancement courses (SEC) including at least one from each discipline and

two ability enhancement compulsory courses (AECC). Since different categories of courses

11

have different objectives and intended learning outcomes, the most efficient and appropriate

teaching learning processes would not be same for all categories of courses.

6.1 TEACHING LEARNING PROCESSES FOR CORE COURSES

The objective of Core courses is to build a comprehensive foundation of physics concepts,

principles and laboratory skills so that a student is able to proceed to any specialized branch

within Electronics. Rather than a quantitative amalgamation of disparate knowledge, it is much

more preferable that students gain the depth of understanding and ability to apply what they

have learnt to diverse problems.

All Core courses have a theory and an associated Electronics laboratory component. Even

though the learning in theory and lab components proceeds in step, the teaching learning

processes for the two components need specific and different emphases.

6.1.1 Teaching Learning Processes for Theory component of Core Courses

A significant part of the theoretical learning in core courses is done in the traditional lecture

cum black-board method. Demonstrations with models, power-point projection, student project

presentations, etc. are some other methods which should be judiciously used to enhance the

learning experience. Problem solving should be integrated into theoretical learning of core

courses and proportionally more time should be spent on it. It is advisable that a list of

problems is distributed to students before the discussion of every topic, and they are

encouraged to solve these in the self-learning mode, since teachers are unlikely to get time to

discuss all of them in the class room.

6.1.2 Teaching Learning Processes for Electronics Laboratory component of Core Courses

Students learn essential Electronics laboratory skills mainly while preparing for experiments,

performing them in the laboratory, and writing appropriate laboratory reports. Most of this

learning takes place in the self-learning mode. However, teachers’ role is crucial at critical key

points. Electronics laboratory learning suffers seriously if students do not get appropriate

guidance at these key points. Many students get their first proper exposure to Electronics

laboratory work in their first year of undergraduate studies. Hence, laboratory teaching to first

year students requires special care.

Demonstration on the working of required apparatuses should be given in few beginning

laboratory sessions of all courses. Sessions on the essentials of experimental data analysis, error

estimation, and scientific report writing are crucial in the first year physics laboratory teaching.

Once the essentials have been learnt, sessions may be taken on applications of these for specific

experiments in lab courses of later years. Students should be encouraged to explore

experimental physics projects outside the curricula.

Many college laboratories lack latest laboratory equipment due to resource crunch. For

example very few laboratories have equipment for sensor and microprocessor based data

acquisition, whose output can be directly fed into a computer for further analysis. Colleges

need to make strategic planning, including student participation under teacher guided projects,

to gradually get their laboratories equipped with latest equipment. The Department of the

Physics and Astrophysics of the University can provide key guidance and help in this regard.

It is recommended that the maximum size of group for all Physics Laboratory courses should

be 12-15 students.

12

6.2 TEACHING LEARNING PROCESSES FOR DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC

ELECTIVES

The objective of DSE papers is to expose students to domain specific branches of Electronics

and prepare them for further studies in the chosen field. While students must learn basic

theoretical concepts and principles of the chosen domain, a sufficient width of exposure to

diverse topics is essential in these papers. Student seminars and projects can be a very fruitful

way to introduce students to the latest research level developments.

Besides a theory component, every DSE paper has either an associated tutorial, or a Electronics

laboratory. Teaching learning processes for theory and Electronics laboratory components

described above in sub-sections 6.1.1and 6.1.2 for core courses, should be applicable for DSE

courses too.

Tutorials provide an opportunity for attending closely to learning issues with individual

students, and hence an effective means to help create interest in the subject and assess their

understanding. Pre-assigned weekly problem sets and assignments help structure tutorial

sessions and should be used as often as possible. Students’ performance in tutorials should be

used for determining their internal assessment marks for the course.

It is recommended that the maximum size of group in a tutorial should be 8-10 students per

group.

6.3 TEACHING LEARNING PROCESSES FOR SKILL ENHANCEMENT

COURSES

Skill Enhancement papers are intended to help students develop skills which may or may not be

directly applicable to Electronics learning. These courses introduce an element of diversity of

learning environments and expectations. Efforts should be made that students gain adequate

‘hands-on’ experience in the desired skills. The theory parts of these courses are intended to

help students get prepared for such experiences. Since the assessment of these courses is

largely college based, teachers should make full use of it to design novel projects.

At the end, the main purpose of Electronics teaching should be to impart higher level objective

knowledge to students in concrete, comprehensive and effective ways. Here, effectiveness

implies gaining knowledge and skill which can be applied to solve practical problems as well

as attaining the capability of logical thinking and imagination which are necessary for the

creation of new knowledge and new discoveries. Once the students understand ‘why is it worth

learning?’ and ‘how does it connect to the real world?’, they will embrace the curriculum in a

way that would spark their imagination and instill a spirit of enquiry in them, so that in future

they can opt for further investigations or research. All in all, the teacher should act as a

facilitator and guide and not as a guardian of the curriculum.

It is recommended that the maximum size of group in the Laboratory for SEC courses should

be 12-15 students per group.

13

7. ASSESSMENT METHODS

In the undergraduate education leading to the B.Sc. Physical Science degree with Electronics,

the assessment and evaluation methods should focus on testing the conceptual understanding of

basic concepts and theories, experimental techniques, development of mathematical skills, and

the ability to apply the knowledge acquired to solve new problems and communicate the results

and findings effectively.

The two perennial shortfalls of the traditional science examination process in our country are

the reliance on rote learning for written exams, and a very perfunctory evaluation of laboratory

skills. Greater emphasis on problem solving and less importance to textbook derivations

discourages rote learning. Theory examinations should be based primarily on unseen problems.

Continuous evaluation of students’ work in the laboratory, and testing them on extensions of

experiments they have already performed can give a more faithful evaluation of their laboratory

skills.

Needless to say, there should be a continuous evaluation system for students. This will enable

teachers not only to ascertain the overall progress of learning by the students, but also to

identify students who are slow learners and for whom special care should be taken. An

appropriate grading system is the ‘relative grading system’. It introduces a competitive element

among students, but does not excessively penalizes weaker students.

Since the Learning Objectives are defined clearly for each course in the LOCF framework, it is

easier to design methods to monitor the progress in achieving the learning objectives during the

course and test the level of achievement at the end of the course.

Formative Assessment for monitoring the progress towards achieving the learning objectives is

an important assessment component, which provides both teachers and students feedback on

progress towards learning goals. University of Delhi examination system has 20 percent

internal assessment for theory component, and 50 percent for physics laboratory and

computational physics laboratory components. These marks should be distributed in periodic

assessments in different modes to serve the intended purpose

Since core courses, discipline specific courses and skill enhancement courses have qualitatively

different kinds of objectives and learning outcomes, one model of assessment methods will not

work for these different kinds of courses.

7.1 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR CORE COURSES

Core courses and associated Electronics laboratory curricula lead to the essential set of learning

outcomes, which every Electronics graduate is expected to have. Their assessment methods

require rigour, comprehensiveness and uniformity about what is minimally expected from

students. Regular interactions mediated through university department among teachers teaching

these courses in different colleges may prove to be helpful in this regard. Since depth of

understanding of core topics is a highly desirable outcome, assessment for these courses should

put greater emphasis on unseen problems, including extensions of textbook derivations done in

class.

14

7.1.1 Assessment Methods for the Theory component of Core courses

The evaluation scheme of the University of Delhi allots 20 percent marks for internal

assessment of theory papers. Teachers should use a judicious combination of the following

methods to assess students for these marks: i) periodic class tests, ii) regular problem based

assignments, iii) unannounced short quizzes, iv) individual seminar presentations v) longer

assignments for covering theory and derivations not discussed in regular lectures, vi)

True/False Tests, and vii) Multiple Choice Tests for large classes.

To help students prepare themselves for formative assessment during the semester, and to

motivate them for self-learning, it is advisable that a Model Problem Set is made available to

them in the beginning of the course, or problem sets are given before discussion of specific

topics in class.

In preparing students for Substantive Summative Assessment at the end of the semester it is

helpful if a Model/mock question paper is made available to them in the beginning of the

course.

7.1.2 Assessment Methods for the Electronics Laboratory component of Core courses

The 50 percent internal assessment for the evaluation scheme for laboratory courses is best

used in continuous evaluation of students’ performance in the lab. This evaluation should

include these components: i) Regular evaluation of experiments regarding a) written report of

each experiment and b) Viva-Voce on each experiment, ii) Test through setting experiments by

assembling components, iii) written test on experiments done in the lab and data analysis, iv)

Designing innovative kits to test the comprehension and analysis of the experiment done by the

students, and v) audio visual recording of the experiments being performed by students and its

self-appraisal.

The end semester laboratory examination should ideally involve extensions of experiments

done by students during the semester. Two or more experiments can be combined for this

purpose. Open ended problems for which students can get the answer by designing their own

experimental method should also be tried.

7.2 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC ELECTIVES

Discipline specific courses build upon general principles learnt in core courses, and also

prepare students for further studies in specific domains of Electronics. Given the time

constraint of only one semester, specific domain exposure is mostly introductory in character.

Assessment for these courses should have significant component of open-ended methods like

seminars and project work. Students have greater chance of proving their individual initiative

and ability for self-learning in these methods. These methods also have greater flexibility to

reward students for out of curriculum learning.

Besides a theory component, every DSE paper has either an associated tutorial, or a Electronics

laboratory, or a computational physics component. Assessment methods for theory and

Electronics laboratory components described above in sub-sections 7.1.1 and 7.1.2 for core


15

Students should be assessed for their performance in tutorials, and this assessment should

contribute to their internal assessment marks. Their work on pre-assigned problem

sets/assignments, and participation in tutorial discussions should be taken into account while

assessing their performance.

7.3 ASSESSMENT METHODS FOR SKILL ENHANCEMENT COURSES

Learning in skill enhancement courses is largely experience based. Student performance in

these courses is best assessed under continuous evaluation. Students could be assigned a

specific task for a class or group of classes, and they could be assessed for their success in

meeting the task.

8. STRUCTURE OF COURSES IN B.Sc. PHYSICAL SCIENCES

(PEM) WITH ELECTRONICS DISCIPLINE

8.1 CREDIT DISTRIBUTION FOR B.SC. PHYSICAL SCIENCES (WITH

PEM).

The B.Sc. Physical science (PEM) programme with Electronics as one of the Discipline

consists of 132 credits based on the Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) approved by the

UGC with 01 hour/week for each credit for theory/tutorials and 02 hours/week for each credit

of laboratory work/Hands-on exercises. Out of 132 credits, 108 credits are of core and DSE

courses equally divided between Electronics discipline, Physics Discipline and Mathematics

Discipline (36 credits each), 16 credits consist of Skilled Enhancement courses (SEC) which

are elective and 8 credits consists of Ability Enhancement Compulsory Courses (AECC)

equally divided (4 credits each) between disciplines of the Environmental sciences and

Languages/communications. A student can take more than 132 credits in total (but not more

than 148 credits) to qualify for the grant of the B.Sc. Physical Sciences degree as per rules and

regulations of the University.

16

Table 8.1 Table showing distribution of credits: Subject-A: Physics

Discipline, Subject-B: Electronics Discipline, and Subject-C: Mathematics

Discipline

Semester Compulsory Core

Courses (CC) each

with 06 credit (Total

no. of Papers 12)

04 Core courses are

compulsory to be

from each subject A,

B and C

Discipline

Specific

Elective

(DSE) each

with 06 credits,

Select any 02

courses from

each subject A,

B and C

Ability

Enhancement

Compulsory

Courses

(AECC) each

with 04 credits,

Select any 02

from 03 courses

Skill

Enhancement

Course (SEC)

each with 04

credits.

Select any 04

Courses.

Select at least

1 from each

subject A, B

and C

Total

Credits

Sem I CC-1A

CC-1B

CC-1C

-

AECC-1 -

22

Sem II CC-2A

CC-2B

CC-2C

-

AECC-2 -

22

Sem III CC-3A

CC-3B

CC-3C

-

-

SEC-1(A/B/C) 22

Sem IV CC-4A

CC-4B

CC-4C

-

-

SEC-2(A/B/C) 22

Sem V -

DSE-1A

DSE -1B

DSE -1C

-

SEC-3(A/B/C) 22

Sem VI -

DSE -2A

DSE -2B

DSE -2C

-

SEC-4(A/B/C) 22

Total

Credits 72 36 8 1

6

132

17

Table 8.2 DETAILS OF COURSES UNDER UNDERGRADUATE

PROGRAMME (B.Sc. Physical Science-PEM)

Course #Credits

Theory + Practical/Tutorials

=================================================================

I. Core Course 12 X (4+2)* = 72

(12 Papers)

04 Courses from each of the

03 disciplines of choice

II. DSE Courses 6 X (4+2)* or 6 X (5+1)** =36

(6 Papers)

Two papers from each discipline (Physics, Electronics, Mathematics) of choice.

Optional Dissertation or project work in place of one Discipline elective paper (6 credits)

in 6th Semester

III. AECC Courses 2 X 4 = 8

(2 Papers of 4 credits each) Environmental Science English/MIL Communication

IV. SEC Courses 4 X (2+2)* =16

(4 Papers of 4 credits each)

____________________________________________________

Total credit = 132

College should evolve a system/policy about ECA/Interest/Hobby/ Sports/NCC/

NSS/related courses on its own.

*Theory with practical/ Hands-on Exercise

**Theory with tutorials

#wherever there is practical there will be no tutorials and vice -versa.

#The size of group for practical papers is recommended to be maximum of 12 to 15

students and for tutorials 8-10 students per group.

18

8.2 SEMESTER-WISE DISTRIBUTION OF COURSES

CORE COURSES (CC)

Table 8.3 All CC courses of Electronics Discipline have 6 credits with 4

credits of theory and 2 credits of practical. Subject B: Electronics Discipline

Core

Course

type

Unique

Paper

Code

Semester Core papers

(Subject B: Electronics

Discipline)

CC-1B 42511101 I Network Analysis and Analog

Electronics + Lab

CC-2B 42511201 II Linear and Digital Integrated Circuits +

Lab

CC-3B 42514305 III Communication Electronics + Lab

CC-4B 42514413 IV Microprocessor and Microcontroller +

Lab

19

DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC ELECTIVES (DSE)

Table 8.4 All DSE courses of Electronic Disciplines (Subject- B) have 06

credits with 04 credits of theory and 02 credits of practical or 05 credits

of theory and 01 credit of Tutorial.

Discipline Specific (Subject-B: Electronics) Elective papers (Credit: 06 each) (DSE 1B,

DSE 2B): Select any 02 papers (one for each semester-V and semester-VI) from the

following options (numbers in brackets indicate number of hours/Week dedicated)

S.No. Unique Paper

Code DSE papers (Subject B: Electronics Discipline)

Odd Semester – V Semester only (DSE-1B)

1 42517511 Semiconductor Devices Fabrication (4) + Lab (4)

2 42517512 Electronic Instrumentation (4) + Lab (4)

3 42517513 Digital Signal Processing (4) + Lab (4)

Even Semester – VI semester only (DSE-2B)

4 42517614 Verilog and FPGA based system Design (4) + Lab (4)

5 42517615 Photonic Devices and Power Electronics (4) + Lab (4)

6 42517616 Antenna Theory and wireless Network (5) + Tut (1)

7 42517617 Dissertation

20

SKILL ENHANCEMENT COURSES (SEC)

Table 8.5 All SEC* courses of Electronic Discipline (Subject-B) have 04

credits with 02 credits of theory and 02 credits of

Practical/Tutorials/Projects and Field Work to be decided by the

College.

Teachers may give a long duration project based on this paper.

S.No. Unique

Paper

Code

Semester SEC papers* (Subject B: Electronics

Discipline)

1 32223902 III/IV/V/VI Computational Physics Skills

2 32223903 III/IV/V/VI Electrical Circuit and Network skills

3 32223905 III/IV/V/VI Renewable Energy and Energy Harvesting

4 32223906 III/IV/V/VI Engineering design and prototyping/Technical

Drawing

5 32223908 III/IV/V/VI Applied Optics

6 32223909 III/IV/V/VI Weather Forecasting

7 XXX1 III/IV/V/VI Introduction to Physical Computing

8 XXX2 III/IV/V/VI Numerical Analysis

* Students pursuing B.Sc. Physical science with PEM (Physics, Electronics

and Mathematics) combination should select the SEC papers related to

Electronics Discipline (from Table 8.5) carefully. SEC papers are common

for both Physics and Electronics Disciplines. Student should select different

SEC papers in all semesters (III/IV/V and VI) for both disciplines (Subject-

A and Subject-B). Same two papers of SEC to qualify B.Sc. degree is not

allowed.

21

ABILITY ENHANCEMENT COMPULSORY COURSES (AECC)

Table 8.6 All the courses have 4 credits. The detailed content of these

courses is NOT mentioned in this document.

AECCC B.Sc. Physical Science (PEM)

1 English

2 MIL Communications

3 Environment Science

TABLE 8.7 SEMESTER-WISE BREAKUP OF TYPES OF COURSES

WITH THEIR CREDITS. Subject-A: Physics Discipline, Subject-B:

Electronics Discipline, and Subject-C: Mathematics Discipline.

Sem Course opted Course name Credits

I Ability Enhancement Compulsory

Course-I

English communications/ Environmental

Science

4

Core Course-1A CC-1A 6

Core Course-1B Network Analysis and Analog

Electronics (Theory + Lab)

4 + 2


II Ability Enhancement Compulsory

Course-II

English communications/

Environmental Science

4


Core Course-2B Linear and Digital Integrated Circuits

(Theory + Lab)

4 + 2


III Core Course-3A CC-3A 6

Core Course-3B Communication Electronics

(Theory + Lab)

4 + 2



22

IV


Core Course-4B Microprocessor and Microcontroller

(Theory + Lab)

4 + 2



V

Discipline Specific Elective -1 A DSE-1A (Subject A: Physics) 6

Discipline Specific Elective -1 B DSE-1B (Subject B: Electronics)

See Table 8.4

6

Discipline Specific Elective -1 C DSE-1C (Subject C: Mathematics) 6


VI

Discipline Specific Elective - 2 A DSE-1A (Subject A: Physics) 6

Discipline Specific Elective - 2 B DSE-1B (Subject B: Electronics) See

Table 8.4

6

Discipline Specific Elective - 2 C DSE-1C (Subject C: Mathematics) 6

Skill Enhancement Course – 4 SEC-4 (A/B/C) 4

TOTAL 132

23

9. DETAILED COURSES FOR PROGRAMME IN B.SC.

PHYSICAL SCIENCES, INCLUDING COURSE

OBJECTIVES, LEARNING OUTCOMES, AND READINGS

9.1. CORE COURSES

CC-1B: Network Analysis and Analog Electronics (42511101)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This course offers the basic knowledge to students to design and analyze the network

circuit analysis and analog electronics.

• It gives the concept of voltage, current sources and various electrical network

theorems. Physics of Semiconductor devices including Junction diode, Bipolar

junction Transistors, Unipolar devices and their applications are discussed in detail.

• This also develops the understanding of amplifier and its applications.



• To understand the concept of voltage and current sources, Network theorems, Mesh

and Node Analysis.

• To develop an understanding of the basic operation and characteristics of different

type of diodes and familiarity with its working and applications.

• Become familiar with Half-wave, Full-wave center tapped and bridge rectifiers. To

be able to calculate ripple factor and efficiency.

• To be able to recognize and explain the characteristics of a PNP or NPN transistor.

• Become familiar with the load-line analysis of the BJT configurations and

understand the hybrid model (h- parameters) of the BJT transistors.

• To be able to perform small signal analysis of Amplifier and understand its

classification.

• To be able to perform analysis of two stage R-C coupled Amplifier.

• To understand the concept of positive and negative feedback along with applications

of each type of feedback and the working of Oscillators.

• To become familiar with construction, working and characteristics of JFET and UJT.

Unit 1

Circuit Analysis: Concept of Voltage and Current Sources. Kirchhoff’s Current Law,

Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law. Mesh Analysis Node Analysis. Star and Delta networks, Star-Delta

Conversion. Principal of Duality. Superposition Theorem. Thevenin’s Theorem. Norton’s

Theorem. Reciprocity Theorem. Maximum Power Transfer Theorem. Two Port Networks: h, y

and z parameters and their conversion.

24

(14 Lectures)

Unit 2

Junction Diode and its applications: PN junction diode (Ideal and practical)-constructions,

Formation of Depletion Layer, Diode Equation and I-V characteristics. Idea of static and

dynamic resistance, dc load line analysis, Quiescent (Q) point. Zener diode, Reverse saturation

current, Zener and avalanche breakdown. Qualitative idea of Schottky diode. Rectifiers-Half

wave rectifier, Full wave rectifiers (center tapped and bridge), circuit diagrams, working and

waveforms, ripple factor and efficiency. Filter- Shunt capacitor filter, its role in power supply,

output waveform, and working. Regulation- Line and load regulation, Zener diode as voltage

regulator, and explanation for load and line regulation.

(18 Lectures)

Unit 3

Bipolar Junction Transistor: Review of the characteristics of transistor in CE and CB

configurations, Regions of operation (active, cut off and saturation), Current gains α and β.

Relations between α and β. dc load line and Q point.

(5 Lectures)

Amplifiers: Transistor biasing and Stabilization circuits- Fixed Bias and Voltage Divider Bias.

Thermal runaway, stability and stability factor S. Transistor as a two port network, h-parameter

equivalent circuit. Small signal analysis of single stage CE amplifier. Input and Output

impedance, Current and Voltage gains. Class A, B and C Amplifiers.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Cascaded Amplifiers: Two stage RC Coupled Amplifier and its Frequency Response.

(2 Lectures)

Feedback in Amplifiers: Concept of feedback, negative and positive feedback, advantages of

negative feedback (Qualitative only).

(2 Lectures)

Sinusoidal Oscillators: Barkhausen criterion for sustained oscillations. Phase shift and

Colpitt’s oscillator. Determination of Frequency and Condition of oscillation.

(5 Lectures)

Unipolar Devices: JFET. Construction, working and I-V characteristics (output and transfer),

Pinch-off voltage. UJT, basic construction, working, equivalent circuit and I-V characteristics.

(4 Lectures)


ELECTRONICS LAB: CC-1B LAB: NETWORK ANALYSIS AND

ANALOG ELECTRONICS LAB

"Sessions on the construction and use of specific measurement instruments and experimental

apparatuses used in the lab, including necessary precautions.


detail, writing of scientific laboratory reports including proper reporting of errors. Application

to the specific experiments done in the lab.”

25

At least 06 experiments from the following besides experiment no. 1:

1. To familiarize with basic electronic components (R, C, L, diodes, transistors), digital

Multimeter, Function Generator and Oscilloscope.

2. Measurement of Amplitude, Frequency & Phase difference using Oscilloscope.

3. Verification of (a) Thevenin’s theorem and (b) Norton’s theorem.

4. Verification of (a) Superposition Theorem and (b) Reciprocity Theorem.

5. Verification of the Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.

6. Study of the I-V Characteristics of (a) p-n junction Diode, and (b) Zener diode.

7. Study of (a) Half wave rectifier and (b) Full wave rectifier (FWR).

8. Study the effect of (a) C- filter and (b) Zener regulator on the output of FWR.

9. Study of the I-V Characteristics of UJT and design relaxation oscillator.

10. Study of the output and transfer I-V characteristics of common source JFET.

11. Study of Fixed Bias and Voltage divider bias configuration for CE transistor.

12. Design of a Single Stage CE amplifier of given gain.

13. Study of the RC Phase Shift Oscillator.

14. Study the Colpitt’s oscillator.


Essential Readings

1. Network,Lines and Fields, J.D.Ryder, Prentice Hall of India.

2. Electronic Devices and Circuits, David A. Bell, 5th Edition 2015, Oxford University

Press.

3. Electronic Circuits: Discrete and Integrated, D.L. Schilling and C. Belove, Tata McGraw

Hill.

4. J. Millman and C. C. Halkias, Integrated Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill (2001)

5. Allen Mottershead, Electronic Devices and Circuits, Goodyear Publishing Corporation.

Additional Readings

1. Electric Circuits, S. A. Nasar, Schaum’s outline series, Tata McGraw Hill (2004).

2. Electrical Circuits, K.A. Smith and R.E. Alley, 2014, Cambridge University Press.

3. Microelectronic circuits, A.S. Sedra, K.C. Smith, A.N. Chandorkar, 2014, 6th Edn.,



1. Electrical Circuits, M. Nahvi & J. Edminister, Schaum’s Outline Series, Tata McGraw-

Hill (2005).

2. 2000 Solved Problems in Electronics, J. J. Cathey, Schaum’s outline Series, Tata

McGraw Hill (1991).

3. Basic Electronics: Principles and Applications, C.Saha, A.Halder, D.Ganguli, 2018,

Cambridge University Press

4. Electronic Principles, A. Malvino, D.J. Bates, 7th Edition, 2018, Tata Mc-Graw Hill

Education.

CC-2B: Linear and Digital Integrated Circuits (42511201)

26


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This paper aims to provide the basic knowledge of linear and digital electronics.

• It discusses about the operational amplifier and its applications. It introduces the number

systems such as Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal number systems along with

their applications in arithmetic circuits.

• Boolean algebra and combinational logic circuits are also discussed.



• To understand Op- Amp basics and its various applications.

• To become familiar with number systems and codes, Logic Gates, Boolean Algebra

Theorems.

• To understand the minimization techniques for designing a simplified logic circuit.

• To design a half Adder, Full Adder, Half-Subtractor, Full-Subtractor.

• To understand the working of Data processing circuits Multiplexers, Demultiplexers,

Decoders, Encoders.

• To become familiar with the working of flip-flop circuits, its working and applications.

Unit 1

Operational Amplifiers (Black box approach): Characteristics of an Ideal and Practical

Operational Amplifier (IC 741), Open and closed loop configuration, Frequency Response.

CMRR. Slew Rate and concept of Virtual Ground.

(5 Lectures)

Applications of Op-Amps: (1) Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, (2) Summing and

Difference Amplifier, (3) Differentiator, (4) Integrator, (5) Wein bridge oscillator, (6)

Comparator and Zero-crossing detector, and (7) Active low pass and high pass Butter worth

filter (1st order only).

(12 Lectures)

Unit 2

Number System and Codes: Decimal, Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal number systems, base

conversions. Representation of signed and unsigned numbers, BCD code. Binary, octal and

hexadecimal arithmetic; addition, subtraction by 2’s complement method, multiplication.

(9 Lectures)

Unit 3

Logic Gates and Boolean algebra: Truth Tables of OR, AND, NOT, NOR, NAND, XOR,

XNOR, Universal Gates, Basic postulates and fundamental theorems of Boolean algebra.

(4 Lectures)

27

Combinational Logic Analysis and Design: Standard representation of logic functions (SOP

and POS), Minimization Techniques (Karnaugh map minimization up to 4 variables for SOP).

(5 Lectures)

Unit 4

Arithmetic Circuits: Binary Addition. Half and Full Adder. Half and Full Subtractor, 4-bit

binary Adder/Subtractor.

(5 Lectures)

Data processing circuits: Multiplexers, De-multiplexers, Decoders, Encoders.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 5

Sequential Circuits: SR, D, and JK Flip-Flops. Clocked (Level and Edge Triggered) Flip-

Flops. Preset and Clear operations. Race-around conditions in JK Flip-Flop. Master-slave JK

Flip-Flop.

(6 Lectures)

Shift registers: Serial-in-Serial-out, Serial-in-Parallel-out, Parallel-in-Serial-out and Parallel-

in-Parallel-out Shift Registers (only up to 4 bits).

(2 Lectures)

Unit 6

Counters (4 bits): Ring Counter. Asynchronous counters, Decade Counter. Synchronous

Counter.

(4 Lectures)

D-A and A-D Conversion: 4 bit binary weighted and R-2R D-A converters, circuit and

working. Accuracy and Resolution. A-D conversion characteristics, successive approximation

ADC. (Mention of relevant ICs for all).

(4 Lectures)


ELECTRONICS LAB: CC-2B LAB: LINEAR AND DIGITAL

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB






At least 04 experiments each from section A, B and C

Section-A: Op-Amp.Circuits (Hardware design)

1. To design an inverting amplifier using Op-amp (741,351) for dc voltage of given gain.

2. (a) To design inverting amplifier using Op-amp (741,351) and study its frequency

response.

(b) To design non-inverting amplifier using Op-amp (741,351) and study frequency

response.

28

3. (a) To add two dc voltages using Op-Amp in inverting and non-inverting mode.

(b) To study the zero-crossing detector and comparator.

4. To design a precision Differential amplifier of given I/O specification using Op-Amplifier.

5. To investigate the use of an op-amp as an Integrator.

6. To investigate the use of an op-amp as a Differentiator.

7. To design a Wien bridge oscillator for given frequency using an Op-Amplifier.

8. To design a circuit to simulate the solution of simultaneous equation and 1st/2nd order

differential equation.

9. Design a Butter-worth Low Pass active Filter (1st order) and study frequency response.

10.Design a Butter-worth High Pass active Filter (1st order) and study frequency response.

11.Design a digital to analog converter (DAC) of given specifications.

Section-B: Digital circuits (Hardware design)

1. (a) To design a combinational logic system for a specified Truth Table.

(b) To convert Boolean expression into logic circuit & design it using logic gate ICs.

(c) To minimize a given logic circuit.

2. Half Adder and Full Adder.

3. Half Subtractor and Full Subtractor.

4. 4 bit binary adder and adder-subtractor using Full adder IC.

5. To design a seven segment decoder.

6. To build Flip-Flop (RS, Clocked RS, D-type and JK) circuits using NAND gates.

7. To build JK Master-slave flip-flop using Flip-Flop ICs.

8. To build a Counter using D-type/JK Flip-Flop ICs and study timing diagram.

9. To make a Shift Register (serial-in and serial-out) using D-type/JK Flip-Flop ICs.

Section-C: SPICE/MULTISIM simulations for electronic circuits and devices

1. To verify the Thevenin and Norton Theorems.

2. Design and analyze the series and parallel LCR circuits.

3. Design the inverting and non-inverting amplifier using an Op-Amp of given gain.

4. Design and Verification of op-amp as integrator and differentiator.

5. Design the 1st order active low pass and high pass filters of given cutoff frequency.

6. Design a Wein`s Bridge oscillator of given frequency.

7. Design clocked SR and JK Flip-Flop`s using NAND Gates.

8. Design 4-bit asynchronous counter using Flip-Flop ICs.

9. Design the CE amplifier of a given gain and its frequency response.


Essential Readings

1. OP-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuit, R.A. Gayakwad, 4th edition, 2000, Prentice Hall

2. Operational Amplifiers and Linear ICs, David A. Bell, 3rd Edition, 2011, Oxford

University Press.

3. Digital Principles and Applications, A.P. Malvino, D.P.Leach and Saha, 8th Ed., 2018,

Tata McGraw

4. Digital Circuits and systems, Venugopal, 2011, Tata McGraw Hill.

29

5. Thomas L. Flyod, Digital Fundamentals, Pearson Education Asia (1994).

6. Digital Principles, R.L.Tokheim, Schaum’s outline series, Tata McGraw- Hill (1994).


1. Fundamentals of Digital Circuits, Anand Kumar, 4th Edn, 2018, PHI Learning.

2. Digital Computer Electronics, A.P. Malvino, J.A. Brown, 3rd Edition, 2018, Tata

McGraw Hill Education.

3. Digital Electronics, S.K. Mandal, 2010, 1st edition, Tata McGraw Hill.

CC-3B : Communication Electronics (42514305)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This paper aims to describe the concepts of electronics in communication.

• Communication techniques based on Analog Modulation, Analog and digital Pulse

Modulation including PAM, PWM, PPM, ASK, PSK, FSK are described in detail.

• Communication and Navigation systems such as GPS and mobile telephony system are

introduced.


At the end of this course, students will be able to develop following learning outcomes:

• the concepts of electronics in communication, introduction to the principle, performance

and applications of communication systems.

• various means and modes of communication, electromagnetic communication spectrum

with an idea of frequency allocation for radio communication system in India.

• an insight on the use of different modulation and demodulation techniques used in analog

communication.

• analyze different parameters of analog communication techniques.

• learn the generation and detection of a signal through pulse and digital modulation

techniques and multiplexing.

• In-depth understanding of different concepts used in a satellite communication system,

Mobile radio propagation, cellular system design and understand mobile technologies like

GSM and CDMA, mobile communication generations 2G, 3G, and 4G with their

characteristics and limitations.

Unit 1

30

Electronic communication: Introduction to communication – means and modes. Power

measurements (units of power). Need for modulation. Block diagram of an electronic

communication system. Brief idea of frequency allocation for radio communication system in

India (TRAI). Electromagnetic communication spectrum, band designations and usage.

Channels and base-band signals.

(4 Lectures)

Analog Modulation: Amplitude Modulation, modulation index and frequency spectrum.

Generation of AM (Emitter Modulation), Amplitude Demodulation (diode detector), Single

Sideband (SSB) systems, advantages of SSB transmission, Concept of Single side band

generation and detection. Frequency Modulation (FM) and Phase Modulation (PM),

modulation index and frequency spectrum, equivalence between FM and PM, Generation of

FM using VCO, FM detector (slope detector), Qualitative idea of Super heterodyne receiver.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 2

Analog Pulse Modulation: Channel capacity, Sampling theorem, Basic Principles-PAM,

PWM, PPM, modulation and detection technique for PAM only, Multiplexing (time division

multiplexing and frequency division multiplexing).

(9 Lectures)

Unit 3

Digital Pulse Modulation: Need for digital transmission, Pulse Code Modulation, Digital

Carrier Modulation Techniques, Sampling, Quantization and Encoding. Concept of Amplitude

Shift Keying (ASK), Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), Phase Shift Keying (PSK), and Binary

Phase Shift Keying (BPSK).

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Satellite Communication: Introduction, need, Geosynchronous satellite orbits, geostationary

satellite advantages of geostationary satellites. Transponders (C - Band), Uplink and downlink,

path loss, Satellite visibility, Ground and earth stations. Simplified block diagram of earth

station.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 5

Mobile Telephony System: Basic concept of mobile communication, frequency bands used in

mobile communication, concept of cell sectoring and cell splitting, SIM number, IMEI number,

need for data encryption, architecture (block diagram) of mobile communication network, idea

of GSM, CDMA, TDMA and FDMA technologies, simplified block diagram of mobile phone

handset, 2G, 3G and 4G concepts (qualitative only), GPS navigation system (qualitative idea

only.

(15 Lectures)


ELECTRONICS LAB: CC-3B LAB: COMMUNICATION

ELECTRONICS LAB



31





1. To design an Amplitude Modulator using Transistor

2. To study envelope detector for demodulation of AM signal

3. To study FM - Generator and Detector circuit

4. To study AM Transmitter and Receiver

5. To study FM Transmitter and Receiver

6. To study Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)

7. To study Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)

8. To study Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)

9. To study Pulse Position Modulation (PPM)

10. To study ASK, PSK and FSK modulators


Essential Readings

1. Electronic Communications, D. Roddy and J. Coolen, Pearson Education India.

2. Advanced Electronics Communication Systems- Tomasi, 6thEdn. Prentice Hall.

3. Modern Digital and Analog Communication Systems, B.P. Lathi, 4th Edition, 2011,


4. Electronic Communication systems, G. Kennedy, 3rd Edn., 1999, Tata McGraw Hill.

5. Principles of Electronic communication systems – Frenzel, 3rd edition, McGraw Hill

Additional Readings

1. Communication Systems, S. Haykin, 2006, Wiley India.

2. Wireless communications, Andrea Goldsmith, 2015, Cambridge University Press.


1. Electronic Communication system, Blake, Cengage, 5th edition.

2. Introduction to Communication systems, U. Madhow, 1st Edition, 2018, Cambridge

University Press.

32

CC-4B: Microprocessor and Microcontroller (42514413)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This paper introduces students with the architecture of microprocessor 8085 and

microcontroller 8051.

• Here, students will learn about the 8085 programming, subroutines, Timing and control

circuitry.

• Also, students will gain an exposure of 8051 I/O port programming and their addressing

modes.

• By the end of syllabus, students will have an introductory knowledge of embedded

systems.


After having this course one is expected to have understanding of :

• designing and developing embedded systems.

• major components that constitute an embedded system.

• the architecture of a 8085 Microprocessor.

• assembly language programming essentials

• a microcontroller, microcomputer embedded system.

• the architecture of a 8051 microcontroller and its concepts like I/O operations, interrupts,

programming of timers and counters.

• Interfacing of 8051 microcontroller with peripherals

• Implementing small programs to solve well-defined problems on an embedded platform.

Unit 1

Microcomputer Organization: Input/Output Devices. Data storage (idea of RAM and ROM).

Computer memory. Memory organization & addressing. Memory Interfacing. Memory Map.

(5 Lectures)

8085 Microprocessor Architecture: Main features of 8085. Block diagram. Pin-out diagram

of 8085. Data and address buses. Registers. ALU. Stack memory. Program counter.

(8 Lectures)

Unit 2

8085 Programming: Instruction classification, Instructions set (Data transfer including stacks.

Arithmetic, logical, branch, and control instructions). Subroutines, delay loops. Timing &

Control circuitry. Timing states. Instruction cycle, Timing diagram of MOV and MVI.

Hardware and software interrupts.

(10 Lectures)

33

Unit 3

8051 Microcontroller: Introduction and block diagram of 8051 microcontroller, architecture

of 8051, overview of 8051 family, 8051 assembly language programming, Program Counter

and ROM memory map, Data types and directives, Flag bits and Program Status Word (PSW)

register, Jump, loop and call instructions.

(12 Lectures)

8051 I/O port programming: Introduction of I/O port programming, pin out diagram of 8051

microcontroller, I/O port pins description & their functions, I/O port programming in 8051

(using assembly language), I/O programming: Bit manipulation.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 4

8051 Programming: 8051 addressing modes and accessing memory locations using various

addressing modes, assembly language instructions using each addressing mode, arithmetic and

logic instructions, 8051 programming in C: for time delay and I/O operations and manipulation,

for arithmetic and logic operations, for ASCII and BCD conversions.

(15 Lectures)

Unit 5

Introduction to embedded system: Embedded systems and general purpose computer

systems. Architecture of embedded system. Classifications, applications and purpose of

embedded systems.

(5 Lectures)


ELECTRONICS LAB: CC-4B LAB: MICROPROCESSOR AND

MICROCONTROLLER LAB






At least 06 experiments each from Section-A and Section-B

Section-A: Programs using 8085 Microprocessor

1. Addition and subtraction of numbers using direct addressing mode

2. Addition and subtraction of numbers using indirect addressing mode

3. Multiplication by repeated addition.

4. Division by repeated subtraction.

5. Handling of 16-bit Numbers.

6. Use of CALL and RETURN Instruction.

7. Block data handling.

8. Other programs (e.g. Parity Check, using interrupts, etc.).

34

Section-B: Experiments using 8051 Microcontroller

1. To find that the given numbers is prime or not.

2. To find the factorial of a number.

3. Write a program to make the two numbers equal by increasing the smallest number and

decreasing the largest number.

4. Use one of the four ports of 8051 for O/P interfaced to eight LED’s. Simulate binary

counter (8 bit) on LED’s .

5. Program to glow the first four LEDs then next four using TIMER application.

6. Program to rotate the contents of the accumulator first right and then left.

7. Program to run a countdown from 9-0 in the seven segment LED display.

8. To interface seven segment LED display with 8051 microcontroller and display ‘HELP’

in the seven segment LED display.

9. To toggle ‘1234’ as ‘1324’ in the seven segment LED display.

10. Interface stepper motor with 8051 and write a program to move the motor through a

given angle in clock wise or counter clockwise direction.

11. Application of embedded systems: Temperature measurement & display on LCD.


Essential Readings

1. Microprocessor Architecture Programming & applications with 8085, 2002, R.S.

Goankar, Prentice Hall.

2. Embedded Systems:Architecture, Programming & Design, Raj Kamal, 2008, Tata

McGraw Hill

3. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems Using Assembly and C, M.A. Mazidi,

J.G. Mazidi, and R.D. McKinlay, 2nd Ed., 2007, Pearson Education India.

4. Introduction to embedded system, K.V. Shibu, 1st edition, 2009, McGraw Hill

5. Microprocessors and Microcontrollers, Krishna Kant, 2nd Edition, 2016, PHI learning

Pvt. Ltd.

Additional Readings 1. Microprocessor and Microcontrollers, N. Senthil Kumar, 2010, Oxford University Press

2. Embedded Systems: Design & applications, S.F. Barrett, 2008, Pearson Education India

References for Laboratory 1. 8051 microcontrollers, Satish Shah, 2010, Oxford University Press.

2. Embedded Microcomputer systems: Real time interfacing, J.W.Valvano 2011, Cengage

Learning

35

9.2 DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC (PHYSICS ELECTIVE) SELECT TWO PAPERS

DSE-1B: Semiconductor Devices Fabrication (42517511)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This course provides a review of basics of semiconductors such as energy bands, doping,

defects etc. and introduces students to various semiconductor and memory devices.

• Thin film growth techniques and processes including various vacuum pumps, sputtering,

evaporation, oxidation and VLSI processing are described in detail.

• By the end of the syllabus, students will have an understanding of MEMS based

transducers.



• Learn to distinguish between single crystal, polycrystalline and amorphous materials

based on their structural morphology and learn about the growth of single crystals of

silicon, using Czocharalski technique, on which a present day electronics and IT

revolution is based.

• Students will understand about the various techniques of thin film growth and processes.

• Gain knowledge about characteristics of semiconductor devices (p-n junction diode,

MOS, MOSFET, TUNNEL diode)

• Understanding of characteristics of Volatile and Non Volatile memory element and their

classifications.

• Appreciate the various VLSI fabrication technologies and learn to design the basic

fabrication process of R, C, P- N Junction diode, BJT, JFET, MESFET, MOS, NMOS,

PMOS and CMOS technology.

• Gain basic knowledge on overview of MEMS (MicroElectro-Mechanical System) and

MEMS based transducers.

Unit 1

Introduction: Review of energy bands in materials. Metal, Semiconductor and Insulator.

Doping in Semiconductors, Defects: Point, Line, Schottky and Frenkel. Single Crystal,

Polycrystalline and Amorphous Materials. Czochralski technique for Silicon Single Crystal

Growth. Silicon Wafer Slicing and Polishing.

(5 Lectures)

Vacuum Pumps: Primary Pump (Mechanical) and Secondary Pumps (Diffusion, Turbo-

molecular, Cryopump, Sputter - Ion)– basic working principle, Throughput and Characteristics

in reference to Pump Selection. Vacuum Gauges (Pirani and Penning).

(6 Lectures)

36

Unit 2

Thin Film Growth Techniques and Processes: Sputtering, Evaporation (Thermal, electron-

Beam, Pulse Laser Deposition (PLD), Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD). Epitaxial Growth,

Deposition by Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE).

(9 Lectures)

Thermal Oxidation Process (Dry and Wet) Passivation. Metallization. Diffusion of Dopants.

Diffusion Profiles. Ion implantation.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 3

Semiconductor Devices: Review of p-n Junction diode, Metal-Semiconductor junction, Metal-

Oxide-Semiconductor (MOS) capacitor and its C-V characteristics, MOSFET (enhancement

and depletion mode) and its high Frequency limit. Microwave Devices: Tunnel diode.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 4

Memory Devices: Volatile Memory: Static and Dynamic Random Access Memory (RAM),

Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) and NMOS, Non-Volatile - NMOS

(MOST, FAMOS), Ferroelectric Memories, Optical Memories, Magnetic Memories, Charge

Coupled Devices (CCD).

(10 Lectures)

Unit 5

VLSI Processing: Introduction of Semiconductor Process Technology, Clean Room

Classification, Line width, Photolithography: Resolution and Process, Positive and Negative

Shadow Masks, Photoresist, Step Coverage, Developer. Electron Beam Lithography. Idea of

Nano-Imprint Lithography. Etching: Wet Etching. Dry etching (RIE and DRIE). Basic

Fabrication Process of R, C, P-N Junction diode, BJT, JFET, MESFET, MOS, NMOS, PMOS

and CMOS technology. Wafer Bonding, Wafer Cutting, Wire bonding and Packaging issues

(Qualitative idea).

(12 Lectures)

Unit 6

Micro Electro-Mechanical System (MEMS): Introduction to MEMS, Materials selection for

MEMS Devices, Selection of Etchants, Surface and Bulk Micromachining, Sacrificial

Subtractive Processes, Additive Processes, Cantilever, Membranes. General Idea MEMS based

Pressure, Force, and Capacitance Transducers.

(7 Lectures)


PRACTICALS-DSE-1B LAB: SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES

FABRICATION LAB



37





1. Fabrication of alloy p-n Junction diode and study its I-V Characteristics.

2. Study the output and transfer characteristics of MOSFET.

3. To design and plot the static & dynamic characteristics of digital CMOS inverter.

4. Create vacuum in a small tube (preferably of different volumes) using a Mechanical

rotary pump and measure pressure using vacuum gauges.

5. Deposition of Metal thin films/contacts on ceramic/thin using Thermal Evaporation and

study IV characteristics.

6. Selective etching of Different Metallic thin films using suitable etchants of different

concentrations.

7. Wet chemical etching of Si for MEMS applications using different concentration of

etchant.

8. Calibrate semiconductor type temperature sensor (AD590, LM 35, LM 75).

9. Quantum efficiency of CCDs.

10. To measure the resistivity of a semiconductor (Ge) crystal with temperature (up to 150C)

by four-probe method.

11. To fabricate a ceramic and study its capacitance using LCR meter.

12. To fabricate a thin film capacitor using dielectric thin films and metal contacts and study

its capacitance using LCR meter.

13. Study the linearity characteristics of (a) Pressure using capacitive transducer (b) Distance

using ultrasonic transducer


Essential Readings

1. Physics of Semiconductor Devices, S. M. Sze. Wiley-Interscience.

2. Handbook of Thin Film Technology, Leon I. Maissel and Reinhard Glang.

3. Fundamentals of Semiconductor Fabrication, S.M. Sze and G. S. May, John-Wiley and

Sons, Inc.

4. Introduction to Semiconductor materials and Devices, M. S. Tyagi, John Wiley & Sons

VLSI Fabrication Principles (Si and GaAs), S.K. Gandhi, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

References for Laboratory 1. The science and Engineering of Microelectronics Fabrication, Stephen A. Champbell,

2010, Oxford University Press.

2. Introduction to Semiconductor Devices, Kelvin F. Brennan, 2010, Cambridge University

Press.

38

DSE-1B : Electronic Instrumentation (42517512)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This course aims to provide an exposure on basics of measurement and instrumentation

and its various aspects and their usage through hands-on mode.

• It also aims to provide exposure of various measurement instruments such as power

supply, oscilloscope, multivibrators, signal generators are discussed in detail.

• It also aims to develop an understanding of virtual instrumentation and transducers.


At the end of this course, students will have understanding of:

• basic principles of the measurement and errors in measurement, specifications of basic

Measurement instruments and their significance with hands on mode.

• principles of voltage measurement, advantages of electronic voltmeter over conventional

multimeter in terms of sensitivity etc.

• measurement of impedance using bridges, Power supply, Filters, IC regulators and Load

and line regulation.

• Specifications of CRO and their significance, the use of CRO and DSO for the

measurement of voltage (dc and ac), frequency and time period.

• Multivibrators, working circuits of Astable and monostable multivibrators.

• Phase Locked Loop (PLL), Voltage controlled oscillators and lock-In amplifier.

• explanation and specifications of Signal and pulse Generators

• the Interfacing techniques, Audrino microcontroller & interfacing software,

Understanding and usage of Transducers.

Unit 1

Measurements: Accuracy and precision. Significant figures. Error and uncertainty analysis.

Shielding and grounding. Electromagnetic Interference.

(3 Lectures)

Basic Measurement Instruments: DC measurement-ammeter, voltmeter, ohm meter, AC

measurement, Digital voltmeter systems (integrating and non-integrating). Digital Multimeter;

Block diagram principle of measurement of I, V, C. Accuracy and resolution of measurement.

Measurement of Impedance- A.C. bridges, Measurement of Self Inductance (Anderson's

bridge), Measurement of Capacitance (De-Sauty’s bridge), Measurement of frequency (Wien's

bridge).

(12 Lectures)

39

Unit 2

Power supply: Block Diagram of a Power Supply, Qualitative idea of C and L Filters. IC

Regulators (78XX and 79XX), Line and load regulation, Short circuit protection. Idea of

switched mode power supply (SMPS) & uninterrupted power supply (UPS).

(4 Lectures)

Oscilloscope: Block Diagram, CRT, Vertical Deflection, Horizontal Deflection. Screens for

CRT, Oscilloscope probes, measurement of voltage, frequency and phase by Oscilloscope.

Digital Storage Oscilloscope. LCD display for instruments.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 3

Multivibrators (IC 555): Block diagram, Astable & Monostable multivibrator circuits. Phase

Locked Loop (PLL): Basic Principles, Phase detector (XOR & edge triggered), Voltage

Controlled Oscillator (Basics, varactor), lock and capture. Basic idea of PLL IC (565 or 4046).

Lock-in-amplifier (qualitative only).

(11 Lectures)

Signal Generators: Function generator, Pulse Generator(qualitative only).

(3 Lectures)

Unit 4

Virtual Instrumentation: Introduction, Interfacing techniques (RS 232, GPIB, USB). Idea

about Audrino microcontroller & interfacing software like lab View).

(5 Lectures)

Transducers: Classification of transducers, Basic requirement/characteristics of transducers,

Active and Passive transducers, Resistive (Potentiometer- Theory, temperature compensation

and applications), Capacitive (variable air gap type), Inductive (LVDT) and piezoelectric

transducers. Measurement of temperature (RTD, semiconductor IC sensors), Light transducers

(photo resistors & photovoltaic cells).

(12 Lectures)


PRACTICALS-DSE-1B LAB: ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION

LAB






At least 06 experiments from the following

1. Measurement of resistance by Wheatstone bridge and measurement of bridge sensitivity.

2. Measurement of Capacitance by De Sauty’s bridge.

40

3. To determine the Characteristics of resistance transducer - Strain Gauge (Measurement of

Strain using half and full bridge).

4. To determine the Characteristics of LVDT.

5. To determine the Characteristics of Thermistors and RTD.

6. Measurement of temperature by Thermocouples.

7. Design a regulated power supply of given rating (5 V or 9V).

8. To design an Astable Multivibrator of given specification using IC 555 Timer.

9. To design a Monostable Multivibrator of given specification using IC 555 Timer.

10. To design and study the Sample and Hold Circuit.

11. To plot the frequency response of a microphone.

12. Glow an LED via USB port of PC.

13. Sense the input voltage at a pin of USB port and subsequently glow the LED connected

with another pin of USB port.


Essential Readings

1. Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques, W.D. Cooper and A. D.

Helfrick, Prentice Hall (2005).

2. Measurement Systems: Application and Design, E.O.Doebelin, McGraw Hill Book - fifth

Edition (2003).

3. Electronic Devices and Circuits, David A. Bell, Oxford University Press (2015).

4. Instrumentation Devices and Systems, S. Rangan, G. R. Sarma and V. S. Mani, Tata

McGraw Hill(1998).


1. “Measurement and Instrumentation Principles”, Alan S. Morris, Elsevier (Butterworth

Heinmann-2008).

2. Basic Electronics: A text lab manual, P.B.Zbar, A.P.Malvino, M.A.Miller, 1990, Mc-

Graw Hill.

41

DSE-1B: Digital Signal Processing (42517513)

Credit : 06 (Theory-04, Practical-02)

Theory : 60 Hours

Practical : 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This paper describes the discrete-time signals and systems, Fourier Transform

Representation of Aperiodic Discrete-Time Signals.

• This paper also highlights the concept of filters and realization of Digital Filters.

• At the end of the syllabus, students will develop an understanding of Discrete and fast

Fourier Transform.


At the end of this course, students will be able to develop following learning outcomes:

• Students will learn basic discrete-time signal and system types, convolution sum, impulse

and frequency response concepts for linear time-invariant (LTI) systems.

• The student will be in position to understand use of different transforms and analyze the

discrete time signals and systems. They will learn to analyze a digital system using z-

transforms and discrete time Fourier transforms, region of convergence concepts, their

properties and perform simple transform calculations.

• The student will realize the use of LTI filters for filtering different real world signals. The

concept of transfer Function and difference-Equation System will be introduced. Also,

they will learn to solve Difference Equations.

• Students will develop an ability to analyze DSP systems like linear-phase, FIR, IIR, All-

pass, averaging and notch Filter etc.

• Students will be able to understand the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) and realize its

implementation using FFT techniques.

• Students will be able to learn the realization of digital filters, their structures, along with

their advantages and disadvantages. They will be able to design and understand different

types of digital filters such as finite & infinite impulse response filters for various

applications.

Unit 1

Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: Classification of Signals, Transformations of the

Independent Variable, Periodic and Aperiodic Signals, Energy and Power Signals, Even and

Odd Signals, Discrete-Time Systems, System Properties. Impulse Response, Convolution

Sum; Graphical Method; Analytical Method, Properties of Convolution; Commutative;

Associative; Distributive; Shift; Sum Property System Response to Periodic Inputs,

Relationship Between LTI System Properties and the Impulse Response; Causality; Stability;

Invertibility, Unit Step Response.

(10 Lectures)

42

Unit 2

Discrete-Time Fourier Transform: Fourier Transform Representation of Aperiodic Discrete-

Time Signals, Periodicity of DTFT, Properties; Linearity; Time Shifting; Frequency Shifting;

Differencing in Time Domain; Differentiation in Frequency Domain; Convolution Property.

The z-Transform: Bilateral (Two-Sided) z-Transform, Inverse z- Transform, Relationship

Between z-Transform and Discrete-Time Fourier Transform, z-plane, Region-of- Convergence;

Properties of ROC, Properties; Time Reversal; Differentiation in the z-Domain; Power Series

Expansion Method (or Long Division Method); Analysis and Characterization of LTI Systems;

Transfer Function and Difference-Equation System. Solving Difference Equations.

(15 Lectures)

Unit 3

Filter Concepts: Phase Delay and Group delay, Zero-Phase Filter, Linear-Phase Filter, Simple

FIR Digital Filters, Simple IIR Digital Filters, All pass Filters, Averaging Filters, Notch Filters.

(5 Lectures)

Discrete Fourier Transform: Frequency Domain Sampling (Sampling of DTFT), The

Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and its Inverse, DFT as a Linear transformation, Properties;

Periodicity; Linearity; Circular Time Shifting; Circular Frequency Shifting; Circular Time

Reversal; Multiplication Property; Parseval’s Relation, Linear Convolution Using the DFT

(Linear Convolution Using Circular Convolution), Circular Convolution as Linear Convolution

with aliasing.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 4

Fast Fourier Transform: Direct Computation of the DFT, Symmetry and Periodicity

Properties of the Twiddle factor (WN), Radix-2 FFT Algorithms; Decimation-In-Time (DIT)

FFT Algorithm; Decimation-In-Frequency (DIF) FFT Algorithm, Inverse DFT Using FFT

Algorithms.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 5

Realization of Digital Filters: Non Recursive and Recursive Structures, Canonic and Non

Canonic Structures, Equivalent Structures (Transposed Structure), FIR Filter structures; Direct-

Form; Cascade-Form; Basic structures for IIR systems; Direct-Form I.

Finite Impulse Response Digital Filter: Advantages and Disadvantages of Digital Filters,

Types of Digital Filters: FIR and IIR Filters; Difference Between FIR and IIR Filters,

Desirability of Linear-Phase Filters, Frequency Response of Linear-Phase FIR Filters, Impulse

Responses of Ideal Filters, Windowing Method; Rectangular; Triangular; Kaiser Window, FIR

Digital Differentiators.

Infinite Impulse Response Digital Filter: Design of IIR Filters from Analog Filters, IIR Filter

Design by Approximation of Derivatives, Backward Difference Algorithm, Impulse Invariance

Method.

(15 Lectures)

PRACTICAL (60 Hours, 2 Credits)

PRACTICALS-DSE-1B LAB: DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB

"Introduction to Numerical computation software Scilab/Matlab be introduced in the lab.

43



to the specific experiments done in the lab”

At least 06 experiments from the following using Scilab/Matlab.

1. Write a program to generate and plot the following sequences: (a) Unit sample sequence

, (b) unit step sequence , (c) ramp sequence , (d) real valued exponential

sequence for

2. Write a program to compute the convolution sum of a rectangle signal (or gate function)

with itself for N = 5

3. An LTI system is specified by the difference equation

(a) Determine

(b) Calculate and plot the steady state response to

4. Given a casual system

(a) Find and sketch its pole-zero plot

(b) Plot the frequency response and

5. Design a digital filter to eliminate the lower frequency sinusoid of

The sampling frequency is Plot its pole zero

diagram, magnitude response, input and output of the filter.

6. Let be a 4-point sequence:

Compute the DTFT and plot its magnitude

(a) Compute and plot the 4 point DFT of

(b) Compute and plot the 8 point DFT of (by appending 4 zeros)

(c) Compute and plot the 16 point DFT of (by appending 12 zeros

7. Let and be the two 4-point sequences,

Write a program to compute their linear convolution using circular convolution.

8. Using a rectangular window, design a FIR low-pass filter with a pass-band gain of unity,

cut off frequency of 1000 Hz and working at a sampling frequency of 5 KHz. Take the

length of the impulse response as 17.

9. Design an FIR filter to meet the following specifications:

Passband edge

Stopband edge

Passband attenuation

44

Stopband attenuation

Sampling frequency

10. The frequency response of a linear phase digital differentiator is given by

Using a Hamming window of length M = 21, design a digital FIR differentiator. Plot the

amplitude response.


Essential Readings

1. Digital Signal Processing, Tarun Kumar Rawat, 2015, Oxford University Press, India

2. Digital Signal Processing, S. K. Mitra, McGraw Hill, India.

3. Principles of Signal Processing and Linear Systems, B.P. Lathi, 2009, 1st Edn. Oxford

University Press.

4. Fundamentals of signals and systems, P.D. Cha and J.I. Molinder, 2007, Cambridge

University Press.

5. Digital Signal Processing Principles Algorithm & Applications, J.G. Proakis and D.G.

Manolakis, 2007, 4th Edn., Prentice Hall.

Additional Readings

1. Digital Signal Processing, A. Anand Kumar, 2nd Edition, 2016, PHI learning Private

Limited.

2. Digital Signal Processing, Paulo S.R. Diniz, Eduardo A.B. da Silva, Sergio L .Netto, 2nd

Edition, 2017, Cambridge University Press.

References for Laboratory 1. A Guide to MATLAB, B.R. Hunt, R.L. Lipsman, J.M. Rosenberg, 2014, 3rd Edn.,


2. Fundamentals of Digital Signal processing using MATLAB, R.J. Schilling and S.L.

Harris, 2005, Cengage Learning.

3. Getting started with MATLAB, Rudra Pratap, 2010, Oxford University Press.

45

DSE-2B: Verilog and FPGA based system Design (42517614)

Credit : 06 (Theory-04, Practical-02)

Theory : 60 Hours

Practical : 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This paper provides a review of combinational and sequential circuits such as

multiplexers, demultiplexers, decoders, encoders and adder circuits.

• Evolution of Programmable logic devices such as PAL, PLA and GAL is explained.

• At the end of the syllabus, students will be able to understand the modeling of

combinational and sequential circuits (including FSM and FSMD) with Verilog Design.


This paper discusses the fundamental Verilog concepts in-lieu of today's most advanced digital

design techniques. At the end of this course, students will be able to develop following learning

outcomes:

• Understand the steps and processes for design of logic circuits and systems.

• Be able to differentiate between combinational and sequential circuits.

• Be able to design various types of state machines.

• Be able to partition a complex logic system into elements of data-path and control path.

• Understand various types of programmable logic building blocks such as CPLDs and

FPGAs and their tradeoffs.

• Be able to write synthesizable Verilog code.

• Be able to write a Verilog test bench to test various Verilog code modules.

• Be able to design, program and test logic systems on a programmable logic device

(CPLD or FPGA) using Verilog.

Unit 1

Digital logic design flow. Review of combinational circuits. Combinational building blocks:

multiplexors, demultiplexers, decoders, encoders and adder circuits. Review of sequential

circuit elements: flip-flop, latch and register. Finite state machines: Mealy and Moore. Other

sequential circuits: shift registers and counters. FSMD (Finite State Machine with Datapath):

design and analysis. Microprogrammed control. Memory basics and timing. Programmable

Logic devices.

(20 lectures)

Unit 2

Evolution of Programmable logic devices. PAL, PLA and GAL. CPLD and FPGA

architectures. Placement and routing. Logic cell structure, Programmable interconnects, Logic

blocks and I/O Ports. Clock distribution in FPGA. Timing issues in FPGA design. Boundary

scan.

(20 lectures)

Unit 3

46

Verilog HDL: Introduction to HDL. Verilog primitive operators and structural Verilog

Behavioral Verilog. Design verification. Modeling of combinational and sequential circuits

(including FSM and FSMD) with Verilog Design examples in Verilog.

(20 lectures)


PRACTICALS-DSE-2B LAB: VERILOG AND FPGA LAB







1. Write code to realize basic and derived logic gates.

2. Half adder, Full Adder using basic and derived gates.

3. Half subtractor and Full Subtractor using basic and derived gates.

4. Design and simulation of a 4 bit Adder.

5. Multiplexer (4x1) and Demultiplexer using logic gates.

6. Decoder and Encoder using logic gates.

7. Clocked D, JK and T Flip flops (with Reset inputs).

8. 3-bit Ripple counter.

9. To design and study switching circuits (LED blink shift).

10. To design traffic light controller.

11. To interface a keyboard.

12. To interface a LCD using FPGA.

13. To interface multiplexed seven segment display.

14. To interface a stepper motor and DC motor.

15. To interface ADC 0804.


Essential Readings

1. Principles of Digital Systems Design and VHDL, Lizy Kurien and Charles Roth;

Cengage Publishing. ISBN-13:978-8131505748.

2. Verilog HDL, Samir Palnitkar, Pearson Education; Second edition (2003).

3. FPGA Based System Design, Wayne Wolf; Pearson Education,

4. Digital Signal processing, S. K. Mitra; McGraw Hill, 1998

5. VLSI design, Debaprasad Das; Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition, 2015.

Additional Readings

1. Digital Signal Processing with FPGAs, U. Meyer Baese; Springer, 2004

2. Verilog HDL primer- J. Bhasker. BSP, 2003

47


1. Digital System Designs and Practices: Using Verilog HDL and FPGAs, Ming-Bo Lin;

Wiley India Pvt Ltd. ISBN-13: 978-8126536948.

2. Verilog Digital System Design, Zainalabedin Navabi; TMH; 2nd edition. ISBN-13: 978-

0070252219.

3. Designing Digital Computer Systems with Verilog, D.J. Laja and S. Sapatnekar;

Cambridge University Press, 2015.

DSE-2B: Photonic devices and Power Electronics (42517615)


Theory: 60 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This paper provides an insight on photonic devices such as Light Emitting Diodes,

Semiconductor Laser, Laser diode, Photodetectors, Solar cell etc.

• Also, students will learn about LCD displays, their advantages over LED displays,

evolution, elements, modes and configurations of optical fiber system.

• Emphasis is being laid to introduce students to power electronics, its need and

applications.



• Develop understanding of application of fundamental laws of physics in such

optoelectronics areas as telecommunications and power electronics for automation in

industries.

• Acquire essential laboratory skills in designing experiments, assembling standard optical

tools for optical experimentation and power electronics and analyzing acquired data.

• Identify the critical areas in application levels and derive typical alternative solutions,

select suitable power converters to control Electrical Motors and other industry grade

apparatus.

• Develop understanding to compare performance and basic operation of various power

semiconductor devices, passive components and various switching circuits.

• Develop understanding of Basic circuit of power rectifiers and inverters.

Unit 1

Classification of photonic devices : Interaction of radiation and matter, Radiative transition

and optical absorption. Light Emitting Diodes- Construction, materials and operation.

48

Semiconductor Laser- Condition for amplification, laser cavity, hetero-structure and quantum

well devices. Charge carrier and photon confinement, line shape function. Threshold current.

Laser diode.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 2

Photodetectors: Photoconductor. Photodiodes (p-i-n, avalanche) and Photo transistors,

quantum efficiency and responsivity. Photomultiplier tube.

(5 Lectures)

Solar Cell: Construction, working and characteristics.

(2 Lectures)

LCD Displays: Types of liquid crystals, Principle of Liquid Crystal Displays, applications,

advantages over LED displays.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 3

Introduction to Fiber Optics: Evolution of fiber optic system- Element of an Optical Fiber

Transmission link- Ray Optics-Optical Fiber Modes and Configurations-Mode theory of

Circular Wave guides- Overview of Modes-Key Modal concepts- Linearly Polarized Modes -

Single Mode Fibers-Graded Index fiber structure.

(13 Lectures)

Unit 4

Power Devices: Need for semiconductor power devices, Power MOSFET (Qualitative).

Introduction to family of thyristors. Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR)- structure, I-V

characteristics, Turn-On and Turn-Off characteristics, ratings, Gate-triggering circuits. Diac

and Triac- Basic structure, working and V-I characteristics. Application of Diac as a triggering

device for Triac.

(10 Lectures)

Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT): Basic structure, I-V Characteristics, switching

characteristics, device limitations and safe operating area (SOA).

(2 Lectures)

Unit 5

Applications of SCR: Phase controlled rectification, AC voltage control using SCR and Triac

as a switch. Power Invertors- Need for commutating circuits and their various types, dc link

invertors, Parallel capacitor commutated invertors, Series Invertor, limitations and its improved

versions, bridge invertors.

(12 Lectures)

PRACTICAL (60 Hours, 2 Credits)

PRACTICALS-DSE-2B LAB: PHOTONIC DEVICES AND POWER

ELECTRONICS LAB



49





1. To determine wavelength of sodium light using Michelson’s Interferometer.

2. Diffraction experiments using a laser.

3. Study of Electro-optic Effect.

4. To determine characteristics of (a) LEDs, (b) Photo voltaic cell and (c) Photo diode.

5. To study the Characteristics of LDR and Photodiode with (i) Variable Illumination

intensity, and (ii) Linear Displacement of source.

6. To measure the numerical aperture of an optical fiber.

7. Output and transfer characteristics of a power MOSFET.

8. Study of I-V characteristics of SCR.

9. SCR as a half wave and full wave rectifiers with R and RL loads.

10. AC voltage controller using TRIAC with UJT triggering.

11. Study of I-V characteristics of DIAC.

12. Study of I-V characteristics of TRIAC


Essential Readings

1. Optoelectronics, J. Wilson and J.F.B. Hawkes, Prentice Hall India (1996).

2. Optoelectronics and Photonics, S.O. Kasap, Pearson Education (2009).

3. Electronic Devices and Circuits, David A. Bell, 2015, Oxford University Press.

4. Introduction to fiber optics, A.K. Ghatak & K. Thyagarajan,Cambridge University

Press(1998).

5. Power Electronics, M.D. Singh & K.B. Khanchandani, Tata McGraw Hill.


1. Power Electronics, P.C. Sen, Tata McGraw Hill.

2. Power Electronics Circuits, Devices & Applications, 3rd Edn., M.H.Rashid, Pearson

Education.

3. A Textbook of Electrical Technology,Vol-II, B.L.Thareja, A.K.Thareja, S.Chand.

50

DSE-2B: Antenna Theory and wireless Network (42517616)

Credit : 06 (Theory-05, Tutorial-01)

Theory : 75 Hours

Course Objective

• This course gives an overview of wireless communication elements and networks.

• Students will develop an understanding of basics of antenna, its various parameters, its

usage as a transmitter and receiver.

• Cellular concept and system design fundamentals are described and the evolution of

current wireless systems real world such as 2G, 3G, 4G and LTE networks is discussed.



• Identify basic antenna parameter (Radiating wire Structures).

• Determine directions of maximum signal radiations and the nulls in the radiation patterns.

• Design array antenna systems from specifications.

• Identify the characteristics of radio-wave propagation.

• Identify Wireless Networks 4G and LTE, and 5G.

• Design Cellular Systems

Unit 1

ANTENNA THEORY:

Introduction: Antenna as an element of wireless communication system, Antenna radiation

mechanism, Types of Antennas, Fundamentals of EMFT: Maxwell’s equations and their

applications to antennas.

(7 Lectures)

Antenna Parameters: Antenna parameters: Radiation pattern (polarization patterns, Field and

Phase patterns), Field regions around antenna, Radiation intensity, Beam width, Gain,

Directivity, Polarization, Bandwidth, Efficiency and Antenna temperature.

(9 Lectures)

Unit 2

Antenna as a Transmitter/Receiver: Effective Height and Aperture, Power delivered to antenna,

Input impedance. Radiation from an infinitesimal small current element, Radiation from an

elementary dipole (Hertzian dipole), Reactive, Induction and Radiation fields, Power density

and radiation resistance for small current element and half wave dipole antenna.

(12 Lectures)

Unit 3

Radiating wire Structures (Qualitative idea only): Monopole, Dipole, Folded dipole, Loop

antenna and Biconical broadband Antenna. Basics of Patch Antenna and its design. Examples

of Patch antenna like bowtie, sectoral, fractal, etc.

(6 Lectures)

51

Propagation of Radio Waves: Different modes of propagation: Ground waves, Space waves,

Space Wave propagation over flat and curved earth, Optical and Radio Horizons, Surface

Waves and Troposphere waves, Ionosphere, Wave propagation in the Ionosphere. Critical

Frequency, Maximum usable frequency (MUF), Skips distance. Virtual height. Radio noise of

terrestrial and extraterrestrial origin. Elementary idea of propagation of waves used in

terrestrial mobile communications.

(9 Lectures)

Unit 4

WIRELESS NETWORKS:

Introduction: History of wireless communication, Wireless Generation and Standards,

Cellular and Wireless Systems, Current Wireless Systems, Cellular Telephone Systems, Wide

Area Wireless Data Services, Broadband Wireless Access, Satellite Networks, Examples of

Wireless Communication Systems. Idea about Global Mobile communication system.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 5

Modern Wireless Communication Systems: Second Generation (2G) Cellular Networks,

Third Generation (3G) Wireless Networks, Wireless Local Loop (WLL), Wireless Local Area

Networks (WLANs), Bluetooth and Personal Area Networks (PANs). Idea about Wi-Fi, 4G

and LTE, and 5G.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 6

Cellular Concept and System Design Fundamentals: Cellular Concept and Cellular System

Fundamentals, Frequency Reuse, Channel Assignment Strategies, Handoff strategies,

Interference and System Capacity, Trunking and Grade of Service. Improving Coverage &

Capacity in Cellular Systems. Cell Splitting and Sectoring. Cellular Systems design

Considerations (Qualitative idea only).

(12 Lectures)


Essential Readings

1. Antenna Theory, Ballanis; John Wiley & Sons, (2003) 2nd Ed.

2. Electro Magnetic Waves and Radiating Systems, Jordan and Balmain, E. C.; PHI,

1968 Reprint (2003) 3rd Ed.

3. Fundamentals of Wireless Communication, D. Tse and P. Viswanathan; (2014)


4. Wireless communication and Networks, Upena Dalal, 2015, Oxford University Press.

5. Mobile Communication Design and Fundamentals, Lee, William C.Y.; (1999) 4th Ed.

Additional Readings

1. Wireless communications, Andrea Goldsmith; (2015) Cambridge University Press.

2. Modern Wireless Communication, Haykin S. & Moher M. Pearson, (2005) 3rd Ed.

52

DSE-2B: Dissertation (42517617)

Credit: 08

Course Objective

Dissertation involves project work with the intention of exposing the student to research

/development. It involves open ended learning based on student ability and initiative,

exposure to scientific writing and inculcation of ethical practices in research and

communication.


• exposure to research methodology

• picking up skills relevant to dissertation project, such as experimental skills in the

subject, computational skills, etc.

• development of creative ability and intellectual initiative

• developing the ability for scientific writing

• becoming conversant with ethical practices in acknowledging other sources, avoiding

plagiarism, etc.

Guidelines for dissertation:

1. The dissertation work should not be a routine experiment or project at the under graduate

level. It should involve more than text book knowledge. Referring text books for

preparation and understanding concepts is allowed; however one component of the

dissertation must include study of research papers or equivalent research material and/or

open ended project.

2. The total number of dissertations allowed should be limited to 5% of the total strength of

the students in the programme. However, students having national scholarships like

NTSE, KVPY, INSPIRE, etc. can be considered above this quota. The selection criterion

is at the discretion of the college. The student should not have any academic backlog

(Essential Repeat). The sole/single supervisor must have a Ph.D. degree. Not more than

two candidates would be enrolled under same supervisor.

3. At the time of submission of teaching work-load of the teachers by the college to the

Department (Department of Physics and Astrophysics, Delhi University), the supervisor

shall submit the proposal (200-300 words; not more than one full A4 page) of the

proposed dissertation. Along with that four names of the external examiners from any

college of Delhi University (other than the own college of the supervisor) or any

department of Delhi University can be suggested. The committee of courses of the

department may appoint any one teacher as an external examiner from the proposed list

of external examiners.

4. No topic would be repeated from the topics allotted by the supervisor in the previous

years, so that the work or dissertation could be distinct every time. The ‘proposal’ should

include the topic, plan of work, and clearly state the expected deliverables. The topic

must be well defined. The abstract should clearly explain the significance of the

suggested problem. It must emphasize the specific skills which the student shall be

learning during the course of dissertation, for example, some computational skill or

literature survey, etc. Both internal (supervisor) and external examiners will assess the

student at the end of the semester and award marks jointly, according to the attached

scheme.

53

5. Other than the time for pursuing dissertation work, there must be at least 2 hours of

interaction per week, of the student with the supervisor. The student has to maintain a

“Log Book” to summarize his/ her weekly progress which shall be duly signed by the

supervisor. Experimental work should be carried out in the parent college or any other

college or the Department in Delhi University with the consent of a faculty member there.

Unsupervised work carried out at research institutions / laboratories is to be discouraged.

6. The dissertation report should be of around 30 pages. It must have minimum three

chapters namely (1) Introduction, (2) the main work including derivations /

experimentation and Results, and (3) Discussion and Conclusion. At the end, adequate

references must be included. Plagiarism should be avoided by the student and this should

be checked by the supervisor.

7. It is left to the discretion of the college if it can allow relaxation of two teaching periods

(at the most two periods per week to the supervisor, irrespective of the number of

students enrolled under him / her for dissertation). The evaluation/presentation of the

dissertation must be done within two weeks after the exams are over. For the interest of

the students it is advised that college may organize a workshop for creating awareness

amongst students. Any teacher who is not Ph.D. holder can be Co-supervisor with the

main supervisor.

Assessment of dissertation

MARKING SCHEME for Dissertation:

• 30 marks: Internal assessment based on performance like sincerity, regularity, etc.

Awarded by: Supervisor

• 40 marks:Written Report (including content and quality of work done). Awarded by:

Supervisor and External Examiner.

• 30 marks: Presentation*. Awarded by: Supervisor and External Examiner.

*All Dissertation presentations should be open. Other students / faculty should be encouraged

to attend.

54

9.3 SKILL- ENHANCEMENT COURSES - (SEC)

# Students should not take the same SEC paper in different

Semesters

SEC: Computational Physics Skills (32223902)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This course is intended to give an insight into computers and their scientific applications.

• To familiarize students with use of computer to solve physics problems.

• To teach a programming language namely FORTRAN and data visualization using

Gnuplot. To teach them to prepare long formatted document using latex.

Course Learning Outcomes Students will be able to • Use computers for solving problems in Physics.

• Prepare algorithm and flowchart for solving a problem.

• Use Linux commands on terminal

• Use an unformatted editor to write sources codes.

• Learn “Scientific Word Processing”, in particular, using LaTeX for preparing articles,

papers etc. which include mathematical equations, picture and tables.

• Learn the basic commands of Gnuplot.

Unit 1

Introduction: Importance of computers in Physics, paradigm for solving physics problems.

Usage of editor in Linux.

Algorithms and Flowcharts: Algorithm: Definition, properties and development. Flowchart:

Concept of flowchart, symbols, guidelines, types. Examples: Cartesian to Spherical Polar

Coordinates, Roots of Quadratic Equation, Sum of two matrices, Sum and Product of a finite

series, calculation of sin(x) as a series, algorithm for plotting (1) Lissajous figures and (2)

trajectory of a projectile thrown at an angle with the horizontal.

(4 Lectures)

Scientific Programming: Some fundamental Linux Commands (Internal and External

commands). Development of FORTRAN, Basic elements of FORTRAN: Character Set,

Constants and their types, Variables and their types, Keywords, Variable Declaration and

concept of instruction and program. Operators: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical and Assignment

Operators. Expressions: Arithmetic, Relational, Logical, Character and Assignment

Expressions. Fortran Statements: I/O Statements (unformatted/formatted), Executable and Non-

Executable Statements, Layout of Fortran Program, Format of writing Program and concept of

coding, Initialization and Replacement Logic. Examples from physics problems.

55

(5 Lectures)

Unit 2

Control Statements: Types of Logic(Sequential, Selection, Repetition), Branching Statements

(Logical IF, Arithmetic IF, Block IF, Nested Block IF, SELECT CASE and ELSE IF Ladder

statements), Looping Statements (DO- CONTINUE, DO-ENDDO, DO-WHILE, Implied and

Nested DO Loops), Jumping Statements (Unconditional GOTO, Computed GOTO, Assigned

GOTO) Subscripted Variables (Arrays: Types of Arrays, DIMENSION Statement, Reading

and Writing Arrays), Functions and Subroutines (Arithmetic Statement Function, Function

Subprogram and Subroutine), RETURN, CALL, COMMON and EQUIVALENCE

Statements), Structure, Disk I/O Statements, open a file, writing in a file, reading from a file.

Examples from physics problems.

Programming:

1. Exercises on syntax on usage of FORTRAN

2. Usage of GUI Windows, Linux Commands, familiarity with DOS commands and

working in an editor to write sources codes in FORTRAN.

3. To print out all natural even/ odd numbers between given limits.

4. To find maximum, minimum and range of a given set of numbers.

5. Calculating Euler number using exp(x) series evaluated at x=1

(6 Lectures)

Unit 3

Scientific word processing: Introduction to LaTeX: TeX/LaTeX word processor, preparing a

basic LaTeX file, Document classes, Preparing an input file for LaTeX, Compiling LaTeX File,

LaTeX tags for creating different environments, Defining LaTeX commands and environments,

Changing the type style, Symbols from other languages. Equation representation: Formulae and

equations, Figures and other floating bodies, Lining in columns- Tabbing and tabular

environment, Generating table of contents, bibliography and citation, Making an index and

glossary, List making environments, Fonts, Picture environment and colors, errors.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 4

Visualization: Introduction to graphical analysis and its limitations. Introduction to Gnuplot.

importance of visualization of computational and computational data, basic Gnuplot

commands: simple plots, plotting data from a file, saving and exporting, multiple data sets per

file, physics with Gnuplot (equations, building functions, user defined variables and functions),

Understanding data with Gnuplot.

(9 Lectures)

PRACTICAL ( 60 Hours)

PRACTICALS: SEC LAB : COMPUTATIONAL PHYSICS SKILLS LAB




Teacher may give a long duration project based on this paper.

56

Hands on exercises: (Use of latest FORTRAN compiler is advisable.)

1. To compile a frequency distribution and evaluate mean, standard deviation etc.

2. To evaluate sum of finite series and the area under a curve.

3. To find the product of two matrices

4. To find a set of prime numbers and Fibonacci series.

5. To write program to open a file and generate data for plotting using Gnuplot.

6. Plotting trajectory of a projectile projected horizontally.

7. Plotting trajectory of a projectile projected making an angle with the horizontally.

8. Creating an input Gnuplot file for plotting a data and saving the output for seeing on the

screen. Saving it as an eps file and as a pdf file.

9. To find the roots of a quadratic equation.

10. Motion of a projectile using simulation and plot the output for visualization.

11. Numerical solution of equation of motion of simple harmonic oscillator and plot the

outputs for visualization.

12. Motion of particle in a central force field and plot the output for visualization.

References

Essential Readings


2. LaTeX–A Document Preparation System, Leslie Lamport (Second Edition, Addison-

Wesley, 1994).

3. Gnuplot in action: understanding data with graphs, Philip K Janert, (Manning 2010)

4. Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Programming with Fortran, S Lipsdutz and

A Poe, 1986 Mc-Graw Hill Book Co.

5. Computational Physics: An Introduction, R. C. Verma, et al. New Age International

Publishers, New Delhi(1999)

6. Elementary Numerical Analysis, K. E. Atkinson, 3rd Edn., 2007, Wiley India Edition.

Additional Readings

1. Computer Programming in Fortran 77. V. Rajaraman (Publisher:PHI).

2. Computational Physics - A practical Introduction to computational Physics and Scientific

Computing; by Konstantinos N. Anagnostopoulos

57

SEC: Electrical Circuits and Network Skills (32223903)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• To develop an understanding of basic principles of electricity and its household

applications.

• To impart basic knowledge of solid state devices and its applications, understanding of

electrical wiring and installation.



• Demonstrate good comprehension of basic principles of electricity including ideas about

voltage, current and resistance.

• Develop the capacity to analyze and evaluate schematics of power efficient electrical

circuits while demonstrating insight into tracking of interconnections within elements

while identifying current flow and voltage drop.

• Gain knowledge about generators, transformers and electric motors. The knowledge

would include to interfacing aspects and consumer defined control of speed and power.

• Acquire capacity to work theoretically and practically with solid-state devices.

• Delve into practical aspects related to electrical wiring like various types of conductors

and cables, wiring-Star and delta connections, voltage drop and losses.

• Measure current, voltage, power in DC and AC circuits acquire proficiency in fabrication

of regulated power supply.

• Develop capacity to identify and suggest types and sizes of solid and stranded cables,

conduit lengths, cable trays, splices, crimps, terminal blocks and solder.

Unit 1

Basic Electricity Principles: Voltage, Current, Resistance, and Power. Ohm's law.Series,

parallel, and series-parallel combinations. AC and DC Electricity. Familiarization with

multimeter, voltmeter and ammeter.

(3 Lectures)

Electrical Circuits: Basic electric circuit elements and their combination. Rules to analyze DC

sourced electrical circuits. Current and voltage drop across the DC circuit elements. Single-

phase and three-phase alternating current sources. Rules to analyze AC sourced electrical

circuits. Real, imaginary and complex power components of AC source. Power factor. Saving

energy and money.

(4 Lectures)

58

Electrical Drawing and Symbols: Drawing symbols. Blueprints. Reading Schematics. Ladder

diagrams. Electrical Schematics. Power circuits. Control circuits. Reading of circuit

schematics. Tracking the connections of elements and identify current flow and voltage drop.

(4 Lectures)

Generators and Transformers: DC Power sources. AC/DC generators. Inductance, capacitance,

and impedance. Operation of transformers.

(2 Lectures)

Electric Motors: Single-phase, three-phase & DC motors. Basic design. Interfacing DC or AC

sources to control heaters and motors. Speed & power of ac motor.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 2

Solid-State Devices: Resistors, inductors and capacitors. Diode and rectifiers.Components in

Series or in shunt. Response of inductors and capacitors with DC or AC sources.

(3 Lectures)

Electrical Protection: Relays. Fuses and disconnect switches. Circuit breakers. Overload

devices. Ground-fault protection. Grounding and isolating. Phase reversal. Surge protection.

Relay protection device.

(3 Lectures)

Electrical Wiring: Different types of conductors and cables. Basics of wiring-Star and delta

connection. Voltage drop and losses across cables and conductors. Instruments to measure

current, voltage, power in DC and AC circuits. Insulation. Solid and stranded cable. Conduit.

Cable trays. Splices: wirenuts, crimps, terminal blocks, and solder. Preparation of extension

board.

(5 Lectures)

Network Theorems: (1) Thevenin' theorem (2) Norton theorem (3) Superposition theorem (4)

Maximum Power Transfer theorem.

(3 Lectures)








At least 08 Experiments from the following:

1. Series and Parallel combinations: Verification of Kirchoff’s law.

2. To verify network theorems: (I) Thevenin (II) Norton (III) Superposition theorem (IV)

Maximum power transfer theorem

3. To study frequency response curve of a Series LCR circuit.

4. To verify: (1) Faraday’s law and (2) Lenz’s law.

5. Programming with Pspice/NG spice.

59

6. Demonstration of AC and DC generator.

7. Speed of motor

8. To study the characteristics of a diode.

9. To study rectifiers (I) Half wave (II) Full wave rectifier (III) Bridge rectifier

10. Power supply (I) C-filter, (II) π- filter

11. Transformer – Step up and Step down

12. Preparation of extension board with MCB/fuse, switch, socket-plug, Indicator.

13. Fabrication of Regulated power supply.

It is further suggested that students may be motivated to pursue semester long dissertation

wherein he/she may do a hands-on extensive project based on the extension of the practicals

enumerated above.


Essential Readings

1. Electrical Circuits, K.A. Smith and R.E. Alley, 2014, Cambridge University Press

2. Performance and design of AC machines - M G Say ELBS Edn.

3. Electronic Devices and Circuits, A Mothershead, 1998, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

4. Network, Lines and Files, John D. Ryder, V Perarson 2nd Edn.,2015.


1. A text book in Electrical Technology - B L Theraja - S Chand & Co.

2. Electrical Circuit Analysis, K. Mahadevan and C. Chitran, 2nd Edition, 2018, PHI

learning Pvt. Ltd.

SEC: Renewable Energy and Energy Harvesting (32223905)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• To impart knowledge and hands on learning about various alternate energy sources.

• This paper describes the ways of harvesting energy using wind, solar, mechanical, ocean,

geothermal energy and so on. To review the working of various energy harvesting systems

which are installed worldwide.



60

• Knowledge of various sources of energy for harvesting

• Understand the need of energy conversion and the various methods of energy storage

• A good understanding of various renewable energy systems, and its components.

• Knowledge about renewable energy technologies, different storage technologies,

distribution grid, smart grid including sensors, regulation and their control.

• Design the model for sending the wind energy or solar energy plant.

• The students will gain hand on experience of:

(i) different kinds of alternative energy sources,

(ii) conversion of vibration into voltage using piezoelectric materials,

(iii) conversion of thermal energy into voltage using thermoelectric modules.

Unit 1

Fossil fuels and Alternate Sources of energy: Fossil fuels and nuclear energy, their

limitation, need of renewable energy, non-conventional energy sources. An overview of

developments in Offshore Wind Energy, Tidal Energy, Wave energy systems, Ocean Thermal

Energy Conversion, solar energy, biomass, biochemical conversion, bio-gas generation,

geothermal energy tidal energy, Hydroelectricity.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 2

Solar energy: Solar energy, its importance, storage of solar energy, solar pond, non-convective

solar pond, applications of solar pond and solar energy, solar water heater, flat plate collector,

solar distillation, solar cooker, solar green houses, solar cell, absorption air conditioning. Need

and characteristics of photo-voltaic (PV) systems, PV models and equivalent circuits, and sun

tracking systems.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 3

Wind Energy harvesting: Fundamentals of Wind energy, Wind Turbines and different

electrical machines in wind turbines, Power electronic interfaces, and grid interconnection

topologies.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 4

Ocean Energy: Ocean Energy Potential against Wind and Solar, Wave Characteristics and

Statistics, Wave Energy Devices. Tide characteristics and Statistics, Tide Energy Technologies,

Ocean Thermal Energy, Osmotic Power, Ocean Bio-mass.

Geothermal Energy: Geothermal Resources, Geothermal Technologies.

Hydro Energy: Hydropower resources, hydropower technologies, environmental impact of

hydro power sources. Rain water harvesting.

(9 Lectures)

Unit 5

Piezoelectric Energy harvesting: Introduction, Physics and characteristics of piezoelectric

effect, materials and mathematical description of piezo-electricity, Piezoelectric parameters and

modeling piezoelectric generators, Piezoelectric energy harvesting applications, Human power.

Electromagnetic Energy Harvesting: Linear generators, physical/mathematical models,

recent applications Carbon captured technologies, cell, batteries, power consumption

61

Environmental issues and Renewable sources of energy, sustainability. Merits of Rain Water

harvesting .

(9 Lectures)


PRACTICALS: SEC LAB: RENEWABLE ENERGY AND ENERGY

HARVESTING SKILLS LAB








1. Demonstration of Training modules on Solar energy, wind energy, etc.

2. Conversion of vibration to voltage using piezoelectric materials

3. Conversion of thermal energy into voltage-driven thermo-electric modules.


Essential Readings

1. Solar energy, Suhas P Sukhative, Tata McGraw - Hill Publishing Company Ltd.

2. Renewable Energy, Power for a sustainable future, Godfrey Boyle, 3rd Edn., 2012, Oxford

University Press.

Additional Readings

1. Solar Energy: Resource Assessment Handbook, P Jayakumar, 2009

2. J.Balfour, M.Shaw and S. Jarosek, Photo-voltaics, Lawrence J Goodrich (USA).

3. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Renewable_energy


1. Non-conventional energy sources, B.H. Khan, McGraw Hill 60

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Renewable_energy

62

SEC: Engineering Design and Prototyping/Technical Drawing

(32223906)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• To introduce the students to modern visualization techniques and their applications in

diverse areas including computer aided design.

• To offers hands-on experience of engineering drawing based on knowledge gained using

computer aided designing software.


This course will enable the student to be proficient in:

• Understanding the concept of a sectional view – visualizing a space after being cut by a

plane. How The student will be able to draw and learn proper techniques for drawing an

aligned sections.

• Understanding the use of spatial visualization by constructing an orthographic multi view

drawing.

• Drawing simple curves like ellipse, cycloid and spiral, Orthographic projections of points,

lines and of solids like cylinders, cones, prisms and pyramids etc.

• Using Computer Aided Design (CAD) software and AutoCAD techniques.

Unit 1

Introduction: Fundamentals of Engineering design, design process and sketching: Scales and

dimensioning, Designing to Standards (ISO Norm Elements/ISI), Engineering Curves:

Parabola, hyperbola, ellipse and spiral.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 2

Projections: Principles of projections, Orthographic projections: straight lines, planes and

solids. Development of surfaces of right and oblique solids. Section of solids. Intersection and

Interpenetration of solids. Isometric and Oblique parallel projections of solids.

(10 Lectures)

Unit 3

CAD Drawing: Introduction to CAD and Auto CAD, precision drawing and drawing aids,

Geometric shapes, Demonstrating CAD specific skills (graphical user interface, create, retrieve,

edit, and use symbol libraries). Use of Inquiry commands to extract drawing data. Control

entity properties. Demonstrating basic skills to produce 2-D drawings. Annotating in Auto

CAD with text and hatching, layers, templates and design centre, advanced plotting (layouts,

viewports), office standards, dimensioning, internet and collaboration, Blocks, Drafting

symbols, attributes, extracting data. Basic printing and editing tools, plot/print drawing to

appropriate scale.

(10 Lectures)

63

Unit 4

Computer Aided Design and Prototyping: 3D modeling with AutoCAD (surfaces and

solids), 3D modeling with Sketchup, 3D designs, Assembly: Model Editing; Lattice and surface

optimization; 2D and 3D packing algorithms, Additive Manufacturing Ready Model Creation

(3D printing), Technical drafting and Documentation.

(6 Lectures)


PRACTICALS: SEC LAB : ENGINEERING DESIGN AND

PROTOTYPING/ TECHNICAL DRAWING LAB







Five experiments based on the above theory.

Teacher may design at least five experiments based on the above syllabus.


Essential Readings

1. Engineering Graphic, K. Venugopal and V. Raja Prabhu, New Age International

2. Engineering Drawing, N.S. Parthasarathy and Vele Murali, Ist Edition, 2015, Oxford

University Press

3. Don S. Lemons, Drawing Physics, MIT Press, M A Boston, 2018, ISBN:9780262535199

4. AutoCAD 2014 and AutoCAD 2014/Donnie Gladfelter/Sybex/ISBN:978-1-118-57510-9

5. Architectural Design with Sketchup/Alexander Schreyer/John Wiley & Sons/ISBN:978-1-

118-12309-6.

Additional Readings 1. Engineering Drawing, Dhananjay A Jolhe, McGraw-Hill

2. James A. Leach, AutoCAD 2017 Instructor, SDC publication, Mission, KS 2016. ISBN:

978163057029.

3. Analysis of Mechanisms and Machines, M A Boston, McGraw-Hill, 2007.

64

SEC: Applied Optics (32223908)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• This paper provides the conceptual understanding of various branches of modern optics to

the students.

• This course introduces basic principles of LASER, Holography and signal transmission via

optical fiber.


Students will be able to:

• Understand basic lasing mechanism qualitatively, types of lasers, characteristics of laser

light and its application in developing LED, Holography.

• Gain concepts of Fourier optics and Fourier transform spectroscopy.

• Understand basic principle and theory of Holography.

• Grasp the idea of total internal reflection and learn the characteristics of optical fibres.

Unit 1

Photo-sources and Detectors

Lasers: an introduction, Planck’s radiation law (qualitative idea), Energy levels, Absorption

process, Spontaneous and stimulated emission processes, Theory of laser action, Population of

energy levels, Einstein’s coefficients and optical amplification, properties of laser beam, Ruby

laser, He-Ne laser, and semiconductor lasers; Light Emitting Diode (LED) and photo-detectors.

(9 lectures)

Unit 2

Fourier Optics and Fourier Transform Spectroscopy (Qualitative explanation) Concept of

Spatial frequency filtering, Fourier transforming property of a thin lens, Fourier Transform

Spectroscopy (FTS): measuring emission and absorption spectra, with wide application in

atmospheric remote sensing, NMR spectrometry, and forensic science.

(6 lectures)

Unit 3

Holography

Introduction: Basic principle and theory: recording and reconstruction processes,

Requirements of holography- coherence, etc. Types of holograms: The thick or volume

hologram, Multiplex hologram, white light reflection hologram; application of holography in

microscopy, interferometry, and character recognition.

(6 lectures)

Unit 4

65

Photonics: Fibre Optics

Optical fibres: Introduction and historical remarks, Total Internal Reflection, Basic

characteristics of the optical fibre: Principle of light propagation through a fibre, the coherent

bundle, The numerical aperture, Attenuation in optical fibre and attenuation limit; Single mode

and multimode fibres, Fibre optic sensors: Fibre Bragg Grating.

(9 lectures)


PRACTICALS: SEC LAB : APPLIED OPTICS LAB







Experiments on Lasers:

1. To determine the grating radial spacing of the Compact Disc (CD) by reflection using He-

Ne or solid state laser.

2. To find the width of the wire or width of the slit using diffraction pattern obtained by a He-

Ne or solid state laser.

3. To find the polarization angle of laser light using polarizer and analyzer d. Thermal

expansion of quartz using laser.

4. To determine the wavelength and angular spread of laser light by using plane diffraction

grating.

Experiments on Semiconductor Sources and Detectors:

5. V-I characteristics of LED.

6. Study the characteristics of solid state laser.

7. Study the characteristics of LDR.

8. Characteristics of Photovoltaic Cell/ Photodiode. e. Characteristics of IR sensor.

Experiments on Fourier Optics:

9. Optical image addition/subtraction.

10. Optical image differentiation.

11. Fourier optical filtering.

12. Construction of an optical 4f system

Experiments on Fourier Transform Spectroscopy:

To study the interference pattern from a Michelson interferometer as a function of mirror

separation in the interferometer. The resulting interferogram is the Fourier transform of the

power spectrum of the source. Analysis of experimental interferograms allows one to

determine the transmission characteristics of several interference filters. Computer simulation

can also be done.

Experiments on Holography and interferometry:

66

13. Recording and reconstruction of holograms (Computer simulation can also be done).

14. To construct a Michelson interferometer or a Fabry Perot interferometer.

15. To determine the wavelength of sodium light by using Michelson’s interferometer.

16. To measure the refractive index of air.

Experiments on Fibre Optics:

17. To measure the numerical aperture of an optical fibre.

18. To measure the near field intensity profile of a fibre and study its refractive index profile.

19. To study the variation of the bending loss in a multimode fibre.

20. To determine the power loss at a splice between two multimode fibre.

21. To determine the mode field diameter (MFD) of fundamental mode in a single-mode fibre

by measurements of its far field Gaussian pattern.

References

Essential Readings

1. LASERS: Fundamentals & applications, K. Thyagrajan & A. K. Ghatak, 2010, Tata

McGraw Hill

2. Introduction to Fourier Optics, Joseph W. Goodman, The McGraw- Hill, 1996.

3. Introduction to Fiber Optics, A. Ghatak & K. Thyagarajan, Cambridge University Press.

4. Fibre optics through experiments, M.R.Shenoy, S.K.Khijwania, et.al. 2009, Viva Books

5. Optics, Karl Dieter Moller, Learning by computing with model examples, 2007, Springer.

Additional Readings

1. Optical Electronics, Ajoy Ghatak and K. Thyagarajan, 2011, Cambridge University Press

2. Optoelectronic Devices and Systems, S.C. Gupta, 2005, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

67

SEC: Weather Forecasting (32223909)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective The aim of this course is to impart theoretical knowledge to the students and also to enable

them to develop an awareness and understanding regarding the causes and effects of different

weather phenomena and basic forecasting techniques.


The student will gain the following:

• Acquire basic knowledge of the elements of the atmosphere, its composition at various

heights, variation of pressure and temperature with height.

• To learn basic techniques to measure temperature and its relation with cyclones and anti-

cyclones.

• Knowledge of simple techniques to measure wind speed and its directions, humidity and

rainfall.

• Understanding of absorption, emission and scattering of radiations in atmosphere;

Radiation laws.

• Knowledge of global wind systems, jet streams, local thunderstorms, tropical cyclones,

tornadoes and hurricanes.

• Knowledge of climate and its classification. Understanding various causes of climate

change like global warming, air pollution, aerosols, ozone depletion, acid rain.

• Develop skills needed for weather forecasting, mathematical simulations, weather

forecasting methods, types of weather forecasting, role of satellite observations in weather

forecasting, weather maps etc. Uncertainties in predicting weather based on statistical

analysis.

• Develop ability to do weather forecasts using input data.

• In the laboratory course, students should be able to learn: Principle of the working of a

weather Station, Study of Synoptic charts and weather reports, Processing and analysis of

weather data, Reading of Pressure charts, Surface charts, Wind charts and their analysis.

Unit 1

Introduction to atmosphere: Elementary idea of atmosphere: physical structure and

composition; compositional layering of the atmosphere; variation of pressure and temperature

with height; air temperature; requirements to measure air temperature; temperature sensors:

types; atmospheric pressure: its measurement.

(9 Lectures)

Unit 2

Measuring the weather: Wind; forces acting to produce wind; wind speed direction: units, its

direction; measuring wind speed and direction; humidity, clouds and rainfall, radiation:

absorption, emission and scattering in atmosphere; radiation laws.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 3

68

Weather systems: Global wind systems; air masses and fronts: classifications; jet streams;

local thunderstorms; tropical cyclones: classification; tornadoes; hurricanes.

(3 Lectures)

Unit 4

Climate and Climate Change: Climate - Its classification; causes of climate change; global

warming and its outcomes; air pollution and its measurement, particulate matters PM 2.5, PM

10. Health hazards due to high concentration of PM2.5; aerosols, ozone depletion.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 5

Basics of weather forecasting: Weather forecasting: analysis and its historical background;

need of measuring weather; types of weather forecasting; weather forecasting methods; criteria

of choosing weather station; basics of choosing site and exposure; satellites observations in

weather forecasting; weather maps; uncertainty and predictability; probability forecasts.

(8 Periods)


PRACTICALS: SEC LAB : WEATHER FORECASTING LAB






1. Study of synoptic charts & weather reports, working principle of weather station.

2. Processing and analysis of weather data:

(a) To calculate the sunniest time of the year.

(b) To study the variation of rainfall amount and intensity.

(c) To observe the sunniest/driest day of the week.

(d) To examine the maximum and minimum temperature throughout the year.

(e) To evaluate the relative humidity of the day.

(f) To examine the rainfall amount month wise.

3. Exercises in chart reading: Plotting of constant pressure charts, surfaces charts, upper wind

charts and its analysis.

4. Formats and elements in different types of weather forecasts/ warning (both aviation and

non-aviation).

5. Simulation of weather system

6. Field visits to India Meteorological department and National center for medium range

weather forecasting

References

Essential Readings

1. Aviation Meteorology, I.C. Joshi, 3rd edition 2014, Himalayan Books

69

2. The weather Observers Hand book, Stephen Burt, 2012, Cambridge University

Press.

3. Meteorology, S.R. Ghadekar, 2001, Agromet Publishers, Nagpur.

4. Text Book of Agrometeorology, S.R. Ghadekar, 2005, Agromet Publishers, Nagpur.

5. Atmosphere and Ocean, John G. Harvey, 1995, The Artemis Press.

SEC: Introduction to Physical Computing (xxx1)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• Exposure to the elements of physical computing using embedded computers to enable the

student to implement experimental setups in physics.

• To offer an opportunity to learn automation and to design an appropriate system for

laboratory experiments using computer software in a project based learning environment.


The students will be able to

• Understand the evolution of the CPU from microprocessor to microcontroller and

embedded computers from a historical perspective.

• Operate basic electronic components and analog and digital electronics building blocks

including power supply and batteries.

• Use basic laboratory equipment for measurement and instrumentation.

• Understand the Arduino ecosystem and to write simple Arduino programs (sketches)

• Understand sensor characteristics and how to select a suitable sensor for various

applications.

• Read digital and analog data and produce digital and analog outputs from an embedded

computer.

• Understand how to interface an embedded computer to the physical environment.

• Visualize the needs of a stand alone embedded computer and implement a simple system

using Arduino.

Unit 1

70

Brief overview of a computer. Evolution from CPU to Microprocessor to microcontroller.

Introduction to Arduino. Overview of basic electronic components (R, L, C, diode, BJT,

MOSFET etc.) and circuits, 555 timer, logic gates, logic function ICs, power supply and

batteries.

(4 Lectures)

Unit 2

Capturing schematic diagrams. Using free software such as Eagle CAD. Using basic lab

instruments – DMM, oscilloscope, signal generator etc.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 3

Understanding Arduino programming. Downloading and installing Arduino IDE. Writing an

Arduino sketch. Programming fundamentals: program initialization, conditional statements,

loops, functions, global variables.

(5 Lectures) Unit 4

Digital Input and Output. Measuring time and events. Pulse Width Modulation.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 5

Analog Input and Output. Physical Interface: sensors and actuators.

(6 Lectures)

Unit 6

Communication with the outside world. System Integration and debugging.

(3 Lectures)


PRACTICALS: SEC LAB: INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL

COMPUTING LAB







1. Hello LED: Connect a LED to a digital output pin and turn it on and off.

2. Hello Switch: Read a switch a toggle an LED when the switch is pressed and released.

3. Hello ADC: Connect a potentiometer to an ADC input and print the analog voltage on

the serial monitor.

71

4. Hello Blink: Read a switch and changing the LED blink rate every time the switch is

pressed and released.

5. Hello PWM: Write a Pulse Width Modulation code in software and vary the LED

intensity.

6. Hello Random: Read a switch and every time the switch is pressed and released,

generate and print a random number on the serial monitor.

7. Hello Random2: Connect a Seven Segment Display (SSD) and print the random

number on this display each time a switch is pressed and released. Collect large data

sample and plot relative frequency of occurrence of each ‘random’ number

8. Hello LCD: Connect a (16X2) LCD to an Arduino and print ‘Hello World’.

9. Hello LCD2: Connect a temperature sensor to an ADC input and print the temperature

on the LCD

10. Hello PWM2: Connect a RGB LED and 3 switches. Use hardware PWM feature of the

Arduino and change the relative intensity of each of the LEDs of the RGB LED and

generate large number of colors.

Mini Projects:

1. Connect 2 SSDs and every time a switch is pressed and released, print 2 random numbers

on the two SSDs

2. Connect a switch and 4 RGB LEDs in a ‘Y’ configuration. Change the LED lighting

patterns each time a switch is pressed and released (total 4095 patterns possible).

3. Arrange acrylic mirrors in a triangle and make a LED kaleidoscope using the RGB LEDs

as the light source.

4. Connect a photo-gate mechanism to a bar pendulum. Verify that the period of oscillation

is independent of the amplitude for small amplitudes. What happens when the amplitude

is large?

5. Connect 8 switches and a small speaker and an audio amplifier and make a piano.

6. Connect 2 sets of 3 switches for two players. Connect LCD and implement a ‘rock-paper-

scissors’ game.

References

Essential Readings

1. Learn Electronics with Arduino: An Illustrated Beginner's Guide to Physical

Computing. Jody Culkin and Eric Hagan. Shroff Publishers. ISBN: 9789352136704.

2. Programming Arduino: Getting Started with Sketches, Second Edition. Simon Monk.

McGraw-Hill Education. ISBN-10: 1259641635.

3. Physical Computing: Sensing and Controlling the Physical World with Computers, 1st

Edition. Thomson. ISBN-10: 159200346X.

4. The Art of Electronics. Paul Horowitz and Winfield Hill. Cambridge University Press.

2nd Edition. ISBN-13: 978-0521689175

5. Designing Embedded Hardware. John Catsoulis. Shroff Publishers. 2nd Edition. ISBN:

9788184042597

72

SEC: Numerical Analysis (xxx2)


Theory: 30 Hours

Practical: 60 Hours

Course Objective

• The emphasis of course is to equip students with the mathematical tools required in

solving problem of interest to physicists.

• To expose students to fundamental computational physics skills and hence enable them to

solve a wide range of physics problems.

• To help students develop critical skills and knowledge that will prepare them not only for

doing fundamental and applied research but also prepare them for a wide variety of

careers.


Theory:

After completing this course, student will be able to

• approximate single and multi-variable function by Taylor's Theorem.

• Solve first order differential equations and apply it to physics problems.

• solve linear second order homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equations with

constant coefficients.

• Calculate partial derivatives of function of several variables

• Understand the concept of gradient of scalar field and divergence and curl of vector fields.

perform line, surface and volume integration

• Use Green's, Stokes' and Gauss's Theorems to compute integrals

Practical:

After completing this course, student will be able to :

• design, code and test simple programs in C++ learn Monte Carlo techniques,

fit a given data to linear function using method of least squares find roots of a given non-linear

function

• Use above computational techniques to solve physics problems

Unit 1

Errors and iterative Methods: Truncation and Round-off Errors. Floating Point Computation,

Overflow and underflow. Single and Double Precision Arithmetic, Iterative Methods.

(2 Lectures)

Solutions of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations: (1) Fixed point iteration method, (2)

Bisection method, (3) Secant Method, (4) Newton Raphson method, (5) Generalized Newton’s

method. Comparison and error estimation.

(6 Lectures)

73

Unit 2

Interpolation: Forward and Backward Differences. Symbolic Relation, Differences of a

polynomial. Newton’s Forward and Backward Interpolation Formulas.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 3

Least Square fitting: (1) Fitting a straight line. (2) Non-linear curve fitting: (a) Power

function, (b) Polynomial of nth degree, and (c) Exponential Function. (3) Linear Weighed

Least square Approximation.

(5 Lectures)

Unit 4

Numerical Differentiation: (1) Newton’s interpolation Formulas & (2) Cubic Spline Method,

Errors in Numeric Differentiation. Maximum and Minimum values of a Tabulated Function.

(4 Lectures)

Numerical Integration: Generalized Quadrature Formula. Trapezoidal Rule. Simpson’s 1/3

and 3/8 Rules. Weddle’s Rule, Gauss-Legendre Formula.

(4 Lectures)

Solution of Ordinary Differential Equations: First Order ODE’s: solution of Initial Value

problems: (1) Euler’s Method, (2) Modified Euler’s method.

(4 Lectures)


PRACTICALS: SEC LAB : NUMERICAL ANALYSIS COMPUTING LAB

At least 08 Experiments from the following:





Algebraic and transcendental equation:

1. To find the roots of an algebraic equation by Bisection method.

2. To find the roots of an algebraic equation by Secant method.

3. To find the roots of an algebraic equation by Newton-Raphson method.

4. To find the roots of a transcendental equation by Bisection method. Interpolation

5. To find the forward difference table from a given set of data values.

6. To find a backward difference table from a given set of data values. Curve fitting

7. To fit a straight line to a given set of data values.

8. To fit a polynomial to a given set of data values.

9. To fit an exponential function to a given set of data values.

Differentiation:

74

10. To find the first and second derivatives near the beginning of the table of values of (x,y).

11. To find the first and second derivatives near the end of the table of values of (x,y).

Integration

12. To evaluate a definite integral by trapezoidal rule.



15. To evaluate a definite integral by Gauss Quadrature rule.

Differential Equations:

16. To solve differential equations by Euler’s method.

17. To solve differential equations by modified Euler’s method.

References

Essential Readings

1. Elementary Numerical Analysis, K.E.Atkinson, 3rd Edn., 2007 , Wiley India Edition.


3. A first course in Numerical Methods, U.M. Ascher & C. Greif, 2012, PHI Learning.


1. Schaum's Outline of Programming with C++. J.Hubbard, 2000, McGraw Hill Pub.

2. Numerical Recipes in C++: The Art of Scientific Computing, W.H. Press et.al., 2nd Edn.,

2013, Cambridge University Press.

3. An introduction to Numerical methods in C++, Brian H. Flowers, 2009, Oxford University

Press.

75

ANNEXURE-1A Steering Committee



1. Prof. Sanjay Jain – HoD (Chairman)

2. Prof. A. G. Vedeshwar – (Coordinator)

3. Prof. Vinay Gupta – (Convener)

4. Prof. Debajyoti Choudhury

5. Prof. P. Das Gupta

6. Prof. S. Annapoorni

7. Prof. H.P. Singh

8. Prof. T.R. Seshadri

9. Prof. Anjan Dutta

10. Prof. S.K. Mandal

11. Prof. Kirti Ranjan

12. Dr. G.S. Chilana (Department of Physics, Ramjas College)

13. Dr. Mallika Verma (Department of Physics, Miranda House)

14. Dr. Anuradha Gupta (Department of Physics, SGTB Khalsha College)

15. Dr. Sangeeta D. Gadre (Department of Physics, Kirori Mal College)

16. Dr. Jacob Cherian (Department of Physics, St. Stephens’ College)

17. Dr. Vandana Luthra (Department of Physics, Gargi College)

18. Dr. Mamta (Department of Physics, SGTB Khalsa College)

19. Dr. P.K. Jha (Department of Physics, Deen Dyal Upadhyaya College)

20. Dr. Sanjay Kumar (Department of Physics, St. Stephens’ College)

21. Dr. Abhinav Gupta (Department of Physics, St. Stephen's College)

22. Dr. Monika Tomar (Department of Physics, Miranda House)

23. Dr. Roshan Kshetrimayum (Department of Physics, Kirori Mal College)

24. Mr. Ashish Tyagi (Department of Physics, Swami Shraddhanand College)

25. Dr. Shalini Lumb Talwar (Department of Physics, Maitreyi College)

26. Dr. Shiva Upadhyay (Department of Physics, Swami Shraddhanand College)

27. Dr. Divya Haridas (Department of Physics, Keshav Mahavidyalaya)

28. Dr. Chetana Jain (Department of Physics, Hansraj College)

76

ANNEXURE 1B

Subject working groups



Group Papers

Name of faculty Role College

I

● Waves and Optics (Hons.

core /GE)

● Electricity and magnetism

(Hons. core/GE)

● Electromagnetic theory

(Hons. core)

● Electricity and magnetism

(Prog. core)

● Waves and Optics (Prog.

core)

● Electrical circuits and

Networks (SEC)

● Applied Optics (SEC)

● Introduction to Physical

Computing (SEC)

Prof. Kirti Ranjan Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Sangeeta D.

Gadre Convenor Kirori Mal College

Dr. Pragati Ishdhir

Member

Hindu College

Dr. K.C. Singh Sri Venkateswara

College

Dr. Pushpa Bindal Kalindi College

Dr. Geetanjali

Sethi

St. Stephen's

College

Dr. Pradeep

Kumar Hansraj College

Dr. N. Chandrlika Gargi College

II

● Elements of Modern

Physics (Hons. core/GE)

● Quantum Mechanics and

applications (Hons. Core)

● Elements of Modern

Physics (Prog. DSE)

● Quantum Mechanics

(Prog. DSE/GE)

● Advanced Quantum

Mechanics (Hons. DSE)

● Renewable energy and

Energy harvesting (SEC)

Prof. P. Das Gupta Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. P.K. Jha Convenor Deen Dyal

Upadhyaya college

Dr. N. Santakrus

Singh

Hindu College

Dr. Punita Verma Kalindi College

Dr. Siddharth

Lahon Kirorimal College

Dr. Onkar Mangla Daulat Ram College

Dr. Sandhya Miranda House

77

Dr. Ajay Kumar Sri Aurobindo

College

III

● Thermal Physics (Hons.

Core)

● Statistical Mechanics

(Hons. Core)

● Thermal Physics and


(Program core/GE)

Prof. S.

Annapoorni Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Anuradha

Gupta Convenor

SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Deepak Jain

Member

Deen Dyal

Upadhyaya college

Dr. Nimmi Singh SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Ashok Kumar Ramjas College

Dr. Aditya Saxena Deshbandhu

College

Dr. Maya Verma Hansraj College

IV

● Solid State Physics (Hons.

Core)

● Solid State Physics (Prog.

DSE/GE)

● Nanomaterials and

Applications (DSE-

Hons.+ Prog.)/GE

Prof. S.

Annapoorni Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Divya Haridas Convenor Keshav

Mahavidyalaya

Dr. Mamta Bhatia

Member

AND College

Dr. Rajveer Singh ARSD College

Dr. Shiva

Upadhyaya S.S.N. College

Dr. Harish K.

Yadav

St. Stephen's

College

Dr. Rashmi

Menon Kalindi College

Dr. Yogesh

Kumar

Deshbandhu

College

V

● Mathematical Physics-I

(Hons. Core)

● Mathematical Physics-II

(Hons. Core)

● Mathematical Physics -III

Prof. T.R.

Seshadri Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. G.S. Chilana Convenor Ramjas College

78

(Hons. Core)

● Advanced Mathematical

Physics (Hons. DSE)

● Mathematical Physics

(Program DSE/ Hons.

GE)

● Advanced Mathematical

Physics -II (Hons. DSE)

● Computational Physics

Skills (SEC)

● Numerical Analysis

(SEC)

● Linear Algebra & Tensor

Analysis (DSE)

Dr. Abha Dev

Habib

Member

Miranda House

Dr. Agam Kumar

Jha Kirori Mal College

Dr. Subhash

Kumar AND College


College

Dr. Neetu

Aggarwal Daulat Ram College

Dr. Bhavna

Vidhani Hansraj College

Dr. Ajay Mishra Dyal Singh College

VI

● Mechanics (Hons.

Core/GE)

● Mechanics (Prog. Core)

● Applied Dynamics

(DSE/GE)

● Classical Dynamics

(DSE)

● Physics Workshop Skills

(SEC)

Prof. A. G.

Vedeshwar

Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Ashish Tyagi Convenor SSN College

Dr. Shalini Lumb

Talwar

Member

Maitreyi College

Dr. Vandana

Arora

Keshav

Mahavidyalaya

Dr. Arvind Kumar Ramjas College

Dr. Chitra Vaid Bhagini Nivedita

College

Dr. Omwati Rana Daulat Ram College

Dr. Sunita Singh Miranda House

Dr. Pranav Kumar Kirori Mal College

Dr. Pooja Devi Shyam lal College

VII

● Nuclear and particle

Physics (Hons. DSE/GE)

● Nuclear and particle

physics (Prog. DSE)

● Radiation Safety (SEC)

Prof. Samit

Mandal Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Vandana

Luthra Convenor Gargi College

79

Dr. Namrata

Member

S.S.N. College

Dr. Supriti Das Gargi College

Dr. Punit Tyagi Ramjas College

VIII

● Astronomy and

Astrophysics (DSE/GE)

● Weather Forecasting

(SEC)

● Medical Physics

(DSE/GE)

● Atmospheric Physics

(DSE/GE)

● Biological Physics

(DSE/GE)

● Physics of Earth

(DSE/GE)

● Technical Drawing (SEC)

● Dissertation

Prof. Anjan Datta Coordinator

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Jacob Cherian Convenor St. Stephen's

College

Dr. S.K. Dhaka

Member

Rajdhani College

Dr. Sanjay Kumar St. Stephen's

College

Dr. Sushil Singh SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Chetna Jain Hansraj College

Dr. Ayushi

Paliwal

Deshbandhu

College

Dr. Rekha Gupta St. Stephen's

College

IX

● Digital Systems and


● Embedded Systems -

Introduction to

Microcontroller

(DSE/GE)

● Digital, Analog and

Instrumentation (Prog.

DSE/Hons. GE)

● Verilog and FPA based

System design (DSE/GE)

● Digital Signal Processing

(DSE/GE)

● Linear and Digital

Integrated Circuits –E

● Microprocessors and

Microcontrollers –E

● Electronic

Instrumentation - E(DSE)

● Basic Instrumentation

Skills (SEC)


Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Mallika

Verma Convenor Miranda House

Dr. Shashi Bala

Member

Ramjas College

Dr. Arijit

Chowdhuri AND College

Dr. Anjali Sharma ARSD College

Dr. Kajal Jindal Kirori Mal College

Dr. Poonam Jain Sri Aurobindo

College

Dr. Savita Sharma Kalindi College

80

Dissertation-E

Dr. Alka Garg Gargi College

X

● Analog systems and


● Experimental techniques

(DSE)

● Physics of Device and

Communication (DSE)

● Communication System

(DSE/GE)

● Network Analysis and

Analog Electronics-E

● Communication

Electronics –E

● Semiconductor Devices

Fabrication - E(DSE)

● Photonic Devices and

Power Electronics -E

(DSE)

● Antenna theory and

wireless network -E

(DSE)

● Electrical circuit network

skills-Prog. SEC


Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Monika

Tomar Convenor Miranda House

Dr. Sanjay

Tandon

Member

Deen Dyal

Upadhyaya college

Dr. Sangeeta

Sachdeva

St. Stephen's

College

Dr. Roshan Kirorimal College

Dr. Kuldeep

Kumar

SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Reema Gupta Hindu College

XI

● Practicals of all Courses


Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. Sanjay Kumar Convenor St. Stephen's

College

Prof. P. D. Gupta

Member

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Prof. A.G.

Vedeshwar

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

81

Prof. Samit

Mandal

Department of

Physics &

Astrophysics

Dr. G.S. Chilana Ramjas College

Dr. Mallika

Verma Miranda House

Dr. Anuradha

Gupta

SGTB Khalsa

College

Dr. Monika

Tomar Miranda House

Dr. Sangeeta D.

Gadre Kirori Mal College


College

Dr. Vandana

Luthra Gargi College

Dr. Roshan Kirori Mal College

82

ANNEXURE 1C

Final drafting team



1. Prof. Sanjay Jain

2. Prof. A. G. Vedeshwar

3. Prof. Vinay Gupta

4. Prof. Samit K. Mandal

5. Dr. Sanjay Kumar – St. Stephens’ College

6. Dr. Sangeeta Gadre – Kirori Mal College

7. Dr. Mamta – SGTB Khalsa College

8. Dr. Punita Verma – Kalindi College

9. Dr. Rajveer Singh – ARSD College

10. Dr. Yogesh Kumar – Deshbandhu College

11. Mrs. Poonam Jain – Sri Aurobindo College

12. Dr. Ajay Kumar – Sri Aurobindo College

of 96

B.Sc. Physical Science

B.SC. PHYSICAL SCIENCE CHEMISTRY COURSES OFFERED UNDER B.Sc. Physical Science PROGRAMME (CBCS)

CORE COURSES (six credits each) – Each course has 4 Periods/week for Theory, 4 Periods/week for Practical

SEMESTER COURSE CATEGORY NAME OF THE COURSE CREDITS

T=Theory Credits

P=Practical Credits

I CORE Atomic Structure, Bonding, General

Organic Chemistry & Aliphatic

Hydrocarbons

T=4 P=2

II CORE Chemical Energetics, Equilibria and

Functional Group Organic

Chemistry-I

T=4 P=2

III CORE Solutions, Phase Equilibrium,

Conductance, Electrochemistry and

Functional Group Organic

Chemistry-II

T=4 P=2

IV CORE Chemistry of s- and p-Block

Elements, States of Matter and

Chemical Kinetics

T=4 P=2

of 96


DISCIPLINE SPECIFIC ELECTIVE (DSE) (SIX credits each)

Two courses (Chemistry of d-block elements, Quantum Chemistry and

Spectroscopy and any one from the rest) are offered in Semester V/VI

COURSE

CATEGORY

NAME OF THE COURSE CREDITS

T=Theory Credits

P=Practical Credits

CHEMISTRY

DSE-1

Applications of Computers in Chemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-2

Analytical Methods in Chemistry T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-3

Molecular Modelling & Drug Design T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-4

Novel Inorganic Solids T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-5

Polymer Chemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-6

Research Methodology for Chemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-7

Green Chemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-8

Industrial Chemicals & Environment

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-9

Inorganic Materials of Industrial Importance

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-10

Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-11

Chemistry of d-block elements, Quantum Chemistry

and Spectroscopy (compulsory) T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-12

Organometallics, Bioinorganic chemistry, Polynuclear

hydrocarbons and UV, IR Spectroscopy T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-13

Molecules of Life T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-14

Nanoscale Materials and their Applications T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

DSE-15

Dissertation 6

of 96


Skill Enhancement Courses (SEC) (four credits each) Any four

courses from the following to be offered in Semester III/IV/V/VI

COURSE

CATEGORY

NAME OF THE COURSE CREDITS

T=Theory Credits

P=Practical Credits

CHEMISTRY

SEC-1 IT Skills for Chemists

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-2 Basic Analytical Chemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-3 Chemical Technology & Society

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-4 Cheminformatics

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-5 Business Skills for Chemists

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-6 Intellectual Property Rights

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-7 Analytical Clinical Biochemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-8 Green Methods in Chemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-9 Pharmaceutical Chemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-10 Chemistry of Cosmetics & Perfumes

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-11 Pesticide Chemistry

T=4 P=2

CHEMISTRY

SEC-12 Fuel Chemistry

T=4 P=2

Student has to study 4 core papers in chemistry in semesters I, II, III & IV.

Student has to study 4 Skill Enancement Courses(SEC), which can be choosen from

Chemistry/Physics/Mathematics. (At least ONE SEC of each discipline)

Student has to study 2 Discipline Specific Elective papers from Chemistry in semester V & VI.

Note: Wherever there is a practical there will be no tutorial and vice-versa. The size of the

group for chemistry practical papersis recommended to be maximum of 15 to 20 students.

of 96


SEMESTER –I

Course Code: CHEMISTRY – Core Paper-1

Course Title: Atomic Structure, Bonding, General Organic Chemistry &

Aliphatic Hydrocarbons

Total Credits: 06 (Credits: Theory-04, Practical-02)

(Total Lectures: Theory- 60, Practical-60)

Objectives:

The course reviews the structure of the atom, which is a necessary pre-requisite in understanding the

nature of chemical bonding in compounds. It provides basic knowledge about ionic, covalent and metallic

bonding and explains that chemical bonding is best regarded as a continuum between the three cases. It

discusses the Periodicity in properties with reference to the s and p block, which is necessary in

understanding their group chemistry. The course is also infused with the recapitulation of fundamentals of

organic chemistry and the introduction of a new concept of visualizing the organic molecules in a three-dimensional space. To establish the applications of these concepts, the classes of alkanes, alkenes,

alkynes and aromatic hydrocarbons are introduced. The constitution of the course strongly aids in the

paramount learning of the concepts and their applications.

Learning Outcomes:

By the end of the course, the students will be able to:

• Solve the conceptual questions using the knowledge gained by studying the quantum mechanical model of the atom, quantum numbers, electronic configuration, radial and angular distribution curves, shapes of s, p, and d orbitals, and periodicity in atomic radii, ionic radii, ionization energy and electron affinity of elements.

• Draw the plausible structures and geometries of molecules using radius ratio rules, VSEPR theory and MO diagrams (homo- & hetero-nuclear diatomic molecules).

• Understand and explain the differential behavior of organic compounds based on fundamental concepts learnt.

• Formulate the mechanism of organic reactions by recalling and correlating the fundamental properties of the reactants involved.

• Learn and identify many organic reaction mechanisms including free radical substitution, electrophilic addition and electrophilic aromatic substitution.

Section A: Inorganic Chemistry (Lectures:30)

Unit 1:

Atomic Structure

Review of: Bohr’s theory and its limitations, Heisenberg uncertainty principle, Dual behaviour of matter and radiation, De-Broglie’s relation, Hydrogen atom spectra, need of a new approach to atomic structure. What is Quantum mechanics? Time independent Schrodinger equation and meaning of various terms in it. Significance of ψ and ψ2, Schrödinger equation for hydrogen atom, radial and angular parts of the hydogenic wave functions (atomic orbitals) and their variations for 1s, 2s, 2p, 3s, 3p and 3d orbitals (Only graphical representation), radial and angular nodes and their significance, radial distribution functions and the concept of the most probable distance with special reference to 1s and 2s atomic orbitals.

of 96


Significance of quantum numbers, orbital angular momentum and quantum numbers ml and ms. Shapes of s, p and d atomic orbitals, nodal planes, discovery of spin, spin quantum number (s) and magnetic spin quantum number (ms). Rules for filling electrons in various orbitals, electronic configurations of the atoms, stability of half-filled and completely filled orbitals, concept of exchange energy, relative energies of atomic orbitals, anomalous electronic configurations.

(Lectures: 14)

Unit 2:

Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure

Ionic Bonding: General characteristics of ionic bonding, energy considerations in ionic bonding, lattice energy and solvation energy and their importance in the context of stability and solubility of ionic compounds, statement of Born-Landé equation for calculation of lattice energy (no derivation), Born-Haber cycle and its applications, covalent character in ionic compounds, polarizing power and polarizability, Fajan’s rules. Ionic character in covalent compounds, bond moment, dipole moment and percentage ionic character.

Covalent bonding: VB Approach: Shapes of some inorganic molecules and ions on the basis of VSEPR (H2O, NH3, PCl5, SF6, ClF3, SF4) and hybridization with suitable examples of linear, trigonal planar, square planar, tetrahedral, trigonal bipyramidal and octahedral arrangements.

Concept of resonance and resonating structures in various inorganic and organic compounds.

MO Approach: Rules for the LCAO method, bonding and antibonding MOs and their characteristics for s-s, s-p and p-p combinations of atomic orbitals, nonbonding combination of orbitals, MO treatment of homonuclear diatomic molecules of 1st and 2nd periods (including idea of s-p mixing) and heteronuclear diatomic molecules such as CO, NO and NO+.

(Lectures: 16)

Section B: Organic Chemistry (Lectures:30)

Unit 3:

Fundamentals of Organic Chemistry

Electronic displacements: Inductive effect, electromeric effect, resonance, hyperconjugation. Cleavage of bonds: homolysis and heterolysis. Reaction intermediates: carbocations, carbanions and free radicals. Electrophiles and nucleophiles, Aromaticity: benzenoids and Hückel’s rule.

(Lectures: 08)

Unit 4:

Stereochemistry

Conformations with respect to ethane, butane and cyclohexane, interconversion of Wedge Formula, Newmann, Sawhorse and Fischer representations, concept of chirality (upto two carbon atoms). configuration: geometrical and optical isomerism; enantiomerism, diastereomerism and meso compounds). Threo and erythro; D and L; cis - trans nomenclature; CIP Rules: R/ S (for upto 2 chiral carbon atoms) and E / Z nomenclature (for upto two C=C systems).

(Lectures: 10)

of 96


Unit 5:

Aliphatic Hydrocarbons

Functional group approach for the following reactions: preparations, physical property & chemical reactions to be studied with mechanism in context to their structure.

Alkanes:

Preparation: catalytic hydrogenation, Wurtz reaction, Kolbe’s synthesis, Grignard reagent.

Reactions: Free radical substitution: Halogenation.

Alkenes:

Preparation: Elimination reactions: Dehydration of alcohols and dehydrohalogenation of alkyl halides (Saytzeff’s rule); cis alkenes (Partial catalytic hydrogenation) and trans alkenes (Birch reduction).

Reactions: cis-addition (alk. KMnO4) and trans-addition (bromine), addition of HX (Markownikoff’s and anti-Markownikoff’s addition), Hydration, Ozonolysis, oxymecuration-demercuration, Hydroboration-oxidation.

Alkynes:

Preparation: Acetylene from CaC2 and conversion into higher alkynes; by dehalogenation of tetrahalides and dehydrohalogenation of vicinal-dihalides.

Reactions: formation of metal acetylides and acidity of alkynes, addition of bromine and alkaline KMnO4, ozonolysis and oxidation with hot alk. KMnO4. Hydration to form carbonyl compounds

(Lectures: 12)

Practical:

(Credits: 2, Laboratory periods: 60)

Section A: Inorganic Chemistry - Volumetric Analysis

1. Estimation of oxalic acid by titrating it with KMnO4.

2. Estimation of Mohr’s salt by titrating it with KMnO4.

3. Estimation of water of crystallization in Mohr’s salt by titrating with KMnO4.

4. Estimation of Fe (II) ions by titrating it with K2Cr2O7 using internal indicator.

5. Estimation of Cu (II) ions iodometrically using Na2S2O3.

Section B: Organic Chemistry

1. Purification of organic compound by crystallisation (from water and alcohol) and distillation.

2. Criteria of purity: Determination of M.P./B.P.

of 96


3. Separation of mixtures by chromatography: Measure the Rf value in each case (combination of two compounds to be given)

a) Identify and separate the components of a given mixture of 2 amino acids (glycine, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, tyrosine or any other amino acid) by radial/ascending paper chromatography.

b) Identify and separate the sugars present in the given mixture by radial/ascending paper chromatography.

References:

Theory:

1. Lee., J. D. A new Concise Inorganic Chemistry, Pearson Education. 2. Huheey, J.E.; Keiter, E.; Keiter, R. (2009),Inorganic Chemistry: Principles of Structure

and Reactivity, Pearson Publication. 3. Atkins, P.W.; Overton, T.L.; Rourke, J.P.; Weller, M.T.; Armstrong, F.A.(2010),Shriver and

Atkin’s Inorganic Chemistry, Oxford 4. Sykes, P.(2005), A Guide Book to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry, Orient Longman. 5. Eliel, E. L. (2000), Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds, Tata McGraw Hill. 6. Morrison, R. N.; Boyd, R. N. Organic Chemistry, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson

Education). 7. Bahl, A; Bahl, B. S. (2012), Advanced Organic Chemistry, S. Chand.

Practical:

1. Jeffery, G.H.; Bassett, J.; Mendham, J.; Denney, R.C.(1989),Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, 5th Edn., John Wiley and Sons Inc,.

2. Furniss, B.S.; Hannaford, A.J.; Smith, P.W.G.; Tatchell, A.R. (2012),Vogel's Textbook ofPractical Organic Chemistry, Pearson.

3. Mann, F.G.; Saunders, B.C.(2009),Practical Organic Chemistry, Pearson Education.

Teaching Learning Process:

• Lectures in class rooms • Peer assisted learning. • Hands-on learning using 3-D models, videos, presentations, seminars • Technology driven learning. • Industry visits

Assessment Methods:

Assessmentwill be done on the basis of regular class test, presentations and assignments as a part of internal assessment during the course as per the curriculum. End semester university examination will be held for both theory and practical. In practical, assessment will be done based on continuous evaluation, performance in the experiment on the date of examination and viva voce.

Keywords

Atomic structures, Quantum numbers, Lattice energy, Electronic effects, Stereochemistry, Chemistry of aliphatic hydrocarbons.

of 96


SEMESTER-II

Course Code: CHEMISTRY –Core Paper-2

Course Title: Chemical Energetics, Equilibria and Functional Group Organic

Chemistry-I



Objectives:

The objective of this paper is to develop basic understanding of the chemical energetics, laws of thermodynamics, chemical and ionic equilibrium. It provides basic understanding of the behaviour of electrolytes and their solutions. It acquaints the students with the functional group approach to study organic chemistry. To establish applications of this concept structure, methods of preparation and reactions for the following classes of compounds: Aromatic hydrocarbons, alkyl and aryl halides, alcohols, phenols and ethers, aldehydes and ketones are described. This course helps the students to relate the structure of an organic compound to its physical and chemical properties.

Learning Outcomes:

By the end of this course, students will be able to:

• Understand the laws of thermodynamics, thermochemistry and equilibria. • Understand concept of pH and its effect on the various physical and chemical properties of the

compounds. • Use the concepts learnt to predict feasibility of chemical reactions and to study the behaviour of

reactions in equilibrium. • Understand the fundamentals of functional group chemistry through the study of methods of

preparation, properties and chemical reactions with underlying mechanism. • Use concepts learnt to understand stereochemistry of a reaction and predict the reaction

outcome • Design newer synthetic routes for various organic compounds.

Section A: Physical Chemistry (Lectures:30)

Unit 1:

Chemical Energetics

Review of thermodynamics and the laws of thermodynamics, important principles and definitions of

thermochemistry, concept of standard state and standard enthalpies of formations, integral and

differential enthalpies of solution and dilution, calculation of bond energy, bond dissociation energy and resonance energy from thermochemical data, variation of enthalpy of a reaction with temperature –

Kirchhoff’s equation., statement of third law of thermodynamics and calculation of absolute entropies of

substances.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 2:

of 96


Chemical Equilibrium

Free energy change in a chemical reaction, Thermodynamic derivation of the law of chemical equilibrium, distinction between G and Go, Le Chatelier’s principle, relationships between Kp, Kc and Kx for reactions involving ideal gases.

.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 3:

Ionic Equilibria

Strong, moderate and weak electrolytes, degree of ionization, factors affecting degree of ionization, Ostwald’s dilution law, ionization constant and ionic product of water, ionization of weak acids and bases, pH scale, common ion effect, salt hydrolysis-calculation of hydrolysis constant, degree of hydrolysis and pH for different salts. Buffer solutions, Henderson-Hasselbach equation.Solubility and solubility product of sparingly soluble salts – applications of solubility product principle

(Lectures: 14)

Section B: Organic Chemistry (Lectures: 30)

Unit 4:

Aromatic Hydrocarbons

Structure and aromatic character of benzene.

Preparation: methods of preparation of benzene from phenol, benzoic acid, acetylene and benzene sulphonic acid.

Reactions: electrophilic substitution reactions in benzene citing examples of nitration, halogenation, sulphonation and Friedel-Craft's alkylation and acylation with emphasis on carbocationic rearrangement, side chain oxidation of alkyl benzenes.

(Lectures: 5)

Unit 5:

Alkyl and Aryl Halides

A) Alkyl halides (upto 5 carbons):

Structure of haloalkanes and their classification as 1⁰, 2⁰ & 3⁰.

Preparation: starting from alcohols (1⁰, 2⁰ & 3⁰) and alkenes with mechanisms.

Reactions: Nucleophilic substitution reactions with mechanism and their types (SN1, SN2 and SNi), competition with elimination reactions (elimination vs substitution), nucleophilic substitution reactions with specific examples from: hydrolysis, nitrite & nitro formation, nitrile & isonitrile formation and Williamson's ether synthesis.

of 96


B) Haloarenes:

Structure and resonance

Preparation: Methods of preparation of chloro, bromo & iodobenzene from benzene (electrophilic substitution), from phenols (nucleophilic substitution reaction) and from aniline (Sandmeyer and Gattermann reactions).

Reaction: Nucleophilic aromatic substitution by OH group (Bimolecular Displacement Mechanism), Effect of nitro substituent on reactivity of haloarenes, Reaction with strong bases NaNH2/NH3 (elimination-addition mechanism involving benzyne intermediate), relative reactivity and strength of C-X bond in alkyl, allyl, benzyl, vinyl and aryl halides.

(Lectures:11)

Unit 6:

Alcohols, Phenols, Ethers, Aldehydes and Ketones (Aliphatic and Aromatic)

A) Alcohols (upto 5 Carbon):

Structure and classification of alcohols as 1⁰, 2⁰ & 3⁰.

Preparation: Methods of preparation of 1⁰, 2⁰ & 3⁰ by using Grignard reagent, ester hydrolysis and reduction of aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acids and esters.

Reactions: Acidic character of alcohols and reaction with sodium, with HX (Lucas Test), esterification, oxidation (with PCC, alkaline KMnO4, acidic K2Cr2O7 and conc. HNO3), Oppeneauer Oxidation.

B) Diols (upto 6 Carbons): Oxidation and Pinacol-Pinacolone rearrangement.

C) Phenols: acidity of phenols and factors affecting their acidity.

Preparation: Methods of preparation from cumene, diazonium salts and benzene sulphonic acid.

Reactions: Directive influence of OH group and Electrophilic substitution reactions, viz. nitration, halogenation, sulphonation, Reimer-Tiemann reaction, Gattermann–Koch reaction, Houben-Hoesch condensation, reaction due to OH group: Schotten-Baumann reaction

D) Ethers (Aliphatic & Aromatic):

Williamson's ether synthesis, Cleavage of ethers with HI

E) Aldehydes and ketones (Aliphatic and Aromatic):

Preparation: from acid chlorides and from nitriles.

Reactions: Nucleophilic addition, nucleophilic addition – elimination reaction including reaction with HCN, ROH, NaHSO3, NH2-G derivatives. Iodoform test, Aldol Condensation, Cannizzaro’s reaction, Wittig reaction, Benzoin condensation. Clemmensen reduction, Wolff Kishner reduction, Meerwein-Pondorff Verley reduction.

(Lectures:14)

Practical:

of 96



Section A: Physical Chemistry

Energetics:

1. Determination of heat capacity of calorimeter.

2. Determination of enthalpy of neutralization of hydrochloric acid with sodium hydroxide.

3. Determination of integral enthalpy of solution of salts (KNO3, NH4Cl).

4. Determination of enthalpy of hydration of copper sulphate.

Ionic equilibria:

1. Preparation of buffer solutions: (i) Sodium acetate-acetic acid or (ii) Ammonium chloride-ammonium acetate. Measurement of the pH of buffer solutions and comparison of the values with theoretical values.


Preparations: (Mechanism of various reactions involved to be discussed)

(Recrystallization, determination of melting point and calculation of quantitative yields to be done in all cases)

1. Bromination of phenol/aniline

2. Benzoylation of amines/phenols

3. Oxime of aldehydes and ketones

4. 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazone of aldehydes and ketones

5. Semicarbazone of aldehydes and ketones

References:

Theory:

1. Castellan, G. W. (2004),Physical Chemistry, Narosa. 2. Kapoor, K.L. (2015),A Textbook of Physical Chemistry,Vol 1, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill

Education. 3. Kapoor, K.L.(2015), A Textbook of Physical Chemistry, Vol 2, 6th Edition,McGraw Hill

Education. 4. B.R.Puri, L.R.Sharma, M.S.Pathania, (2017),Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal

Publishing Co. 5. Finar, I. L. Organic Chemistry (Volume 1 & 2), Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson

Education). 6. Morrison, R. N.; Boyd, R. N. Organic Chemistry, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson

Education). 7. Bahl, A; Bahl, B. S. (2012), Advanced Organic Chemistry, S. Chand.

Practical:

of 96


1. Khosla, B.D.; Garg, V.C.;Gulati, A.(2015),Senior Practical Physical Chemistry, R. Chand & Co. 2. Furniss, B.S.; Hannaford, A.J.; Smith, P.W.G.; Tatchell, A.R. (2012),Vogel's Textbook

ofPractical Organic Chemistry, Pearson. 3. Mann, F.G.; Saunders, B.C. (2009),Practical Organic Chemistry, Pearson Education.

Additional Resources:

1. Mahan, B. H.(2013),University Chemistry, Narosa. 2. Barrow, G.M. (2006). Physical Chemistry, 5th Edition,McGraw Hill.


• The teaching learning process will involve the blended learning technique along with traditional chalk and black board method wherever required.

• Certain topics like stereochemistry of nucleophilic substitution, elimination reactions and their underlying stereochemistry, where traditional chalk and talk method may not be able to convey the concept, are especially taught through audio-visual aids.

• Students are encouraged to participate actively in the classroom through regular presentations on curriculum based topics.

Assessment Methods:


Keywords: Chemical energetics, Feasibility of reaction, Hydrocarbons, Haloalkanes and haloarenes, Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers, Aldehydes and Ketones.

SEMESTER –III


Course Title: Solutions, Phase Equilibrium, Conductance, Electrochemistry

and Functional Group Organic Chemistry-II



Objectives:

The students will learn about ideal and non-ideal solutions, Raoult’s law, partially miscible and immiscible solutions and their applications. The student will also learn about equilibrium between phases with emphasis on one component and simple eutectic systems. In electrochemical cells the students will learn about electrolytic and galvanic cells, measurement of conductance and its applications, measurement of emf and its applications.The topics of carbohydrates, amino acids, peptides and proteins are introduced through some specific examples. A relationship between structure, reactivity and biological properties of biomolecules is established through the study of these representative biomolecules.

of 96


Learning Outcomes:


• Explain the concepts of different types of binary solutions-miscible, partially miscible and immiscible along with their applications.

• Explain the thermodynamic aspects of equilibria between phases and draw phase diagrams of simple one component and two component systems.

• Explain the factors that affect conductance, migration of ions and application of conductance measurement.

• Understand different types of galvanic cells, their Nernst equations, measurement of emf, calculations of thermodynamic properties and other parameters from the emf measurements.

• Understand and demonstrate how the structure of biomolecules determines their chemical properties, reactivity and biological uses.

• Design newer synthetic routes for various organic compounds.

Section A: Physical Chemistry (Lectures:30)

Unit 1:

Solutions

Thermodynamics of ideal solutions: Ideal solutions and Raoult's law, deviations from Raoult's law- non-ideal solutions. Vapour pressure, composition and temperature-composition curves of ideal and non-ideal solutions. Distillation of solutions, Lever rule, Azeotropes. Partial miscibility of liquids: Critical solution temperature; effect of impurity on partial miscibility of liquids. Immiscibility of liquids: principle of steam distillation, Nernst distribution law and its applications, solvent extraction.

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 2:

Phase Equilibrium

Phases, components and degrees of freedom of a system, criteria of phase equilibrium, Gibbs phase rule and its thermodynamic derivation, derivation of Clausius- Clapeyron equation and its importance in phase equilibria, phase diagrams of one component systems (water and sulphur) and two component systems involving eutectics, congruent and incongruent melting points (lead-silver, FeCl3-H2O and Na-K only).

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 3:

Conductance

Conductivity, equivalent and molar conductivity and their variation with dilution for weak and strong electrolytes, Kohlrausch Law of independent migration of ions, transference number and its experimental determination using Hittorf and moving boundary methods, Ionic mobility, applications of conductance measurements: determination of degree of ionization of weak electrolytes, solubility and solubility products of sparingly soluble salts, ionic product of water, hydrolysis constant of a salt. Conductometric titrations (only acid-base).

(Lectures: 8)

of 96


Unit 4:

Electrochemistry

Reversible and irreversible cells, concept of EMF of a cell, measurement of EMF of a cell, Nernst equation and its importance, types of electrodes, standard electrode potential, electrochemical series. thermodynamics of a reversible cell, calculation of thermodynamic properties: G, H and S from EMF data. Calculation of equilibrium constant from EMF data, concentration cells with transference and without transference, liquid junction potential and salt bridge, pH determination using hydrogen electrode and quinhydrone electrode, Potentiometric titrations-qualitative treatment (acid-base and oxidation-reduction only).

(Lectures: 10)


Unit 5:

Functional group approach for the following reactions: Preparations, physical & chemical properties to be studied in context to their structure with mechanism.

A) Carboxylic acids and their derivatives (aliphatic and aromatic)

Preparation: Acidic and alkaline hydrolysis of esters.

Reactions: Hell-Volhard Zelinsky reaction, acidity of carboxylic acids, effect of substitution on acid strength.

Carboxylic acid derivatives (aliphatic):

Preparation: Acid chlorides, anhydrides, esters and amides from acids and their interconversion, Claisen condensation.

Reactions: Relative reactivities of acid derivatives towards nucleophiles, Reformatsky reaction, Perkin condensation.

B) Amines (aliphatic & aromatic) and Diazonium Salts

Amines

Preparation: from alkyl halides, Gabriel's Phthalimide synthesis, Hofmann Bromamide reaction.

Reactions: Hofmann vs Saytzeff elimination, carbylamine test, Hinsberg test, reaction with HNO2, Schotten-Baumann reaction. Electrophilic substitution (case aniline): nitration, bromination, sulphonation, basicity of amines.

Diazonium salt

Preparation: from aromatic amines

Reactions: conversion to benzene, phenol and dyes.

(Lectures: 13)

of 96


Unit 6:

Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins

Zwitterion, isoelectric point and electrophoresis

Preparation of amino acids: Strecker synthesis and using Gabriel’s phthalimide synthesis.

Reactions of amino acids: ester of –COOH group, acetylation of –NH2 group, complexation with Cu2+

ions, ninhydrin test.

Overview of Primary, Secondary, Tertiary and Quaternary Structure of proteins.

Determination of primary structure of peptides by degradation Edmann degradation (N- terminal) and C–terminal (thiohydantoin and with carboxypeptidase enzyme). Synthesis of simple peptides (upto

dipeptides) by N-protection (t-butyloxycarbonyl and phthaloyl) & C- activating groups and Merrifield solid-

phase synthesis.

(Lectures: 9)

B) Carbohydrates

Classification, and general properties, glucose and fructose (open chain and cyclic structure), determination of configuration of monosaccharides, absolute configuration of glucose and fructose,

mutarotation, ascending and descending in monosaccharides. Structure of disaccharides (sucrose,

cellobiose, maltose, lactose) and polysaccharides (starch and cellulose) excluding their structure

elucidation.

(Lectures:8)

Practical:


Section A: Physical Chemistry

Phase Equilibria

1. Construction of the phase diagram of a binary system (simple eutectic) using cooling curves.

2. Determination of critical solution temperature and composition of phenol water system and study the effect of impurities on it.

Conductance

1. Determination of cell constant.

2. Determination of equivalent conductance, degree of dissociation and dissociation constant of a weak acid.

3. Perform the following conductometric titrations:

a) Strong acid vs strong base

b) Weak acid vs strong base.

of 96


Potentiometry

Perform the potentiometric titrations of (i) Strong acid vs strong base and (ii) Weak acid vs strong base.


Systematic qualitative analysis of organic compounds possessing monofunctional groups (Alcohols, Phenols, Carbonyl, -COOH). (Including Derivative Preparation).

References:

Theory:

1. Castellan, G.W. (2004),Physical Chemistry, Narosa. 2. Kapoor, K.L. (2015),A Textbook of Physical Chemistry,Vol 1, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill Education. 3. Kapoor, K.L. (2013),A Textbook of Physical Chemistry,Vol 3, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill Education. 4. B.R.Puri, L.R.Sharma, M.S.Pathania, (2017),Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publishing

Co. 5. Morrison, R. N.; Boyd, R. N. Organic Chemistry, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson

Education). 6. Finar, I. L. Organic Chemistry (Volume 1 & 2), Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson

Education).

Practical:

1. Khosla, B.D.; Garg, V.C.;Gulati, A.(2015),Senior Practical Physical Chemistry, R. Chand & Co.


• Teaching Learning Process for the course is visualized as largely student-focused. • Transaction through an intelligent mix of conventional and modern methods. • Engaging students in cooperative learning. • Learning through quiz design. • Problem solving to enhance comprehension.

Assessment Methods:


Keywords:

Raoult's law, Lever rule, azeotropes, critical solution temperature, transference number, EMF, Carboxylic acids and derivatives, Amines and diazonium salts, Polynuclear and heterocyclic compounds

of 96


SEMESTER-IV


Course Title: Chemistry of s- and p-Block Elements, States of Matter and

Chemical Kinetics



Objectives:

The objective of this paper is to provide basic understanding of the fundamental principles of metallurgy through study of the methods of extraction of metals, recovery of the by-products during extraction, applications of metals, alloy behaviour and their manufacturing processes. The course illustrates the diversity and fascination of inorganic chemistry through the study of properties and utilities of s- and p-block elements and their compounds. The students will learn about the properties of ideal and real gases and deviation from ideal behaviour, properties of liquid, types of solids with details about crystal structure. The student will also learn about the reaction rate, order, activation energy and theories of reaction rates.

Learning Outcomes:


• Understand the chemistry and applications of s- and p-block elements. • Derive ideal gas law from kinetic theory of gases and explain why the real gases deviate from ideal

behaviour. • Explain Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution, critical constants and viscosity of gases. • Explain the properties of liquids especially surface tension and viscosity. • Explain symmetry elements, crystal structure specially NaCl, KCl and CsCl • Define rate of reactions and the factors that affect the rates of reaction. • Understand the concept of rate laws e.g., order, molecularity, half-life and their determination • Learn about various theories of reaction rates and how these account for experimental

observations.


Unit 1:

General Principles of Metallurgy

Chief modes of occurrence of metals based on standard electrode potentials. Ellingham diagrams for reduction of metal oxides using carbon as reducing agent.

Hydrometallurgy with reference to cyanide process for silver and gold, Methods of purification of metals (Al, Pb, Ti, Fe, Cu, Ni, Zn): electrolytic, oxidative refining, van Arkel-De Boer process, Mond's process and Zone Refining.

(Lectures: 4)

of 96


Unit 2:

s- and p- block elements

Periodicity in s- and p-block elements with respect to electronic configuration, atomic and ionic size, ionization enthalpy, electronegativity (Pauling, Muliken, and Allred-Rochow scales). Allotropy in C, S, and P. Oxidation states with reference to elements in unusual and rare oxidation states like carbides and nitrides), inert pair effect, diagonal relationship and anomalous behaviour of first member of each group. ,compounds of s- and p-block elements , diborane and concept of multicentre bonding. Structure, bonding and their important properties like oxidation/reduction, acidic/basic nature of the following compounds and their applications in industrial and environmental chemistry. Hydrides of nitrogen (NH3, N2H4, N3H, NH2OH) Oxoacids of P, S and Cl, Halides and oxohalides: PCl3, PCl5, SOCl2 and SO2Cl2.

(Lectures: 26)

Section B: Physical Chemistry (Lectures:30)

Unit 3:

Kinetic Theory of Gases

Postulates of kinetic theory of gases and derivation of the kinetic gas equation, deviation of real gases from ideal behaviour, compressibility factor, causes of deviation, van der Waals equation of state for real gases. Boyle temperature (derivation not required), critical phenomena, critical constants and their calculation from van der Waals equation, Andrews isotherms of CO2, Maxwell Boltzmann distribution laws of molecular velocities and molecular energies (graphic representation – derivation not required) and their importance. Temperature dependence of these distributions, most probable, average and root mean square velocities (no derivation), collision cross section, collision number, collision frequency, collision diameter and mean free path of molecules, viscosity of gases and effect of temperature and pressure on coefficient of viscosity (qualitative treatment only).

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 4:

Liquids

Surface tension and its determination using stalagmometer, Viscosity of a liquid and determination of coefficient of viscosity using Ostwald viscometer, effect of temperature on surface tension and coefficient of viscosity of a liquid (qualitative treatment only).

(Lectures: 3)

Unit 5:

Solids

Forms of solids, symmetry elements, unit cells, crystal systems, Bravais lattice types and identification of lattice planes. Laws of crystallography - law of constancy of interfacial angles.

Law of rational indices, Miller indices. X–ray diffraction by crystals, Bragg’s law, structures of NaCl, KCl and CsCl (qualitative treatment only), defects in crystals.Glasses and liquid crystals.

(Lectures: 6)

of 96


Unit 6:

Chemical Kinetics

The concept of reaction rates, effect of temperature, pressure, catalyst and other factors on reaction rates. Order and molecularity of a reaction, derivation of integrated rate equations for zero, first and second order reactions (both for equal and unequal concentrations of reactants), half–life of a reaction, general methods for determination of order of a reaction, Concept of activation energy and its calculation from Arrhenius equation.

Theories of reaction rates: Collision theory and activated complex theory of bi-molecular reactions. Comparison of the two theories (qualitative treatment only)

(Lectures: 11)

Practical:


Section A: Inorganic Chemistry

Semi-micro qualitative analysis of mixtures using H2S or any other scheme- not more than four ionic species (two anions and two cations and excluding insoluble salts) out of the following:

Cations: NH4+, Pb2+, Bi3+, Cu2+, Cd2+, Fe3+, Al3+, Co2+, Ni2+, Mn2+, Zn2+, Ba2+, Sr2+, Ca2+, K+

Anions: CO32-, S2- , SO3

- , NO2- , CH3COO-, Cl-, Br-, I-, NO3

-,SO42- , PO4

3- , BO33- , C2O4

2-, F-.

(Spot tests should be carried out wherever feasible)

Section B: Physical Chemistry

1. Surface tension measurement (use of organic solvents excluded):

Determination of the surface tension of a liquid or a dilute solution using a stalagmometer.

2. Viscosity measurement (use of organic solvents excluded):

a) Determination of the relative and absolute viscosity of a liquid or dilute solution using an Ostwald viscometer.

b) Study of the variation of viscosity of an aqueous solution with concentration of solute.

3. Chemical Kinetics

Study the kinetics of the following reactions by integrated rate method:

a) Acid hydrolysis of methyl acetate with hydrochloric acid. b) Compare the strength of HCl and H2SO4 by studying the kinetics of hydrolysis methyl acetate.

References:

Theory:

1. Lee., J. D. A new Concise Inorganic Chemistry, Pearson Education.

of 96


2. Atkins, P.W.; Overton, T.L.; Rourke, J.P.; Weller, M.T.; Armstrong, F.A. (2010),Shriver and Atkin’s Inorganic Chemistry, Oxford.

3. Miessler, G. L.; Tarr, D.A.(2014), Inorganic Chemistry, Pearson. 4. Castellan, G. W.(2004),Physical Chemistry, Narosa. 5. Kapoor, K.L. (2015),A Textbook of Physical Chemistry, Vol.1, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill

Education. 6. Kapoor, K.L. (2015),A Textbook of Physical Chemistry, Vol.5, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill

Education. 7. B.R.Puri, L.R.Sharma, M.S.Pathania, (2017),Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal

Publishing Co.

Practical:

1. Svehla, G. (1996),Vogel’s Qualitative Inorganic Analysis, Prentice Hall. 2. Khosla, B.D.; Garg, V.C.;Gulati, A.(2015),Senior Practical Physical Chemistry, R. Chand & Co.


• Through chalk and board method. • Revising and asking questions from students at the end of class • Motivating students to do some activity related to the topic • Power point presentation • Correlating the topic with real life cases. • Quiz contest among students on important topic.

Assessment Methods:

1. Graded assignments 2. Conventional class tests 3. Class seminars by students on course topics with a view to strengthening the content through

width and depth 4. Quizzes 5. End semester university examination.

Keywords:

Metallurgy, Periodicity, Anomalous behaviour, Ellingham diagrams, Hydrometallurgy, Allotropy, Diagonal relationship, Multicentre bonding, Ideal/real gases, Surface tension, Viscosity, Crystal systems, Rate Law, Rate constant

of 96


CHEMISTRY DISCIPLINE ELECTIVE

COURSES (DSE) Chemistry of d block elements, Quantum Chemistry and Spectroscopy is compulsory.

Choose any one more.

Course Code: CHEMISTRY –DSE-1

Course Title: Applications of Computers in Chemistry

Total Credits: 06 (Credits: Theory-04, Practicals-02)

(Total Lectures: Theory- 60, Practicals-60)

Objectives:

The aim of this paper is to make the students learn the working of computer and its applications in chemistry via programming language, QBASIC and use of software as a tool to understand chemistry, and solve chemistry based problems.

Learning Outcomes:


• Have knowledge of most commonly used commands and library functions used in QBASIC programming.

• Develop algorithm to solve problems and write corresponding programs in BASIC for performing calculations involved in laboratory experiments and research work.

• Use various spreadsheet software to perform theoretical calculations and plot graphs

Unit 1:

Basic Computer system (in brief)

Hardware and Software; Input devices, Storage devices, Output devices, Central Processing Unit (Control Unit and Arithmetic Logic Unit); Number system (Binary, Octal and Hexadecimal Operating System); Computer Codes (BCD and ASCII); Numeric/String constants and variables. Operating Systems (DOS, WINDOWS, and Linux); Software languages: Low level and High Level languages (Machine language, Assembly language; QBASIC, FORTRAN and C++); Compiled versus interpreted languages. Debugging Software Products (Office, chemsketch, scilab, matlab, and hyperchem), internet application

(Lectures: 5)

Unit 2:

Use of Programming Language for solving problems in Chemistry

of 96


Computer Programming Language- QBASIC, (for solving some of the basic and complicated chemistry problems). QB4 version of QBASIC can be used.

Programming Language – QBASIC; arithmetic expressions, hierarchy of operations, inbuilt functions. Syntax and use of the following QBASIC commands: INPUT and PRINT; GOTO, If, ELSEIF, THEN and END IF ; FOR and NEXT; Library Functions ( ABS, ASC, CHR$, EXP,INT, LOG, RND, SQR,TAB and trigonometric Functions), DIM, READ, DATA, REM, RESTORE, DEF FNR, GOSUB, RETURN, SCREEN, VIEW, WINDOW, LINE, CIRCLE, LOCATE, PSET

Simple programs using above mentioned commands.

Solution of quadratic equation, polynomial equations (formula, iteration, Newton – Raphson methods, binary bisection and Regula Falsi); Numerical differential, Numerical integration (Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rule), Simultaneous equations, Matrix addition and multiplication, Statistical analysis.

QBASIC programs for Chemistry problems - Example: plotting van der Waals Isotherms (Simple Problem, available in general text books) and observe whether van der Waal gas equation is valid at temperatures lower than critical temperature where we require to solve a cubic equation and calculation of area under the curves (Complicated Problem, not available in general text books).

(Lectures: 40)

Unit 3:

Use of Software Products

Computer Software like Scilab, Excel, LibreOffice and Calc , to solve some of the plotting or calculation problems, Handling of experimental data

(Lectures: 15)

Practical:


Computer programs using QBASIC based on numerical methods

1. Roots of equations: (e.g. volume of gas using van der Waals equation and comparison with ideal gas, pH of a weak acid).

2. Numerical differentiation (e.g., change in pressure for small change in volume of a van der Waals gas, potentiometric titrations).

3. Numerical integration (e.g. entropy/ enthalpy change from heat capacity data).

4. Probability distributions (gas kinetic theory) and mean values.

5. Mean, standard deviation and Least square curve fitting method for linear equation.

6. Matrix operations: addition, multiplication and transpose

7. Graphic programs related to Chemistry problems. e.g. van der Waals isotherm, Compressibility versus pressure curves, Maxwell distribution curves, concentration-time graph, pH metric titration curve, conductometric titration curves, Lambert Beer’s law graph, s, p, d orbital shapes, radial distribution curves, particle in one dimensional box.

of 96


Use of Software Products

1. Computer Software like Scilab and Excel, etc for data handling and manipulation.

2. Simple exercises using molecular visualization software.

3. Open source chemistry software to draw structures.

References:

Theory:

1. McQuarrie, D. A.(2008), Mathematics for Physical Chemistry, University Science Books. 2. Mortimer, R.(2005), Mathematics for Physical Chemistry,3rd Edition, Elsevier. 3. Steiner, E.(1996),The Chemical Maths Book, Oxford University Press. 4. Yates, P. (2007),Chemical Calculations, CRC Press. 5. Harris, D. C. (2007),Quantitative Chemical Analysis,6th Edition, Freeman, Chapters 3-5.

Practical:

1. Levie, R.D.(2001),How to use Excel in analytical chemistry and in general scientific data analysis, Cambridge University Press.

2. Noggle, J. H.(1985), Physical Chemistry on a Microcomputer, Little Brown & Co. 3. Venit, S.M.(1996),Programming in BASIC: Problem solving with structure and style, Jaico

Publishing House.


Conventional methods of teaching i.e. lectures, PPTs, Complete demonstrations of computer systems in chemistry using QBASIC -a DOS based language. Using DOSBOX emulator for different operating systems and running QB45 in it can solve this problem. Another version that runs on WINDOWS is QB64. This is compatible with most of the QBASIC commands.

Assessment Methods:

• The students to be assigned projects based on chemistry problems done in class or in practical classes and use BASIC program to solve it. The projects to be a part of internal assessment.

• Presentation • Test • Semester end examination

Keywords:

Hardware, software, programming language, ASCII, BCD, QBASIC, Library commands, mathematical operators, QBASIC commands.

of 96



Course Title: Analytical Methods in Chemistry



Objectives:

The objective of this course is to make student aware of the concept of sampling, Accuracy, Precision, Statistical test data-F, Q and t test. The course exposes students to the laws of spectroscopy and selection rules governing the possible transitions in the different regions of the electromagnetic spectra. Thermal and electroanalytical methods of analysis are also dealt with. Students are exposed to important separation methods like solvent extraction and chromatography. The practicals expose students to latest instrumentation and they learn to detect analytes in a mixture.

Learning Outcomes:


• Perform experiment with accuracy and precision. • Develop methods of analysis for different samples independently. • Test contaminated water samples.

• Understand basic principle of instrument like Flame Photometer, UV-vis spectrophotometer. • Learn separation of analytes by chromatography. • Apply knowledge of geometrical isomers and keto-enol tautomers to analysis.

• Determine composition of soil. • Estimate macronutrients using Flame photometry.

Unit 1:

Qualitative and quantitative aspects of analysis:

Sampling, evaluation of analytical data, errors, accuracy and precision, methods of their expression.

Normal law of distribution of indeterminate errors, statistical test of data; F, Q and t test, rejection of data, and confidence intervals.

(Lectures: 5)

Unit 2:

Optical methods of analysis

Origin of spectra, interaction of radiation with matter, fundamental laws of spectroscopy and selection rules

UV-Visible Spectrometry: Basic principles of instrumentation (choice of source, monochromator and detector) for single and double beam instrument; Transmittance. Absorbance and Beer-Lambert law

Basic principles of quantitative analysis: estimation of metal ions from aqueous solution, geometrical isomers, keto-enol tautomers.

of 96


Flame Atomic Absorption and Emission Spectrometry: Basic principles of instrumentation (choice of source, monochromator, detector, choice of flame and Burner designs). Techniques of atomization and sample introduction; Method of background correction, sources of chemical interferences and their method of removal, Techniques for the quantitative estimation of trace level of metal ions from water samples.

(Lectures: 25)

Unit 3:

Thermal methods of analysis:

Theory of thermogravimetry (TG) and basic principle of instrumentation of thermal analyser. Techniques for quantitative estimation of Ca and Mg from their mixture.

(Lectures: 5)

Unit 4:

Electroanalytical methods

Classification of electroanalytical methods, basic principle of pH metric, potentiometric and conductometric titrations.Techniques used for the determination of equivalence points. Techniques used for the determination of pKa values.

(Lectures:10)

Unit 5:

Separation techniques

Solvent extraction: Classification, principle and efficiency of the technique.

Mechanism of extraction: extraction by solvation and chelation, Technique of extraction: batch, continuous and counter current extractions, Qualitative and quantitative aspects of solvent extraction: extraction of metal ions from aqueous solution, extraction of organic species from the aqueous and non-aqueous media.

Chromatography: Classification, principle and efficiency of the technique, Mechanism of separation: adsorption, partition &ion-exchange, Development of chromatograms: frontal, elution and displacement methods.

(Lectures:15)

Practical:


1. Separation of mixtures by paper chromatography and reporting the Rf values:

(i) Co2+ and Ni2+. (ii) Amino acids present in the given mixture.

2. Solvent Extractions

of 96


(i) To separate a mixture of Ni2+ & Fe2+ by complexation with DMG and extracting the Ni2+ DMG complex in chloroform, and determine its concentration by spectrophotometry.

3. Analysis of soil:

(i) Determination of pH of soil. (ii) Total soluble salt (iii) Estimation of calcium and magnesium (iv) Qualitative detection of nitrate and phosphate

4. Ion exchange:

(i) Determination of exchange capacity of cation exchange resins and anion exchange resins. (ii) Separation of amino acids from organic acids by ion exchange chromatography.

5. Spectrophotometry

(i) Verification of Lambert-Beer’s law and determination of concentration of a coloured species (CuSO4, KMnO4, CoCl2, CoSO4)

(ii) Determination of concentration of coloured species via following methods; 1. Graphical method, (b) Epsilon method, (c) Ratio method, (iv) Standard addition method

References:

Theory:

1. Willard, H.H.(1988),Instrumental Methods of Analysis, 7th Edition, Wardsworth Publishing Company.

2. Christian, G.D.(2004),Analytical Chemistry, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York. 3. Harris, D. C.(2007),Quantitative Chemical Analysis,6th Edition, Freeman. 4. Khopkar, S.M. (2008), Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry, New Age International

Publisher. 5. Skoog, D.A.; Holler F.J.; Nieman, T.A. (2005), Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Thomson

Asia Pvt. Ltd.

Practical:

1. Jeffery, G.H.; Bassett, J.; Mendham, J.; Denney, R.C.(1989),Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis,John Wiley and Sons.


• Teaching through audio-visual aids. • Students are encouraged to participate actively in the classroom through regular presentations

on curriculum based topics. • As the best way to learn something is to do it yourself, practicals are planned in such a way so as

to reinforce the topics covered in theory.

Assessment Methods:

• Presentations by individual student/ small group of students • Class tests at periodic intervals. • Written assignment(s) • Objective type chemical quizzes based on contents of the paper. • End semester university theory and practical examination.

of 96


Keywords:

Separation techniques, Solvent extraction, Ion-exchange, Optical methods, Flame Atomic Absorption and Emission Spectrometry, indeterminate errors, statistical test of data; F, Q and t tests. TGA.


Course Title: Molecular Modelling and Drug Design



Objectives:

Objective of this course is to make students learn the theoretical background of principles of computational techniques in molecular modelling, evaluation and applications of different methods for various molecular systems, energy minimization techniques, analysis of Mulliken Charge & ESP Plots and elementary idea of drug design.

Learning Outcomes:


• Understand theoretical background of computational techniques and selective application to various molecular systems.

• Learn Energy minimization methods through use of different force fields. • Learn ESP Plots by suitable soft wares, electron rich and electron deficient sites, • Compare computational and experimental results and explain deviations. • Carry out Molecular dynamics (MD) and Monte Carlo (MC) simulations on several molecules and

polymers. • Learn QSAR properties and their role in molecular modelling, cheminformatics and drug

discovery. • Perform Optimization of geometry parameters of a molecule (such as shape, bond length and

bond angle) through use of software like Chem Sketch and Argus Lab in interesting hands-on exercises.

Unit 1:

Introduction: Overview of Classical and Quantum Mechanical Methods (Ab initio, Semi-empirical, Molecular Mechanics, Molecular Dynamics and Monte Carlo) General considerations.

Coordinate systems: Cartesian and Internal Coordinates, Bond lengths, bond angles and torsion angles, Writing Z -matrix (ex: methane, ethane, ethene, ethyne, water, H2O2 .

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 2:

Potential Energy Surfaces: Intrinsic Reaction Coordinates, Stationary points, Equilibrium points – Local and Global minima, concept of transition state with examples: Ethane, propane, butane, cyclohexane. Meaning of rigid and relaxed PES.

of 96


Applications of computational chemistry to determine reaction mechanisms.

Energy Minimization and Transition State Search: Geometry optimization, Methods of energy minimization: Multivariate Grid Search, Steepest Descent Method, Newton-Raphson method and Hessian matrix.

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 3:

Molecular Mechanics: Force Fields, Non-bonded interactions (van der Waals and electrostatic), how to handle torsions of flexible molecules, van der Waals interactions using Lennard-Jones potential, hydrogen bonding interactions, electrostatic term, Parameterization. Applications of MM, disadvantages, Software, Different variants of MM: MM1, MM2, MM3, MM4, MM+, AMBER, BIO+, OPLS.GUI.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 4:

Molecular Dynamics: Radial distribution functions for solids, liquids and gases, intermolecular Potentials (Hard sphere, finite square well and Lennard-Jones potential), concept of periodic box, ensembles (microcanonical, canonical, isothermal – isobaric), Ergodic hypothesis. Integration of Newton’s equations (Leapfrog and Verlet Algorithms), Rescaling, Simulation of Pure water – Radial distribution curves and interpretation, TIP & TIP3P, Typical MD simulation

Brief introduction to Langevin and Brownian dynamics

Monte Carlo Method: Metropolis algorithm.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 5:

Huckel MO with examples: ethane, propenyl, cyclopropenyl systems, Properties calculated – energy, charges, dipole moments, bond order, electronic energies, resonance energies, Oxidation and reduction (cationic and anionic species of above systems)

Extension to Extended Huckel theory and PPP methods

Ab-initio methods: Writing the Hamiltonian of a system, Brief recap of H – atom solution, Units in quantum mechanical calculations, Born-Oppenheimer approximation (recap), Antisymmetry principle, Slater determinants, Coulomb and Exchange integrals,

Examples of He atom and hydrogen molecule, Hartree-Fock method

Basis sets, Basis functions, STOs and GTOs, diffuse and polarization functions. Minimal basis sets

Advantages of ab initio calculations, Koopman’s theorem, Brief idea of Density Functional Theory

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 6:

of 96


Semi-empirical methods: Brief idea of CNDO, INDO, MINDO/3, MNDO, AM1, PM3 methods. Other file formats – PDB. Visualization of orbitals – HOMO, LUMO, ESP maps.

QSAR: Structure-activity relationships. Properties in QSAR (Partial atomic charges, polarizabilities, volume and surface area, log P, lipophilicity and Hammet equation and applications, hydration energies, refractivity). Biological activities (LD50, IC50, ED50.)

(Lectures: 8)

Practical:


1. Plotting a 3D graph depicting a saddle point in a spreadsheet software.

2. Determine the enthalpy of isomerization of cis and trans 2-butene.

3. Determine the heat of hydrogenation of ethylene.

4. Compare the optimized C-C bond lengths and Wiberg bond orders in ethane, ethene, ethyne and benzene using PM3. Is there any relationship between the bond lengths and bond orders? Visualize the highest occupied and lowest unoccupied molecular orbitals of ethane, ethene, ethyne, benzene and pyridine.

5. Perform a conformational analysis of butane.

6. Compare the basicities of the nitrogen atoms in ammonia, methylamine, dimethylamine and trimethylamine by comparison of their Mulliken charges and ESP maps.

7. Compare the gas phase basicities of the methylamines by comparing the enthalpies of the following reactions:

BH+ + NH3 → B + NH4+

where B = CH3NH2, (CH3)2NH, (CH3)3N

8. Arrange 1-hexene, 2-methyl-2-pentene, (E)-3-methyl-2-pentene, (Z)-3-methyl-2-pentene, and 2,3-dimethyl-2-butene in order of increasing stability.

9. Compare the optimized bond angles H2O, H2S, H2Se using PM3.

10. Compare the HAH bond angles for the second row hydrides (BeH2, CH4, NH3, H2O) and compare with the results from qualitative MO theory.

11. (a) Compare the shapes of the molecules: 1-butanol, 2-butanol, 2-methyl-1-propanol, and 2-methyl-2-propanol. Note the dipole moment of each molecule. (b) Show how the shapes affect the trend in boiling points: (118 ºC, 100 ºC, 108 ºC, 82 ºC, respectively).

12. Compute the resonance energy of benzene by comparison of its enthalpy of hydrogenation with that of cyclohexene.

13. Plot the electrostatic potential mapped on electron density for benzene and use it to predict the type of stacking in the crystal structure of benzene dimer.

14. Predict the aromaticity of thiophene with respect to benzene by comparing the enthalpies of the following reactions:

of 96


(a) Hydrogenation of benzene to 1,3-cyclohexadiene and then 1,3-cyclohexadiene to cyclohexene.

(b)

S S S

H2 H2

15. Docking of Sulfonamide-type D-Glu inhibitor into MurD active site using Argus lab.

Note: Software: Argus Lab (www.planaria-software.com).

References:

Theory:

1. Lewars, E. (2003), Computational Chemistry, Kluwer academic Publisher. 2. Cramer, C.J.(2004),Essentials of Computational Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons. 3. Hinchcliffe, A. (1996),Modelling Molecular Structures, John Wiley & Sons. 4. Leach, A.R.(2001),Molecular Modelling, Prentice-Hall.

Practical:

1. Lewars, E. G. (2011),Computational Chemistry, Springer (India) Pvt. Ltd. Chapter 1 & 2. 2. Engel, T.; Reid, P.(2012),Physical Chemistry, Prentice-Hall. Chapter 26.


Conventional methods of teaching i.e. lectures, PPTs, Hands on practice of molecule centric problems with maximum characterization parameters and recently designed lead drug molecules

Assessment Methods:

• Assignment based on Theoretical designing of small molecules of drug prospective • Presentation on fundamentals of drug designing and molecular modelling • Test • Semester end examination

Keywords:

Molecular modelling, Quantum Mechanical Method, Cartesian Coordinates, Molecular Dynamics, Force Field, Software of Computational Chemistry.

of 96



Course Title: Novel Inorganic Solids



Objectives:

Solid-state chemistry also referred as material chemistry currently has emerged with great focus on novel inorganic solids. It has found enormous applications in both industrial and research arenas and has helped to shape modern day recyclable adsorbents and catalysts. Novel inorganic-organic hybrid nanocomposites have received a lot of attention because of their abundance and cost-effective nature they can be utilized as catalysts, as a nano reactor to host reactants for synthesis and for the controlled release of biomolecules. Materials such as semiconductors, metals, composites, nanomaterials, carbon or high-tech ceramics make life easier in this era and are great sources of industrial growth and technological changes. Therefore, its exposure to the undergraduates with science backgrounds can groom them for future researches.

Learning Outcomes:

By the end of the course, the student will be able to:

• Understand the mechanism of solid-state synthesis. • Explain about the different characterization techniques and their principle. • Understand the concept of nanomaterials, their synthesis and properties. • Explain the mechanism of growth of self-assembled nanostructures. • Appreciate the existence of bioinorganic nanomaterials. • Explain the importance of composites, conducting polymers and their applications. • Understand the usage of solid materials in various instruments, batteries, etc. which would help

them to appreciate the real life importance of these materials

Unit 1:

Basic introduction to solid-state chemistry: Semiconductors, different types of semiconductors and their applications.

Synthesis of inorganic solids: Conventional heat and beat method, Co-precipitation method, Sol-gel method, Hydrothermal method, Chemical vapor deposition (CVD), Ion-exchange and Intercalation method.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 2:

Characterization techniques of inorganic solids:Powder X-ray Diffraction, UV-visible spectroscopy, Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM), Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM), Fourier-Transform Infrared (FTIR) spectroscopy, Brunauer–Emmett–Teller (BET) surface area analyser, Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS)

(Lectures: 10)

of 96


Unit 3:

Cationic, anionic and mixed solid electrolytes and their applications. Inorganic pigments – coloured, white and black pigments.

One-dimensional metals, molecular magnets, inorganic liquid crystals.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 4:

Nanomaterials: Overview of nanostructures and nanomaterials, classification, preparation and optical properties of gold and silver metallic nanoparticles, concept of surface plasmon resonance, carbon nanotubes, inorganic nanowires, Bioinorganic nanomaterials, DNA and its nanomaterials, natural and artificial nanomaterials, self-assembled nanostructures, control of nanoarchitecture, one dimensional control.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 5:

Composite materials: Introduction, limitations of conventional engineering materials, role of matrix in composites, classification, matrix materials, reinforcements, metal-matrix composites, polymer-matrix composites, fibre-reinforced composites, bio-nanocomposites, environmental effects on composites, applications of composites.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 6:

Speciality polymers:Conducting polymers - Introduction, conduction mechanism, polyacetylene, polyparaphenylene, polyanilineand polypyrrole, applications of conducting polymers, ion-exchange resins and their applications.

Ceramic & Refractory:Introduction, classification, properties, manufacturing and applications of ceramics, refractory and superalloys as examples.

(Lectures: 10)

Practical:


Chemistry Practical: Novel Inorganic Solids

1. Synthesis of silver nanoparticles by chemical methods and characterization using UV-visible spectrophotometer.

2. Synthesis of silver nanoparticles by green approach methods and characterization using UV-visible spectrophotometer.

3. Preparation of polyaniline and its characterization using UV-visible spectrophotometer.

of 96


4. Synthesis of metal sulphide nanoparticles (MnS, CdS, ZnS, CuS, NiO) and characterization using UV-visible spectrophotometer.

5. Intercalation of hydrogen in tungsten trioxide and its conductivity measurement using conductometer.

6. Synthesis of inorganic pigments (PbCrO4, ZnCrO4, Prussian Blue, Malachite).

7. Synthesis of pure ZnO and Cu doped ZnO nanoparticles.

8. Preparation of zeolite A and removal of Mg and Ca ions from water samples quantitatively using zeolite.

References:

Theory:

1. West, A. R. (2014), Solid State Chemistry and Its Application, Wiley. 2. Smart, L. E.; Moore, E. A., (2012),Solid State Chemistry: An Introduction CRC Press Taylor &

Francis. 3. Rao, C. N. R.; Gopalakrishnan, J. (1997),New Direction in Solid State Chemistry, Cambridge

University Press. 4. Poole Jr.; Charles P.; Owens, Frank J. (2003), Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley

and Sons.

Practicals:

1. Orbaek, W.; McHale, M.M.; Barron, A. R.; Synthesis and Characterization of Silver Nanoparticles for An Undergraduate Laboratory,J. Chem. Educ. 2015, 92, 339−344.

2. MacDiarmid, G.; Chiang, J.C.; Richter, A.F.; Somasiri, N.L.D.(1987), Polyaniline: Synthesis and Characterization of the Emeraldine Oxidation State by Elemental Analysis, L. Alcaeer (ed.), Conducting Polymers, 105-120, D. Reidel Publishing.

3. Cheng, K.H.; Jacobson, A.J.; Whittingham, M.S. (1981),Hexagonal Tungsten Trioxide and Its Intercalation Chemistry, Solid State Ionics, 5, 1981, 355-358.

4. Ghorbani H.R.; Mehr, F.P; Pazoki, H; Rahmani, B.M.; Synthesis of ZnO Nanoparticles by Precipitation Method, Orient J Chem 2015, 31(2).


Blackboard, Power point presentations, Assignments, Field Trips to Industry, Different working models ICT enabled classes, Interactive sessions, Debate, recent literature using internet and research articles.

Assessment Methods:

Students’ evaluation will be done on the basis of regular class test, presentations and assignments as a part of internal assessment during the course as per the curriculum. End semester university examination will be held for both theory and practical. In practical, assessment will be done based on continuous evaluation, performance in the experiment on the date of examination and viva voce.

Keywords:

Solid State Chemistry, Nanomaterials, Solid electrolyte, Inorganic Pigments, Self-assembled, Composite Materials, Instrumentation, Polymers.

of 96



Course Title: Polymer Chemistry



Objectives:

The primary objective of this paper is to help the student to know about the synthesis, properties and applications of polymers.

Learning Outcomes:


• Know about history of polymeric materials and their classification • Learn about different mechanisms of polymerization and polymerization techniques • Evaluate kinetic chain length of polymers based on their mechanism • Differentiate between polymers and copolymers • Learn about different methods of finding out average molecular weight of polymers • Differentiate between glass transition temperature (Tg) and crystalline melting point (Tm) • Determine Tg and Tm • Know about solid and solution properties of polymers • Learn properties and applications of various useful polymers in our daily life.

This paper will give glimpse of polymer industry to the student and help them to choose their career in the field of polymer chemistry.

Unit 1:

Introduction and history of polymeric materials:

History of polymeric materials, Different schemes of classification of polymers, Polymer nomenclature, Molecular forces and chemical bonding in polymers, Texture of Polymers

Functionality and its importance:

Criteria for synthetic polymer formation, classification of polymerization processes, Relationships between functionality, extent of reaction and degree of polymerizationBifunctional systems, Poly-functional systems

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 2:

Kinetics of Polymerization

Mechanism of step growth polymerization, kinetics of step growth, radical chain growth, ionic chain (both cationic and anionic), Mechanism and kinetics of copolymerization, polymerization techniques

of 96


(Lectures: 8)

Unit 3:

Glass transition temperature (Tg) and determination of Tg, Free volume theory, WLF equation, Factors affecting glass transition temperature (Tg).

Crystallization and crystallinity: Determination of crystalline melting point and degree of crystallinity, Morphology of crystalline polymers, Factors affecting crystalline melting point.

Nature and structure of polymers-Structure Property relationships

(Lectures: 14)

Unit 4:

Determination of molecular weight of polymers (Mn, Mw, etc.) by end group analysis, viscometry, light scattering and osmotic pressure methods. Molecular weight distribution and its significance. Polydispersity index

Polymer Solution

Criteria for polymer solubility and Solubility parameter, Thermodynamics of polymer solutions, entropy, enthalpy and free energy change of mixing of polymers solutions.

Polymer Degradation

Thermal, oxidative, hydrolytic and photodegradation

(Lectures: 16)

Unit 5:

Properties of Polymers

(Physical, thermal, Flow & Mechanical Properties) Brief introduction to preparation, structure, properties and application of the following polymers: polyolefins, polystyrene and styrene copolymers, poly(vinyl chloride) and related polymers, poly(vinyl acetate) and related polymers, acrylic polymers, fluoro polymers, polyamides and related polymers. Phenol formaldehyde resins (Bakelite, Novolac), polyurethanes, silicone polymers, polydienes, Polycarbonates, Conducting Polymers: polyacetylene, polyaniline, poly(p-phenylene sulphide, polypyrrole, polythiophene

(Lectures: 10)

Practical:


Chemistry Lab: Polymer chemistry

Polymer synthesis

1. Free radical solution polymerization of styrene (St) / Methyl Methacrylate (MMA)/MethylAcrylate (MA).

of 96


2. Preparation of nylon 6,6

3. Redox polymerization of acrylamide

4. Precipitation polymerization of acrylonitrile

5. Preparation of urea-formaldehyde resin

6. Preparations of novalac resin/resold resin.

7. Microscale Emulsion Polymerization of Poly(methylacrylate).

Polymer characterization

1. Determination of molecular weight of polyvinyl propylidene in water by viscometry:

2. Determination of the viscosity-average molecular weight of poly(vinyl alcohol) (PVOH) and the fraction of head-to-head monomer linkages in the polymer.

3. Determination of molecular weight by end group analysis of polymethacrylic acid.

Polymer analysis

1. Estimation of the amount of HCHO in the given solution by sodium sulphite method

2. IR studies of polymers

3. DSC (Differential Scanning Calorimetry) analysis of polymers

4. TG-DTA (Thermo-Gravimetery-Differential Thermal Analaysis) of polymers

Suggested Additional Experiment:

1. Purification of monomer. 2. Emulsion polymerization of a monomer.

References:

Theory:

1. Carraher,C. E. Jr. (2013), Seymour’s Polymer Chemistry, Marcel Dekker, Inc. 2. Odian, G. (2004), Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley. 3. Billmeyer, F.W. (1984),Text Book of Polymer Science, John Wiley. 4. Ghosh, P. (2001),Polymer Science & Technology, Tata Mcgraw-Hill. 5. Lenz, R.W. (1967),Organic Chemistry of Synthetic High Polymers, Intersecience (Wiley).

Practical:

1. Allcock, H.R.; ; Lampe, F. W.; Mark, J. E. (2003),Contemporary Polymer Chemistry, Prentice-Hall.

2. Fried, J.R. (2003), Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice-Hall. 3. Munk, P.; Aminabhavi, T. M. (2002), Introduction to Macromolecular Science, John Wiley &

Sons. 4. Sperling, L.H.(2005),Introduction to Physical Polymer Science, John Wiley & Sons.

of 96


Teaching-Learning Process:

• Teaching learning process for the course is visualized as largely student-focused. • Transaction through an intelligent mix of conventional and modern methods. • Engaging students in cooperative learning. • Learning through quiz design. • Problem solving to enhance comprehension.

Assessment Methods:


Keywords:

Bonding, Texture, Polymerization, Degradation, Polymer solution, Crystallization, Properties, Applications.


Course Title: Research Methodology For Chemistry

Total Credits: 06 (Credits: Theory-05, Tutorial-01)

(Total Lectures: Theory- 75, Tutorial-15)

Objectives:

The objective of this paper is to formulate the research problems and connect the research outcomes to the society. Student should be able to assess the local resources and opportunities in public domains. It further helps in gaining the knowledge of safety and ethical handlings of chemicals in lab and households.

Learning Outcomes:


• Learn how to identify research problems. • Evaluate local resources and need for addressing the research problem • Find out local solution. • Know how to communicate the research findings.

Unit 1:

Literature Survey

Print: Sources of information: Primary, secondary, tertiary sources; Journals: Journal abbreviations, abstracts, current titles, reviews, monographs, dictionaries, text-books, current contents, Introduction to Chemical Abstracts and Beilstein, Subject Index, Substance Index, Author Index, Formula Index, and other Indices with examples.

of 96


Digital: Web resources, E-journals, Journal access, TOC alerts, Hot articles, Citation index, Impact factor, H-index, E-consortium, UGC infonet, E-books, Internet discussion groups and communities, Blogs, Preprint servers, Search engines, Scirus, Google Scholar, ChemIndustry, Wiki- Databases, ChemSpider, Science Direct, SciFinder, Scopus.

Information Technology and Library Resources: The Internet and World Wide Web. Internet resources for chemistry. Finding and citing published information. Open source Lead lectures. Open source chemistry designing sources, Essentials of Problem formulation and communication with society.

(Lectures: 20)

Unit 2:

Methods of Scientific Research and Writing Scientific Papers

Reporting practical and project work. Idea about public funding agencies of research, Writing literature surveys and reviews. Organizing a poster display. Giving an oral presentation. Writing scientific papers – justification for scientific contributions, bibliography, description of methods, conclusions, the need for illustration, style, publications of scientific work. Writing ethics. Avoiding plagiarism. Assessment of locally available resources.

(Lectures: 20)

Unit 3:

Chemical Safety and Ethical Handling of Chemicals

Safe working procedure and protective environment, protective apparel, emergency procedure and first aid, laboratory ventilation. Safe storage and use of hazardous chemicals, procedure for working with substances that pose hazards, flammable or explosive hazards, procedures for working with gases at pressures above or below atmospheric level. Safe storage and disposal of waste chemicals. Recovery, recycling and reuse of laboratory chemicals. Procedure for laboratory disposal of explosives. Identification, verification and segregation of laboratory waste.Disposal of chemicals in the sanitary sewer system.Incineration and transportation of hazardous chemicals.

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 4:

Data Analysis

The Investigative Approach: Making and Recording Measurements. SI Units and their use. Scientific method and design of experiments.

Analysis and Presentation of Data: Descriptive statistics. Choosing and using statistical tests. Chemometrics. Analysis of variance (ANOVA), Correlation and regression, Curve fitting, fitting of linear equations, simple linear cases, weighted linear case, analysis of residuals, General polynomial fitting, linearizing transformations, exponential function fit, r and its abuse. Basic aspects of multiple linear regression analysis.

Biostatistics: brief introduction and data handling.

(Lectures: 13)

Exposure of chemistry software

of 96


Chemistry Students must be given exposure to applications of molecular modelling softwares e.g. Hyperchem, Schrodinger etc. Hands on experiments of docking.

(Lectures: 10)

References:

Theory:

1. Dean, J.R.; Jones, A.M.; Holmes, D;, Reed, R.; Jones, A.Weyers, J. (2011),Practical skills in chemistry, Prentice-Hall.

2. Hibbert, D.B.; Gooding, J.J. (2006),Data analysis for chemistry, Oxford University Press. 3. Topping, J.(1984),Errors of observation and their treatment, Chapman Hall, London. 4. Levie, R. de.(2001),How to use Excel in analytical chemistry and in general scientific data

analysis, Cambridge University Press. 5. Le, C.T.; Eberly,L.E. (2016),Introductory Biostatistics, Wiley.

Additional References:

1. Chemical safety matters IUPAC – IPCS, Cambridge University Press, 1992. 2. OSU safety manual 1.01.

Teaching Learning Process

Lecture with conventional teaching aids, presentations, invited talks on thrusting areas, group discussions, literature survey and lab visit.

Assessment Methods

• Internal assessment through assignments and class test. • Writing review on identified research problem • Poster presentation • End semester university examination

Keywords Review of research papers, writing research papers, citation, and Laboratory safety.


Course Title: Green Chemistry



Objectives:

Today's society is moving towards becoming more and more environmentally conscious. There is rising concern of environmental pollution, depleting resources,climate change, ozone depletion, heaps and heaps of landfills piling up, legislation which is getting stringent with strict environmental laws,,rising cost of waste deposits and so on. We are faced with a challenge to work towards sustainable practices.Green chemistry has arisen from these concerns.It is not a new branch of chemistry but the way chemistry should be practiced.

of 96


Innovations and applications of green chemistry in education has helped companies not only gain environmental benefits but at the same time achieve economic and societal goals also. This is possible because these undergraduate students are ultimate scientific community of tomorrow.

Learning Outcomes:


• Understand the twelve principles of green chemistry and will build the basic understanding of toxicity,hazard and risk of chemical substances.

• Understand stoichiometric calculations and relate them to green chemistry metrics.They will learn about atom economy and how it is different from percentage yield.

• Learn to design safer chemical ,products and processes that are less toxic,than current alternatives. Hence,they will understand the meaning of inherently safer design for accident prevention and the principle "what you don't have can't harm you"

• Understand benefits of use of catalyst and bio catalyst ,use of renewable feed stock which helps in energy efficiency and protection of the environment, renewable energy sources, importance led reactions in various green solvents.

• Appreciate the use of green chemistry in problem solving skills, critical thinking and valuable skills to innovate and find out solution to environmental problems. Thus the students are able to realise that chemistry can be used to solve rather than cause environmental problems.

• Green chemistry is a way to boost profits, increase productivity and ensure sustainability with absolute zero waste. Success stories and real world cases also motivate them to practice green chemistry.These days customers are demanding to know about a product: Is it green? Does it contribute to global warming? Was it made from non depletable resources? Students have many career opportunities as " green" is the path to success.

Unit 1: Introduction to Green Chemistry

What is Green Chemistry? Some important environmental laws, pollution prevention Act of 1990, emergence of green chemistry, Need for Green Chemistry. Goals of Green Chemistry. Limitations/ Obstacles in the pursuit of the goals of Green Chemistry

(Lectures:5)

Unit 2:

Principles of Green Chemistry and Designing a Chemical synthesis

Twelve principles of Green Chemistry and their explanation with examples

Special emphasis on the following:

• Prevention of Waste/ by products; maximum incorporation of the materials used in the process into the final products , Environmental impact factor, waste or pollution prevention hierarchy

• Green metrics to assess greenness of a reaction, e.g. Atom Economy, calculation of atom economy of the rearrangement, addition, substitution and elimination reactions.

• Prevention/ minimization of hazardous/ toxic products reducing toxicity • Risk = (function) hazard x exposure • Designing safer chemicals with minimum toxicity yet has the ability to perform the desired functions • Green solvents: super critical fluids with special reference to carbon dioxide, water as a solvent for

organic reactions, ionic liquids, fluorous biphasic solvent, PEG, solventless processes, solvents obtained from renewable resources and how to compare greenness of solvents

• Energy requirements for reactions – alternative sources of energy: use of microwaves , ultrasonic energy and photochemical energy

of 96


• Selection of starting materials; should be renewable rather than depleting, Illustrate with few examples such as biodiesel and polymers from renewable resources (such as green plastic)

• Avoidance of unnecessary derivatization – careful use of blocking/protecting groups • Use of catalytic reagents (wherever possible) in preference to stoichiometric reagents; catalysis and

green chemistry, comparison of heterogeneous and homogeneous catalysis, biocatalysis, asymmetric catalysis and photocatalysis.

• Design for degradation: A product should not persist after the commercial function is over e.g. soaps and detergents, pesticides and polymers

• Strengthening/ development of analytical techniques to prevent and minimize the generation of hazardous substances in chemical processes.

• Prevention of chemical accidents designing greener processes, inherent safer design, principle of ISD “What you don’t have cannot harm you”, greener alternative to Bhopal Gas Tragedy (safer route to carcarbaryl) and Flixiborough accident (safer route to cyclohexanol) subdivision of ISD, minimization, simplification, substitution, moderation and limitation.

(Lectures:25)

Unit 3:

Examples of Green Synthesis/ Reactions

• Green Synthesis of the following compounds: adipic acid, catechol, disodium iminodiacetate (alternative to Strecker synthesis).

• Green Reagents: Non-phosgene Isocyanate Synthesis, Selective Methylation using dimethylcarbonate. • Microwave assisted solvent free synthesis of copper phthalocyanine • Microwave assisted reactions in water: Hofmann Elimination, methyl benzoate to benzoic acid and

Decarboxylation reaction • Ultrasound assisted reactions: sonochemical Simmons-Smith Reaction (Ultrasonic alternative to Iodine)

(Lectures:10)

Unit 4:

Real world case studies based on the Presidential green chemistry awards of EPA

• Surfactants for Carbon Dioxide – replacing smog producing and ozone depleting solvents with CO2 for precision cleaning and dry cleaning of garments.

• A new generation of environmentally advanced wood preservatives: Getting the chromium and Arsenic out of pressure treated wood.

• An efficient, green synthesis of a compostable and widely applicable plastic (polylactic acid) made from corn.

• Healthier Fats and oils by Green Chemistry: Enzymatic Inter esterification for production of No Trans-Fats and Oils.

• Development of Fully Recyclable Carpet: Cradle to Cradle Carpeting. • Using a naturally occurring protein to stimulate plant growth, improve crop quality, increase yields, and

suppress disease.

(Lectures:10)

Unit 5:

Future Trends in Green Chemistry

Oxidation reagents and catalysts; Biomimcry and green chemistry, Biomimetic, Multifunctional Reagents;

mechanochemical and solvent free synthesis of inorganic complexes; co crystal controlled solid state synthesis

(C2S3); Green chemistry in sustainable development.

of 96


(Lectures:10)

Practical:


Chemistry Lab- Green chemistry Characterization by m. pt., U.V.-Visible spectroscopy, IR spectroscopy, and any other specific method should be done (wherever applicable). Safer starting materials 1. Preparation and characterization of nanoparticles of gold using tea leaves/silver nanoparticles using plant extracts. Using renewable resources

2. Preparation of biodiesel from waste cooking oiland characterization (TLC, pH, Solubility, Combustion Test, Density, Viscosity, Gel Formation at Low Temperature and IR can be provided).

Use of enzymes as catalysts 3. Benzoin condensation using Thiamine Hydrochloride as a catalyst instead of cyanide.

Alternative green solvents

4. Extraction of D-limonene from orange peel using liquid CO2 prepared form dry ice. 5. Mechanochemical solvent free, solid–solid synthesis of azomethine using p- toluidine and o-vanillin/p-

vanillin (various other combinations of primary amine and aldehyde can also be tried).

Alternative sources of energy

6. Solvent free, microwave assisted one pot synthesis of phthalocyanine complex of copper(II). 7. Photoreduction of benzophenone to benzopinacol in the presence of sunlight.

Reducing waste

8. Designing and conducting an experiment by utilizing the products and by products obtained in above preparations which become waste otherwise if not used. This is done by critical thinking and literature survey.

Some representative examples:

• Use of nanoparticles as catalyst for a reaction • Benzoin converted into Benzil and Benzil into Benzilic acid by a green method • Use of azomethine for complex formation • Rearrangement reaction from Benzopinacol to Benzopinacolone • Conversion of byproduct of biodiesel to a useful product • Students should be taught to do spot tests for qualitative inorganic analysis for cations and anions, and

qualitative organic analysis for preliminary test and functional group analysis.

References:

Theory:

1. Anastas, P.T.; Warner, J.C.(1998), Green Chemistry, Theory and Practice, Oxford University Press.

of 96


2. Lancaster, M.(2016),Green Chemistry An Introductory Text.2nd Edition, RSC Publishing.

3. Cann ,M. C.; Umile, T.P. (2008), Real world cases in Green chemistry Vol 11, American chemical Society,Washington.

4. Matlack, A.S.(2001),Introduction to Green Chemistry, Marcel Dekker.

5. Alhuwalia, V. K.; Kidwai, M.R.(2005),New Trends in Green chemistry, Anamalaya Publishers.

Practical:

1. Kirchoff, M.; Ryan, M.A. (2002), Greener approaches to undergraduate chemistry experiment. American Chemical Society, Washington DC.

2. Sharma, R.K.; Sidhwani, I.T.; Chaudhari, M.K.(2013), Green Chemistry Experiments: A monograph, I.K. International Publishing House Pvt Ltd. New Delhi.

3. Pavia,D.L.; Lamponam, G.H.; Kriz, G.S.W. B.(2006),Introduction to organic Laboratory Technique-A Microscale approach,4th Edition, Brrooks-Cole Laboratory Series for Organic chemistry.

4. Wealth from Waste: A green method to produce biodiesel from waste cooking oil and generation of useful products from waste further generated. Indu Tucker Sidhwani et al. University of Delhi, Journal of Undergraduate Research and Innovation, Volume 1, Issue 1,February 2015, ISSN: 2395-2334.

5. Sidhwani, Tucker I.; Chowdhury, S. Greener alternatives to Qualitative Analysis for Cations without H2S and other sulfur containing compounds, J. Chem. Educ. 2008, 85, 1099.

6. Sidhwani, Tucker I.; Chowdhury, S. et al., DU Journal of Undergraduate Research and Innovation2016, Volume 2, Issue 2, 70-79.

7. Dhingra, S., ;Angrish, C. Qualitative organic analysis: An efficient, safer, and economical approach to preliminary tests and functional group analysis. Journal of Chemical Education, 2011, 88(5), 649-651.


• Conventional chalk and board teaching

• Power point presentations

• Interactive sessions

• Literature survey and critical thinking to design to improve a traditional reaction and problem solving

• Visit to a green chemistry lab

• Some motivating short movies in green chemistry especially in bio mimicry

Assessment Methods:

• Presentation by students

• Class Test

• Written Assignment

• End Semester University Theory and Practical Exams

Keywords: Green chemistry, Twelveprinciples of green chemistry, Atom economy, Waste minimization, Green metric, Green solvents, Solvent free, Catalyst, Bio-catalyst, Renewable energy sources, Hazardous, Renewable feedstock ,Ionic liquids, Supercritical fluids ,Inherent safer design, Green synthesis, Co-crystal controlled solid state synthesis, Sustainable development, Presidential green chemistry awards.

of 96



Course Title: Industrial Chemicals and Environment



Objectives:

The objective of this course is to make students aware about the concepts of different gases and their industrial production, uses, storage and hazards. Manufacturing, applications, analysis and hazards of the Inorganic Chemicals, Preparation of Ultra-Pure metals for semiconducting technology, Air and Water pollution, control measures for Air and Water Pollutants, Catalyst and Biocatalyst, Energy and Environment.

Learning Outcomes:

By the end of this course students will be able to understand:

• The different toxic gases and their toxicity hazards • Safe design systems for large scale production of industrial gases. • Manufacturing processes, handling and storage of inorganic chemicals. • Hazardous effects of the inorganic chemicals on human beings and vegetation. • The requirement of ultra-pure metals for the semiconducting technologies • Composition of air, various air pollutants, effects and control measures of air pollutants. • Different sources of water, water quality parameters, impacts of water pollution, water treatment. • Different industrial effluents and their treatment methods. • Different sources of energy. • Generation of nuclear waste and its disposal. • Use of biocatalyst in chemical industries.

Unit 1:

Industrial Gases: Large scale production, uses storage and hazards in handling of the following gases:

oxygen, nitrogen, argon, neon, helium, hydrogen, acetylene, carbon monoxide, chlorine, fluorine, and

sulphur dioxide.

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 2:

Inorganic Chemicals: Manufacture, applications, analysis and hazards in handling the following chemicals: hydrochloric acid, nitric acid, sulphuric acid, caustic soda, borax, bleaching powder, sodium thiosulphate, hydrogen peroxide, potassium dichromate and potassium permanganate

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 3:

Industrial Metallurgy: Preparation of ultrapure metals for semiconductor technology.

(Lectures: 4)

of 96


Unit 4:

Environment and its segments:

Ecosystems. Biogeochemical cycles of carbon, nitrogen and sulphur.

Air Pollution: Major regions of atmosphere,chemical and photochemical reactions in atmosphere.

Air pollutants: types, sources, particle size and chemical nature; Photochemical smog: its constituents and photochemistry. Major sources of air pollution, Pollution by SO2, CO2, CO, NOx, H2S and other foul smelling gases, methods of estimation of CO, NOx, SOx and control procedures, Effects of air pollution on living organisms and vegetation

Greenhouse effect and Global warming, Environmental effects of ozone, Ozone depletion by oxides of nitrogen, chlorofluorocarbons and halogens, Air pollution control, Settling Chambers, Venturi Scrubbers, Cyclones, Electrostatic Precipitators (ESPs).

(Lectures:15)

Unit 5:

Water Pollution:

Hydrological cycle, water resources, aquatic ecosystems, Sources and nature of water pollutants, Techniques for measuring water pollution, Impacts of water pollution on hydrological cycle and ecosystems. Water purification methods. Effluent treatment plants (primary, secondary and tertiary treatment). Industrial effluents from the following industries and their treatment: electroplating, textile, tannery, dairy, petroleum and petrochemicals, agro fertilizer.

Sludge disposal. Industrial waste management, incineration of waste.

Water treatment and purification (reverse osmosis, electro dialysis, ion exchange).

Water quality parameters for wastewater, industrial water and domestic water.

(Lectures:15)

Unit 6:

Energy & Environment: Sources of energy: Coal, petrol and natural gas. Nuclear fusion / fission, solar, hydrogen, geothermal, tidal and hydel.

Nuclear Pollution: Disposal of nuclear waste, nuclear disaster and its management.

Biocatalysis: Introduction to biocatalysis: Importance in green chemistry and chemical industry.

(Lectures: 10)

Practical:


Chemistry Lab: Industrial Chemicals & Environment

of 96


1. Determination of dissolved oxygen in water.

2. Determination of Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD).

3. Determination of Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD).

4. Percentage of available chlorine in bleaching powder.

5. Measurement of chloride, sulphate and salinity of water samples by simple titration method (AgNO3 and potassium chromate).

6. Estimation of total alkalinity of water samples (CO32-, HCO3

-) using double titration method.

7. Measurement of dissolved CO2

8. Determination of hexavalent Chromium Cr(VI) concentration in tannery wastes/waste water sample using UV-Vis spectrophotometry technique.

9. Preparation of borax/ boric acid

References:

Theory

1. Manahan, S.E. (2017),Environmental Chemistry, CRC Press 2. Buchel, K.H.; Moretto, H.H.; Woditsch, P.(2003),Industrial Inorganic Chemistry, Wiley-VCH. 3. De, A.K.(2012), Environmental Chemistry, New Age International Pvt., Ltd. 4. Khopkar, S.M.(2010), Environmental Pollution Analysis, New Age International Publisher.

Practical

1. Vowles, P.D.; Connell, D.W. (1980),Experiments in Environmental Chemistry: A Laboratory Manual, Vol.4, Pergamon Series in Environmental Science.

2. Gopalan, R.; Anand, A.; Sugumar R.W. (2008),A Laboratory Manual for Environmental Chemistry, I. K. International.


• Conventional chalk and board teaching, • Visit to chemical industries to get information about the technologies, methods to

check pollutants and its treatment. • ICT enabled classes. • Power point presentations. • Interactive sessions. • To get recent information through the internet.

Assessment Methods:


Keywords:

of 96


Air pollution,Biocatalysis, Environment,Green chemistry, Industrial gases, Inorganic chemicals, Metals,

Ultrapure metals,Sources of energy,Water pollution.


Course Title: Inorganic Materials of Industrial Importance



Objectives:

The course introduces learners to the diverse roles of inorganic materials in the industry. It gives an insight into how these raw materials are converted into products used in day to day life. Students learn about silicates, fertilizers, surface coatings, batteries, engineering materials for mechanical construction as well as the emerging area of nano-sized materials. The course helps develop the interest of students in the frontier areas of inorganic and material chemistry.

Learning Outcomes:


• Learn the composition and applications of the different kinds of glass. • Understand glazing of ceramics and the factors affecting their porosity. • Give the composition of cement and discuss the mechanism of setting of cement. • Explain the suitability of fertilizers for different kinds of crops and soil. • Explain the process of formulation of paints and the basic principle behind the protection offered by

the surface coatings. • Explain the principle, working and applications of different batteries. • List and explain the properties of engineering materials for mechanical construction used in day to day

life. • Explain the synthesis and properties of nano-dimensional materials, various semiconductor and

superconductor oxides.

Unit 1:

Silicate Industries

Glass: Glassy state and its properties, classification (silicate and non-silicate glasses). Manufacture and processing of glass. Composition and properties of the following types of glasses: Soda lime glass, lead glass, armoured glass, different types of safety glass, borosilicate glass, fluorosilicate glass, coloured glass, photosensitive glass, photochromic glass, glass wool and optical fibre.

Ceramics: Brief introduction to types of ceramics. glazing of ceramics.

Cement: Manufacture of Portland cement and the setting process, Different types of cements: quick setting cements, eco-friendly cement (slag cement), pozzolana cement.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 2:

Fertilizers:

of 96


Different types of fertilizers (N, P and K). Importance of fertilizers, chemistry involved in the manufacture of the following fertilizers: urea, ammonium nitrate, calcium ammonium nitrate, ammonium phosphates, superphosphate of lime, potassium chloride and potassium nitrate.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 3:

Surface Coatings:

Brief introduction to and classification of surface coatings, paints and pigments: formulation, composition and related properties, pigment volume concentration (PVC)and critical pigment volume concentration (CPVC), fillers, thinners, enamels and emulsifying agents. Special paints: heat retardant, fire retardant, eco-friendly paints, plastic paints, water and oil paints. Preliminary methods for surface preparation, metallic coatings (electrolytic and electroless with reference to chrome plating and nickel plating), metal spraying and anodizing.

Contemporary surface coating methods like physical vapor deposition, chemical vapor deposition, galvanising, carburizing, sherardising, boriding, nitriding and cementation.

(Lectures: 18)

Unit 4:

Batteries:

Primary and secondary batteries, characteristics of an Ideal Battery, principle, working, applications and comparison of the following batteries: Pb- acid battery, Li-metal batteries, Li-ion batteries, Li-polymer batteries, solid state electrolyte batteries, fuel cells, solar cells and polymer cells.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 5:

Engineering materials for mechanical construction:

Composition, mechanical and fabricating characteristics and applications of various types of cast irons, plain carbon and alloy steels, copper, aluminum and their alloys like duralumin, brasses and bronzes cutting tool materials, superalloys, thermoplastics, thermosets and composite materials.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 6:

Nano dimensional materials

Introduction to zero, one and two-dimensional nanomaterial: Synthesis, properties and applications of fullerenes, carbon nanotubes, carbon fibres, semiconducting and superconducting oxides.

(Lectures: 6)

Practical:

of 96



Chemistry Lab: Inorganic materials of industrial importance

1. Detection of constituents of Ammonium Sulphate fertilizer (Ammonium and Sulphate ions) by qualitative analysis and determine its free acidity.

2. Detection of constituents of CAN fertilizer (Calcium, Ammonium and Nitrate ions) fertilizer and estimation of Calcium content.

3. Detection of constituents of Superphosphate fertilizer (Calcium and Phosphate ions) and estimation of phosphoric acid content.

4. Detection of constituents of Dolomite (Calcium, Magnesium and carbonate ions) and determination of composition of Dolomite (Complexometric titration).

5. Analysis of (Cu, Ni) in alloy or synthetic samples (Multiple methods involving Complexometry, Gravimetry and Spectrophotometry).

6. Analysis of (Cu, Zn) in alloy or synthetic samples (Multiple methods involving Iodometry, Complexometry and Potentiometry).

7. Synthesis of pure ZnO and Cu doped ZnO nanoparticles.

8. Synthesis of silver nanoparticles by green and chemical approach methods and its characterization using UV-visible spectrophotometer.

References:

Theory:

1. West, A. R. (2014),Solid State Chemistry and Its Application, Wiley 2. Smart, L. E.; Moore, E. A. (2012),Solid State Chemistry An Introduction, CRC Press Taylor &

Francis. 3. Atkins, P.W.; Overton, T.L.; Rourke, J.P.; Weller, M.T.; Armstrong, F.A.(2010),Shriver and

Atkins Inorganic Chemistry, W. H. Freeman and Company. 4. Kent, J. A. (ed) (1997),Riegel’s Handbook of Industrial Chemistry, CBS Publishers, New

Delhi. 5. Poole Jr.; Charles P.; Owens, Frank J.(2003), Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley and

Sons.

Practical:

1. Svehla, G.(1996),Vogel’s Qualitative Inorganic Analysis, Prentice Hall. 2. Banewicz, J. J.; Kenner, C.T. Determination of Calcium and Magnesium in Limestones and

Dolomites, Anal. Chem., 1952, 24 (7), 1186–1187. 3. Ghorbani, H. R.; Mehr, F.P.; Pazoki, H.; Rahmani B. M. Synthesis of ZnO Nanoparticles by

Precipitation Method. Orient J Chem 2015;31(2). 4. Orbaek, W.; McHale, M.M.; Barron, A.R. Synthesis and characterization of silver

nanoparticles for an undergraduate laboratory, J. Chem. Educ. 2015, 92, 339−344.


1. Kingery, W. D.; Bowen H. K.; Uhlmann, D. R. (1976),Introduction to Ceramics, Wiley Publishers, New Delhi.

2. Gopalan, R. Venkappayya, D.; Nagarajan, S. (2004),Engineering Chemistry, Vikas Publications.

of 96




Assessment Methods:

Assessment will be done based on regular class test, presentations and assignments as a part of internal assessment during the course as per the curriculum. End semester university examination will be held for both theory and practical. In practical, assessment will be done based on continuous evaluation, performance in the experiment on the date of examination and viva voce.

Keywords:

Silicates, Ceramics, Cement, Fertilizers, Surface Coatings, Batteries, Engineering materials for mechanical construction, Nano dimensional materials.


Course Title: Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis



Objectives:

This course aims to provide knowledge on various spectroscopic techniques for chemical analysis along with the basic principles of instrumentation.

Learning Outcomes:


• Handle analytical data • Understand basic components of IR, FTIR, UV-Visible and Mass spectrometer. • Interpret of IR, FTIR, UV-visible spectra and their applications. • Understand the use of single and double beam instruments. • Learn separations techniques like Chromatography. • Learn elemental analysis, NMR spectroscopy, Electroanalytical Methods, Radiochemical

Methods, X-ray analysis and electron spectroscopy.

Unit 1:

Introduction to analytical methods of data analysis

Treatment of analytical data, including error analysis. Classification of analytical methods and the types of instrumental methods. Consideration of electromagnetic radiations.

of 96


(Lectures: 4)

Unit 2:

Molecular spectroscopy

Infrared spectroscopy: Interaction of radiations with molecules: absorption and scattering. Means of excitation (light sources), separation of spectrum (wavelength dispersion, time resolution), detection of the signal (heat, differential detection), interpretation of spectrum (qualitative, mixtures, resolution), advantages of Fourier-Transform Infrared (FTIR) spectroscopy.

Applications: Issues of quality assurance and quality control, special problems for portable instrumentation and rapid detection.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 3:

UV-Visible/ Near IR Spectroscopy

Emission, absorption, fluorescence and photoacoustic. Excitation sources (lasers, time resolution), wavelength dispersion (gratings, prisms, interference filters, laser, placement of sample relative to dispersion, resolution), Detection of signal (photocells, photomultipliers, diode arrays, sensitivity and S/N), Single and double beam instruments, Interpretation (quantification, mixtures, absorption vs. fluorescence and the use of time, photoacoustic, fluorescent tags).

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 4:

Separation techniques

Chromatography: Gas chromatography, liquid chromatography, Importance of column technology (packing, capillaries), Separation based on increasing number of factors (volatility, solubility, interactions with stationary phase, size, electrical field), Detection: simple vs. specific (gas and liquid), Detection as a means of further analysis (use of tags and coupling to IR and MS), Electrophoresis (plates and capillary) and use with DNA analysis. Immunoassays and DNA techniques.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 5:

Mass spectroscopy

Making the gaseous molecule into an ion (electron impact, chemical ionization), Making liquids and solids into ions (electrospray, electrical discharge, laser desorption, fast atom bombardment), Separation of ions on basis of mass to charge ratio, Magnetic, Time of flight, Electric quadrupole. Resolution, time and multiple separations, detection and interpretation.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 6:

Elemental analysis

of 96


Mass spectrometry (electrical discharges). Atomic spectroscopy: Atomic absorption, atomic emission, and atomic fluorescence. Excitation and getting sample into gas phase (flames, electrical discharges, plasmas), wavelength separation and resolution (dependence on technique), detection of radiation (simultaneous/scanning, signal noise), interpretation (errors due to molecular and ionic species, matrix effects, other interferences).

(Lectures: 8)

NMR spectroscopy: Principle, Instrumentation, Factors affecting chemical shift, Spin-coupling, Applications.

(Lectures: 4)

Electroanalytical Methods: Potentiometry & Voltammetry.(Lectures: 4)

Radiochemical Methods.(Lectures: 4)

X-ray analysis and electron spectroscopy (surface analysis). (Lectures: 4)

Practical:


Chemistry Lab: Instrumental methods of chemical analysis

At least 10 experiments to be performed.

1. Determination of the isoelectric pH of a protein. 2. Titration curve of an amino acid. 3. Determination of the void volume of a gel filtration column. 4. Determination of a mixture of cobalt and nickel (UV-visible spectroscopy). 5. Study of electronic transitions in organic molecules (i.e., acetone in water). 6. IR absorption spectra (study of aldehydes and ketones). 7. Determination of calcium, iron, and copper in food by atomic absorption spectroscopy. 8. Quantitative analysis of mixtures by gas chromatography (i.e., chloroform and carbon tetrachloride). 9. Separation of carbohydrates by HPLC. 10. Determination of caffeine in beverages by HPLC. 11. Potentiometric titration of a chloride-iodide mixture. 12. Cyclic voltammetry of the ferrocyanide/ferricyanide couple. 13. Use of nuclear magnetic resonance instrument and to analyse the spectra of methanol and ethanol 14. Use of fluorescence to do “presumptive tests” to identify blood or other body fluids. 15. Use of “presumptive tests” for anthrax or cocaine. 16. Collection, preservation, and control of blood evidence being used for DNA testing. 17. Use of capillary electrophoresis with laser fluorescence detection for nuclear DNA (Y chromosome

only or multiple chromosome). 18. Use of sequencing for the analysis of mitochondrial DNA. 19. Laboratory analysis to confirm anthrax or cocaine. 20. Detection in the field and confirmation in the laboratory of flammable accelerants or explosives. 21. Detection of illegal drugs or steroids in athletes. 22. Detection of pollutants or illegal dumping. 23. Fibre analysis.

References:

Theory:

of 96


1. Willard, H.H.; Merritt, L.L. Jr.; Dean, J.A.; Settle, F.A. Jr.(2004), Instrumental methods of

analysis, 7th edition, CBS Publishers.

2. Christian, G.D.(2004),Analytical Chemistry, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York. 3. Skoog, D.A.; Holler, F. J.; Crouch, S.(2006),Principles of Instrumental Analysis,Thomson

Brooks/Cole. 4. Banwell, C.N. (2006),Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy,Tata McGraw-Hill Education

Practical:

1. Skoog, D. A.; Holler, F. J.; Crouch, S.(2006),Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Cengage Learning.

2. Willard, H.H.; Merritt, L.L. Jr.; Dean, J.A.; Settle, F.A. Jr.(2004), Instrumental methods of

analysis, 7th edition, CBS Publishers.


• Conventional chalk and board teaching, • Class interactions and group discussions • Power point presentation on important topics.

Assessment Methods:


Keywords:

Analytical methods of data analysis, Infrared spectroscopy, UV-Visible spectroscopy, Chromatographic

techniques, Mass spectra, Elemental analysis methods, NMR spectroscopy, Electroanalytical methods,

Radiochemical methods, X-ray analysis, Electronic spectroscopy.


Course Title: Chemistry of d-Block Elements, Quantum Chemistry and

Spectroscopy



Objectives:

The objective of this course is to introduce the students to d and f block elements and highlights the concept of horizontal similarity in a period and stresses on their unique properties. It familiarizes them with coordination compounds which find manifold applications in diverse fields. This course also disseminates the concepts and methodology of quantum mechanics, its applications to spectroscopy and establishes relation between structure determination and spectra.

of 96


Learning Outcomes:


• Understand chemistry of d and f block elements, Latimer diagrams, properties of coordination compounds and VBT and CFT for bonding in coordination compounds

• Understand basic principles of quantum mechanics: operators, eigen values, averages, probability distributions.

• Understand and use basic concepts of microwave, IR and UV-VIS spectroscopy for interpretation of spectra.

• Explain Lambert-Beer's law, quantum efficiency and photochemical processes.


Unit 1:

Transition Elements (3d series)

General properties of elements of 3d series with special reference to electronic configuration, variable valency, colour, magnetic and catalytic properties and ability to form complexes. A brief introduction to Latimer diagrams (Mn, Fe and Cu) and their use to identify oxidizing, reducing species and species which disproportionate. Calculation of skip step potentials.

Lanthanoids and actinoids: Electronic configurations, oxidation states displayed. A very brief discussion of colour and magnetic properties. Lanthanoid contraction(causes and consequences), separation of lanthanoids by ion exchange method.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 2:

Coordination Chemistry

Brief discussion with examples of types of ligands, denticity and concept of chelate. IUPAC system of nomenclature of coordination compounds (mononuclear and binuclear) involving simple monodentate and bidentate ligands. Structural and stereoisomerism in complexes with coordination numbers 4 and 6.

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 3:

Bonding in coordination compounds

Valence Bond Theory (VBT): Salient features of theory, concept of inner and outer orbital complexes of Cr, Fe, Co and Ni. Drawbacks of VBT.

Crystal Field Theory

Splitting of d orbitals in octahedral symmetry. Crystal field effects for weak and strong fields. Crystal field stabilization energy (CFSE), concept of pairing energy. Factors affecting the magnitude of Δ. Spectrochemical series. Splitting of d orbitals in tetrahedral symmetry. Comparison of CFSE for octahedral and tetrahedral fields, tetragonal distortion of octahedral geometry. Jahn-Teller distortion, square planar coordination.

of 96


(Lectures: 14)

Section B: Physical Chemistry (Lectures:30)

Unit 4:

Quantum Chemistry

Postulates of quantum mechanics, quantum mechanical operators.

Free particle. Particle in a 1-D box (complete solution), quantization, normalization of wave functions, concept of zero-point energy.

Rotational Motion: Schrödinger equation of a rigid rotator and brief discussion of its results (solution not required). Quantization of rotational energy levels.

Vibrational Motion: Schrödinger equation of a linear harmonic oscillator and brief discussion of its results (solution not required). Quantization of vibrational energy levels.

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 5:

Spectroscopy

Spectroscopy and its importance in chemistry. Wave-particle duality. Link between spectroscopy and quantum chemistry. Electromagnetic radiation and its interaction with matter.

Types of spectroscopy. Difference between atomic and molecular spectra. Born- Oppenheimer approximation: Separation of molecular energies into translational, rotational, vibrational and electronic components.

Microwave (pure rotational) spectra of diatomic molecules. Selection rules. Structural information derived from rotational spectroscopy.

IR Spectroscopy: Selection rules, IR spectra of diatomic molecules. Structural information derived from vibrational spectra. Vibrations of polyatomic molecules. Group frequencies. Effect of hydrogen bonding (inter- and intramolecular) and substitution on vibrational frequencies.

Electronic Spectroscopy: Electronic excited states. Free electron model and its application to electronic spectra of polyenes. Colour and constitution, chromophores, auxochromes, bathochromic and hypsochromic shifts.

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 6:

Photochemistry

Laws of photochemistry. Lambert-Beer’s law. Fluorescence and phosphorescence. Quantum efficiency and reasons for high and low quantum yields. Primary and secondary processes in photochemical reactions. Photochemical and thermal reactions. Photoelectric cells.

(Lectures: 6)

of 96


Practical:



1. Estimation of the amount of nickel present in a given solution as bis -(dimethylglyoximato) nickel(II) or aluminium as oxinate in a given solution gravimetrically.

2. Estimation of (i) Mg2+ or (ii) Zn2+ by complexometric titrations using EDTA.

3. Estimation of total hardness of a given sample of water by complexometric titration.

4. Determination of the composition of the Fe3+ - salicylic acid complex / Fe2+ - phenanthroline complex in solution by Job’s method.

Section B: Physical Chemistry

UV/Visible spectroscopy

1. Study the 200-500 nm absorbance spectra of KMnO4 and K2Cr2O7 (in 0.1 M H2SO4) and determine the λmax values. Calculate the energies of the two transitions in different units (J molecule-1, kJ mol-1, cm-1, eV).

2. Study the pH-dependence of the UV-Vis spectrum (200-500 nm) of K2Cr2O7

3. Record the 200-350 nm UV spectra of the given compounds (acetone, acetaldehyde, 2-propanol, acetic acid) in water. Comment on the effect of structure on the UV spectra of organic compounds.

Colorimetry

1. Verify Lambert-Beer’s law and determine the concentration of CuSO4/KMnO4/K2Cr2O7/CoSO4 in a solution of unknown concentration

Chemical Kinetics; Study the kinetics of the following reactions.

1. Initial rate method: Iodide-persulphate reaction

2. Integrated rate method: Saponification of ethyl acetate.

References:

Theory:

1. Atkins, P.W.; Overton, T.L.; Rourke, J.P.; Weller, M.T.; Armstrong, F.A.(2010),Shriver and Atkins Inorganic Chemistry, W. H. Freeman and Company.

2. Miessler, G. L.; Fischer P.J.; Tarr, D.A.(2014),Inorganic Chemistry, Pearson. 3. Huheey, J.E.; Keiter, E.A., Keiter; R.L., Medhi, O.K. (2009),Inorganic Chemistry- Principles of

Structure and Reactivity, Pearson Education. 4. Pfennig, B. W.(2015), Principles of Inorganic Chemistry. John Wiley & Sons. 5. Kapoor, K.L. (2015),A Textbook of Physical Chemistry, Vol.4, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill

Education. 6. Kapoor, K.L. (2015),A Textbook of Physical Chemistry, Vol.5, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill

Education.

of 96


7. B.R.Puri, L.R.Sharma, M.S.Pathania, (2017),Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publishing Co.

Practical:

1. Jeffery, G.H.; Bassett, J.; Mendham, J.; Denney, R.C.(1989),Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis, John Wiley and Sons.

2. Marr, G.; Rockett, B.W. (1972),Practical Inorganic Chemistry, Van Nostrand Reinhold. 3. Khosla, B.D.; Garg, V.C.;Gulati, A.(2015),Senior Practical Physical Chemistry, R. Chand & Co.


1. Castellan, G. W.(2004),Physical Chemistry, Narosa. 2. Petrucci, R. H.(1989),General Chemistry: Principles and Applications, Macmillan Publishing

Co.


• Lectures to introduce a topic and give its details. • Discussions so that the student can internalize the concepts. • Problem solving to make the student understand the working and application of the concepts.

Assessment Methods:

• Graded assignments • Conventional class tests • Class seminars by students on course topics with a view to strengthening the content through

width and depth • Quizzes • End semester university examination.

Keywords:

d-block elements, Actinoids, Lanthinoids, VBT, Crystal field theory, Splitting of d levels, Coordination compounds, Quantisation, Selection rules, Schrodinger equation, Operator, Spectrum, Quantum efficiency, Fluorescence.


Course Title: Organometallics, Bioinorganic Chemistry, Polynuclear

Hydrocarbons and UV, IR Spectroscopy



Objectives:

The purpose of the course is to introduce students to some important 3d metals and their compounds which they are likely to come across. Students learn about organometallic compounds and bioinorganic chemistry which are currently frontier areas of chemistry providing an interface between organic chemistry, inorganic Chemistry and biology.The functional group approach to organic chemistry

of 96


introduced in the previous courses is reinforced through the study of the chemistry of carboxylic acids and their derivatives, Amines and diazonium salts, active methylene compounds. The students will also be introduced to the chemistry and applications of polynuclear hydrocarbons and heterocyclic compounds.The learners are introduced to spectroscopy, an important analytical tool which allows identification of organic compounds by correlating their spectra to structure.

Learning Outcomes:


• Understand the chemistry and applications of 3d elements including their oxidation states and important properties of the familiar compounds potassium dichromate, potassium permanganate and potassium ferrocyanide

• Use IR data to explain the extent of back bonding in carbonyl complexes • Get a general idea of toxicity of metal ions through the study of Hg2+ and Cd2+ in the physiological

system • Understand the fundamentals of functional group chemistry, polynuclear hydrocarbons and

heterocyclic compounds through the study of methods of preparation, properties and chemical reactions with underlying mechanism.

• Gain insight into the basic fundamental principles of IR and UV-Vis spectroscopic techniques. • Use basic theoretical principles underlying UV-visible and IR spectroscopy as a tool for

functional group identification in organic molecules.


Unit 1:

Chemistry of 3d metals

General discussion of 3d metals. Oxidation states displayed by Cr, Fe, Co, Ni and Cu.

A study of the following compounds (including preparation and important properties):

K2Cr2O7, KMnO4, K4[Fe(CN)6] .

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 2:

Organometallic Compounds

Definition and classification with appropriate examples based on nature of metal-carbon bond (ionic, s, p and multicentre bonds). Structure and bonding of methyl lithium and Zeise’s salt. Structure and physical properties of ferrocene. 18-electron rule as applied to carbonyls. Preparation, structure, bonding and properties of mononuclear and polynuclear carbonyls of 3d metals. π-acceptor behaviour of carbon monoxide (MO diagram of CO to be discussed), synergic effect and use of IR data to explain extent of back bonding.

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 3:

Bio-Inorganic Chemistry

of 96


A brief introduction to bio-inorganic chemistry. Role of metal ions present in biological systems with special reference to Na+, K+ and Mg2+ ions: Na/K pump; Role of Mg2+ ions in energy production and chlorophyll. Brief introduction to oxygen transport and storage (haemoglobin-myoglobin system). Brief introduction about toxicity of metal ions (Hg2+and Cd2+).

(Lectures: 12)


Unit 4:

Polynuclear and heteronuclear aromatic compounds:

Structure elucidation of naphthalene, preparation and properties of naphthalene and anthracene.

Preparation and Properties of the following compounds with reference to electrophilic and nucleophilic substitution: furan, pyrrole, thiophene, and pyridine.

(Lectures: 13)

Unit 5:

Active methylene compounds

Preparation: Claisen ester condensation, Keto-enol tautomerism.

Reactions: Synthetic uses of ethylacetoacetate (preparation of non-heteromolecules having up to 6

carbons).

(Lectures: 5)

Unit 6:

UV-Visible and infrared spectroscopy and their application to simple organic molecules.

Electromagnetic radiations and their properties; double bond equivalence and hydrogen deficiency.

UV-Visible spectroscopy (electronic spectroscopy): General electronic transitions, λmax &εmax, chromophores & auxochromes, bathochromic & hypsochromic shifts. Application of Woodward rules for calculation of λmax for the following systems: conjugated dienes - alicyclic, homoannular and heteroannular; α,β-unsaturated aldehydes and ketones, charge transfer complex.

Infrared (IR) Spectroscopy: Infrared radiation and types of molecular vibrations, significance of functional group & fingerprint region. IR spectra of alkanes, alkenes, aromatic hydrocarbons (effect of conjugation and resonance on IR absorptions), simple alcohols (inter and intramolecular hydrogen bonding and IR absorptions), phenol, carbonyl compounds, carboxylic acids and their derivatives (effect of substitution on >C=O stretching absorptions).

(Lectures: 12)

Practical:



of 96


1. Separation of mixtures of two ions by paper chromatography and measurement of Rfvalue in each case:

(Fe3+, Al3+ and Cr3+) or (Ni2+, Co2+, Mn2+ and Zn2+)

2.Preparation of any two of the following complexes and measurement of their conductivity:

(i) tetraamminecopper (II) sulphate (ii) potassium trioxalatoferrate (III) trihydrate.

Compare the conductance of the complexes with that of M/1000 solution of NaCl, MgCl2 and LiCl3.


1. Detection of extra elements

2. Systematic qualitative analysis of organic compounds possessing monofunctional groups: amide, amines, halo-hydrocarbons and carbohydrates (Including Derivative preparation)

3. Identification of simple organic compounds containing the above functional groups by IR spectroscopy through examination of spectra (spectra to be provided).

References:

Theory:

1. Huheey, J.E.; Keiter, E.A.; Keiter; R. L.; Medhi, O.K. (2009),Inorganic Chemistry- Principles of Structure and Reactivity, Pearson Education.

2. Lee., J. D. A new Concise Inorganic Chemistry, Pearson Education. 3. Douglas, B.E.; McDaniel, D.H.; Alexander, J.J. (1994), Concepts and Models of Inorganic

Chemistry,John Wiley & Sons. 4. Atkins, P.W.; Overton, T.L.; Rourke, J.P.; Weller, M.T.; Armstrong, F.A. (2010),Shriver and

Atkins Inorganic Chemistry, 5th Edn, W. H. Freeman and Company, 41 Madison Avenue, New York, NY.

5. Finar, I. L. Organic Chemistry (Volume 1 & 2), Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson Education).

6. Morrison, R. N.; Boyd, R. N. Organic Chemistry, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson Education).

7. Bahl, A; Bahl, B. S. (2012), Advanced Organic Chemistry, S. Chand.

Practical:

1. Ahluwalia, V.K.; Dhingra, S.; Gulati, A.(2005),College Practical Chemistry, University Press (India) Ltd.

2. Ahluwalia, V.K.; Dhingra, S.(2004),Comprehensive Practical Organic Chemistry: Qualitative Analysis, University Press.

3. Vogel, A.I.(1972),Textbook of Practical Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall. 4. Svehla, G. (1996),Vogel’s Qualitative Inorganic Analysis, Prentice Hall.


1. Cotton, F. A.; Wilkinson, G.; Gaus, P.L. (1995), Basic Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd Edition, John Wiley.

2. Sharpe, A.G.(2005), Inorganic Chemistry, Pearson Education. 3. Greenwood, N.N.; Earnshaw, A.(1997), Chemistry of the Elements, Elsevier. 4. Silverstein, R.M.; Bassler, G.C.; Morrill, T.C. (1991),Spectroscopic Identification of

Organic Compounds, John Wiley & Sons.

of 96


5. Dyer, J.R.(1978),Applications of Absorption Spectroscopy of Organic Compounds, Prentice Hall.



Assessment Methods:


Keywords:

3d metals; Organometallic Chemistry; Metal Carbonyl; Ferrocene; 18-electron rule; Synergic bonding; Bioinorganic chemistry; Sodium potassium pump; Haemoglobin-myoglobin system; Biomolecules, UV-visible spectroscopy; IR spectroscopy; Charge transfer spectra.


Course Title: Molecules of Life



Objectives:

The objective of this course is to deliver information about biochemically significant features of the chemistry of carbohydrates, proteins, enzymes, nucleic acids and lipids, using suitable examples. This includes classification, reaction chemistry and biological importance of these biomolecules. This course extends the knowledge gained from synthetic organic chemistry to chemistry of biomolecules. Key emphasis is placed on understanding the structural principles that govern reactivity/physical /biological properties of biomolecules as opposed to learning structural detail.

Learning Outcomes:


• Learn and demonstrate how the structure of biomolecules determines their chemical properties, reactivity and biological uses.

• Gain an insight into mechanism of enzyme action and inhibition. • Understand the basic principles of drug-receptor interaction and SAR. • Understand biological processes like replication, transcription and translation. • Demonstrate an understanding of metabolic pathways, their inter-relationship, regulation and

energy production from biochemical processes.

of 96


Unit 1:

Carbohydrates

Classification of carbohydrates, reducing and non-reducing sugars, biological functions, general properties and reactions of glucose and fructose, their open chain structure, epimers, mutarotation and anomers, reactions of monosaccharides, determination of configuration of glucose (Fischer proof), cyclic structure of glucose. Haworth projections. Cyclic structure of fructose. Linkage between monosaccharides: structure of disaccharides (sucrose, maltose, lactose) and polysaccharides (starch and cellulose) excluding their structure elucidation.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 2:

Amino Acids, Peptides and Proteins

Classification of amino acids and biological uses of amino Acids, peptides and proteins. Zwitterion structure, isoelectric point and correlation to acidity and basicity of amino acids. Determination of primary structure of peptides, determination of N-terminal amino acid (by DNFB and Edman method) and C– terminal amino acid (by thiohydantoin and with carboxypeptidase enzyme). Synthesis of simple peptides (up to dipeptides) by N-protection (t-butyloxycarbonyl and phthaloyl) & C-activating groups and Merrifield solid phase synthesis, Overview of primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary structure of proteins, denaturation of proteins.

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 3:

Enzymes and correlation with drug action

Classification of enzymes and their uses(mention Ribozymes). Mechanism of enzyme action, factors affecting enzyme action, Coenzymes and cofactors and their role in biological reactions, specificity of enzyme action(including stereospecificity), enzyme inhibitors and their importance, phenomenon of inhibition (Competitive and non-competitive inhibition including allosteric inhibition). Drug action-receptor theory. Structure – activity relationships of drug molecules, binding role of –OH group,-NH2 group, double bond and aromatic ring.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 4:

Nucleic Acids

Components of Nucleic acids: Adenine, guanine, thymine,cytosine and uracil (structure only), other components of nucleic acids, nucleosides and nucleotides (nomenclature), structure of polynucleotides; structure of DNA (Watson-Crick model) and RNA(types of RNA),difference between DNA and RNA, genetic code, biological roles of DNA and RNA: replication, transcription and translation.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 5:

Lipids

of 96


Introduction to lipids, classification. Oils and fats: Common fatty acids present in oils and fats, Omega-3&6 fatty acids, trans fats, hydrogenation, hydrolysis, acid value, saponification value, iodine number. Biological importance of triglycerides, phospholipids, glycolipids, and steroids (cholesterol).

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 6:

Concept of Energy in Biosystems

Calorific value of food. Standard caloric content of carbohydrates, proteins and fats. Oxidation of foodstuff (organic molecules) as a source of energy for cells. Introduction to metabolism (catabolism, anabolism), ATP: the universal currency of cellular energy, ATP hydrolysis and free energy change. Conversion of food into energy. Outline of catabolic pathways of carbohydrate- glycolysis, fermentation and Krebs cycle. Overview of catabolic pathways of fats and proteins. Interrelationships in the metabolic pathways of proteins, fats and carbohydrates.

(Lectures: 10)

Practical:


1. Separation of amino acids by paper chromatography

2. Study of titration curve of glycine and determination of its isoelectric point.

3. Estimation of proteins by Lowry’s method

4. Action of salivary amylase on starch

5. Effect of temperature on the action of salivary amylase on starch.

6. To determine the saponification value of an oil/fat.

7. To determine the iodine value of an oil/fat

8. Qualitative tests for carbohydrates- Molisch test Barfoed’s reagent test, rapid furfural test,Tollen’s

test and Fehling solution test(Only these tests are to be done in class)

9. Qualitative tests for proteins

10. Extraction of DNA from onion/cauliflower

References:

Theory:

1. Finar, I. L. Organic Chemistry (Volume 1 & 2), Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson Education).

2. Morrison, R. N.; Boyd, R. N. Organic Chemistry, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson Education).

3. Berg, J. M.; Tymoczko, J. L.; Stryer, L.(2002),Biochemistry, W. H. Freeman.

Practical:

of 96


1. Furniss, B.S.; Hannaford, A.J.; Smith, P.W.G.; Tatchell, A.R. (2012),Vogel's Textbook ofPractical Organic Chemistry, Pearson.

2. Manual of Biochemistry Workshop, 2012, Department of Chemistry, University of Delhi.


• The teaching learning process will involve the traditional chalk and black board method. Along with pedagogy of flipped classroom

• Certain topics like mechanism of enzyme action and enzyme inhibition, transcription and translation etc. where traditional chalk and talk method may not be able to convey the concept, are taught through audio-visual aids.

• Students are encouraged to participate actively in the classroom through regular presentations on curriculum based topics, peer assessment, designing games based on specific topics etc.

• As the best way to learn something is to do it yourself, practicals are planned in such a way so as to reinforce the topics covered in theory.

Assessment Methods:



Keywords:

Biomolecules, Enzymes, Mechanism of enzyme action and inhibition, SAR, Drug Receptor Theory, Energy concept in biological system, Catabolic pathways and their inter-relationship.


Course Title: Nanoscale Materials and Their Applications



Objectives:

The aim of this course is to introduce materials at nanoscale, their preparation, characterization

and applications.

Learning Outcomes:


• Understand the concept of nanodimensions.

• Know the various methods of preparation of nanomaterials.

• Know the different characterization techniques used for the analysis of nanomaterials and

understand the basic principle behind these techniques.

of 96


• Understand the optical and conducting properties of nanostructures.

• Appreciate the real life applications of nanomaterials.

Unit 1:

Introduction to nanodimensions

0D, 1D, 2D nanomaterials, Quantum Dots,Nanoparticles, Nanostructures (nanowires, thin films,

nanorods), carbon nanostructures (carbon nanotubes, carbon nanofibers, fullerenes), Size Effects in

nano systems, Quantum confinement and its consequences, Semiconductors.Band structure and band gap.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 2:

Preparation of nanomaterials

Top down and Bottom up approach, Photolithography. Ball milling.Vacuum deposition.Physical vapor

deposition (PVD), Chemical vapor deposition (CVD), Thermal decomposition, Chemical reduction, Sol-

Gel synthesis,Hydrothermal synthesis, Spray pyrolysis,Electrochemical deposition, Pulsed Laser

deposition.

(Lectures:8)

Unit 3:

Characterization techniques (Basic working principles and interpretation of experimental data using

these techniques need to be covered)

UV-visible spectroscopy, X-ray diffraction (Powder and Single Crystal), Raman Spectroscopy, Scanning

Electron Microscopy (SEM), Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM), Energy Dispersive X-ray

Spectroscopy (EDX), X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS), Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM),

Scanning Tunneling Microscopy (STM), Dynamic light scattering (DLS), Brunauer-Emmett-Teller (BET)

Surface area measurement and Thermogravimetric analysis (TG).

(Lectures:14)

Unit 4:

Optical Properties

Surface plasmon resonance, Excitons in direct and indirect band gap semiconductor nanocrystals.

Radiative processes: General absorption, emission and luminescence (fluorescence and

photoluminescence). (Lectures:8)

Unit 5:

Conducting properties

Carrier transport in nanostructures.Tunneling and hoping conductivity. Defects and impurities: Deep level

and surface defects. (Lectures:6)

Unit 6:

of 96


Applications

Nanomaterials as Catalysts, semiconductor nanomaterials as photocatalysts, nanocomposites as

catalysts.

Carbon nanostructures as catalytic nanoreactors, metal and metal oxides confined inside carbon

nanostructures, Nanowires and thin films for photonic devices (LEDs, solar cells, transistors).

(Lectures:14)

References:

1. West, A. R.(2014),Solid State Chemistry and Its Application, Wiley 2. Smart, L. E.; Moore, E. A.(2012),Solid State Chemistry An Introduction, CRC Press Taylor &

Francis. 3. Rao, C. N. R.; Gopalakrishnan, J.(1997),New Direction in Solid State Chemistry, Cambridge

University Press. 4. Poole, Jr.; Charles P.; Owens, Frank J.;(2003), Introduction to Nanotechnology, John Wiley

and Sons. 5. Chattopadhyay, K.K.; Banerjee, A. N.(2009),Introduction to Nanoscience and Technology,

PHI.

Practical:


Chemistry Lab: Nanoscale materials and their applications


1. Synthesis of metal nanoparticles by chemical reduction method.

2. Synthesis of semiconductor nanoparticles.

3. Surface Plasmon study of metal nanoparticles by UV-Visible spectrophotometer.

4. XRD pattern of nanomaterials and estimation of particle size. (Students can be provided with

XRD patterns of known materials and asked to interpret the data.)

5. To study the effect of size on color of nanomaterials.

6. To prepare composite of CNTs with other materials.

7. Growth of quantum dots by thermal evaporation.

8. Prepare a disc of ceramic of a compound using ball milling, pressing and sintering, and study

its XRD.

9. Fabricate a thin film of nanoparticles by spin coating (or chemical route) and study

transmittance spectra in UV-Visible region.


Lectures, ICT enabled presentations and group discussions will be part of teaching learning process.

Assessment Methods:

of 96


Internal assessment will be through assignments, projects, presentation and class test. End semester examination will be for theory and practical.

Keywords:

Nanomaterials, Preparation, Characterization, Applications.


Course Title: Dissertation

Total Credits: 06

Objectives:

The Objective is to enable student to identify a problem in the field of chemistry and to carry out literature

survey, design an experiment, perform experiment, analyse data and write a report.

Learning Outcomes:

By the end of the dissertation, the students will be able to;

• Do survey, study and cite published literature on a particular area of interest. • Correlate the experimental observations with theoretical understanding. • Interpret results, write a report and submit to the supervisor. • Use laboratory resources judiciously. • Work in a team under the supervision of a teacher. • Develop scientific writing skills.

Content:

Unit 1: Identification of research problem

Unit 2: Survey of literature

Unit 3: Formulation of hypothesis, experimental design and methodology

Unit 4: Analysis of data and interpretation of results

Unit 5: Discussion and conclusion

Unit 6: Writing a project report

Assessment Methods:

The assessment will be through evaluation of the dissertation, presentation and viva voce involving external and internal examiners.

of 96


SKILL-ENHANCEMENT COURSES (SEC)

Course Code: CHEMISTRY –SEC-1

Course Title: IT Skills For Chemists



Objectives:

The objective of this course is to introduce the students to fundamental mathematical techniques and basic computer skills that will help them in solving chemistry problems. It aims to make the students understand the concept of uncertainty and error in experimental data. It acquaints the students with different software for data tabulation, calculation, graph plotting, data analysis and document preparation.

Learning Outcomes:


• Become familiar with the use of computers • Use software for tabulating data, plotting graphs and charts, carry out statistical analysis of the

data. • Solve chemistry problems and simulate graphs. • Prepare documents that will incorporate chemical structure, chemical equations, mathematical

expressions from chemistry.

Unit 1:

Mathematics

Fundamentals, mathematical functions, polynomial expressions, logarithms, the exponential function, units of a measurement, interconversion of units, constants and variables, equation of a straight line, plotting graphs.

Uncertainty in experimental techniques: Displaying uncertainties, measurements in chemistry, decimal places, significant figures, combining quantities.

Uncertainty in measurement: types of uncertainties, combining uncertainties. Statistical treatment. Mean, standard deviation, relative error. Data reduction and the propagation of errors. Graphical and numerical data reduction. Numerical curve fitting: the method of least squares (regression).

Algebraic operations on real scalar variables (e.g. manipulation of van der Waals equation in different forms). Roots of quadratic equations analytically and iteratively (e.g. pH of a weak acid). Numerical methods of finding roots (Newton-Raphson, binary –bisection, e.g. pH of a weak acid not ignoring the ionization of water, volume of a van der Waals gas, equilibrium constant expressions).

Differential calculus: The tangent line and the derivative of a function, numerical differentiation (e.g., change in pressure for small change in volume of a van der Waals gas, potentiometric titrations).

of 96


Numerical integration (Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rule, e.g. entropy/enthalpy change from heat capacity data).

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 2:

Introductory writing activities: Introduction to word processor and structure drawing (ChemSketch) software. Incorporating chemical structures, chemical equations, expressions from chemistry (e.g. Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution law, Bragg’s law, van der Waals equation, etc.) into word processing documents.

(Lectures: 4)

Unit 3:

Handling numeric data: Spreadsheet software (Excel/ LibreOffice Calc), creating a spreadsheet, entering and formatting information, basic functions and formulae, creating charts, tables and graphs Incorporating tables and graphs into word processing documents. Simple calculations, plotting graphs using a spreadsheet (Planck’s distribution law, radial distribution curves for hydrogenic orbitals, gas kinetic theory- Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curves as function of temperature and molecular weight), spectral data, pressure-volume curves of van der Waals gas (van der Waals isotherms), data from phase equilibria studies. Graphical solution of equations

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 4:

Numeric modelling: Simulation of pH metric titration curves. Excel functions LINEST and Least Squares. Numerical curve fitting, linear regression (rate constants from concentration- time data, molar extinction coefficients from absorbance data), numerical differentiation (e.g. handling data from potentiometric and pH metric titrations, pKa of weak acid), integration (e.g. entropy/enthalpy change from heat capacity data)

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 5:

Statistical analysis: Gaussian distribution and Errors in measurements and their effect on data sets. Descriptive statistics using Excel. Statistical significance testing: The t test. The F test. Presentation graphics.

(Lectures: 4)

Practical:


1. Potting graphs using a spreadsheet

i. Planck’s distribution law

ii. Radial distribution curves for hydrogenic orbitals,

iii. Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution curves as function of temperature and molecular weight

of 96


iv. van der Waals isotherms

v. Data from phase equilibria studies

2. Calculations using spreadsheet

vi. Rate constants from concentration- time data

vii. Molar extinction coefficients from absorbance data

viii. Numerical differentiation (e.g. handling data from potentiometric and pH metric titrations)

ix. pKa of weak acid

3. Preparing a word processing document having tables, chemical structures and chemical equations

References:

1. McQuarrie, D.A. (2008), Mathematics for Physical Chemistry University Science Books. 2. Steiner, E.(2008),The Chemical Maths Book Oxford University Press. 3. Yates, P.(2007),Chemical calculations, CRC Press. 4. Harris,D.C.(2007),Quantitative Chemical Analysis. Freeman, Chapters 3-5. 5. Levie, R. de. (2001), How to use Excel in analytical chemistry and in general scientific data

analysis, Cambridge Univ. Press. 6. Venit, S.M. (1996),Programming in BASIC: Problem solving with structure and style. Jaico

Publishing House.


This course has major components of hands on exercises. The teaching learning process will require conventional teaching along with hands on exercise on computers.

Assessment Methods:

Assessment on solving chemistry related problems using spreadsheet. Presentation on documentation preparation on any chemistry topic involving tables and graphs Semester end practical and theory examination

Keywords:

Uncertainty in measurements, roots of quadratic and polynomial equations, Newton Raphson's method, binary bisection, numerical integration, trapezoidal rule, Simpson's rule, differential calculus, least square curve fitting method, Spreadsheet, charts, tables, graphs, LINEST, t-test, F-test.

of 96



Course Title: Basic Analytical Chemistry



Objectives:

The objective of this course is to make students aware about the importance and the concepts of chemical analysis of water and soil,using separation techniques like chromatography and instrumentation techniques like flame photometry and spectrophotometry.

Learning Outcomes:


• Handle analytical data • Determine composition and pH of soil, which can be useful in agriculture • Do quantitative analysis of metal ions in water • Separate mixtures using separation techniques • Estimate macro nutrients using Flame photometry

Unit 1:

Introduction

Introduction to analytical chemistry and its interdisciplinary nature, Concept of sampling. Importance of accuracy, precision and sources of error in analytical measurements. Significant figures. Presentation of experimental data and results.

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 2:

Analysis of soil

Composition of soil, concept of pH and its measurement, complexometric titrations, chelation, chelating agents, use of indicators.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 3:

Analysis of water:

Definition of pure water, sources responsible for contaminating water, water sampling methods, water purification methods.

(Lectures:8)

of 96


Unit 4:

Chromatography

Definition and general introduction on principles of chromatography. Paper chromatography, thin layer chromatography, Column chromatography and ion-exchange chromatography.

(Lectures: 8)

Practical:


Chemistry Lab-Basic analytical chemistry

1. Determination of pH of soil samples.

2. Estimation of Calcium and Magnesium ions as Calcium carbonate by complexometric titration.

3. Determination of pH, acidity and alkalinity of a water sample.

4. Determination of dissolved oxygen (DO) of a water sample.

5. Paper chromatographic separation of mixture of metal ion (Ni2+ and Co2+).

6. To study the use of phenolphthalein in trap cases.

7. To analyze arson accelerants.

8. To carry out analysis of gasoline.

9. Estimation of macro-nutrients: Potassium, calcium and magnesium in soil samples by flame photometry.

10. Spectrophotometric determination of Iron in vitamin / dietary tablets.

11. Spectrophotometric identification and determination of caffeine and benzoic acid in soft drink.

12. Determination of ion exchange capacity of anion / cation exchange resin (using batch procedure if use of column is not feasible).

References:

1. Christian, G.D. (2004),Analytical Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons.

2. Harris, D. C. (2007),Exploring Chemical Analysis, W.H. Freeman and Co.

3. Skoog, D.A.; Holler F.J.; Nieman, T.A. (2005),Principles of Instrumental Analysis, Thomson

Asia Pvt. Ltd.

4. Svehla, G. (1996),Vogel’s Qualitative Inorganic Analysis, Prentice Hall. 5. Mendham, J.; Denney, R.C.; Barnes, J.D.; Thomas, M.J.K. (2007), Vogel’s Quantitative

Chemical Analysis,6thEdition, Prentice Hall.


• Conventional chalk and board teaching,

of 96


• Class room interactions and group discussions • Lab demonstrations and experiments after completion of theory part • ICT enabled classes

Assessment Methods:

Assessment will be done on the basis of regular class test, presentations and assignments as a part of

internal assessment during the course as per the curriculum. End semester university examination will be

held for both theory and practical. In practical, assessment will be done based on continuous evaluation,

performance in the experiment on the date of examination and viva voce.

Keywords:

Analytical chemistry, Sampling, Accuracy, Precision, Significant figures, Soil analysis, Analysis of water, Chromatography, Ion exchange chromatography, Flame photometry.


Course Title: Chemical Technology and Society

Total Credits: 04 (Credits: Theory-04)

(Total Lectures: Theory- 60)

Objectives:

This course will help students to connect chemical technology for societal benefits. It would fulfil the gap between academia and industries.

Learning Outcomes:


• Understand the use of basic chemistry to chemical engineering • Learn and use various chemical technology used in industries • Develop scientific solutions for societal needs

Chemical Technology

Basic principles of distillation, solvent extraction, solid-liquid leaching and liquid-liquid extraction, separation by absorption and adsorption. An introduction into the scope of different types of equipment needed in chemical technology, including reactors, distillation columns, extruders, pumps, mills, emulgators. Scaling up operations in chemical industry. Introduction to clean technology.

Society

Exploration of societal and technological issues from a chemical perspective. Chemical and scientific literacy as a means to better understand topics like air and water (and the trace materials found in them that are referred to as pollutants).

Sources of energy

Coal, petrol and natural gas. Nuclear fusion / fission, solar, hydrogen, geothermal, tidal and hydel.

of 96


Properties of Polymers (Physical, thermal, Flow & Mechanical Properties)

Brief introduction to preparation, structure, properties and application of the following polymers: polyolefins, polystyrene and styrene copolymers, poly(vinyl chloride) and related polymers, poly(vinyl acetate) and related polymers, acrylic polymers, fluoro polymers, polyamides and related polymers. Phenol formaldehyde resins (Bakelite, Novolac), polyurethanes, silicone polymers, polydienes, Polycarbonates, Conducting Polymers, [polyacetylene, polyaniline, poly(p-phenylene sulphide), polypyrrole, polythiophene].

Natural Polymers

Structure, properties and applications of shellac, lignin, starch, nucleic acids and proteins.

Basics of drug synthesis

Application of genetic engineering

References:

1. Hill, J.W.; McCreary, T.W.; Kolb, D.K. (2013),Chemistry for changing times, Pearson.


• Lectures using teaching aid (chalk/power point/videos) • Group discussion • Presentations • Advise to students to prepare a report on technological applications • Visit to nearby industries • Invite people of industries for interaction with students

Assessment Methods:



Keywords:

Chemical Technology; Society; Energy; Polymer; Pollutants.

of 96



Course Title: Chemoinformatics



Objectives:

The aim of the course is to introduce the students to computational drug design through structure-activity relationship, QSAR and combinatorial chemistry. The students will learn about the target analysis, virtual screening for lead discovery, structure based and ligand based design method and the use of computational techniques, library preparation and data handling.

Learning Outcomes:


• Have a comprehensive understanding of drug discovery process and techniques including structure-activity relationship, quantitative structure activity relationship and the use of chemoinformatics in this, including molecular modelling and docking studies.

• Appreciate role of modern computation techniques in the drug discovery process and perform their own modelling studies.

Unit 1:

Introduction to Chemoinformatics: History and evolution of chemoinformatics, Use of chemoinformatics, Prospects of chemoinformatics, Molecular modelling and structure elucidation.

(Lectures: 2)

Unit 2:

Representation of molecules and chemical reactions: Nomenclature, Different types of notations, SMILES coding, Matrix representations, Structure of Molfiles and Sdfiles, Libraries and toolkits, Different electronic effects, Reaction classification.

(Lectures: 2)

Unit 3:

Searching chemical structures: Full structure search, sub-structure search, basic ideas, similarity search, three dimensional search methods, basics of computation of physical and chemical data and structure descriptors, data visualization.

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 4:

Applications: Prediction of Properties of Compounds; Linear Free Energy Relations; Quantitative Structure-Property Relations; Descriptor Analysis; Model Building; Modeling Toxicity.

of 96


(Lectures: 6)

Unit 5:

Structure-Spectra correlations; Prediction of NMR, IR and Mass spectra; Computer Assisted Structure elucidations; Computer Assisted Synthesis Design

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 6:

Introduction to drug design; Target Identification and Validation; Lead Finding and Optimization; Analysis of HTS data; Virtual Screening; Design of Combinatorial Libraries; Ligand-Based and Structure Based Drug design; Application of Chemoinformatics in Drug Design.

(Lectures: 8)

Practical:


1. Overview of Rational Drug Design, Ligands and Targets

2. In silico representation of chemical information

i. CIF IUCr Crystallographic Information Framework ii. CML Chemical Markup Language iii. SMILES -- Simplified Molecular Input Line Entry Specification iv. InChi -- IUPAC International Chemical Identifier v. Other representations

3. Chemical Databases and Data Mining

i. Cambridge Structural Database CCDC CSD ii. Crystallographic Open Database COD iii. Protein Data Bank PDB Ligand Explorer iv. Chemspider v. Other Data Bases

4. Molecular Drawing and Interactive Visualization

i. ChemDraw ii. MarvinSketch iii. ORTEP iv. Chimera, RasMol, PyMol

5. Computer-Aided Drug Design Tools

i. Molecular Modeling Tools ii. Structural Homology Modeling Tools iii. Docking Tools and Screening Tools iv. Other tools

6. Building a Ligand

of 96


i. Building ab initio ii. Building from similar ligands iii. Building with a known macromolecular target iv. Building without a known macromolecular target v. Computational assessment of activity and toxicity and drugability.

References:

1. Leach, A. R.; Gillet, V. J. (2007), An introduction to Chemoinformatics, Springer. 2. Gasteiger, J.; Engel, T. (2003), Chemoinformatics: A text-book. Wiley-VCH. 3. Gupta, S. P. (2011),QSAR & Molecular Modeling. Anamaya Pub. 4. Gasteiger, J. Handbook of cheminformatics: from data to knowledge in 4 volumes, Wiley.


1. Jürgen,B.(2004),Chemoinformatics Concepts, Methods, and Tools for Drug Discovery, Springer


The course aims to introduce students to different cheminformatics methods and its use in drug research through practicals. It is a rather new discipline of science. It concerns with the applications of computer to solving the chemistry problems related to drug designing and drug discovery.

The course will give emphasis on active learning in students through a combination of lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. The underlying principles will be explained in lectures and the practicals will establish the understanding of these principles through applications to drug research.

Assessment Methods:

• Formative assessment supporting student learning in Cheminformatics practicals • Summative assessment • Review of a case study • Exercise based on SAR and QSAR-Report • Practical exam of five hours

Keywords:

Cheminformatics, Virtual Chemical Library, Virtual Screening, SAR-QSAR, Drug Design lead discovery.


Course Title: Business Skills for Chemists

Total Credits: 04 (Credits: Theory-04)

(Total Lecture: Theory-60)

Objectives:

The objective of this course is to enhance the business and entrepreneurial skills of undergraduate chemistry students and improve their employment prospects. The course will orient the students to understand the Industry linkage with chemistry, challenges and business opportunities. It will expose the students to the concepts of intellectual property rights, patents and commercialisation of innovations.

of 96


Learning Outcomes:


1. Learn basics skills of of business and project management. 2. Understand the process of product development and business planning that includes

environmental compliancy. 3. Learn the process by which technical innovations are conceived and converted into successful

business ventures. 4. Understand the intellectual property rights and patents which drive business viability and

commercialization of innovation. 5. Relate to the importance of chemistry in daily life, along with the employment and business

opportunities. They will effectively use the skills to contribute towards the well-being of the society and derive commercial value.

Unit 1:

Chemistry in industry

Current challenges and opportunities for the chemistry based industries.

Role of chemistry in India and global economies.

Chemistry based products in the market.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 2:

Business Basics

Key business concepts, Business plans, Market need, Project management, Routes to market, Concept of entrepreneurship

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 3:

Project Management

Different stages of a project:

• Ideation • Bench work • Pilot trial • Production • Promotion/ Marketing

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 4:

Commercial Realisation and Case Studies

of 96


• Commercialisation • Case study of Successful business ideas in chemistry • Case study of Innovations in chemistry • Financial aspects of business with case studies

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 5:

Intellectual Property Rights

Introduction to IPR & Patents

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 6:

Environmental Hazards

Industries involving hazardous chemicals. Importance of development of cost-effective alternative technology. Environmental ethics.

(Lectures: 12)

Students can be taken for industrial visits for practical knowledge and experience. Group of 4-5 students may be asked to prepare business plan based on some innovative ideas and submit as a project / presentation discussing its complete execution.

References:

1. www.rsc.org 2. Nwaeke, L.I.(2002),Business Concepts and Perspectives, Springfield Publishers. 3. Silva, T. D. (2013),Essential Management Skills for Pharmacy and Business Managers,

CRC Press.


• Class room teaching board method or power point presentations • Class room interactions and group discussions • Through videos and online sources • Visit to chemical industries for real understanding of whole process

Assessment Methods:

• Written examination and class tests • Oral presentation of project proposal along with written assignment.

Keywords:

Business skills, Chemical industry, Entrepreneurship, Project management, Intellectual property rights, Environmental ethics.

of 96



Course Title: Intellectual Property Rights

Total Credits: 04 (Total Lectures: Theory-60)

Objectives:

The course aims to give insights into the basics of the Intellectual Property (IP) and in its wider purview it encompasses intricacies relating to IP. This course is designed to introduce a learning platform to those who may be involved in the making and creation of various forms of IP, besides the effective management of IPR of other creators. The course may also provide cursory understanding of the overall IP ecosystem in the country.

Learning Outcomes:


• Learn theoretical concepts of evolution of Intellectual Property Laws, and to differentiate between the different kinds of IP.

• Know the existing legal framework relating to IP in India. • Comprehend the value of IP and its importance in their respective domains. • This course may motivate the students to make their career in multifaceted field of intellectual

property rights.

Unit 1:

Introduction

Basic concept of Intellectual Property, Rationale behind Intellectual Property, Justifications for protection of IP, IPR and Economic Development, Major International Instruments relating to the protection of IP. The World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO), WTO and TRIPS Agreement.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 2:

Copyright and Related rights

Introduction to copyright and its relevance, subject matter and conditions of protection, ownership and term of copyright, rights under copyright law, infringement of copyright and remedies, exceptions to infringement/ public rights.

(Lectures: 10)

Unit 3:

Patents

Introduction, Criteria for obtaining patents, Patentable subject matter, Non patentable inventions, Procedure for registration, Term of patent and Rights of patentee, Patent Cooperation Treaty & International registration, Basic concept of Compulsory license and Government use of patent,

of 96


Infringement of patents and remedies, Software patents and importance for India, Utility model & patent, Trade secrets and know-how agreement, Traditional Knowledge and efforts of Indian Govt. for its protection.

(Lectures: 15)

Unit 4:

Trade Marks

Meaning of mark and Trademark, Categories of Trademark: Service Mark, Certification Mark, Collective Mark, Well known Mark and Non-conventional Mark, Criteria for registrability of trademark: Distinctiveness & non- deceptiveness, A good Trade Mark & its functions, Procedure for registration and Term of protection, Grounds for refusal of trademark registration, Assignment and licensing of marks (Character merchandising), Infringement and Passing Off, Salient Features of Indian Trade Mark Act,1999.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 5:

Designs, GI and Plant Varieties Protection

Designs: Meaning of design protection, Concept of original design, Registration &Term of protection, Copyright in Designs.

Geographical Indication: Meaning of GI, Difference between GI and Trade Marks, Registration of GI, Term & implications of registration, Concept of Authorized user, Homonymous GI

Plant Variety Protection and Farmer’s Right: Meaning, Criteria of protection, Procedure for registration, effect of registration and term of Protection, Benefit Sharing and Farmer’s rights

(Lectures: 12)

Unit 6:

Enforcement and Protection

Enforcement of Intellectual Property Rights: Counterfeiting and Piracy, Understanding Enforcement of IP and Enforcing IPRs, Enforcement under TRIPS Agreement, Role of Customs and Police in IPR Protection

(Lectures: 7)

Practical:

No Practical as such. However, students may be asked to prepare a project on different topics of IPR and present them before the class.

References:

1. Pandey, N.; Dhami, K. (2014),Intellectual Property Rights, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. 2. Acharya, N.K.(2001),Text Book of Intellectual Property Rights, Asia Law House.

of 96


3. Ganguli, P. (2001),Intellectual Property Rights: unleashing the knowledge economy. Tata McGraw Hill.


1. https://www.wipo.int 2. Ahuja, V.K.(2017),Law Relating to Intellectual Property Rights, Lexis Nexis. 3. Wadehra, B.L. (2000),Law Relating to Patents, Trade Marks, Copyright, Designs

&Geographical Indications. Universal law Publishing Pvt. Ltd.. 4. Journal of Intellectual Property Rights (JIPR); NISCAIR(CSIR).


This course must be taught through lecture in class and by invited talks of experts. The students must visit the nearby intellectual property office or some law firm to have an idea of the way the work is being done there.

Assessment Methods:

The course is designed to be completed in 60 periods. The internal assessment shall be 25% (Class Test 10%, Assignment/project presentation 10% and attendance 5%) and the semester exam at the end of semester shall be 75%.

Keywords:

Intellectual Property, IP Laws, Patents, Copyright, Trademark, WIPO.


Course Title: Analytical Clinical Biochemistry



Objectives:

The objective of this course is to deliver information about biochemically significant features of the proteins, enzymes, nucleic acids and lipids, using suitable examples. This includes classification, properties and biological importance of biomolecules. The course provides an overview of drug receptor interaction and Structure Activity Relation (SAR) studies. It will introduce the students to the concept of genetic code and concept of heredity. Key emphasis is placed on understanding the basic principles that govern the biological functions of biomolecules.

Learning Outcomes:


• Understand and establish how the structure of biomolecules determines their reactivity and biological uses.

• Understand the basic principles of drug-receptor interaction and structure activity relation (SAR). • Gain an insight into concept of heredity through biological processes like replication, transcription

and translation.

of 96


• Demonstrate an understanding of the biochemistry of diseases. • Understand the application of chemistry in biological systems.

Unit 1:

Metabolism

Biological importance of carbohydrates and proteins, Introduction to metabolism (catabolism, anabolism), ATP: the universal currency of cellular energy, outline of catabolic pathways of fats, proteins and carbohydrate-glycolysis, alcoholic and lactic acid fgermentation, Krebs cycle.

(Lectures: 4)

Unit 2:

Enzymes

Nomenclature, classification, Characterisation, Mechanism of enzyme action, factors affecting enzyme action, Coenzymes and cofactors and their role in biological reactions, Specificity of enzyme action (Including stereospecificity), Enzyme inhibitors and their importance, Introduction to biocatalysis: Importance in ―green chemistry and chemical industry. Drug action-receptor theory. Structure – activity relationships of drug molecules, binding role of –OH group, -NH2 group, double bond and aromatic ring.

(Lectures: 8)

Unit 3:

Lipids

Classification. Biological importance of triglycerides and phosphoglycerides and cholesterol; Liposomes and their biological functions and underlying applications, Lipoproteins. Properties, functions and biochemical functions of steroid hormones and peptide hormones

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 4:

Nucleic Acids

Components of nucleic acids: adenine, guanine, thymine and cytosine (structure only), other components of nucleic acids, nucleosides and nucleotides (numbering), structure of DNA (Watson-Crick model) and RNA (types of RNA), genetic code, biological roles of DNA and RNA: replication, transcription and translation.

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 5:

Biochemistry of disease

A diagnostic approach by blood/ urine analysis, Blood: composition and functions of blood, blood coagulation. Blood collection and preservation of samples, Anaemia, Urine: Collection and preservation of samples. Formation of urine. Composition and estimation of constituents of normal and pathological

of 96


urine. Regulation, estimation and interpretation of data for blood sugar, urea, creatinine, cholesterol and bilirubin.

(Lectures: 6)

Practical:


Chemistry Lab: Analytical clinical biochemistry

1. Proteins-Qualitative tests

2. Lipids – qualitative Tests.

3. Determination of the iodine number of oil.

4. Determination of the saponification number of oil.

5. Determination of acid value of fats and oils.

6. Determination of cholesterol using Liebermann- Burchard reaction.

7. Estimation of DNA by diphenylamine reaction

8. Determination of amount of protein using Lowry's method.

9. Determination of enzyme activity

References:

Theory:

1. Devlin, T.M. (2010),Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlation, Wiley. 2. Berg, J. M.; Tymoczko, J. L.; Stryer, L. (2002),Biochemistry, W. H. Freeman. 3. Satyanarayana, U.; Chakrapani, U. (2017), Fundamentals of Biochemistry, Books and Allied

(P) Ltd. 4. Lehninger, A.L; Nelson, D.L; Cox, M.M. (2009),Principles of Biochemistry, W. H. Freeman. 5. Finar, I. L. Organic Chemistry (Volume 1 & 2), Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd. (Pearson

Education).

Practical:

1. Dean, J.R.; Jones, A.M.; Holmes, D;, Reed, R.; Jones, A.Weyers, J. (2011),Practical skills in chemistry, Prentice-Hall.

2. Wilson, K.; Walker, J. (2000),Principles and techniques of practical biochemistry,Cambridge University Press.

3. Gowenlock. A.H. (1988),Varley's Practical Clinical Biochemistry, CRC Press.

Teaching Learning Process: Ning Process

• The teaching learning process will involve the traditional chalk and black board method. • Certain topics like Mechanism of enzyme action, drug receptor theory, transcription and

translation, SAR etc. where traditional chalk and talk method may not be able to convey the concept, are taught through audio-visual aids.

of 96


• Students are encouraged to participate actively in the classroom through regular presentations on curriculum based topics.

• As the best way to learn something is to do it yourself, practicals are planned in such a way so as to reinforce the topics covered in theory.

Assessment Methods:


Keywords:

Metabolism, Enzymes, Mechanism of enzyme action and Inhibition, Structure activity relation (SAR), Drug Receptor Theory, Biocatalysis, Lipids and their biological functions, Nucleic acids and concept of heredity, Biochemistry of diseases.


Course Title: Green Methods in Chemistry



Objectives:

• To inspire the students about the chemistry which is good for human health and environment. • To evaluate suitable technologies for the remediation of hazardous substances. • To make students aware of how chemical processes can be designed, developed and run in a

sustainable way. • To acquire the knowledge of the twelve principles of green chemistry and how to apply in green

synthesis. • To make students aware about the benefits of using green chemistry. • To have the idea of Biocatalytic Process—Conversion of Biomass into chemicals.

Learning Outcomes: By the end of this course, students will be able to:

• Get idea of toxicology, environmental law, energy and the environment • Think to design and develop materials and processes that reduce the use and generation of

hazardous substances in industry. • Think of chemical methods for recovering metals from used electronics materials. • Get ideas of innovative approaches to environmental and societal challenges. • Know how chemicals can have an adverse/potentially damaging effect on human and vegetation. • Critically analyse the existing traditional chemical pathways and processes and creatively think about

bringing environmentally benign reformations in these protocols. • Convert biomass into valuable chemicals through green technologies.

Unit 1:

of 96


Introduction

• Definition of green chemistry and how it is different from conventional chemistry and environmental chemistry.

• Need of green chemistry • Importance of green chemistry in- daily life, Industries and solving human health problems (four

examples each). • A brief study of Green Chemistry Challenge Awards (Introduction, award categories and study

about five last recent awards).(Lectures:8)

Unit 2:

Twelve Principles of Green Chemistry

The twelve principles of the Green Chemistry with their explanations

Special emphasis on the following:

• Prevention of waste / byproducts, pollution prevention hierarchy. • Green metrics to assess greenness of a reaction: environmental impact factor, atom economy

and calculation of atom economy. • Green solvents-supercritical fluids, water as a solvent for organic reactions, ionic liquids, solvent

less reactions, solvents obtained from renewable sources. • Catalysis and green chemistry- comparison of heterogeneous and homogeneous catalysis, bio-

catalysis, asymmetric catalysis and photocatalysis. • Green energy and sustainability. • Real-time analysis for pollution prevention. • Prevention of chemical accidents, designing greener processes, inherent safer design, principle

of ISD “What you don’t have cannot harm you”, greener alternative to Bhopal Gas Tragedy (safer route to carcarbaryl) and Flixiborough accident (safer route to cyclohexanol) subdivision of ISD, minimization, simplification, substitution, moderation and limitation.

(Lectures:14)

Unit 3: The following Real-world Cases in green chemistry should be discussed: Surfactants for carbon dioxide – replacing smog producing and ozone depleting solvents with CO2 for precision cleaning and dry cleaning of garments. Designing of environmentally safe marine antifoulant. Rightfit pigment: Synthetic azo pigments to replace toxic organic and inorganic pigments. An efficient, green synthesis of a compostable and widely applicable plastic (polylactic acid) made from corn.

(Lectures:8

)

Practical:


Chemistry Lab- Green methods in chemistry

Characterization by m. pt.; U.V.-Visible spectroscopy, IR spectroscopy, and any other specific method should be done (wherever applicable).

of 96


1. Preparation and characterization of nanoparticles of gold using tea leaves/ silver nanoparticles using plant extracts.

2. Preparation and characterization of biodiesel from vegetable oil preferably waste cooking oil. 3. Extraction of D-limonene from orange peel using liquid CO2 prepared from dry ice. 4. Mechanochemical solvent free, solid-solid synthesis of azomethine using p-toluidine and o-

vanillin (various other combinations of primary amine and aldehyde can also be tried). 5. Solvent free, microwave assisted one pot synthesis of phthalocyanine complex of copper(II). 6. Designing and conducting an experiment by utilizing the products and by-products obtained in

above preparations which become waste otherwise if not used. This is done by critical thinking and literature survey.

Some representative examples:

7. Use of nanoparticles as catalyst for a reaction. 8. Use of azomethine for complex formation. 9. Conversion of byproduct of biodiesel to a useful product.

References:

Theory:

1. Anastas, P.T.; Warner, J.C.(1998), Green Chemistry, Theory and Practice, Oxford University Press. 2. Lancaster, M.(2016),Green Chemistry An Introductory Text.2nd Edition, RSC Publishing. 3. Cann ,M. C.; Umile, T.P. (2008), Real world cases in Green chemistry Vol 11, American chemical

Society,Washington. 4. Matlack, A.S.(2001),Introduction to Green Chemistry, Marcel Dekker.

5. Ryan, M.A.; Tinnesand, M. (2002), Introduction to Green Chemistry (Ed), American Chemical Society, Washington DC.

Practical:

1. Kirchoff, M.; Ryan, M.A. (2002), Greener approaches to undergraduate chemistry experiment. American Chemical Society, Washington DC.

2. Sharma, R.K.; Sidhwani, I.T.; Chaudhari, M.K.(2013), Green Chemistry Experiments: A monograph, I.K. International Publishing House Pvt Ltd. New Delhi.

3. Pavia,D.L.; Lamponam, G.H.; Kriz, G.S.W. B.(2006),Introduction to organic Laboratory Technique-A Microscale approach,4th Edition, Brrooks-Cole Laboratory Series for Organic chemistry.

4. Sharma R. K., Sharma, C., & Sidhwani, I.T. Solventless and one-pot synthesis of Cu(II) phthalocyanine complex: a green chemistry experiment. Journal of Chemical Education, 2010, 88(1), 86-88.

5. Sharma, R. K., Gulati, S., & Mehta, S. Preparation of gold nanoparticles using tea: a green chemistry experiment. Journal of Chemical Education, 2012, 89(10), 1316-1318.

6. Wealth from waste: A green method to produce biodiesel from waste cooking oil and generation of useful products from waste further generated “A social Awareness Project” Indu Tucker Sidhwani, Geeta Saini, Sushmita Chowdhury, Dimple Garg, Malovika, Nidhi Garg, Delhi University Journal of Undergraduate Research and Innovation, Vol 1, Issue 1, Feb 2015. ISSN: 2395-2334.


• ICT enabled classes • Power point presentations • visit to pharmaceutical industry • Through videos classes • Interactive classes

Assessment Methods:

• Graded assignments • Conventional class tests

of 96


• Class seminars by students on course topics with a view to strengthening the content through width and depth

• Quizzes • End semester university examination.

Keywords: Green Chemistry, Twelve principles, Sustainable chemistry, Green energy, Marine antifoulant, Non toxic

pigments.


Course Title: Pharmaceutical Chemistry



Objectives:

The objective of this paper is to develop basic understanding of drugs discovery, design, development and their side effects. The course will cover synthesis of major drug classes including-analgesics, antipyretics, anti- inflammatory agents, antibacterial and antifungal agents, antiviral agents, central nervous system agents and drugs for HIV--AIDS. An overview of fermentation process and production of certain dietary supplements and certain common antibiotics will be discussed.

Learning Outcomes:


• Gain insight into retro-synthesis approach in relation to drug design and drug discovery. • Learn synthetic pathways of major drug classes. • Understand the fermentation process and production of ethanol, citric acids, antibiotics and some

classes of vitamins.

Unit 1:

Introduction

Drug discovery, design and development: Sources of drugs: biological, marine, minerals and plant tissue culture, physio-chemical aspects (optical, geometric and bioisosterism) of drug molecules and biological action, drug receptor interaction, basic retro-synthetic approach for development of drug. Cause of side effect of drugs like ibuprofen, cetirizine, thalidomide. Difference between drug and poison.

(Lectures: 7)

Unit 2:

Drugs and Pharmaceuticals

Study of pharmaceutical aids like talc, diatomite, kaolin, bentomite, gelatin and natural colours

Synthesis of the representative drugs of the following classes: analgesics agents, antipyretic agents, anti- inflammatory agents (Aspirin); antibacterial and antifungal agents (Sulphonamides; Sulphanethoxazol,

of 96


Sulphacetamide, Trimethoprim); antiviral agents (Acyclovir), central nervous system agents (Phenobarbital, Diazepam),Cardiovascular (Glyceryl trinitrate), antilaprosy (Dapsone), HIV-AIDS related drugs (AZT- Zidovudine).

(Lectures:15)

Unit 3:

Fermentation

Aerobic and anaerobic fermentation. Production of (i) Ethyl alcohol and citric acid, (ii) Antibiotics; Penicillin, Cephalosporin, Chloromycetin and Streptomycin, (iii) Lysine, Glutamic acid, Vitamin B2, Vitamin B12 and Vitamin C.

(Lectures: 8)

Practical:


Chemistry Lab: Pharmaceutical chemistry

1. Preparation of aspirin and its analysis.

2. Preparation of paracetamol and its analysis.

3. Preparation of sulphacetamide of sulphonamide and its analysis.

4. Determination of alcohol contents in liquid drugs/galenical.

5. Determination of ascorbic acid in vitamin C tablets by iodometric or coulometric titrations.

6. Synthesis of ibuprofen.

7. Analysis of commercial vitamin C tablets by iodometric and coulometric titrimetry.

References:

Theory:

1. Patrick, G. (2017), Introduction to Medicinal Chemistry, Oxford University Press. 2. Singh H.; Kapoor V.K. (1996), Medicinal and Pharmaceutical Chemistry, Vallabh Prakashan. 3. Foye, W.O.; Lemke, T. L.; William, D.A. (1995),Principles of Medicinal Chemistry, B.I. Waverly

Pvt. Ltd.

Practical:

1. Kjonaas, R.A.; Williams, P.E.; Counce, D.A.; Crawley, L.R. Synthesis of Ibuprofen. J. Chem. Educ., 2011, 88 (6), pp 825–828 DOI: 10.1021/ed100892p.

2. Marsh, D.G.; Jacobs, D.L.; Veening, H. Analysis of commercial vitamin C tablets by iodometric and coulometric titrimetry. J. Chem. Educ., 1973, 50 (9), p 626. DOI: 10.1021/ed050p626


of 96


The teaching learning process will involve the traditional chalk and black board method. Certain topics like retro-synthetic approach and fermentation processes are taught through audio-visual aids. Students are encouraged to participate actively in the classroom through regular presentations on curriculum based topics.

Assessment Methods:


Keywords:

Retro-synthesis, Drug discovery, Design and synthesis, Side effects, Fermentation.


Course Title: Chemistry of Cosmetics and Perfumes



Objectives:

Cosmetic plays an important role in our everyday lives as they make an individual's appearance more attractive and boost one's self-esteem and confidence. Keeping in view the tremendous potential which the cosmetic industry has today around the globe, this course will be useful for introducing students of Chemistry honours to the world of cosmetic chemistry. This has been designed to impart the theoretical and practical knowledge on basic principles of cosmetic chemistry, manufacture, formulation of various cosmetic products.

Learning outcomes:

By the end of this course, the students will be able to:

• Learn basic of cosmetics, various cosmetic formulation, ingredients and their roles in cosmetic products.

• Learn the use of safe, economic and body-friendly cosmetics • Prepare new innovative formulations.

Unit 1:

Cosmetics- Definition, History, Classification, Ingredients, Nomenclature, Regulations.

(Lectures: 4)

Unit 2:

Face Preparation: Structure of skin, Face powder, Compact powder, Talcum powder.

(Lectures: 6)

of 96


Unit 3:

Skin Preparation: Face cream, vanishing cream, cold cream, suntan cream, lather shaving cream

(Lectures: 5)

Unit 4:

Hair preparation: Structure of hair, classification of hair, Hair dye- classification – temporary, semi-permanent, demi permanent, permanent, formulation, hair sprays, shampoo- types of shampoo, conditioners

(Lectures: 6)

Unit 5:

Colored preparation: Nail preparation Structure of nail, Nail lacquers, Nail polish remover Lipsticks

(Lectures: 4)

Unit 6:

Personal hygiene products: Antiperspirants and deodorants, oral hygiene products, flavours and essential oils

(Lectures: 5)

Practical:


Preparation of:

1. Talcum powder.

2. Shampoo.

3. Enamels.

4. Face cream.

5. Nail polish and nail polish remover.

6. Hand wash

7. Hand sanitizer

8. Body lotion

9. Soap

10. Tooth powder

11. Tooth paste

of 96


References:

1. Barel, A.O.; Paye, M.; Maibach, H.I.(2014), Handbook of Cosmetic Science and Technology, CRC Press.

2. Garud, A.; Sharma, P.K.; Garud, N. (2012),Text Book of Cosmetics, Pragati Prakashan. 3. Gupta, P.K.; Gupta, S.K.(2011),Pharmaceutics and Cosmetics, Pragati Prakashan 4. Butler, H. (2000),Poucher's Perfumes, Cosmetic and Soap, Springer 5. Kumari, R.(2018),Chemistry of Cosmetics, Prestige Publisher.


1. Flick,E.W.(1990), Cosmetic and toiletry formulations, Noyes Publications / William Andrew Publishing.

2. Natural Ingredients for Cosmetics; EU Survey 2005 3. Formulation Guide for cosmetics; The Nisshin OilliO Group, Ltd. 4. Functional Ingredients & Formulated Products for Cosmetics & Pharmaceuticals; NOF

Corporation


• Conventional chalk and board teaching with power point presentation, you tube videos. and presentations from students on relevant topics.

• Theory coupled with preparation of cosmetic products in lab.

Assessment Methods:

Internal assessment through assignments and class test. End semester written and practical examination.

Keywords:

Cosmetic Products, Ingredients, Formulations, Raw materials, Lab. preparation, Ideal characteristics


Course Title: Pesticide Chemistry



Objectives:

Pesticide plays an important role in controlling quantity as well quality of the economic crops by protecting them from the various pests. They are used for prevention of much spoilage of stored foods and also used for prevention of certain diseases, which conserves health and has saved the lives of millions of people and domestic animals.Keeping the importance of pesticides in mind this course is aimed to introduce synthesis and application of pesticides.

Learning Outcomes:

of 96


Students will be able to learn about the basic role of pesticide in everyday life, various ingredients and their role in controlling the pest. Students can also educate the farmers/gardeners to choose the appropriate pesticides for their crop production.

Unit 1:

Introduction:Classification, synthesis, structure activity relationship (SAR), mode of action, uses and adverse effects of representative pesticides in the following classes: Organochlorines (DDT, Gammaxene); Organophosphates (Malathion, Parathion); Carbamates (Carbofuran and Carbaryl); Quinones (Chloranil), Anilides (Alachlor and Butachlor).

(Lectures:12)

Unit 2:

Botanical insecticides [No structure elucidation or synthesis is required for the following compounds:]Alkaloids(Nicotine); Pyrethrum (natural and synthetic pyrethroids); Azadirachtin; Rotenone and Limonene.

(Lectures:8)

Unit 3:

Pesticide formulations: Wettable powders, Surfactants, Emulsifiable concentrates, Aerosols, Dust and

Granules, Controlled Release Formulations.

(Lectures:6)

Unit 4:

New Tools in Biological Pest Control: Repellants, Chemosterilants, Antifeedants, Sex attractants.

(Lectures:4)

Practical:


1. To carryout market survey of potent pesticides with details as follows:

a) Name of pesticide b) Chemical name, class and structure of pesticide c) Type of formulation available and Manufacturer’s name d) Useful information on label of packaging regarding: Toxicity, LD50 (“Lethal Dose, 50%”), Side effects and Antidotes.

2. To carryout market survey of potent botanical pesticides with details as follows:

a) Botanical name and family; b) Chemical name (active ingredient) and structure of active ingredient; c) Type of formulation available and Manufacturer’s name; d) Useful information on label of packaging regarding: Toxicity, LD50 (“Lethal Dose, 50%”), Side effects and Antidotes.

3. Preparation of simple Organochlorine pesticides. 4. To calculate acidity/alkalinity in given sample of pesticide formulations as per BIS specifications. 5. To calculate active ingredient in given sample of pesticide formulations as per BIS specifications. 6. Preparation of Neem based botanical pesticides.

of 96


References:

1. Perry, A.S.; Yamamoto, I.; Ishaaya, I.; Perry, R.Y.(1998),Insecticides in Agriculture

and Environment, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg. 2. Kuhr, R.J. ; Derough, H.W.(1976),Carbamate Insecticides: Chemistry, Biochemistry

and Toxicology, CRC Press,USA.


Conventional chalk and board teaching with power point presentation, you tube videos and presentations from students on relevant topics.

Assessment Methods:

Internal assessment through assignments and class test. End semester written and practical examination.

Keywords:

Structure Activity Relationship (SAR), Organochlorines, Organophosphates, Carbamates, Quinones, Anilides, Botanical, Alkaloids, Pyrethrum, Azadirachtin, Rotenone, Limonene, Pesticide formulations, Repellants, Chemosterilants, Antifeedants, Sex attractants, Controlled release pesticide formulation.


Course Title: Fuel Chemistry



Objectives:

The course aims to provide students with a basic scientific and technical understanding of the production, behaviour and handling of hydrocarbon fuels and lubricants, including emerging alternative & renewable fuels. This will enable them to be industry ready to contribute effectively in the field of petroleum chemistry and technology.

Learning Outcomes:

• The course covers both conventional petroleum-based fuels, and alternative & renewable fuels, including gaseous fuels.

• The students will learn the chemistry that underpins petroleum fuel technology, will understand the refining processes used to produce fuels and lubricants and will know how differences in chemical composition affect properties of fuels and their usage in different applications.

• The course will also cover origin of petroleum, crude oil, composition, different refining processes employed industrially to obtain different fractions of petroleum. Further, course will cover various alternative and renewable fuels like Biofuels (Different generations), Gaseous Fuels (e.g. CNG, LNG, CBG, Hydrogen etc.).

• The course will also cover fuel product specifications, various test methods used to qualify different types of fuels as well characterization methods.

• Review of energy scenario (Global & India), Energy sources (renewable and non-renewable). Types of Crude Oils, Composition and Properties. Crude oil assay

of 96


Unit 1:

Review of energy sources (renewable and non-renewable). Classification of fuels and their calorific value.Determination of calorific value by Bomb calorimeter and Junker’s calorimeter.

(Lectures:4)

Unit 2:

Coal: Analysis of coal, Proximate and ultimate Analysis, Uses of coal (fuel and nonfuel) in various industries, its composition, carbonization of coal. Coal gas, producer gas and water gas composition and uses. Fractionation of coal tar, uses of coal tar bases chemicals, requisites of a good metallurgical coke, Coal gasification (Hydrogasification and Catalytic gasification), Coal liquefaction and Solvent Refining.

(Lectures:7)

Unit 3:

Petroleum and Petrochemical Industry: Composition of crude petroleum, Refining and different types of petroleum products and their applications.

(Lectures:4)

Unit 4:

Fractional Distillation (Principle and process), Cracking (Thermal and catalytic cracking),

Reforming Petroleum and non-petroleum fuels (LPG, CNG, LNG, bio-gas, fuels derived from biomass), fuel from waste, synthetic fuels (gaseous and liquids), clean fuels.

(Lectures:6)

Unit 5:

Petrochemicals: Vinyl acetate, Propylene oxide, Isoprene, Butadiene, Toluene and its derivatives Xylene.

(Lectures:4)

Unit 6:

Lubricants: Classification of lubricants, lubricating oils (conducting and non-conducting) Solid and semi-solid lubricants, synthetic lubricants.

Properties of lubricants (viscosity index, cloud point, pore point and and aniline Point) and their determination.

(Lectures:5)

Practical:


of 96


1. Test Methods for Petroleum products

2. To prepare biodiesel from vegetable oil

3. Calorific value of a fuel

4. Characterization of different petroleum products using UV and IR

5. To determine pore point and cloud point of fuel

6. To determine the viscosity of biodiesel ay various temperature using biodiesel.

7. To determine free fatty acid content in given sample.

8. To determine the density of the given fuel sample.

Reference:

Stocchi, E.(1990),Industrial Chemistry, Vol -I, Ellis Horwood Ltd. UK.


• Teaching Learning Process for the course is visualized as largely student-focused. • Transaction through an intelligent mix of conventional and modern methods. • Lectures by Industry Experts • Visit to Industry

Assessment Methods:

• Written exams-both objective and subjective questions. • Dissertation work on a given topic - Preparation of literature report followed by presentation. • Internal Assessment. • End semester university examination for theory and practical.

Keywords:

Energy; Fuels; Petroleum; Biofuels; Synthetic Lubricants

दिल्ली दिश्िदिद्यालय - Zakir Husain Delhi College

Documents

Transcript of दिल्ली दिश्िदिद्यालय - Zakir Husain Delhi College